B-64603en 01

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 484
At a glance
Powered by AI
The manual discusses safety precautions, warnings, and cautions that must be followed when working with control units and peripheral units. It is important to be trained on safety before performing any work. Page numbers are provided to find more details on specific topics.

Safety precautions include only being involved in work if sufficiently trained for safety, reading all manuals, and understanding descriptions. Specific warnings and cautions are provided on pages s-2 through s-5.

Warnings and cautions regarding mounting, wiring and exchanging parts are described on page s-2. It is important to install safety devices if serious accidents could occur due to failures.

FANUC Series 0+-MODEL F

CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)

B-64603EN/01

No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.


All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japans Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law. The export from Japan is subject to an export license by the
government of Japan. Furthermore, the product may also be controlled by re-export
regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
The products in this manual are manufactured under strict quality control. However, when
using any of the products in a facility in which a serious accident or loss is predicted due to
a failure of the product, install a safety device.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as impossible.
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by or in the main body.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B-64603EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Described below are the safety precautions regarding the control units and those peripheral units
explained herein. The safety precautions must be observed in order to use these units safely.
Because exchanging, as well as performing daily maintenance operations on, the control units and those
peripheral units explained herein may incur diverse dangers, you cannot be involved in such work unless
you have been sufficiently trained for safety.
Some safety precautions may not apply to your control units or peripheral units explained herein because
the units have no corresponding function. If this is the case, skip reading those precautions.
As for safety precautions regarding machine tools, refer to the respective machine manuals provided by
the machine tool builders.
Before starting to operate machines for check purposes, be sure to read the manuals provided by the
machine tool builders and FANUC and sufficiently understand their descriptions.
Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ......................................................................... s-1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING MOUNTING, WIRING, AND EXCHANGING .......... s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING DESIGNING................................................................. s-4
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES REGARDING DAILY MAINTENANCE ............................ s-5
NOTE REGARDING KOREAN KC MARK .......................................................................................... s-5

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE


This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.
Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly
before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a
danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the
approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and
Caution.

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s-1

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B-64603EN/01

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING MOUNTING, WIRING,


AND EXCHANGING
WARNING
1 Before starting mounting, wiring, and exchanging, be sure to shut off externally
supplied power. Otherwise, electrical shocks, breakdown, and blowout may
occur.
If a control unit is turned off but other units are not, it is likely that power may be
supplied to servo units, resulting in the units being damaged and workers getting
an electrical shock when the units are exchanged.
2 Voltage lingers in servo and spindle amplifiers for a while even after power has
been turned off, resulting in workers possibly getting an electrical shock when
the workers touch them. Before starting to exchange these amplifiers, wait for 20
minutes after power has been turned off.
3 Be sure to ground your control units and peripheral units in accordance with your
national grounding standards (protective grounding class C or stricter).
Otherwise, electrical shocks, breakdown, and blowout may occur.
4 In order to prevent damage that may be caused by static electricity, wear a
grounding wrist strap or take a similar protective measure before starting to
touch a printed-circuit board or unit or attach a cable.
Static electricity from human bodies can damage electrical circuits.
5 In unit replacement, specify the same settings and parameters in the newly
installed unit as those for the one removed. (For details, refer to the respective
manuals for the units.)
Operating the newly installed unit with incorrect settings or parameters will cause
the machine to behave unexpectedly, possibly leading to a damaged workpiece
or machine or injury.
6 If you notice an apparent hardware fault, such as abnormal noise, abnormal
odor, smoke, ignition, or abnormal heat, in the hardware while power is being
supplied to it, shut it off at once. These faults can cause fire, breakdown,
blowout, and malfunction.
7 The radiating fins of control units, servo amplifiers, spindle amplifiers, and other
devices can remain very hot for a while after power has been turned off, making
you get burned if you touch them. Before starting to work on them, wait and
make sure they are cool.
8 When exchanging heavy stuff, you should do so together with two or more
people.
If you try to exchange heavy stuff all by yourself, you may drop it and get hurt.
9 Wiring work in the control units and peripheral units must be done only after they
have been installed. Otherwise, electrical shocks can occur.
10 Be careful not to damage cables. Otherwise, electrical shocks can occur.
11 When working, wear suitable clothes with safety taken into account. Otherwise,
injury and electrical shocks can occur.
12 Do not work with your hands wet. Otherwise, electrical shocks and damage to
electrical circuits can occur.

s-2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B-64603EN/01

1
2
3
4
5

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

14
15

CAUTION
Failing to observe any caution stated below can lead to fire, breakdown, blowout,
and malfunction.
Do not attach the units directly to any flammable object or install the units near
any flammable object.
Do not allow any foreign matter (such as a screw, metal chip, or coolant) to get
in the units.
Handle the units and printed-circuit boards gently because they are precision
devices. Be careful not to drop them or give a high impact to them.
Lay signal wires away from power wires as stated in this manual.
When fastening each unit or wire, be sure to observe the screw tightening torque
specified for them. If screws are tightened too weakly or too strongly, it is likely
that the unit may drop, break, or malfunction, or the wire may be short-circuited.
Do not forget to tighten all necessary screw.
Do not block any cooling fan air inlet or outlet. For units having no cooling fan,
allow space for natural convection cooling above and below them.
Be careful not to make an incorrect wiring or connection. Be sure to attach wires
and cables to their respective corresponding terminals and connectors.
Confirm equipments electrical rating stated herein. Do not apply any unspecified
voltage to the equipment.
Do not confuse voltage polarity. Carefully confirm the arrangement of connector
pins.
When making a cable assembly, press-mount, crimp, or solder the wires, using
the tool specified by the cable manufacturer.
Use printed-circuit boards and peripheral units that match your control unit.
When mounting the units, pay attention to their mass.
When detaching a cable from a unit, hold the connector rather than the cable.
When attaching a cable, be sure to fit its connector to the connector pins
securely. For connectors having a lock mechanism, be sure to lock them
securely.
As for the shielding wires of the cables specified herein, securely ground them,
using, for example, cable clamps.
Always use wires whose length, diameter, heat resistance, and flex resistance
match their use.

s-3

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B-64603EN/01

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING DESIGNING


1
2

WARNING
When designing, be sure to observe all rules stated in this document and any
related manuals. Otherwise, it is likely that failure and malfunction may occur.
Failures in the control units and I/O units as well as input power abnormality and
communication failures can hamper the normal operation of these I/O units.
Design each I/O unit in such a way that the machine can operate safely, for
example, by providing an external safety circuit to the I/O unit so that no accident
will occur even if the I/O unit fails to operate normally.
The DO function of each I/O unit has been designed in such a way that, if a
system alarm is issued in the control unit that controls the I/O unit or the power
of the control unit or the I/O unit is turned off, the DO function of all the I/O units
is turned off. However, it is not guaranteed that the DO function is surely turned
off. So, it is requested that, if a signal regarding safety is involved, a safety circuit
external to each I/O unit must be configured. Using the dual check safety
function makes it possible to detect a single fault in a portion related to safety.
For details of the dual check safety function, refer to the FANUC Series
30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Dual Check Safety Connection Manual (B-64483EN-2).
Install each control unit, display unit, MDI unit, and machine operator panel in
such a place that neither cutting chip nor coolant will spatter to them. Otherwise,
damage or malfunction may occur.
Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level, oil-free coolants
called synthetic, and water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level, in particular,
can largely affect the CNC and peripheral units. Please note that, even if
consideration is taken to protect them from direct exposure to these coolants,
the following trouble is likely to occur.
Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level
Some coolants containing sulfur or chlorine are at an extremely high activity
level. If such a coolant adheres to the CNC or peripheral units, it reacts
chemically with a material, such as resin, of equipment, possibly leading to
corrosion or deterioration. If it gets in the CNC or peripheral units, it corrodes
metals, such as copper and silver, used as component materials, possibly
leading to a defective component.
Synthetic-type coolants having a high permeability
Some synthetic-type coolants whose lubricating component is, for example,
PAG (polyalkylene glycol) have an extremely high permeability. If such a
coolant is used even in equipment having a high closeness, it can readily flow
into the CNC or peripheral units through, for example, gaskets. It is likely that,
if the coolant gets in the CNC or a peripheral unit, it may deteriorate the
insulation and damage the components.
Water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level
Some coolants whose pH is increased using alkanolamine are so strong
alkali that its standard dilution will lead to pH10 or higher. If such a coolant
spatters over the surface of the CNC or peripheral unit, it reacts chemically
with a material, such as resin, possibly leading to corrosion or deterioration.

s-4

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B-64603EN/01

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES REGARDING DAILY


MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Battery replacement
Do not replace batteries unless you have been well informed of maintenance
work and safety.
When opening the cabinet and replacing batteries, be careful not to touch any
high-voltage circuit (marked with
and covered with an electric shock
prevention cover).
When the electric shock prevention cover has been removed, you will get an
electric shock if you touch any high-voltage circuit.
WARNING
Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to remove the cause of the blown
fuse.
So, do not replace fuses unless you have been well informed of maintenance
work and safety.
When opening the cabinet and replacing fuses, be careful not to touch any
high-voltage circuit (marked with
and covered with an electric shock
prevention cover).
When the electric shock prevention cover has been removed, you will get an
electric shock if you touch any high-voltage circuit.
CAUTION
Handle the batteries gently. Do not drop them or give a strong impact to them.
NOTE
Each control unit uses batteries, because it must hold data, such as programs,
offset values, and parameters even when AC power for it is off.
Back up the data (programs, offset values, and parameters) regularly.
If the battery voltage becomes low, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on
the machine operators panel or screen.
Once the battery voltage alarm has been displayed, replace the batteries within
one week. Otherwise, the memory contents may be lost.
For the battery replacement procedure, see Section 4.4, Batteries. Recollect or
discard old batteries in the way your local autonomous community specifies.

NOTE REGARDING KOREAN KC MARK


NOTE
This equipment is industrial (Class A) electromagnetic wave suitability equipment
and seller or user should take notice of it, and this equipment is to be used in the
places except for home.
(A ) ,
.

s-5

PREFACE

B-64603EN/01

PREFACE
This manual describes the information, that is, electrical and structural specifications, needed in
connecting machine tools to the control and peripheral units stated below. The manual covers the range
shown on the total connection diagrams mentioned in Chapter 2. The manual briefly describes the units
that are used in common with the FANUC control units, such as FANUC I/O units, FANUC PANEL i,
and servo motors. It also gives supplementary information for use of these units with the control units.
For detailed specifications, refer to the manuals of these components.
For options not covered in this manual, also refer to the manuals of these components.

Applicable models
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Model name
FANUC Series 0i TF
FANUC Series 0i MF
FANUC Series 0i PF

Abbreviation
0iTF
0iMF
0iPF

0iF

Series 0i

Organization of this manuals


This manual consists of chapters 1 to 12 and appendixes at the end of the book.
Chapter and title
Chapter 1
CONFIGURATION
Chapter 2
TOTAL CONNECTION DAIGRAMS
Chapter 3
INSTALLATION
Chapter 4
POWER SUPPLAY CONNECTION
Chapter 5
CONNECTION TO CNC
PERIOHERALS
Chapter 6
SERVO AND SPINDLE
INTERFACES
Chapter 7
CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
i
Chapter 8
UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC
I/O Link i
Chapter 9
STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP
Chapter 10
CONNECTION TO OTHER
NETWORKS
Chapter 11
CONNECTION WITH THE FANUC
PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL
PERSONAL COMPUTERS
Chapter 12
PANEL i

Contents
Provides general information related to the connection, as well as an
introduction to detailed information.
Describes how to connect peripheral units.
Describes the installation requirements for using.
Describes how to make connections related to the power supply.
Describes how to connect the peripheral devices.

Describes how to connect the 30iB series to servo or spindle amplifiers.


Also explains how to connect separate detector interface units.
Describes how to connect machine interface I/O units using the FANUC I/O
Link i.
Describes major units that correspond to the FANUC I/O Link i.

Describes how to handle the emergency stop signal.


A lot of important information regarding safety is included. Be sure to read It.
Describes how to connect to networks.

Describes how to connect to the FANUC PANEL i or a commercial personal


computer, using the high-speed serial bus (HSSB) or Ethernet.

Describes how to connect a PANEL i.

p-1

PREFACE

B-64603EN/01

Chapter and title


APPENDIX

Contents
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)

OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS AND CONNECTORS


20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
MEMORY CARD INTERFACE

Related manuals of 0i-F


The following table lists the manuals related to 0i-F. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related manuals
Manual name

Specification number

DESCRIPTIONS
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
OPERATORS MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)
OPERATORS MANUAL (For Lathe System)
OPERATORS MANUAL (For Machining Center System)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARAMETER MANUAL
0i-PF CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
0i-PF OPERATORS MANUAL
0i-PF PARAMETER MANUAL
Programming
Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Macro Compiler PROGRAMMING MANUAL
C Language Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL
PMC
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATORS MANUAL
DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL
FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL
CC-Link Board CONNECTION MANUAL
Industrial Ethernet CONNECTION MANUAL
Operation guidance function
MANUAL GUIDE i
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) OPERATORS MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE i (For Machining Center System) OPERATORS MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE i (Set-up Guidance Functions) OPERATORS MANUAL
Dual Check Safety
Dual Check Safety CONNECTION MANUAL

B-64602EN
B-64603EN
B-64603EN-1
B-64604EN
B-64604EN-1
B-64604EN-2
B-64605EN
B-64610EN
B-64623EN
B-64624EN
B-64630EN
B-63943EN-2
B-66263EN
B-63943EN-3
B-64513EN
B-63993EN
B-64014EN
B-64043EN
B-64163EN
B-64463EN
B-64013EN
B-63874EN
B-63874EN-2
B-63874EN-1
B-64483EN-2

p-2

PREFACE

B-64603EN/01

Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR is/i/is/i series


The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR is/i/is/i series
Manual name
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i series DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i series DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER i series DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER i series DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO MOTOR is series
FANUC SERVO MOTOR i series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER i series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC SERVO MOTOR is series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER i series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i series
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series
FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO MOTOR DiS series
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series
BUILT-IN SPINDLE MOTOR Bi series
PARAMETER MANUAL

Specification number
B-65262EN
B-65272EN
B-65302EN
B-65312EN
B-65282EN
B-65322EN

B-65285EN

B-65325EN

B-65270EN

B-65280EN

Related manuals of FANUC PANEL i


The following table lists the manuals related to FANUC PANEL i.
Manual name
FANUC PANEL i CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Specification number
B-64223EN

Related manuals of FANUC I/O Unit


The following table lists the manuals related to FANUC I/O Unit.
Manual name

Specification number

FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL A CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL B CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Handy Machine Operators Panel CONNECTION MANUAL

B-61813E
B-62163E
B-63753EN

Training

FANUC runs FANUC Training Center to train those who will be involved in the connection,
maintenance, and operation of FANUC products. It is recommended to attend the class so you will
be able to use the products effectively.
Visit the following web site for detailed descriptions of its curriculum.
http://www.fanuc.co.jp/

p-3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B-64603EN/01

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................ s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING MOUNTING, WIRING, AND
EXCHANGING............................................................................................ s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING DESIGNING ..................................... s-4
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES REGARDING DAILY MAINTENANCE .... s-5
NOTE REGARDING KOREAN KC MARK .............................................................. s-5

PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
1

CONFIGURATION .................................................................................. 1
1.1

CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT NAMES .............. 1


1.1.1
1.1.2

1.2

Configurations of LCD-mounted Type Control Units ............................................. 1


Configurations of Optional Boards .......................................................................... 5

HARDWARE OVERVIEW.............................................................................. 6
1.2.1

LCD-mounted Type Control Unit Overview ........................................................... 6

TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ....................................................... 7

INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 10
3.1

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE CABINET ............... 10


3.1.1
3.1.2

3.2
3.3

CAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION DESIGN OF MACHINE


TOOL POWER MAGNETICS CABINETS ................................................... 11
THERMAL DESIGN OF THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC CABINET ...... 14
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3

3.4

Environmental Conditions outside the Cabinet ...................................................... 10


Installation Conditions of the Control Unit ............................................................ 10

Temperature Rise within the Machine Tool Magnetic Cabinet.............................. 14


Heat Output of Each Unit ....................................................................................... 14
Thermal Design of Operator's Panel....................................................................... 15

COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE AND GROUNDING .................. 16


3.4.1

Grounding as Noise Suppression Measures ........................................................... 17


3.4.1.1
3.4.1.2

3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7

3.5

3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10

Protective Ground (Grounding for Protection against Indirect Contact) ............... 21


Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit ........................................... 22
Separating Signal Lines .......................................................................................... 23
Noise Suppressor .................................................................................................... 25
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing ....................................................................... 26
Lightning Surge Absorber Installation ................................................................... 28

INSTALLING THE CONTROL UNIT ............................................................ 30


3.5.1

3.6

Grounding methods ........................................................................................... 17


Cabinet ............................................................................................................... 18

Installing the LCD-mounted Type Control Unit .................................................... 30

TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR FASTENING UNITS AND GROUND


TERMINALS ................................................................................................ 31
DUSTPROOF MEASURES FOR CABINETS AND PENDANT BOXES ...... 31
LCD PROTECTION COVER ....................................................................... 34
ATTACHING SCREW CAPS ....................................................................... 34
INSTALLATION CONDITION FOR UL RECOGNITION .............................. 35
c-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION ......................................................... 36


4.1

24 VDC POWER (INSULATION AC/DC CONVERTOR) ............................. 36


4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3

4.2
4.3
4.4

Connecting 24 VDC Power .................................................................................... 36


24 VDC Power Supply Specification ..................................................................... 38
Power Capacity of 24 VDC Power Supplies .......................................................... 40

TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL UNIT ............. 41


4.2.1
4.2.2

Power-on Sequence ................................................................................................ 41


Power-off Sequence ............................................................................................... 42

CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT ................................. 44


BATTERIES ................................................................................................. 44
4.4.1

Battery for Memory Backup in the Control Unit (3 VDC) .................................... 44


4.4.1.1
4.4.1.2

4.4.2
4.4.3

Replacing the lithium battery ............................................................................. 45


Replacing commercially available alkaline dry cells (size D) ........................... 46

Battery for Separate Absolute Pulsecoders (6VDC) .............................................. 48


Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor (6VDC) ............................ 49

CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS ............................................. 50


5.1

CONNECTION BETWEEN THE LCD-MOUNTED TYPE CONTROL UNIT


AND MDI UNIT ............................................................................................ 50
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4

5.2

5.3

Connecting the High-speed Skip (HDI) ................................................................. 66


Input Signal Rules for the High-speed Skip (HDI) ................................................ 67

LINKING THE ETHERNET INTERFACE ..................................................... 68


5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4

5.5

Overview ................................................................................................................56
Connecting I/O Devices ......................................................................................... 56
RS232-C Serial Port ............................................................................................... 57
RS232-C Interface Specification ............................................................................ 59

CONNECTING THE HIGH-SPEED SKIP (HDI)........................................... 66


5.3.1
5.3.2

5.4

Overview ................................................................................................................50
Connection with the MDI Unit ............................................................................... 51
Key Layout of MDI Unit ........................................................................................ 53
Keyboard Cover ..................................................................................................... 55

CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES ...................................... 56


5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4

B-64603EN/01

Connection to the Ethernet Interface ...................................................................... 68


Specification of Twisted-Pair Cable ....................................................................... 70
Network Installation ............................................................................................... 72
Ethernet Connector Panel ....................................................................................... 73

USB PORT .................................................................................................. 77

SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES ................................................. 79


6.1
6.2

OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 79
Interface to the Amplifiers ............................................................................ 80

6.3

SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE ........................................................ 82

6.2.1
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5

Number of Units That Can Be Connected .............................................................. 81


Overview ................................................................................................................82
Connection Diagram............................................................................................... 83
Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification ...................................................... 84
Connection of Power Supply .................................................................................. 84
Separate Detector Interface (Digital Input) ............................................................ 86
6.3.5.1
6.3.5.2
6.3.5.3

6.3.6

FANUC serial interface ..................................................................................... 86


Parallel interface ................................................................................................ 87
Input Signal Requirements (Parallel interface) .................................................. 88

Overview of the Analog Basic Unit ....................................................................... 90


c-2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B-64603EN/01

6.3.7
6.3.8

Connection Diagrams of an Analog Basic Unit ..................................................... 91


Separate Detector Interface (Analog Input)............................................................ 93
6.3.8.1
6.3.8.2
6.3.8.3

6.3.9
6.3.10
6.3.11
6.3.12
6.3.13

Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector........................................... 96


Connection Between the Basic Unit and Additional Unit ...................................... 98
Connector Locations............................................................................................... 98
Installation ............................................................................................................ 100
Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit ........................................ 101

CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i ................................................. 103


7.1
7.2

OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 103


CONNECTION........................................................................................... 104
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3

7.3

7.4

Assignment of Signals .......................................................................................... 112


Fixed Signals ........................................................................................................ 112
Status Alarm ......................................................................................................... 113

MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR ............................................................... 114


7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3

7.5

Connection of I/O Link i by Electric Cable.......................................................... 105


Connection of FANUC I/O Link i by Optical Fiber Cable .................................. 106
Connection When Multiple Channels of the I/O Link i is Used .......................... 108

ASSIGNMENT FOR I/O UNITS ................................................................. 112


7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3

Analog 1Vp-p Interface ..................................................................................... 93


Input signal requirements (analog 1Vp-p interface) .......................................... 94
Method for checking the encoder signals .......................................................... 95

Manual Pulse Generator Connection .................................................................... 114


Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator ........................................................... 115
Manual Pulse Generator Signal Specifications .................................................... 115

POWER SUPPLY ...................................................................................... 116

UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i ...................................... 117


8.1
8.2

GENERAL UNITS ...................................................................................... 117


CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR CONNECTOR PANEL ................. 121
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4

Configuration ....................................................................................................... 121


Connection Diagram............................................................................................. 122
Module Specifications .......................................................................................... 123
Connection of the Basic Module, and Extension Modules A and B .................... 125
8.2.4.1
8.2.4.2
8.2.4.3
8.2.4.4

8.2.5

Connection of Extension Module C (2A Output Module) ................................... 131


8.2.5.1
8.2.5.2
8.2.5.3

8.2.6

Connector pin arrangement.............................................................................. 131


2A Output Signal Connection .......................................................................... 132
2A output signal specifications ........................................................................ 133

Connection of Extension Module D (Analog Input Module) ............................... 133


8.2.6.1
8.2.6.2
8.2.6.3
8.2.6.4

8.2.7
8.2.8
8.2.9
8.2.10
8.2.11
8.2.12
8.2.13

Connector pin arrangement.............................................................................. 125


DI (Input Signal) Connection .......................................................................... 126
DO (Output Signal) Connection ...................................................................... 128
DI/DO Signal Specifications ........................................................................... 129

Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation .......................................................... 133


Analog Input Signal Connections .................................................................... 134
Analog Input Signal Specifications ................................................................. 135
Channel selection and A/D conversion data .................................................... 135

Manual Pulse Generator Connection .................................................................... 138


Connection of Basic and Extension Modules ....................................................... 138
Module Installation............................................................................................... 139
Other Notes........................................................................................................... 144
Rotary Switch Setting ........................................................................................... 146
Connection of the Grounding Terminal of the Module ........................................ 148
Terminal Conversion Adapter .............................................................................. 149
c-3

TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.2.13.1
8.2.13.2
8.2.13.3
8.2.13.4
8.2.13.5
8.2.13.6

8.3

Overall Connection Diagram ................................................................................ 179


Power Connection ................................................................................................ 180
DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement ..................................................................... 181
DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection ................................................... 182
DO (Output Signal) Connection ........................................................................... 186
Manual Pulse Generator Connection .................................................................... 187
External View ....................................................................................................... 188
Specifications ....................................................................................................... 189
Other Notes........................................................................................................... 191
Connection of the Grounding Terminal of the Module ........................................ 193

CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE TYPE-2 FOR CONNECTOR PANEL .... 194


8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.5
8.5.6
8.5.7
8.5.8
8.5.9
8.5.10
8.5.11
8.5.12
8.5.13
8.5.14
8.5.15
8.5.16

8.6

Overall Connection Diagram ................................................................................ 163


Power Connection ................................................................................................ 164
DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement ..................................................................... 165
DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection ................................................... 166
DI (Matrix Input Signal) Connection ................................................................... 168
DO (Output Signal) Connection ........................................................................... 169
Manual Pulse Generator Connection .................................................................... 172
External View ....................................................................................................... 173
Specifications ....................................................................................................... 174
Other Notes........................................................................................................... 176
Connection of the Grounding Terminal of the Module ........................................ 178

CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR OPERATOR'S PANEL AND I/O


MODULE FOR POWER MAGNETICS CABINET...................................... 179
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.4.6
8.4.7
8.4.8
8.4.9
8.4.10

8.5

Connection diagram ......................................................................................... 150


Component names ........................................................................................... 151
External view and dimensions ......................................................................... 154
Installation ....................................................................................................... 155
Cable connection to the terminal block ........................................................... 156
Connection ....................................................................................................... 158

CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR OPERATOR'S PANEL (FOR


MATRIX INPUT) ........................................................................................ 163
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8.3.7
8.3.8
8.3.9
8.3.10
8.3.11

8.4

B-64603EN/01

Configuration ....................................................................................................... 194


Connector Layout Diagram .................................................................................. 195
Connection Diagram............................................................................................. 196
Module Specifications .......................................................................................... 197
DI/DO Connector Pin Assignment ....................................................................... 198
DI (Input Signal) Connection ............................................................................... 199
DO (Output Signal) Connection ........................................................................... 206
DI/DO Signal Specifications ................................................................................ 210
Power Supply Connection .................................................................................... 211
Manual Pulse Generator Connection .................................................................... 211
Connection between Modules .............................................................................. 211
Unit Dimensions ................................................................................................... 213
Mounting the Module ........................................................................................... 214
Connector Panel Printed Circuit Board ................................................................ 215
Other Notes........................................................................................................... 218
Connection of the Grounding Terminal of the Module ........................................ 220

CONNECTION OF TERMINAL TYPE I/O MODULE ................................. 221


8.6.1
8.6.2

Overview .............................................................................................................. 221


Module Specifications .......................................................................................... 222
8.6.2.1
8.6.2.2
8.6.2.3

Types of modules ............................................................................................. 222


Installation conditions ...................................................................................... 223
I/O signal specifications .................................................................................. 223
c-4

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B-64603EN/01

8.6.2.4
8.6.2.5
8.6.2.6
8.6.2.7

8.6.3

External View and Dimensions ............................................................................ 228


8.6.3.1
8.6.3.2
8.6.3.3

8.6.4
8.6.5

Dimensions (common to the modules) ............................................................ 228


Dimensions in a maximum configuration (one basic module + three
extension modules) .......................................................................................... 228
Component names ........................................................................................... 229

Installation ............................................................................................................232
Connection ........................................................................................................... 234
8.6.5.1
8.6.5.2
8.6.5.3
8.6.5.4
8.6.5.5
8.6.5.6
8.6.5.7
8.6.5.8
8.6.5.9

8.6.6

Power supply rating ......................................................................................... 226


Heat dissipation ............................................................................................... 226
Weight ............................................................................................................. 226
Applicable wire................................................................................................ 227

Overall connection diagram ............................................................................. 234


Power connection ............................................................................................ 235
Signal assignment on terminal blocks.............................................................. 236
DI/DO connection............................................................................................ 239
Manual pulse generator connection ................................................................. 246
Inter-module connection .................................................................................. 246
Cable connection to a terminal block .............................................................. 247
Detaching a terminal block .............................................................................. 248
Connection of the ground terminal .................................................................. 249

Settings ................................................................................................................. 250


8.6.6.1 Address map .................................................................................................... 250
8.6.6.2 Channel selection and A/D conversion data for extension module D ............. 251
8.6.6.3 Channel selection and D/A conversion data for extension module E .............. 253
DO alarm detection ........................................................................................................... 254
8.6.6.4 Setting the rotary switch .................................................................................. 256

8.6.7

Others ................................................................................................................... 257


8.6.7.1
8.6.7.2

8.7

I/O Link CONNECTION UNIT .................................................................... 260


8.7.1
8.7.2
8.7.3
8.7.4

Overview .............................................................................................................. 260


Specification ......................................................................................................... 261
Installation ............................................................................................................263
Connection ........................................................................................................... 266
8.7.4.1
8.7.4.2

8.8

Method of common pin expansion .................................................................. 257


Parallel DO (output signal) connection ........................................................... 259

I/O Link connection ......................................................................................... 266


Power connection ............................................................................................ 267

CONNECTION TO MACHINE OPERATOR'S PANEL .............................. 268


8.8.1
8.8.2
8.8.3
8.8.4

Overview .............................................................................................................. 268


Total Connection Diagram ................................................................................... 271
DI/DO Address Map ............................................................................................ 274
Each Connections ................................................................................................. 276
8.8.4.1
8.8.4.2
8.8.4.3
8.8.4.4
8.8.4.5
8.8.4.6
8.8.4.7
8.8.4.8

8.8.5

Manual Pulse Generator ....................................................................................... 295


8.8.5.1
8.8.5.2

8.8.6
8.8.7
8.8.8
8.8.9

Pin assignment ................................................................................................. 276


Power supply connection ................................................................................. 280
I/O Link i connection ....................................................................................... 281
Using the channel 2 of I/O Link i .................................................................... 281
Emergency stop signal connection .................................................................. 284
Power ON/OFF control signal connection....................................................... 285
General-purpose DI signal connection ............................................................ 287
General-purpose DO signal connection ........................................................... 293
Manual pulse generator connection ................................................................. 295
Pendant type manual pulse generator connection ............................................ 295

Connector (on the cable side) specifications ........................................................ 297


DI/DO Addresses for the Keyboard ..................................................................... 297
Code Output for the Rotary Switch ...................................................................... 299
Outline .................................................................................................................. 300
c-5

TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.8.9.1
8.8.9.2
8.8.9.3
8.8.9.4
8.8.9.5
8.8.9.6
8.8.9.7
8.8.9.8

8.8.10

Outline of main panel ...................................................................................... 300


Outline of Safety machine operators panel..................................................... 301
Outline of Safety machine operators panel type B ......................................... 302
Outline of sub panel AA .................................................................................. 303
Outline of sub panel D ..................................................................................... 304
Connector locations of main panel .................................................................. 305
Connector locations of safety machine operators panel ................................. 305
Connector locations of safety machine operators panel type B ...................... 306

Specifications of the Machine Operators Panel .................................................. 306


8.8.10.1
8.8.10.2
8.8.10.3
8.8.10.4
8.8.10.5
8.8.10.6
8.8.10.7
8.8.10.8
8.8.10.9

8.8.11

B-64603EN/01

Installation conditions ...................................................................................... 306


Order specification........................................................................................... 306
Main panel specification .................................................................................. 307
Safety machine operators panel and safety machine operators panel type B
specification ..................................................................................................... 307
Sub panel AA, D specification ........................................................................ 308
Power supply specification .............................................................................. 308
Heat output ...................................................................................................... 308
General-purpose DI signal definition .............................................................. 308
General-purpose DO signal definition ............................................................. 309

Keyboard .............................................................................................................. 309


8.8.11.1 Meaning of key symbols .................................................................................. 309
8.8.11.2 Detachable key top on the main panel ............................................................. 311
8.8.11.3 Keyboard cover................................................................................................ 311

8.8.12

8.9

8.9.1
8.9.2
8.9.3
8.9.4
8.9.5
8.9.6
8.9.7
8.9.8

8.10

Overall Connection Diagram ................................................................................ 314


Power Connection ................................................................................................ 314
DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement ..................................................................... 315
DI (Input Signal) Connection ............................................................................... 316
DO (Output Signal) Connection ........................................................................... 323
External View ....................................................................................................... 327
Specifications ....................................................................................................... 327
Other Notes........................................................................................................... 329

CONNECTION OF SAFETY IO UNIT........................................................ 331


8.10.1
8.10.2
8.10.3
8.10.4
8.10.5
8.10.6
8.10.7
8.10.8
8.10.9
8.10.10
8.10.11
8.10.12
8.10.13

8.11

DO (Output Signal) Error Detection .................................................................... 312

CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL CONNECTION UNIT


(SOURCE DO)........................................................................................... 314

Overview ..............................................................................................................331
Total connection diagram ..................................................................................... 331
Power supply connection...................................................................................... 332
I/O Link i Connection........................................................................................... 332
DI/DO Address ..................................................................................................... 333
Pin assignment of DI/DO ..................................................................................... 334
DI/DO connection ................................................................................................ 335
Outline of Safety IO Unit ..................................................................................... 343
Connector locations of Safety IO Unit ................................................................. 344
Color labels for connectors of Safety IO Unit ...................................................... 345
Connector specification of Safety IO Unit ........................................................... 346
Specifications of Safety IO Unit........................................................................... 346
DO (Output Signal) Error Detection .................................................................... 348

CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR OPERATORS PANEL


SUPPORTING SAFETY FUNCTION ......................................................... 349
8.11.1
8.11.2
8.11.3
8.11.4
8.11.5

Overview ..............................................................................................................349
Connection Diagram............................................................................................. 349
Power Connection ................................................................................................ 350
DI/DO Address Map ............................................................................................ 351
DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement ..................................................................... 353
c-6

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B-64603EN/01

8.11.6
8.11.7
8.11.8
8.11.9
8.11.10
8.11.11

8.12

I/O UNIT FOR POWER MAGNETICS CABINET ....................................... 363


8.12.1
8.12.2
8.12.3
8.12.4
8.12.5
8.12.6
8.12.7
8.12.8
8.12.9
8.12.10

DIGeneral-purpose Input SignalConnection ................................................ 355


DO (Output Signal) Connection ........................................................................... 358
Manual pulse generator Connection ..................................................................... 359
External View ....................................................................................................... 360
Specifications .......................................................................................................361
DO (output signal) Error Detection ...................................................................... 362
Overall Connection Diagram ................................................................................ 363
Power Connection ................................................................................................ 364
DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement ..................................................................... 365
DI(General-purpose Input Signal)Connection ..................................................... 366
DO(Output Signal) Connection ............................................................................ 373
Manual Pulse Generator Connection .................................................................... 377
External View ....................................................................................................... 377
GND Cable Connection........................................................................................ 378
Specifications ....................................................................................................... 379
Other Notes...........................................................................................................381

STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP ....................................................... 383


9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6

STOP MODES ........................................................................................... 383


SHUTTING OFF THE MOTOR POWER ................................................... 383
STOPPING THE SPINDLE MOTOR ......................................................... 384
STOPPING THE SERVO MOTOR ............................................................ 384
EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL ................................................................... 385
CAUTIONS ABOUT MULTI-PATH CONTROL .......................................... 389

10 CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS ........................................... 390


11 CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL
PERSONAL COMPUTERS ................................................................. 391
11.1
11.2
11.3

OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 391


CAUTIONS ................................................................................................ 391
CONNECTION USING THE HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) ............ 391
11.3.1
11.3.2
11.3.3
11.3.4
11.3.5
11.3.6
11.3.7

11.4

Overview ..............................................................................................................391
Connection Diagram............................................................................................. 392
Specifications of a Commercial PC ...................................................................... 392
Installation Environment ...................................................................................... 393
Handling Precautions ........................................................................................... 393
Procedure for Installing Personal Computer Interface Boards ............................. 393
Cable Connection ................................................................................................. 394

CONNECTION USING Ethernet ................................................................ 395


11.4.1
11.4.2

Overview ..............................................................................................................395
Connection Diagram............................................................................................. 395

12 PANEL i .............................................................................................. 396


APPENDIX
A

OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS AND CONNECTORS ................... 399

20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES ......................... 432


B.1

BOARD-MOUNTED CONNECTORS ........................................................ 432


c-7

TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.1.1
B.1.2

B.2

Vertical-type Connectors ...................................................................................... 432


Straight and Right-angled Connectors (for Spring and Screw-fixing Connector
Housings) ............................................................................................................. 432

CABLE CONNECTORS ............................................................................ 433


B.2.1
B.2.2

B.3

B-64603EN/01

Strand Wire Press-mount Connector .................................................................... 433


Soldering Type Connector.................................................................................... 434

RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE HOUSINGS, AND


CABLES .................................................................................................... 435
B.3.1
B.3.2

Recommended Connectors ................................................................................... 436


Applicable Cables................................................................................................. 436

CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)................................. 443

OPTICAL FIBER CABLE .................................................................... 446

MEMORY CARD INTERFACE ............................................................ 456

HOW TO ATTACH THE KEYBOARD COVER ................................... 458

c-8

1.CONFIGURATION

B-64603EN/01

CONFIGURATION

1.1

CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT


NAMES

The LCD-mounted type is one having both control and indicator sections in it. Each unit has different
composition. Described below is the configuration of type. This manual focuses on how to attach the
connectors shown in the configuration diagrams to device.

1.1.1

Configurations of LCD-mounted Type Control Units

Basic
unit

Screen
size

Touch
panel

Without
8.4"
Basic unit
A

With

Without
10.4"
With

Basic unit
G

Without
15"
With

LCD-mounted type control units


Number of
Number of
option slots horizontal soft keys

MDI

With
(horizontal)
With
(vertical)
With
(horizontal)
With
(vertical)
Separate
(horizontal/ver
tical)
Separate
(horizontal/
vertical)

Without
2
Without
2
Without
2
Without
2
Without
2
Without
2
Without
2
Without
2

Number of vertical
soft keys

5+2

without

10+2

(8+1)or Without

10+2

8+1

CAUTION
The touch panel is a device designed to be operated by touching directly its
screen. Touch panel is possible to be operated with the gloves or bare hand. It is
possible to get a better operating feeling when using a FANUC-supplied
exclusive touch panel pen (A02B-0236-K111).
Please be careful not to press too strongly when operating with a finger. There is
a risk that internal circuit of the touch panel fails or the glass cracks.
If you press the screen with the pointed pen or sharp tool like a driver, it may
cause failure or the surface of the display may be scratched. Be sure to keep
away from such improper use.
CAUTION
Do not poke the surface of the display with a sharp tool like a driver, or hit
strongly with a something hard like a grip of driver. It may cause failure or the
surface of the display may be scratched.

-1-

1.CONFIGURATION

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
The indicators having a touch panel has a protection sheet attached to its front
surface. Explanations about how to replace the protection sheet, refer to the
FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Maintenance Manual (B-64605EN).
10.4 LCD unit (front view)

Liquid-crystal
display

Vertical soft
keys

Memory card
interface

USB port

Horizontal soft
keys

NOTE
1 This figure shows the 10.4 LCD-mounted control unit as viewed from the front.
The basic configuration of the other control unit models is the same, as viewed
from the front.
2 The LCD (liquid-crystal display) has been fabricated using an extreme precision
technology. However, some of their pixels may fail to light or stay constantly
lighting because of their characteristics. Please be forewarned that these
phenomena are not faults.

-2-

1.CONFIGURATION

B-64603EN/01
Basic unit A (rear view)

Fan unit

Battery

FSSB interface
connector
[COP10A]

Ethernet connector
(Embedded Ethernet)
CD38A

Soft key connectors


Power supply
connector
[CP1]

MDI connector
[JA2]
I/O device interface
connector (RS-232C)
[JD36A]

I/O device interface


connector (RS-232C)
[JD36B]

Fuse

High-speed skip
connector
[JA40]
I/O Link i or I/O Link connector
[JD51A]

Position coder connector


[JA41]

NOTE
1 This figure shows an LCD-mounted control unit having no option slot as viewed
from the rear.
2 The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.

-3-

1.CONFIGURATION

B-64603EN/01

Basic unit G (rear view)

Battery
Fan unit

FSSB interface
connector
COP10A-1

MDI connector
CA55

Fuse

Power supply
connector
CPD16A

Soft key connectors


USB port
CD41P

I/O device interface


connector (RS-232C)
JD56A

Ethernet connector
(Embedded Ethernet)
CD38S
I/O device interface
connector (RS-232C)
JD36A
Position coder connector
JA41
High-speed skip connector
JA40

I/O Link i connector


JD51A

NOTE
1 This figure shows an LCD-mounted control unit having no option slot as viewed
from the rear.
2 The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.

-4-

1.CONFIGURATION

B-64603EN/01

1.1.2

Configurations of Optional Boards


Fast Ethernet board

PROFIBUS-DP slave board

For Profibus
[CN2]

For Ethernet
[CD38R]

DeviceNet master board

HSSB interface board

For HSSB interface


[COP21N]

For DeviceNet
[TBL]

DeviceNet slave board

PROFIBUS-DP master board

For Profibus
[CN1]

For DeviceNet
[TBL]

CC-Link remote device station board

For CC-Link
[CT1]

NOTE
The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
The Fast Ethernet board may be used also as data server or FL-net functions,
depending on the settings of parameters.

-5-

1.CONFIGURATION

B-64603EN/01

1.2

HARDWARE OVERVIEW

1.2.1

LCD-mounted Type Control Unit Overview


Main board
-

Fast Ethernet board


Fast Ethernet function
Data server function
FL-net function
EtherNet/IP
master/slave function
PROFINET
master/slave function
Modbus/TCP function

CPU for controlling CNC


Power supply
Axis control function
MDI I/F
I/O Link i control function
Analog output
Position coder
PMC control function
High-speed skip (HDI)
RS-232C I/F
Memory card I/F
USB I/F
Ethernet function

Basic system

HSSB interface board


High-speed serial bus interface
Various types of network boards

Options

PROFIBUS-DP master board


PROFIBUS-DP slave board
DeviceNet master board note2
DeviceNet slave board
CC-Link remote device station board
Unit without optional slots
or
Unit having two optional slots

Note
1
On a unit with optional slots, as many optional boards as the slots can be mounted.

-6-

2.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

B-64603EN/01

TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS


10.4LCD unit and 8.4LCD/MDI unit

t
i
n
u
y
a
l
p
s
i
D

Main board
24V-IN(CP1)

24 VDC power supply


MDI unit
CK27

MDI(JA2)

RS-232C I/O device

R232C-1(JD36A)
RS-232C I/O device

R232C-2(JD36B)

Touch panel
Analog output for tool drives
A-OUT&HDI(JA40)

High-speed skip input

DC24V
I/O Link i (JD51A)

Distributed
I/O board
CPD1
JA3
JD1B

Manual pulse generator


Operator's
panel

JD1A
DC24V

Power
magnetics
cabinet

CPD1 Distributed
JD1B I/O board
I/O unit, etc
JD1A
Position coder

P0S(JA41)

Circuit breaker
DC24V
AC reactor
MCC

AC200V
Circuit breaker

i PS
Position coder

FSSB(COP10A)

i SP
Serial spindle motor

COP10B

i SV

COP10A
COP10B

Servo motor

Servo motor

i SV

COP10A
COP10B

Servo motor

i SV

COP10A
COP10B

Servo motor

i SV

COP10A

(In this figure, a 1-axisamplifier is used.)


Separate detector interface unit 1
DC24V

CP11A

JF101

Linear scale, axis 2

COP10B

JF103

Linear scale, axis 3

COP10A

JF104

Linear scale, axis 4

CNF1

JA4A

To separate detector interface unit 2


ETHERNET(CD38A)

Linear scale, axis 1

JF102

Ethernet

-7-

Absolute scale battery


(Required only when an absolute scale is used)

2.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

B-64603EN/01

15LCD unit

Display unit

Main board
24V-IN(CPD16A

24VDC power supply


MDI unit

MDI(CA55)
RS-232C I/O device

R232C-1(JD56A)
RS-232C I/O device

R232C-2(JD36A)

Touch panel
Analog output for tool drives

A-OUT&HDI(JA40)

DC24V
I/O Link i (JD51A)

High-speed skip input


Distributed
I//O board
CPD1
JA3
JD1B

Manual pulse generator


Operators
panel

JD1A
DC24V

CPD1 Distribute
I/O board
JD1B
I/O unit, etc
JD1A

Power
magnetics
cabinet

Position coder
POS(JA41)

Circuit breaker
DC24V
AC reactor
MCC

AC200V
Circuit breaker

i PS
Position coder

FSSB(COP10A)

i SP
Serial spindle motor

COP10B

i SV

COP10A
COP10B

Servo motor

Servo motor

i SV

COP10A
COP10B

Servo motor

i SV

COP10A
COP10B

Servo motor

i SV

COP10A

(In this figure, a 1-axisamplifier is used.)


Separate detector interface unit 1
DC24V

CP11A

JF101

Linear scale, axis 1

JF102

Linear scale, axis 2

COP10B

JF103

Linear scale, axis 3

COP10A

JF104

Linear scale, axis 4

CNF1

JA4A

Absolute scale battery


(Required only when an absolute scale is used)

To separate detector interface unit 2


ETHERNET(CD38S)

USB(CD41P)

Ethernet (Embedded Ethernet)

USB memory

-8-

2.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

B-64603EN/01

When optional boards are provided

Optional slot

Fast Ethernet board

Memory card
ETHERNET(CD38R)

Use a compact flash card purchased from FANUC


Ethernet or FL-net ,and so on

HSSB interface board

HSSB(COP21A)

PANEL i
or Personal Computer

PROFIBUS-DP
master board
PROFI(CN1)

Other control unit


or PROFIBUS device

PROFIBUS-DP
slave board
PROFI(CN2)

Other control unit


or PROFIBUS device

DeviceNet
master board
DVNET(TBL)

Other control unit


or DeviceNet device

DeviceNet
slave board
DVNET(TBL)

Other control unit


or DeviceNet device

CC-Link remote
device station board
CCLNK(CT1)

CC-Link device

-9-

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

INSTALLATION

3.1

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE


CABINET

3.1.1

Environmental Conditions outside the Cabinet

The control unit and the peripheral units have been designed on the assumption that they are housed in
closed cabinets. In this manual "cabinet" refers to the following:

Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the control unit or peripheral units;

Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for housing the MDI unit, or
operator's panel.

Equivalent to the above.


The following table lists the environmental conditions required in installing these cabinets. Section 3.3 of
this connection manual explains the design conditions regarding installation of cabinets that will meet the
environmental conditions.
Ambient
temperature of
the cabinet
Humidity

Vibration

Meters above
sea level

Operating
Nonoperating (including storage
and transportation)
Temperature change
Normal
Short period (less than 1 month)
Operating
Nonoperating (including storage
and transportation)
Operating
Nonoperating (including storage
and transportation)

-20C to 60C
0.3C/minute or less
75%RH or less, no condensation
95%RH or less, no condensation
2
4.9m/s (0.5G) or less
9.8m/s2 (1.0G) or less
Up to 1000 m (see Note 1 in the Subsec. 3.1.2.)
Up to 12000 m
Normal machine shop environment
(The environment must be considered if the cabinets are in a
location where the density of dust, coolant, organic solvent,
and/or corrosive gas is relatively high.)

Environment

3.1.2

0C to 45C

Installation Conditions of the Control Unit


Condition

Ambient
temperature

Humidity

LCD-mounted type control unit and display unit

Operating
Nonoperating (including storage
and transportation)
Temperature change
Normal
Short period (less than 1 month)

0C to 58C
-20C to 60C
0.3C/minute or less
75%RH or less, no condensation
95%RH or less, no condensation

- 10 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

Condition

LCD-mounted type control unit and display unit


2

Operating
Vibration

Meters above
sea level

Environment

4.9m/s (0.5G) or less


FANUCs evaluation test was conducted under the following
conditions complying with IEC 60068-2-6.
10 to 58Hz: 0.075mm (amplitude)
58 to 500Hz: 9.8m/s2 (1.0G)
Direction of vibration: Each of the X, Y, and Z directions
Number of sweep cycles: 10

Nonoperating (including storage


and transportation)
Operating
Nonoperating (including storage
and transportation)

9.8m/s2 (1.0G) or less


Up to 1000m (Note 1)
Up to 12000m
Coolant, lubricant, or cutting chips shall not be sprinkled
directly over the CNC or servo unit. No corrosive gas shall be
allowed.

NOTE
1 If the control unit is installed 1000 m or higher above sea level, the allowable
upper ambient temperature of the control unit in the cabinet is changed as
follows. Assume that the allowable upper ambient temperature of the control unit
in the cabinet installed 1000 m or higher above sea level decreases by 1.0C for
every 100 m rise in altitude.
Example)
When a control unit whose required operating ambient temperature range is
0C to 55C is installed 1750 m above sea level:
55C-(1750m-1000m)/100m 1.0C = 47.5C
Therefore, the allowable ambient temperature range is from 0C to 47.5C.
2 When using a unit having additional installation conditions, be sure to meet also
these conditions.

3.2

CAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION DESIGN OF


MACHINE TOOL POWER MAGNETICS CABINETS

When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions described in Section 3.1. In
addition, the magnetic interference on the screen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must be
considered. When mounting FANUC-supplied units, such as displays and operators panels, use packing
and fasten the mounting screws with the specified tightening torque. When designing magnetics cabinets,
pay due consideration to each item stated in the following CAUTION.

CAUTION
1 The cabinet must be fully closed. The cabinet must be designed to prevent the
entry of airborne dust, coolant, and organic solvent.
2 The cabinet must be designed so that the permissible temperature of each unit is
not exceeded. (See Section 3.3.)
3 A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air within. (This is
not necessary for a unit with fan.) The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves
at 0.5 m/sec along the surface of each installed unit.
However, do not blow air from the fan directly to the unit, because doing so can
readily make dust attach the portion where the air flow hits, leading to possible
trouble. (This is not necessary for a unit with fan.)
- 11 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

CAUTION
4 For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between each unit
and the wall of the cabinet.
5 Each FANUC-supplied unit, such as a display or operators panel, has been
designed on the assumption that they will be mounted using packing and with the
specified screw tightening torque. Failing to mount them as specified can lead to
unit damage and/or malfunction. Be sure to use packing and observe the
specified screw tightening torque. (See Sections 3.6 and 3.7.)
6 Failing to use packing or to provide complete sealing, or using any packing not
resistant to coolant in use will allow dust, coolant, and organic solvent to get in
the cabinet, leading to possible equipment trouble. Be sure to use an appropriate
packing and a secure sealing.
In addition, use an appropriate packing and a secure sealing for the cable outlets
and doors of the machine builder-provided units, such as displays, operators
panels, and cabinet pendant boxes. (See Section 3.7.)
7 The LCD must not be installed in such a place that coolant would directly fall onto
the unit. Be sure to attach a protection cover to the LCD if it will be used in an
environment where it is anticipated that coolant may come into contact with it, for
example, an environment with a relatively dense oil mist.
8 Noise must be minimized. As the machine and the control unit are reduced in
size, the parts that generate noise may be placed near noise-sensitive parts in
the magnetics cabinet.
The control unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet design to
minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmitted to the control
unit is necessary. (See Section 3.4.)
9 When placing units in the cabinet, also consider ease of maintenance. The units
should be placed so that they can be checked and replaced easily when
maintenance is performed.
10 The hard disk drive and floppy disk drive must not be installed near the source of
a strong magnetic field.
11 The installation conditions of the I/O unit and connector panel I/O module must be
satisfied. In order to secure ventilation in the equipment, mount the I/O unit and
connector panel I/O module in the specified orientation. Clearances of 100 mm or
more both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring and ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit and
connector panel I/O module.
Top

I/O base unit


(No screws or protrusions shall extend from the
bottom of this unit.)

Bottom

- 12 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

CAUTION
By a machine tool of a machine door adjacent to operator's panel, large shock will
be applied to the operator's panel every time of opening or closing the door.
CNC control unit and I/O unit on the operator's panel are deteriorated by
repeated large shock for a prolonged period every time opening and closing of
the door. So, attach a packing rubber or damper on the door to prevent damage
by direct large shock. Use the rubber for measures of the door and high tolerance
to a cutting fluid. Also, use the rubber even if repetition shock is applied, form
does not change and vibration absorption effect does not deteriorate. When the
rubber deteriorates, describe exchange method of the rubber, make the structure
which can be exchanged by an end user.
Describe the exchange method to manual of a machine tool.

Operators panel

Machine
door

A machine tool of the door and the operators panel are contiguous,
please attach the rubber or a damper for the measures of shock when
opening and closing the door.

- 13 -

3.INSTALLATION

3.3

B-64603EN/01

THERMAL DESIGN OF THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC


CABINET

The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units and parts installed in the cabinet
generate heat. Since the generated heat is radiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the
air in the cabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amount of heat generated is
constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, the less the internal temperature rises. The thermal
design of the cabinet refers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating the surface area of
the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installing heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary.
Such a design method is described in the following subsections.

3.3.1

Temperature Rise within the Machine Tool Magnetic Cabinet

The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/C per 1m2 surface area, that is,
when the 6W heat source is contained in a cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air
in the cabinet rises by 1C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers to the area useful in cooling,
that is, the area obtained by subtracting the area of the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface
area of the cabinet. There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited by the fun, and
the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost constant. For example, the operators panel
cabinet may contain an LCD-mounted type control unit. To keep the temperature in the cabinet at 58C or
below when the ambient temperature is 45C, the equation below must be satisfied.
Internal heat loss P [W]
6[W/m2C] surface area S[m2] 13[C] of rise in temperature
(A cooling capacity of 6 W/C assumes the cabinet is so large that agitation with the fan motor does not
make the temperature distribution uniform. For a small cabinet like the operator's panel, a cooling
capacity of 8 W/C, indicated in Subsection 3.3.3, may be used.)
For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4m2 has a cooling capacity of 24W/C. To limit the
internal temperature increase to 13C under these conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 312W. If
the actual internal heat is 360W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by 15C. When this
happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet must be improved using the heat exchanger.

3.3.2

Heat Output of Each Unit


Table 3.3.2 Heat output
Unit

LCD-mounted type
control unit

Heat output

8.4LCD unit

Option 0 slot
Option 2 slots
Option 0 slot
Option 2 slots
Option 0 slot
Option 2 slots

10.4LCD unit
15LCD unit
Optional board

Fast Ethernet board


(when used as data server functions)
HSSB interface board
PROFIBUS-DP master board
PROFIBUS-DP slave board
DeviceNet master board
DeviceNet slave board
CC-Link remote device station board

MDI units

- 14 -

Remarks

32W

Note 1)

32W

Note 1)

37W

Note 1)

3W
(3.3W)
4W
5W
2W
3W
3.5W
3W
0W

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
1 The values listed above do not include any heat output of the option boards. To
obtain the total heat output of the control unit, add the heat output from the any
option boards.
2 See Chapter 6 for the heat output of the separate detector interface unit.
3 See Chapter 8 for the heat output of each I/O unit.
4 Refer to the PANEL i Connection and Maintenance Manual (B-64223EN) for the
heat output of the PANEL i.

3.3.3

Thermal Design of Operator's Panel

With a small cabinet like the operator's panel, the heat dissipating capacity of the cabinet is as shown
below, assuming that there is sufficient mixing of the air inside the cabinet.
Coated metal surfaces: 8 W/m2C
Plastic surfaces: 3.7 W/m2C
An example of the thermal design for the cabinet shown in Fig. 3.3.3 is shown below.

Fig. 3.3.3

Assume the following.


Thermal exchange rates
Coated metal surfaces
: 8 W/m2C
Plastic surfaces
: 3.7 W/m2C
Allowable temperature rise
: 13C higher than the exterior temperature
Also, assume the following.
Dimensions of pendant type cabinet shown in Fig. 3.3.3: 560(W) 470(H) 150(D) mm
- 15 -

3.INSTALLATION
Surface area of metallic sections
Surface area of plastic sections

B-64603EN/01

:
:

0.5722 m2
0.2632 m2

In this case, the allowable total heat dissipation for the cabinet is:
8 0.5722 13 + 3.7 0.2632 13 = 72 W.
In consequence, it can be concluded that the units shown in Table 3.3.3 on the next page can be installed
in this cabinet.
Table 3.3.3
LCD-mounted type control unit (with 10.4LCD unit)
Standard machine operator's panel
120-mm square fan motor for air mixing
Total heat dissipation of the above

32W
15W(Note)
8W
55

NOTE
The 15 W quoted for the standard machine operator's panel represents an
example heat output value when half of all the input signals are turned on. This
value varies, depending on the mechanical configuration.

3.4

COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE AND


GROUNDING

In general, noise can occur because of electrostatic coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground loop
and get in a control unit.
On the control unit side, due consideration is paid to a protective measure for external noise. However, it
is hard to measure the magnitude and frequency of noise quantitatively and there are lots of uncertainties
with noise. So, it is important to take measures for minimizing noise occurrence and keeping any noise
from entering the control unit in order to enhance stability in CNC-based machine tool system operation.
Grounding the power magnetics cabinet and devices is very important to prevent an electric shock and
suppress a noise influence. The CNC system uses the following three types of grounding:
(1) Signal grounding
This type of grounding is used to supply a reference potential (0 V) for the electrical signal system.
(2) Frame grounding
This type of grounding is used for safety reasons as well as to suppress external and internal noise.
For example, grounding is provided for the device frames, panels, and shielding on the interface
cables connecting the devices.
(3) System grounding (PE)
This type of grounding is used to connect frame grounds, which are provided for the individual
devices or between the units, to the ground as a system at a single point.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the machine as described in the
following section.

- 16 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

3.4.1

Grounding as Noise Suppression Measures

3.4.1.1

Grounding methods

Typically, noise that becomes a problem is highfrequency noise. To suppress highfrequency noise, it is
important that the devices are grounded at low impedance(NOTE).
The grounding schemes for this purpose are described below.

NOTE
Impedance includes a resistance component that converts electric current to heat
as well as a component called reactance, and indicates a characteristic of
resistance to the flow of alternating current at a certain frequency.

(1) Multipoint grounding scheme


In this grounding scheme, when grounded at sufficiently low impedance, the cabinet metal plates are used
as ground plates, to which grounding is provided in the vicinity of each device.
This scheme has a great effect of suppressing highfrequency noise because it enables grounding to the
lowimpedance metal plates of the cabinet in the shortest distance. However, the noise suppression effect
depends on the cabinet structure because the cabinet metal plates are used as ground plates.
See Subsection 3.4.1.2 for the cabinet. Fig. 3.4.1.1 (a) is a schematic wiring diagram.

Cabinet
(Lower-impedance metal plates)
i PS i SP i SV

Pendant box
(Lower-impedance metal plates)

Ground bar for


shield clamp

Control unit

JF*

Connection at
low impedance

Connect the unit


to a metal plate
close to it.
However, keep
signal grounding
points at least
10 cm away
from power wire
grounding
points.

Machine
operators panel

24 V output power

Signal line

AC input

Power line
PE terminal (for connecting external
protective conductor)
(Do not coat mating surfaces.)

Machine side
Motor

Separate the signal line


and power line when
routing them.

Grounding electrode or main

Frame grounding

grounding terminal

System grounding (PE)

Fig. 3.4.1.1 (a) Schematic diagram for multipoint grounding scheme

When the multipoint grounding scheme is adopted, the units can be grounded at low impedance, and
ground wires (wires from the units ground terminal to a grounding plate) can be shortened, so that wiring
may be simplified. So, FANUC recommends the multipoint grounding scheme.

- 17 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

CAUTION
If it is impossible to configure cabinet metal plates with a low impedance, it is
likely that noise may effect grounding circuits shared by power wires and signal
wires.

(2) Singlepoint grounding scheme


In this grounding scheme, grounding separation is achieved between the signal system and power system,
and grounding is provided at a single point to suppress the noise influence of the power system on the
signal system.
This scheme tends to need longer connection wires for grounding the devices. To produce a sufficient
effect of suppressing highfrequency noise, it is therefore necessary to use largerdiameter wires or use
two or more wires for each connection. Fig. 3.4.1.1 (b) is a schematic wiring diagram.
Cabinet

Pendant box

i PS i SP i SV

JF*

Ground bar for


shield clamp

Control unit

Machine
operators panel

Power system ground


bar
Signal system ground bar

24 V output power

AC input

Achieve grounding
separation between
the signal system
and power system.

Signal line
Signal system
ground bar

Power line

PE terminal (for connecting


external protective conductor)

Machine side
Motor

Separate the signal line


and power line when
routing them.

Grounding electrode or

Frame grounding

main grounding terminal

System grounding (PE)

Fig. 3.4.1.1 (b) Schematic diagram for multipoint grounding scheme

3.4.1.2

Cabinet

A cabinet is an important element in improving noise immunity and suppressing radiated noise. One of
the causes of problems related to noise immunity and radiated noise is faulty electrical continuity between
the metal plates that make up the cabinet. Typically, noise that becomes a problem is highfrequency
noise, against which measures must be taken in the cabinet design.

- 18 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

(1) Basic cabinet structure


A cabinet should basically be made of metal.
To improve noise immunity, there must be lowimpedance electrical continuity between the metal plates
that make up the cabinet, which are the side plates, top plate, and bottom plate, and a weldingtype
cabinet structure is recommended.
As for a cabinet welding method, bead welding is more suitable than spot welding for providing
lowimpedance electrical continuity between the metal plates.
For an assemblytype cabinet structure, provide electrical continuity by bringing the metal plates into
direct contact with each other, without applying a coating to their joint surface areas.
In a structure that has the metal plates connected only with wires because of structural constraints,
lowimpedance connections are more difficult to make than in a structure in which welding is made or
the metal plates are brought into direct contact with each other. It is necessary to maintain sufficient
levels of items such as the crosssectional area of a wire to use, continuity of connections, and contact
areas.

Bring the metal plates into direct contact with each


other, without applying a coating to their joint areas.

Bead welding

Fig. 3.4.1.2 (a) Cabinet structure

NOTE
Explained above is how to provide cabinets with low-impedance electrical
continuity so as to increase noise immunity and to suppress noise radiation. See
Subsection 3.4.2 for conditions required to configure protective grounding
circuits.

(2) Mounting units on the cabinet


The shortest possible lengths of unit ground wires (wires from the units ground terminal to a grounding
plate) should be used to make connections. A ground wire with a small conductor diameter causes
impedance to high-frequency noise to become particularly higher, leading to an insufficient grounding
effect. For the location of the ground terminal of each unit, refer to the manual relevant to the unit. The
following shows the recommended method by which the metal plate with the unit mounted is installed on
the cabinet. Care should be taken so that the cabinet and metal plate are connected to each other on their
broad areas with no coating. It is not recommended that electrical continuity be provided only by screws,
because impedance to high frequency cannot be sufficiently low.

- 19 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

<Good example>
Cabinet
Metal
plate

Coating
mask

Unit

Coating

Cabinet

Metal plate

Screw

Shortest connection
with thick ground wire

Continuity on areas
with no coating

<Bad example>
Cabinet
Metal
plate
Unit

Continuity only by screw


in a coated area

Fig. 3.4.1.2 (b) Installing a unit in a cabinet

- 20 -

Thin ground wire, long


ground wire

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

3.4.2

Protective Ground (Grounding for Protection against Indirect


Contact)

Protection against indirect contract is intended to prevent the risk that may occur in a conductive portion
which is not charged with electricity (applied with voltage) during normal operation but may be charged
with electricity if insulation is accidentally destroyed. It must be implemented by:
- measures to prevent the occurrence of a touch voltage, or
- automatic disconnection of the supply before the time of contact with a touch voltage can become
hazardous
As for protective grounding in automatic disconnection of the supply before the time of contact with a
touch voltage can become hazardous, follow any standards the machine tool is supposed to meet. Some
standard examples follow:
Regarding protective grounding
IEC 60364-4-41:2005 and JIS C 60364-4-41:2010 (Low-voltage electrical installations - Part 4-41:
Protection for safety - Protection against electric shock) 411
Regarding the minimum cross-sectional area of protective conductors
IEC 60204-1:2005/A1:2008 and JIS B 9960-1:2008/A1:2011 (Safety of Machinery Electrical
Equipment of Machines Part 1: General Requirements) 8.2.2
NFPA 79:2012 (Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery) 8.2.2 Equipment Grounding
(Protective) Conductors and Bonding Jumpers
NFPA 79:2012 (Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery) 18.2 Continuity of the Equipment
Grounding (Protective Bonding) Circuit
Regarding the cross-sectional area of a protective conductor shared by multiple circuits
IEC 60364-5-54:2011 and JIS C 60364-5-54:2006 (Electrical installations of buildings Part 5-54:
Selection and erection of electrical equipment Earthing arrangements, protective conductors and
protective bonding conductors) 543.1.4
Regarding use of enclosures (cabinets) or frames as protective conductors
IEC 60204-1:2005/A1:2008 and JIS B 9960-1:2008/A1:2011 (Safety of Machinery Electrical
Equipment of Machines Part 1: General Requirements) 8.2.3
IEC 60364-5-54:2011 and JIS C 60364-5-54:2006 (Electrical installations of buildings Part 5-54:
Selection and erection of electrical equipment Earthing arrangements, protective conductors and
protective bonding conductors) 543.2.2, 543.2.3;
NFPA 79:2012 (Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery) 12.2.1 Conductor Material

- 21 -

3.INSTALLATION

3.4.3

B-64603EN/01

Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit

Continuity between the control units and a 0 V terminals


CAUTION
In each control unit, the 0 V and ground terminals are electrically connected to
each other. So, do not connect any external units 0 V connected to the control
units 0 V to any other lines grounding electrode that can have an electrical
potential different from that of the grounding electrode connected to the control
unit.

Machine
Control unit

I/O module

DOCOM

Power magnetics cabinet

Control
signal

+24V
Output
signal

24 VDC
output
power
Relay
0V

0V

0V
Machine-side main ground terminal (main ground bus)
Other ground terminal

Other grounding electrode

Grounding electrode

Fig. 3.4.3 (a) Undesired example of using other ground terminal

- 22 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

Connecting the ground terminal of an LCD-mounted type control unit


Connect the 0 V line in the control unit to the cabinets metal plate or signal system ground bar nearby via
the protective ground terminal (see below).
Rear view

Side view

Protective
ground terminal
M4 stud)

Electric wire
2
(2 mm or
thicker)
Protective ground
tap on cabinets
metal plate
Signal system ground bar
Multiple-point grounding
Single-point grounding

Fig. 3.4.3 (b) Ground terminal connection

3.4.4

Separating Signal Lines

The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the following table. Process the
cables in each group as described in the action column.
Table 3.4.4 Cable grouping
Group
A

Signal line

Action

Primary AC power line


Secondary AC power line
AC/DC power lines (containing the power lines
for the servo and spindle motors)
AC/DC solenoid
AC/DC relay

- 23 -

Bind the cables in group A separately (Note 1) from


groups B and C, or cover group A with an
electromagnetic shield (Note 2).
See Subsection 3.4.5 and connect spark killers or
diodes with the solenoid and relay.

3.INSTALLATION
Group
B

B-64603EN/01

Signal line

Action

DC solenoid (24 VDC)


DC relay (24 VDC)
DI/DO cable between the I/O unit and power
magnetics cabinet
DI/DO cable between the I/O unit and machine
24 VDC input power cables connected to the
control unit and its peripherals
I/O Link i cable
Cable for the position coder
Cable for the manual pulse generator

Connect diodes with the DC solenoid and relay.


Bind the cables in group B separately from group A,
or cover group B with an electromagnetic shield.
Separate group B as far from group C as possible.
It is desirable to apply shield processing described in
Subsection 3.4.6.
Bind the cables in group C separately from group A,
or cover group C with an electromagnetic shield.
Separate group C as far from group B as possible.
Be sure to perform shield processing as described in
Subsection 3.4.6.

(Note 3)

Cable for the MDI


RS232C interface cable
Cable for the battery
Cable for the Ethernet
Other cables for which shield processing is
specified

NOTE
1 Binding the cables in one group separately from another means that the groups
are placed 10 cm or more apart from one another.
2 Covering a group with an electromagnetic shield means that shielding is provided
between groups with grounded steel plates.
3 The shield is not required when the cable for the MDI is no more than 50 cm in
length.
Cabinet

24VDC
power
supply

Spindle
amplifier

Pendant box

Servo
amplifier

Control
unit

I/O
Unit
Duct

Shielding
plate

To motor
and the like

Cable of group A

Cable of group B, C

Section of duct

Group A

Group B, C
Shielding plate

Fig. 3.4.4 Cable layout example

- 24 -

Unit
receiving
AC
voltage

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

3.4.5

Noise Suppressor

Actuators, such as solenoids and relays, used in power magnetics cabinets need a noise suppressor.
Because an actuator, which converts electrical energy to mechanical action, is an inductive load, it
resonates with the parasitic capacitance in a circuit containing it, when it works on and off, thus
generating intermittent arcs accompanied by abrupt voltage rises and falls at its contacts, hence
electromagnetic waves interfering with electronics circuits. As a remediation measure, treat the inductive
load as described below.
1) While referencing the processing for cable groups A and B described in Subsection 3.4.4,
Separating Signal Lines, apply a CR snubber circuit and a diode, respectively, to an inductive load
in an AC circuit and that in a DC circuit.
2) When selecting a CR snubber or diode, observe the following cautions.

Cautions for selecting and using a CR snubber

Use a CR snubber in an AC circuit.


A varistor, voltage clamping element, can limit the peak of an oscillating voltage waveform but
cannot relax an abrupt voltage transition . For this reason, we recommend using a CR snubber rather
than the varistor.
Determine the rating of the resistor and capacitor in the CR snubber according to the steady-state
current I (A) and DC resistance RL () of the inductive load as follows:
1) CR snubber resistance: R RL()
2)

2
2
CR snubber capacitance: I C I (F)
10

20

Place the CR snubber close to the inductive load to minimize its wiring.

Inductive load (such as relay)

CR snubber

M
3

General-purpose induction motor

Fig. 3.4.5 (a) Example of applying a CR snubber

Cautions for selecting and using a diode

A diode (freewheeling diode) can be used as a noise suppressor for a DC driver circuit.
Determine the ratings of the diode according to the drive voltage and current for the inductive load
(such as a solenoid coil, relay, or motor) as follows:
1) Voltage rating: Approximately twice the voltage applied to the inductive load
2) Current rating: Approximately twice the steady-state current flowing through the inductive load

Place the diode close to the inductive load in order to minimize its wiring.
- 25 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

+
Inductive load (such as a relay)

Diode

3.4.5 (b)

3.4.6

Example of applying a diode

Cable Clamp and Shield Processing

Some cables that are drawn into the control unit, servo amplifier, or spindle amplifier need shielding
(basically, every signal line needs shielding). Clamp all these cables in the way shown below. This type
of clamping works for both cable supporting and shielding. Be sure to make clamping because it is quite
important to make system operation stable. Clamping shield correctly can suppress effect from external
noise.
Partially peel the sheath off a cable and expose the shield, and press the exposed portion against the
ground bar with the clamp. Care should be taken so that the ground bar and shield have a surface contact
in a larger area. (See the figure below.)
The machine builder is requested to prepare the ground bar for cable clamping and place it as shown
below.
When the multipoint grounding scheme is used, care should be taken so that the ground bar for the shield
clamp and cabinet are connected at low impedance by, for example, preventing the cabinet side contact
surface from being coated.
When using an in-line connector or the like to split a cable, it is necessary to connect the shield of one
portion of the cable and that of the other portion and to keep the total impedance of the two cable portions
from becoming high. Even if the connector is placed at the inlet of the cabinet, it is also necessary to use
the shield for the intra-cabinet portion of the cable all the way to the other end of the cable.
Ground bar for shield clamp
Cable

40 mm to 80 mm

Metal fittings
for clamp

Fig. 3.4.6 (a) Cable clamp (1)

- 26 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
1 Select a cable with a proper length.
2 If the cable is too long, the noise immunity may be reduced or noise may be
caused on other cables. In addition, when the excess length is coiled, the
inductance is increased and a high voltage is induced during turning on or off of
signals. This may cause a failure or a malfunction due to noise.
3 Bundle and clamp the shields of cables that lead into the control unit or amplifier
at a point, respectively, close to the unit or amplifier.

Control unit

Cabinet

Ground bar for shield clamp


Metal fittings for clamp
Shield

Fig. 3.4.6 (b) Cable clamp (2)

Prepare a ground bar for cable clamping shown below.

Ground terminal
(grounded)

Hole for securing metal


fitting clamp
Mount screw hole

Fig. 3.4.6 (c) Ground bar for shield clamp (outline drawing)

- 27 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

The ground bar for cable clamping must be made of a steel plate at least 2 mm thick and plated with
nickel.
Ground bar for shield clamp

12

20

(Unit: mm)

Fig. 3.4.6 (d) Ground bar for shield clamp (hole arrangement and dimension drawing)
Max. 60
Reference)

28

17
(Unit: mm)

Fig. 3.4.6 (e) Clamping metal fixture (outline drawing)

Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp


A02B-0303-K001 (8 pieces)

3.4.7

Lightning Surge Absorber Installation

It is recommended to install a surge absorber between input power lines and between input power lines
and the ground in order to protect equipment from thunderbolt-caused voltage surges. However, installing
a surge absorber does not always ensure protection from lightning surges.
For recommended lightning surge absorbers, refer to your respective servo amplifier descriptions.

Installation procedure
The surge-absorbing elements used for measures against surges due to lightening must be installed in the
input power unit as shown in the figure below. The figure below shows an example in which an
insulating transformer, shown by dotted lines, is not installed. If an insulating transformer is installed,
surge-absorbing element 2 (between line and ground) is not required.

- 28 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

To control power input for control unit


24 VDC power and control power
supply input of Power Supply for
servo amplifier

Circuit
breaker

(MCCB)
R
AC
input S
T

Circuit
breaker
(MCCB)

Insulating
transformer

Circuit
breaker

Magnetic
contactor

AC
reactor

(MCCB)

PE

Circuit
breaker

(5A,MCCB)

To main circuit
power input of
Power Supply for
servo amplifier

To other electric parts on the machine

b
Surge-absorbing element 1
(between lines)

Surge-absorbing element 2
(between line and ground)

Fig. 3.4.7 Example of installing lightning surge absorbers on 200 VAC lines

CAUTION
1 For a better surge absorbing effect, the wiring shown by heavy line must be as
short as possible.
Wire size : Cross-sectional area at least 2 mm2 large
Wire length: The sum of the length (a) of the wire for the connection of
surge-absorbing element 1 and that (b) of surge-absorbing element
2 must be 2 m or less.
2 If conducting dielectric strength tests by applying overvoltages (1000 VAC and
1500 VAC) to the power line, remove surge-absorbing element 2. Otherwise, the
overvoltages would activate the element.
3 The circuit breaker (5A) is a short circuit protection of lines if the surge-absorbing
elements result in short circuit breakdown due to the absorption of an excessive
amount of energy.
NOTE
The circuit breaker (5A) can be used also for other electric parts on the machine
because no current flows through surge-absorbing elements 1 and 2 in the
normal state. The other electric parts on the machine can be the control power
supply of Power Supply for servo unit and the power supply for the fan motor for a
spindle motor.

- 29 -

3.INSTALLATION

3.5

B-64603EN/01

INSTALLING THE CONTROL UNIT


CAUTION
The control unit has a built-in fan motor. Failing to secure a space sufficient to
maintain a satisfactory air flow in the control unit can lead to abnormal heat
generation and faults.

3.5.1

Installing the LCD-mounted Type Control Unit

Air enters the control unit through the bottom and is drawn through the fan motor which is located on the
top of the control unit.
Space

, shown in Fig. 3.5.1, must be provided to ensure unrestricted air flow.

Also, space

cannot be provided, ensure that nothing is


should be provided whenever possible. When space
placed in the immediate vicinity which could obstruct the air flow.
AIR FLOW

AIR FLOW
A

50mm

Rear view

50mm

Fig. 3.5.1

- 30 -

Unit: mm

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

3.6

TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR FASTENING UNITS AND


GROUND TERMINALS

The following table lists the tightening torque for screws and nuts used to fasten the units (except those
having molded mounting parts) explained herein and ground terminals in the units.
Screw and nut diameter

Tightening torque

M3
M4

0.8 to 1.0 Nm
1.6 to 2.0 Nm

The following table lists the tightening torque for screws and nuts used to fasten those units having
molded mounting parts, such as separate detector interface units.
Screw and nut diameter

Tightening torque

M4
M5

1.1 to 1.5 Nm
2.4 to 2.8 Nm

CAUTION
Be sure to observe the rules listed above when tightening screws. If screws are
tightened too weakly or too strongly, it is likely that the unit may drop, break, or
malfunction.
For units having a touch panel in particular, be sure to observe the above rules.
Failing to observe them can cause the touch panel to malfunction.
NOTE
For units having different installation conditions specified herein, observe them
first.

3.7

DUSTPROOF MEASURES FOR CABINETS AND


PENDANT BOXES

When designing and manufacturing cabinets or pendant boxes for housing displays and operators panels,
they are requested to observe the following cautions to make their structures resistant to intrusion of dust,
cutting chips, coolant, organic solvent, and oil mist because these cabinets and pendant boxes are
susceptible to them.
1) The cabinet and pendant box must be of a hermetically sealed structure.
2) Apply packing to the panel mounting surface to which a display and operator's panel are to be
mounted.
3) Make sure that the door packing of the cabinet and pendant box is sealed firmly.
4) For a cabinet or pendant box with a rear cover, apply packing to the mounting surface.
5) Make sure that the cable entrance is sealed with packing, connectors for conduits, etc.
6) Make sure that all other openings are blocked, if any.
7) Pay due consideration to keep the display and operators panel from direct exposure to cutting chips
and coolant; do not let any coolant come into contact with them.
8) Coolant can readily form puddles on the cabinet and pendant box and may drop on the panel surface
of the display and operators panel. Use such a structure that can prevent coolant from forming
puddles on the display and operators panel or dropping on the panel surface.

- 31 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

WARNING
Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level, oil-free coolants
called synthetic, and water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level, in particular,
can largely affect the CNC and peripheral units. Please note that, even if
consideration is taken to protect them from direct exposure to these coolants, the
following trouble is likely to occur.
- Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level
Some coolants containing sulfur or chlorine are at an extremely high activity
level. If such a coolant adheres to the CNC or peripheral units, it reacts
chemically with a material, such as resin, of equipment, possibly leading to
corrosion or deterioration. If it gets in the CNC or a peripheral unit, it corrodes
metals, such as copper and silver, used as component materials, possibly
leading to a defective component.
- Synthetic-type coolants having a high permeability
Some synthetic-type coolants whose lubricating component is, for example,
PAG (polyalkylene glycol) have an extremely high permeability. If such a
coolant is used even in equipment having a high closeness, it can readily flow
into the equipment through, for example, gaskets, or packing. It is likely that, if
the coolant gets in the CNC or a peripheral unit, it may deteriorate the
insulation and damage the components.
- Water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level
Some coolants whose pH is increased using alkanolamine are so strong alkali
that its standard dilution will lead to pH10 or higher. If such a coolant spatters
over the surface of the CNC or peripheral unit, it reacts chemically with a
material, such as resin, possibly leading to corrosion or deterioration.

When making screw holes in packing, be careful not to cut to the edge of the packing. Any extra cut can
let coolant get in the cabinet through the screw hole, causing trouble.

- 32 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

Packing
Screw hole

*) When making screw holes in packing, be careful not to cut to the edge of the packing.

Any extra cut can let coolant


get in the cabinet through the
screw hole.
Packing
Screw hole

Packing for LCD units, MDI units, and machine operators panels
Observe the following rough standards for the thickness and hardness of packing used with LCD units
(included LCD-mounted control units or display units), MDI units, and machine operators panels.
Thickness
Hardness

: 1.4mm(including double-stick tape)


: 8(Asker C)

The following models of packing can be purchased from FANUC. These models are electrically
conductive. When they are used to mount a unit on a cabinet or pendant box, they leave no electrical gap
between the unit and cabinet or pendant box, being effective in electromagnetic wave shielding and EMC
measures.
Ordering information

Use

A02B-0319-K150
A02B-0319-K151
A02B-0323-K302
A02B-0323-K301
A02B-0323-K304
A02B-0323-K310
A02B-0323-K313
A02B-0323-K314
A02B-0323-K315
A02B-0323-K320

For 8.4 LCD/MDI (horizontal)


For 8.4 LCD/MDI (vertical)
For standard MDI unit (ONG) (200x260mm)
For 10.4 LCD unit, for standard MDI unit (ONG vertical type) (220x290mm)
For 15 LCD unit
For standard MDI unit (ONG vertical type) (220x230mm)
For small MDI unit (ONG) (200x140mm)
For standard MDI unit (QWERTY) (160x290mm)
For standard MDI unit (QWERTY type B) (145x400mm)
For main panel of standard machine operators panel or safety machine
operators panel (140x290mm)
For safety machine operators panel type B

A02B-0323-K321

CAUTION
1 We have evaluated the above models of packing for many different coolants.
However, we do not necessarily guarantee that they are resistant to all coolants.
They are not resistant to, for example, coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a
high activation level and water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level.
2 When attaching these models of packing, observe the cautions provided together
with them.
When using packing to install a LCD unit, MDI unit, or machine operators panel in a cabinet or pendant
box, be careful not to pinch the packing between the mounting surface of the cabinet or pendant box and
the brim of the unit being installed.

- 33 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

When attaching packing,

Cabinet, pendant box

be careful not to pinch it.

LCD unit, MDI unit,


standard machine operators
panel

3.8

Packing

LCD PROTECTION COVER

FANUC offers LCD-mounted control units and display units having a protection cover for the LCD
screen and soft keys on their front surface. The protection cover can be purchased also on an unbundling
basis.

CAUTION
Do not install the LCD-mounted control unit and the display unit in such a place
that coolant would directly fall onto the unit. Be sure to attach a protection cover
to the LCD-mounted control unit and the display unit if they will be used in an
environment where it is anticipated that coolant may scatter over them, for
example, an environment with a relatively dense oil mist.

3.9

ATTACHING SCREW CAPS

After mounting any of the LCD-mounted control unit, display unit, MDI unit, and machine operators
panel main panel, which are supposed to be mounted on the front of a cabinet or pendant box using M3
screws, attach screw caps to the screw mounting hole at every corner.

Dent

CAUTION
When attaching screw caps, pay due attention to the dent in them and be careful
not leave any gap. Otherwise, coolant may get in the equipment, causing trouble.

- 34 -

3.INSTALLATION

B-64603EN/01

3.10

INSTALLATION CONDITION FOR UL RECOGNITION

1.

Outline
For UL recognition of the product, installed after due considerations on UL requirements.

2.

Notes on the installation conditions for UL recognition

Set up the LCD-mounted type control unit, display unit and MDI unit on a flat surface of a
Type 1 Enclosure *1.
(*1. Type 1 Enclosure is defined in standard UL 50 as follows.
TYPE 1 - Enclosures constructed for indoor use to provide a degree of protection to
personnel against incidental contact with the enclosed equipment and to provide a degree
of protection against falling dirt.)

Use CNC, Display and MDI unit in Pollution degree 2 *2 environment or cleaner environment,
except for part exposed on the outside of enclosure.
(*2. Pollution degree is a classification according to the amount of pollution and condensation
present in the environment.
"Pollution Degree 2" is defined in the standard UL 508 as follows.
Normally, only nonconductive pollution occurs; however, temporary conductivity caused
by condensation may be expected.)

Maximum surrounding air temperature rating: +60C *3


(*3. This temperature rating is a condition of UL evaluation for recognition. However, for
long-term reliability, the cabinet should be actually designed in accordance with the
maximum operating surrounding air temperature that described in the subsection 3.1.2 in
the connection manual (B-64603EN).)

Power supply unit for this unit must have an isolating device and the DC 24 Volt output must
be isolated from AC mains supply.
(This isolation can be achieved with the use of the isolating DC power supply unit that
complies with UL standard.)
DC 24 Volt power cable needs to be used with 14AWG or 16AWG size conductors.

- 35 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

B-64603EN/01

POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

4.1

24 VDC POWER (INSULATION AC/DC CONVERTOR)

4.1.1

Connecting 24 VDC Power

Prepare a 24 VDC power supply (insulation AC/DC converter) and supply power to the 24 VDC input of
the control unit and peripheral units, such as I/O units.
It is recommended to provide an ON/OFF circuit external to the 24 VDC power supply as shown in Fig.
4.1.1(a) so that it can turn on and off the AC input to the 24 VDC power supply.
It is also recommended to use a separate 24 VDC power supply for any unit whose load fluctuates largely
or which may generate noise, in order to minimize effect of noise and voltage variation to the control unit
or peripheral unit.
Main circuit
breaker

Magnetic AC line
contactor filter

Power supply

SV

Control unit

3-phase
200VAC for
power line

AC input

24 VDC
input for
control

ON/OFF
circuit

24VDC
input

24VDC power
supply

Peripheral unit such


as an I/O unit

24VDC power
supply

24VDC power
supply

Device with large


noise or load
fluctuations

Fig. 4.1.1 (a) Example of recommended 24 VDC power supply connection

- 36 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

B-64603EN/01

CAUTION
When the ON/OFF circuit is provided on the DC side of a 24 VDC power supply,
on-time rush current imposes an extremely heavy burden on the relay contact in
the ON/OFF circuit compared with the time when the ON/OFF circuit is provided
on the AC side. So, it is necessary to select a relay that is highly resistant to rush
current. In general, a relay having a high current rating and being large in size
should be selected.
In the connection shown in Fig. 4.1.1(b), for example, use a separate 24 VDC
power supply if voltage variation due to abrupt changes in the load or rush current
may transiently exceed the rated input voltage range (24 VDC 10%) for the
control unit or peripheral unit.
Example 1

AC input

24VDC power supply

Control unit or
peripheral unit

Unit with
high load
fluctuation

Example 2

AC input

24VDC power supply

Control unit or
peripheral unit

Unit with high


rush current

Fig. 4.1.1 (b) Example of connection with high transient voltage variation

NOTE
Try as much as possible to avoid the configuration shown in Fig. 4.1.1(b) even
when load fluctuation and rush current are low.
In a configuration where two or more units are connected to the same 24 VDC
power supply, the control unit will not be able to start, thus failing to issue an
alarm, if the power supply fails to operate because of a fault in a unit other than
the control unit. For this reason, it is likely that it may take time to locate the fault.
If the 24 VDC power supply for the control unit and peripheral units must be
connected also to another unit because of a limited space in the power magnetics
cabinet, insert a noise filter, example: ZGB2203-01U manufactured by TDK,
before the 24 VDC input for the control unit and peripheral units in order to
prevent noise from the 24 VDC power supply from entering the control unit and
peripheral units after paying due consideration to the voltage variation resulting
from load fluctuation or rush current. In case of using a noise filter, enough
inspect workings of the control unit and peripheral units, because there may be
influenced of another noise by the noise filter.

- 37 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

4.1.2

B-64603EN/01

24 VDC Power Supply Specification

Specifications of recommended 24 VDC power supply:


Output voltage: +24V10% (21.6V to 26.4V)
(In the 24 VDC input for the control unit and peripheral units, ripple voltage and noise are contained. See
Fig. 4.1.2.)
Output current:
The continuous load current of the 24 VDC power supply is higher than or equal to the current used
by the control unit and peripheral units that are connected to the power supply.
(At the maximum temperature inside the power magnetics cabinet in which the power supply is
located. See Subsection 4.1.3.)
Load fluctuations (including rush current):
The output voltage must not go out of the above range due to load fluctuations by external DO and
other factors.
Instantaneous input interruption retention time: 10 ms or more (for -100%), 20 ms or more (for -50%)
Safety standard
UL 60950-1, CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1, EN60950-1 approved
Noise voltage at terminal/electrical field intensity of noise
EN55011/EN55022-B, FCC-B, VCCI-B compliant

NOTE
Safety standard and Noise voltage at terminal/electrical field intensity of noise are
recommended for selecting the 24 VDC power supply on the market.
However, the required standards may be different from above standards by the
machine, an importing country, revision of the standard, or etc, prepare the 24
VDC power supply that is conformed to required standards.

- 38 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

B-64603EN/01
Instantaneous
interruption (-100%)

Timing chart

Instantaneous
interruption (-50%)

10mS

AC input
voltage

20mS

26.4V
Output
voltage
21.6V
Abrupt load change
Output
current
0A

Example of ripple voltage and noise due to switching power supply


26.4V
Noise

In the 24 VDC input for


the control unit and
peripheral units, noise
and ripple voltage must
fall within this range.

Ripple voltage

Noise
21.6V

Fig. 4.1.2 (a) Timing chart

CAUTION
Do not use any power supply circuit, consisting of a capacitor and rectifier circuit,
like one shown in Fig. 4.1.2 (b), because it cannot maintain a voltage of 24 VDC
(the voltage falls to 21.6 V or below in each 24 VDC input for the control unit and
peripheral units) due to instantaneous interruption or voltage variation in the AC
input. Instead, use a voltage regulator.

AC input

Rectifier
circuit
(*)

Control unit
and other units

(*) The rectifier circuit here refers to a diode-based full-wave rectifier circuit or the like.

Fig. 4.1.2 (b) Example of a power supply circuit that cannot maintain 24 VDC

- 39 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

4.1.3

B-64603EN/01

Power Capacity of 24 VDC Power Supplies

The 24 VDC power supply for the control unit and peripheral units must have the power capacity that can
supply current required by them.
Calculate the power capacity required of each 24 VDC power supply according to what control unit and
options are connected to the power supply while referencing Table 4.1.3.

LCD-mounted type
control unit

Option board

Table 4.1.3 Power capacity


Unit
8.4LCD/MDI unit
Option 0 slot
Option 2 slots
10.4LCD unit
Option 0 slot
Option 2 slots
15LCD unit
Option 0 slot
Option 2 slots
Fast Ethernet board
HSSB interface board
PROFIBUS-DP master board
PROFIBUS-DP slave board
DeviceNet master board
DeviceNet slave board
CC-Link remote device station board

MDI units

Power capacity

Remarks

1.4A

Note 1)

1.4A

Note 1)

2.0A

Note 1)

0.1A
0.2A
0.2A
0.1A
0.1A
0.1A
0.1A
0A

NOTE
1 Each power capacity listed above does not include that of option boards.
2 When connecting the RS-232C device which will draw power from the control
unit, add the power capacity that the device requires to the listed power capacity.
3 Limit the total power consumption of memory cards and USB memories to within
2 W.
4 See Chapter 6 for the power capacity of the separate detector interface unit.
5 See Chapter 8 for the power capacity of I/O units.
6 Refer to the PANEL i Connection and Maintenance Manual (B-64223EN) for the
power capacity of the PANEL i.
7 Selecting 24 VDC power supplies impose restrictions besides their power
capacity. Be sure to read also Subsection 4.1.2.
WARNING
If the machine tool of interest has a vertical axis, it is necessary to select a 24
VDC power supply that can hold its output of 24 VDC for a prolonged time even
after the AC input has been interrupted (including power failure and
instantaneous power interruption) in order to keep a possible fall along the
vertical axis within an acceptable range. The control unit deenergizes servo
circuits if its 24 VDC input falls to 21.6 V or below. For this reason, failing to
maintain the 24 VDC input to the control unit for a satisfactory period after the AC
input has been interrupted may lead to a larger amount of fall along the vertical
axis, depending on a peripheral circuit in use, because the servo for the vertical
axis is deenergized before the peripheral circuit detects an AC input interruption
and activates the brake. In general, selecting a 24 VDC power supply having a
power capacity with a wide margin would prolong the hold time of the 24 VDC
output after an AC input interruption.
- 40 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

B-64603EN/01

4.2

TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL


UNIT

4.2.1

Power-on Sequence

Turn on the power to all the units at the same time, or in the following sequence:
1
2
3

Power to the overall machine (AC input)


Servo amplifier control power supply (24VDC)
Power to the slave I/O units connected via the I/O Link i, the separate detector interface unit, and power to the
control unit (24 VDC), power to the separate detector (scale)

The expression the same time here means that the power to the units mentioned in Steps 1 and 2 above
has been turned on at least within 500 ms after the 24 VDC power supply for the control unit mentioned
in Step 3 above has been turned on. The power to each unit mentioned in Step 3 must have been turned on
within a period between 200 ms before the 24 VDC power supply for the control unit is turned on and
500 ms after that time.
Power to the overall machine
Servo amplifier control power
supply

Power to the control unit

ON
OFF

t1

ON
OFF
t2

Power to peripheral units


(including Power Mate i)

t3

ON
OFF

Fig. 4.2.1

t1:-500ms It is meant that the power to the overall machine and the servo amplifier control
power are turned on at least within 500 ms after the control unit power has been
turned on.
t2: 200ms It is meant that the power to peripheral units (including Power Mate i) is turned on
not earlier than 200 ms before the control unit power is turned on.
t3:-500ms It is meant that the power to peripheral units (including Power Mate i) is turned on
not earlier than 500 ms before the control unit power is turned on.

NOTE
Leave each of the memory backup battery (3 VDC) and separate absolute pulse
coder battery (6 VDC) connected regardless of whether the control unit power is
on or off. Removing these batteries with the control unit power turned off can
corrupt parameters and programs in the control unit as well as position data in the
pulse coder.
See Subsection 4.4.1 for explanations about how to replace the memory backup
battery.
See Subsection 4.4.2 for explanations about how to replace the separate
absolute pulse coder battery.

- 41 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

4.2.2

B-64603EN/01

Power-off Sequence

Turn off the power to all the units at the same time, or in the following sequence:
1
2
3

Power to the slave I/O units connected via the I/O Link i, the separate detector interface unit, and power to the
control unit (24 VDC)
Servo amplifier control power supply (24 VDC), power to the separate detector (scale)
Power to the overall machine (AC input)

The expression the same time here means that there is no problem even if the power to the units
mentioned in Steps 5 and 6 above is turned off not earlier than 500 ms before the power to the control unit
mentioned in Step 4 above is turned off. If the power to the units mentioned in Steps 5 and 6 is turned off
earlier, alarm information is left in the control unit. In addition, the power to each peripheral unit
mentioned in Step 4 above must be turned off not earlier than 500 ms before the power to the control unit
is turned off. Otherwise, alarm information is left in the control unit.
ON
Power to peripheral units
(including Power Mate i)

OFF

t4

ON
Power to the control unit
OFF
t4
Servo amplifier control power supply ON
Power to the overall machine
OFF

Fig. 4.2.2

t4:500ms It is meant that the power of interest is turned off not earlier than 500 ms before the
power to the control unit is turned off.

CAUTION
The power to the control unit cannot be turned on or off with peripheral units
supplied with power.
Before turning off the power to the control unit, be sure to turn off the power to the
units (such as slave I/O units connected via the I/O Link i, the I/O Link i, I/O Link i
-equipped i series servo amplifier, Power Mate i, separate detector I/F units,
servo amplifier control power, and separate detectors (scale)) connected to the
control unit.

- 42 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

B-64603EN/01

WARNING
It is impossible for the control side to control motors if the power supply is off or
there is no AC input (including power failure). It is necessary for the machine side
to perform any necessary processing.
If the control unit is used to control a vertical axis, for example, provide the motor
with a brake mechanism to prevent a fall along the vertical axis. The brake should
be controlled in such a way that the motor is clamped when the servo has not be
started or when the motor is not supposed to rotate and unclamped only when it
is supposed to rotate. It is common practice to clamp servo motors when the
servo axes cannot be controlled because of the power supply being off or of a
power failure. Even with this common practice, a fall may occur along a controlled
axis before the relay works. So, it is necessary to examine whether the fall
distance poses any problem.
Power-off:
Before turning off the control unit power, be sure to apply the
brake to clamp the motor.
Power failure: On detecting a power failure, apply the brake quickly.
Turning off the control unit power results in the servo being
deenergized. So, select a 24 VDC power supply that can maintain
its 24 VDC output for a prolonged time after an AC input
interruption.

- 43 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

4.3

B-64603EN/01

CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT

Supply the power to the control unit from a 24 VDC power supply.
Control unit

24VDC power supply

CPD16A or CPD19A
1
2
3

+24V
0V

24VDC stabilized power


24VDC 10%

GND
Cable
CPD16A or CPD19A
Tyco Electronics
1-178288-3 (housing)
1-175218-5 (contact)

Use terminals that match


24VDC power
24 VDC power.
supply
+24V

+24V (1)
0V (2)

0V
FG

Recommended cable: A02B-0124-K830(5m)


(Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the
24VDC power supply side)

4.4

Interconnect 0V and FG, and


ground them.

BATTERIES

A system using this control unit uses batteries in the places listed below. Refer to the FANUC PANEL i
Connection and Maintenance Manual (B-64223EN) for explanations about the batteries used for the
PANEL i. Used batteries must be discarded according to appropriate local ordinances or rules. When
discarding batteries, insulate them by using tape and so forth to prevent the battery terminals from
short-circuiting.
Use

Component connected to battery

Memory backup in the control unit


Preservation of the current position indicated by the separate absolute
pulse coder
Preservation of the current position indicated by the absolute pulse
coder built into the motor

4.4.1

Control unit
Separate detector interface unit
Servo amplifier

Battery for Memory Backup in the Control Unit (3 VDC)

Offset data, and system parameters are stored in SRAM in the control unit. The SRAM power is backed
up with the memory backup batteries held in the control unit.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message "BAT" blinks on the LCD screen and the
battery alarm signal is output to the PMC. Upon the alarm, replace the battery as soon as possible. The
rough standard for the replacement limit is one week. However, how long the battery lasts after the alarm
varies, depending on the system configuration of interest.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no longer be backed up. Turning on the
power to the control unit in this state causes system alarm to occur because the contents of memory are
lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing the battery.
FANUC thus recommends that the battery be replaced periodically, once a year, regardless of whether a
battery alarm is issued.
The following two kinds of batteries can be used.

Lithium battery built into the CNC control unit.

Alkaline dry cell (size D) inserted in an external battery case attached to the control unit.
- 44 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
Before shipped from FANUC, the control unit is equipped with a lithium battery
set as default. With this lithium battery, memory contents can be preserved for
one year.

4.4.1.1

Replacing the lithium battery

For LCD-mounted type control unit


Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B-0323-K102).
(1) Turn on the power to the machine (control unit). After about 30 seconds, turn off the power.
(2) Take out the lithium battery from the rear of the control unit (by holding the latch of the lithium
battery and pulling it up while unlatching the claw held in the case).
Extract the unit while holding this
portion.

(3) Insert a new lithium battery, prepared in advance, into the battery case (by pushing it in until the
claw of the lithium battery fits in the case). Make sure that the claw is latched securely.

Push the unit in until the


claw is latched into the
case.

WARNING
It is likely that the lithium battery may explode unless it is replaced correctly.
Do not use any battery other than the specified one (A02B-0323-K102).

- 45 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

B-64603EN/01

CAUTION
Steps (1) to (3) should be completed within 30 minutes.
Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified
period. Otherwise, the contents of SRAM may be lost.
Before starting battery replacement, save the SRAM contents in a batch. They
can be restored easily even if they are lost.
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (B-64605EN) for explanations about how to
save and restore SRAM contents in a batch.
NOTE
Discard used batteries as industrial waste according to the rules and ordinances
of the country where the machine is installed and of the local government that
has jurisdiction over the location of the machine. When discarding them, insulate
the battery terminals with tape or the like to protect them from short-circuiting.

4.4.1.2

Replacing commercially available alkaline dry cells (size D)

In place of the built-in lithium battery in the control unit, commercially available alkaline dry cells (size
D) can be used by installing a battery case outside the control unit and inserting the dry cells in the case.

How to connect the battery case to the control unit


For the LCD-mounted type control unit, connect the battery cable (A02B-0323-K103) to the battery case
(A02B-0236-C282). For the stand-alone type control unit, use the battery case (A02B-0236-C281), which
comes with the battery cable attached.

Example of connecting the battery case to the control unit (LCD-mounted type)

NOTE
1 The battery cable is engaged with its connector using a simple lock mechanism.
Fasten the cable at a length of 500 mm or smaller measured from the connector
with some slack so that the connector will not be disengaged due to the weight or
tension of the cable.
2 Keep the battery cable away from any possible noise source, such as power
wires.

- 46 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

B-64603EN/01

Battery cable for LCD-mounted type control unit


LCD-mounted type control unit
Battery
B
A

Battery case
1
+
-

2
(M4 terminals)

cable
Battery case
+
-

+ (B1)
- (A1)
Shield
Ground plate
Recommended cable:
Connector kit (CNC side):

Terminal(Battery case side):


Recommended wire:

A02B-0323-K103(14m)
A02B-0323-K107
(CNC side cases, housings and contacts* for 10 cables)
* contact is 1-2069337-1 (TE connectivity)
M4 terminal
#22AWG 2wires, with shield, outside diameter:5mm or less

Battery cable for LCD-mounted type control unit

NOTE
1 In case of assemble this cable, please keep loosening the cable length in the case
and clamp with nylon band etc. as bellow figure in order to prevent tension to the
contacts directly.
2 Special tool provided by
connector manufacture is
Clamp with
Housing
required to assemble this cable.
Nylon
band .
Contact
Keep loosening.
Case
Internal figure of CNC side connector

Replacing the alkaline dry cells (size D)


(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Prepare two new alkaline dry cells (size D).


Turn on the power to the machine (control unit).
Remove the battery case cover.
Replace the batteries, paying careful attention to their orientation.
Replace the battery case cover.

CAUTION
To replace the battery when the power is off, follow the same procedure as that
for the replacement of a lithium battery, described above.
Pay attention to the battery polarity. If a battery is installed with incorrect polarity,
the battery may overheat, blow out, or catch fire

- 47 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

B-64603EN/01

Dry cell 2
Cover

Connection
terminal on the rear

Mounting hole
4
Battery case

4.4.2

Battery for Separate Absolute Pulsecoders (6VDC)

The absolute Pulsecoder uses a battery because it must hold data on absolute positions. When the
voltage of the batteries for absolute Pulsecoders becomes low, alarm 307 or 306 occurs, with the
following indication in the CNC state display at the bottom of the CNC screen.
Alarm 308 (alarm 2 indicating the voltage of the battery becomes low) :
The indication "APC" blinks in reversed display.
Alarm 307 (alarm indicating the voltage of the battery becomes low) :
The indication "APC" blinks in reversed display.
Alarm 306 (battery zero alarm) :
The indication "ALM" blinks in reversed display.
When alarm 307 (alarm indicating the voltage of the battery becomes low) occurs, replace the
battery as soon as possible. In general, the battery should be replaced within one or two weeks,
however, this depends on the number of Pulsecoders used.
When alarm 306 (battery zero alarm) occurs, Pulsecoders are reset to the initial state, in which
absolute positions are not held. Alarm 300 (reference position return request alarm) also occurs,
indicating that reference position return is required.
In general, replace the batteries periodically within the service life listed below.
A06B-6050-K061 or D-size alkaline dry cells (LR20) : Two years (for each six-axis
configuration)
A06B-6073-K001 : Two years (for each three-axis configuration)
A06B-6114-K504 : One year (for each three-axis configuration)

NOTE
The above values indicate the estimated service life of batteries used with
FANUC absolute Pulsecoders. The actual battery service life depends on the
machine configuration based on, for example, detector types. For details, contact
the machine tool builder.

Replacing batteries
To prevent absolute position information in absolute Pulsecoders from being lost, turn on the machine
power before replacing the battery. The replacement procedure is described below.
<1> Ensure that the power to the servo amplifier is turned on.
<2> Ensure that the machine is in the emergency stop state (the motor is inactive).
<3> Ensure that the DC link charge LED of the servo amplifier is off.
<4> Detach the old batteries and attach new ones.

- 48 -

4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

B-64603EN/01

WARNING
The absolute Pulsecoder of each of the i/i S series servo motors and the i S
series servo motors (i S0.4 to i S22) has a built-in backup capacitor. Therefore,
even when the power to the servo amplifier is off and the batteries are replaced,
reference position return is not required if the replacement completes within less
than 10 minutes. Turn the power on and replace the batteries if the replacement
will take 10 minutes or more.
To prevent electric shock, be careful not to touch metal parts in the power
magnetics cabinet when replacing the batteries.
Because the servo amplifier uses a large-capacitance electrolytic capacitor
internally, the servo amplifier remains charged for a while even after the power is
turned off. Before touching the servo amplifier for maintenance or other purposes,
ensure your safety by measuring the residual voltage in the DC link with a tester
and confirming that the charge indication LED (red) is off.
Be sure to replace the batteries with specified ones. Pay attention to the battery
polarity. If a wrong type of battery is used or a battery is installed with incorrect
polarity, the battery may overheat, blow out, or catch fire, or the absolute position
information in the absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.
Ensure that the battery connector is inserted in the correct position.

How to insert batteries into the battery case


Use the following procedure to replace the batteries in the battery case.
<1> Loosen the screws on the battery case and detach the cover.
<2> Replace the batteries in the case (pay attention to the polarity).
<3> Attach the cover to the battery case.
Battery case (with a cover)
A06B-6050-K060

Batteries
Four A06B-6050-K061 batteries or
D-size alkaline dry cells

CAUTION
Four D-size alkaline dry cells (LR20) that are commercially available can be used
as batteries. A set of four A06B-6050-K061 batteries is optionally available from
FANUC.
Replace all the four batteries with new ones. If old and new batteries are mixed,
the absolute position information in the absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.
When connecting batteries, pay due attention to their polarity. If they are
connected in reverse polarity, it is likely that they may get hot, explode, or catch
fire. In addition, it is also likely that information on absolute positions may be lost
from the absolute Pulsecoder.

4.4.3

Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor (6VDC)

The battery for the absolute pulse coder built into the motor is installed in the servo amplifier.
Explanations about how to connect and replace the battery, refer to the maintenance manual for the servo
amplifier in use.
- 49 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5.1

CONNECTION BETWEEN THE LCD-MOUNTED TYPE


CONTROL UNIT AND MDI UNIT

5.1.1

Overview

A MDI is embedded in 8.4 LCD/MDI unit of Basic unit A, therefore it is not necessary to connect the
MDI cable by a machine maker.
Connection of the MDI cable of a control unit without the MDI is described below.

LCD-mounted type control unit


For basic unit A (10.4LCD)

JA2

CK27
MDI cable

MDI unit

- 50 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

5.1.2

Connection with the MDI Unit

For basic unit A (10.4LCD)


MDI unit

Control unit
JA2
FI80-20P

Honda tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.


(including housings)
PCR-E20FA-E20SPF1A+(press-mount
type) or
PCR-E20FS-E20SPF1A+(soldering
type)

Recommended MDI unit


connector
PCR-E20FA(Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S(Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E(FUJITSU COMPONENT)
52622-2011(Molex)

JA2

CK27

SHIELD
Recommended cable specification

GROUNDING PLATE
A02B-0319-K813(45cm)

Recommended wire specification

(#28AWG X 10 pairs, Maximum cable length : 20m)

NOTE
Clamp the cable so that excessive force is not applied due to vibration. However,
shielding and clamping are not required for a cable of up to 50 cm.

- 51 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

For basic unit G (15.4LCD)


Control unit
CK27

Recommended MDI unit


connector
PCR-E20FA(Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S(Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E(FUJITSU
COMPONENT)
52622-2011(Molex)

CK27

A02B-0236-K813(45cm)
A02B-0236-K814(1.5m)
, Maximum cable length : 20m)

NOTE
For MDI cable connector mating on the CA55 side, a simple lock mechanism is
employed. Ensure that a load greater than 1 kg is not applied to the connectors.
Moreover, clamp the cable so that excessive force is not applied due to vibration.
However, shielding and clamping are not required for a cable of up to 50 cm.

- 52 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

5.1.3

Key Layout of MDI Unit

For Lathe (T series)


-

Standard MDI unit (ONG keys)


Help key

Reset key

Address/numeric keys

Edit keys

Cancel (CAN) key


Case shift key
Input key

Shift key
AUX key
CTRL key

ALT key
TAB key

Page change keys

Cursor keys

Function keys

Small MDI unit (ONG keys)


Address keys/Numeric keys

Cancel (CAN) key


Input key
Function keys

Shift key

Help key
Page change keys
Reset key

Edit keys

Cursor keys

- 53 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

For Machining center (M series)


-

Standard MDI unit (ONG keys)


Help key

Reset key

Address/numeric keys

Edit keys

Cancel (CAN) key


Case shift key
Input key

Shift key
AUX key
CTRL key

ALT key
TAB key

Page change keys

Cursor keys

Function keys

Small MDI unit (ONG keys)


Address/numeric keys

Cancel (CAN) key


Input key
Function keys

Shift key

Help key
Page change keys
Reset key

Edit keys

Cursor keys

- 54 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

Common to lathe system / machining center system


-

Standard MDI unit (QWERTY keys)


Function keys

Help key

Reset key

Address keys
Numeric keys
Case shift key
AUX key
CTRL key
Shift key
ALT key

Input key

TAB key

Page change keys

Edit keys

Cursor keys

Cancel (CAN) key

Standard MDI unit (QWERTY type B keys)


Reset key
Case shift key

Help key

Function keys

Edit keys

Numeric keys

Address keys

CTRL key
ALT key
TAB key

AUX key

Shift key

Cursor keys
Page change keys

5.1.4

Input key
Cancel (CAN) key

Keyboard Cover

Use the keyboard cover when using the system under environments with higher degree of dust or coolant.
Refer Appendix F about how to setting.

WARNING
Use the keyboard cover, when it may become impossible to operate key switch
because the dust, cutting chips, etc. get in the crevice between keyboards.

- 55 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

5.2

CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES

5.2.1

Overview

An input/output device is used to enter information such as control unit programs and parameters from an
external device to the control unit, or to output information from the control unit to an external device.
The input/output devices usable with this control unit include Handy File.
The interface of the input/output devices electrically conforms to RS232-C, so that a connection can be
made with a device that has an RS232-C interface.
The tables below indicate the serial ports of this control unit.
Port name
1CH (JD36A)
2CH (JD36B)

Interface location
Main control unit
Main control unit

Note

The serial ports of the 15 LCD LCD-mounted type control unit are as listed in the table below, however.
Port name
1CH (JD56A)
2CH (JD36A)

Interface location
Main control unit
Main control unit

Note

NOTE
When a touch panel is used, this serial port is used for touch panel
communication on the control unit side, so that this port cannot be used as a
general-purpose port.

5.2.2

Connecting I/O Devices

R232C-1
JD36A

R232C-2
JD36B

Punch panel

This figure shows an


example of connection
for the LCD-mounted
type control unit.
External I/O device

- 56 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
This interface is the RS232-C interface on the control unit side.
For these devices, the RS232-C interface on the control unit is used for the
following cases:
Ladder monitoring, storing, or loading using FANUC LADDER III
DNC operation via RS232-C, external I/O device control
Input/output of parameters and programs by using the control unit screen
display function

5.2.3

RS232-C Serial Port


Control unit
Relay connector
(DBM-25S)

JD56A, JD36A
FI80-20P, DF1R020WB1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

RD
0V
DR
0V
CS
0V
CD
0V
(*)
+24V

11 SD
12 0V
13 ER
14 0V
15 RS
16 0V
17 (*)
18 (+5V)(*)
19 +24V
20 (+5V)(*)

>

>

<

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
SG
CD

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

ER

+24V

NOTE
1 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal names are not indicated.
2 Pins 18 and 20 (+5V) are provided for touch channel connection.

- 57 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

(FUJITSU COMPONENT)

For LCD-mounted type

For stand-alone type

NOTE
1 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal names are not indicated.

- 58 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

5.2.4

RS232-C Interface Specification

RS232-C Interface signals


Generally signals as follows are used in RS232-C interface.
Control unit
Output

Input

SD (Send data)
RD (Receive data)

RS (Request to Send)
When CS is not used short CS
and RS.
CS (Enable to send)
When DR is not used
short DR and ER.

ER (Ready)

DR (Data set ready)


Always short ER and
CD.

CD (Check data)
SG (Signal ground)
FG (Frame ground)

Fig. 5.3.4 RS232-C interface

Signal description of RS232-C interface


Signal

I/O

SD
RD

Output
Input

Description
Sending data
Receiving data

Start bit

Stop bits

(When ISO code 0 is sent)

RS

Output

CS

Input

DR

Input

ER

Output

CD

Input

SG
FG

Sending
request
Sending
permitted

Data set ready

This signal is set to on when control unit starts sending data and is turned off
when transmission ends.
When both this signal and the DR signal are set, the control unit can send
data. If I/O device processing is delayed by a punching operation, etc.,
control unit data sending can be stopped by turning off this signal after
sending two characters, including the data being sent currently. If this signal
will not be used, make sure to strap this signal circuit to the RS signal circuit.
When I/O device is ready to operate, this signal is set. This signal should
usually be connected to the signal indicating I/O device power supply being
(Note)
on. (ER signal
of I/O device). See Note below.
The control unit transfers data when this signal is set. If the signals turned
off during data transfer, alarm 086 is issued. If the DR signal will not be
used, make sure to strap this signal circuit to the ER signal circuit.
This signal is set when the control unit is ready to operate. External device
should regard the SD signal as being significant when the ER signal is set.

Control unit
ready to
operation
Signal
Since this signal is not used in connections with I/O device, the signal circuit
Condition
must be strapped, inside the connecting cable, to the ER signal circuit.
Signal grounding
Frame grounding

- 59 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
Signal on/off state is defined as follows;
-3V or lower

+3V or higher

OFF
Marking

ON
Spacing

Function
Signal Condition

Transmission Method of RS232-C interface


-

Start-stop

Generally, two transmission methods are available at the serial interface. This control unit uses the
start-stop method.

NOTE
Start-stop method:
With this method, start and stop signals are output before and after each data
bit.
One character in start-stop

b1
Start bit

b2

b3

b4

b5

b6

b7

b8

Data bit
(8 bits including one parity bit)

Stop bits
(2 bits)

Codes

Transmission codes are as follows:


(1) EIA code and Control codes DC1 to DC4.
(2) ISO code and Control codes DC1 to DC4
The connected I/O device must be able to recognize the following control codes, sent from control
unit.
Control code
DC1

Tape reader start

DC2

Tape punch designation

DC3

Tape reader stop

DC4

Tape punch release

NOTE
The listed control codes are used for both EIA and ISO.
In this interface, control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.
(a) Control unit can control I/O device by issuing codes DC1 to DC4.
(b) If processing is delayed at the I/O device (when the control unit outputs data)
(i) External device can temporarily stop control unit data output by using the control unit's
CS signal. Data output stops within two characters including a currently transmitting
character when CS OFF signal is input to control unit. When CS signal is turned on again,
data transmission start.
(ii) If control code DC3 is input to control unit, control unit stops data output within ten
characters. When control code DC1 is input to control unit, control unit starts sending data
again.
(c) When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, the external device must
satisfy the specification shown in Table 5.3.4.
- 60 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

Table 5.3.4
EIA code

ISO code
Character
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
DEL
NUL
BS
HT
LF or NL
CR
SP
%
(
)
+
:
/
.
#
$
&

,
;
<
=
>
?
@

5 4

Character
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
Del
Blank
BS
Tab
CR or
EOB

6 5

Remarks

SP
ER
( 2-4-5 )
( 2-4-7 )
+
-

/
.

?
?

- 61 -

?
?

&

Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
1 When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, the following
items must be noted in Table 5.3.4.
Control out (Comment field start)
Control in (Comment field end)
EIA code

(....................)

Condition 1

ISO code

(.....................)

CR

..

..................

Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3

LF

....................

Condition1 Left parenthesis "("of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 5
when used in the EIA code.
Right parenthesis ")"of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 7
when used in the EIA code.
Condition2 EIA code CR is LF in ISO code.
Condition3 EIA code O is : in ISO code.
2 Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes output from the control unit.
So they need not to be punched on the control unit tape.
(3) Transmission rate (Baud rate)
The transmission rate (Baud rate) is the number of bits transferred per second.
The following baud rates are available depending on the system parameter.
50, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
[Example] Baud rate : 110
When using one start bit and two stop bits (totaling 11 bits per character):
Transmission characters/second= 110/11 =10 characters/second (Max.)
(4) Cable length
The cable length depends on the external device type. Consult with the device manufacturers for
actual connecting cable lengths.
Cable length is as follows by the specification of control unit.
RS232-C Baud rate 4800 or less: Up to 100 m
Baud rate 9600 or less: Up to 50 m

Time chart when the control unit receives data (Read into memory)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

Control unit outputs DC1.


The I/O device starts sending data upon receiving DC1.
Control unit sends DC3 when control unit processing is delayed.
The I/O device stops sending data to control unit after receiving DC3.
The device may send up to 10 characters after receiving DC3. If it sends more than 10 characters,
alarm 087 will occur.
Control unit reissues DC1 upon completing delayed processing.
The I/O device restarts data output upon receiving the DC1 code (the data must be the next data to
the preceding.)
Control unit sends DC3 upon completing data read.
The I/O device stops sending data.

- 62 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

10ms or longer

100ms or longer

ER
(output)
RS (output)
DC1

DC3

DC3

DC1

SD (output)

ER code

RD (input)

DR (input)

CS (input)
Up to 10 characters
1ms or longer

Time chart when the control unit send data (Punch out)
(1) Control unit output DC2.
(2) Control unit outputs punch data in succession.
(3) When data processing is delayed at the I/O device.
(a) Data output stops within two characters including a currently transmitting character when CS
signal is turned off.
When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission starts. (See Fig. 5.3.4 (b))
(b) If control code DC3 is input to control unit, control unit stops data output within ten characters.
When control code DC1 is input to control unit, control unit starts sending data again. (See Fig.
5.3.4 (c))
(4) The control unit starts sending the next data if the CS signal is turned on after the I/O device
completes data processing.
(5) The control unit issues DC4 upon completing data output.
10ms or longer

100ms or longer

ER (output)
RS (output)
DC2

DC4

SD (output)

RD (input)

CS (input)

1ms or longer

Within 2 characters

Fig. 5.3.4 (b)

- 63 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

10ms or longer

100ms or longer

ER (output)
RS (output)
DC2

DC4

SD (output)
DC3

DC1

RD (input)
Within 2 characters
DR (input)

CS (input)
1ms or longer

Fig. 5.3.4 (c)

Connection between RS232-C interface and external device


I/O device side

Control unit side


SD

SD

RD

RD

RS

RS

CS

CS

ER

ER

DR

DR

CD

CD

SG

SG

FG

FG

- 64 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

Use the connection shown in the figure below when the ER and DR signals are not used for
handshaking.
Control unit
side

I/O device side


SD

SD

RD

RD

RS

RS

CS

CS

ER

ER

DR

DR

CD

CD

SG

SG

FG

FG

The cable for connecting the I/O device to the control unit should be connected as shown in the below
diagram.
Serial interface
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
ER
DR

Cable : twist 10 pairs 0.18mm , with shield

- 65 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

5.3

CONNECTING THE HIGH-SPEED SKIP (HDI)

5.3.1

Connecting the High-speed Skip (HDI)


Control unit
JA40
FI80-20P, DF1R020WB1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

HDI0
0V
HDI2
0V
0V
<>
<>
<>
<>
0V

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

HDI1
0V
HDI3
0V
<>
0V
<>
<>
<>
<>

NOTE
1 No connections must be made to the pins with angle brackets (<>) because they
are reserved for expansions.

- 66 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

Cable connections
JA40
HDI0
0V
HDI1
0V
HDI2
0V
HDI3
0V

1
2
11
12
3
4
13
14
6

0V

5 or 10
15
16
17
18
19
20
7
8
9

0V

10
Shield

Ground plate
Recommended cableside connectors
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (FUJITSU COMPONENT)
52622-2011 (Molex Japan)

5.3.2

Input Signal Rules for the High-speed Skip (HDI)

Circuit configuration

Control unit
DRIVER

IiL/IiH

FILTER

VH/VL
SHIELD

Absolute maximum rating


Input voltage range Vin: -3.6V to +13.6V
- 67 -

RECEIVER

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS


Unit

B-64603EN/01

Input characteristics
Symbol
Specification

High level input voltage


Low level input voltage

VH
VL

High level input current

IiH

Low level input current


Input signal pulse duration
Input signal delay or variations

IiL

3.6 to 11.6
0 to 1.0
2 (max)
11 (max)
-8.0 (max)
20 (min)
0.02 (max)

Unit

Remarks

V
V
mA
mA
mA
s
ms

Vin=5V
Vin=10V
Vin=0V

NOTE
1 The plus (+) sign of IiH/IiL represents the direction of flow into the receiver. The
minus (-) sign of IiH/IiL represents the direction of flow out of the receiver.
2 The high-speed skip signal is assumed to be 1 when the input voltage is at the
low level and 0 when it is at the high level.
3 The input level for the control unit receiver is high when the circuit is open. So,
the input level for the external driver must be low.

5.4

LINKING THE ETHERNET INTERFACE


CAUTION
Before attaching or removing cables, power off the control unit main unit, and
confirm that the power is off.
Ask the respective manufacturers for explanations about how to build a network
and about conditions for using units (such as a media converter, hub, transceiver,
and cable) other than the control unit. When installing network cables, exercise
sufficient caution so that the network will not be affected by any noise source.
Electrically separate the network wiring sufficiently from noise sources like motors
and their power lines. Also, ground each unit as required. If the grounding
impedance is high, it may cause trouble in communication. Once the equipment
is installed, conduct communication tests to verify normal operation before
starting actual use of the equipment.
FANUC is not liable to any damage related to trouble arising from any unit other
than the control unit.

5.4.1

Connection to the Ethernet Interface

A hub (line concentrator) is used to connect the control unit to a system. A typical example of connection
is shown below. For the connection of the control unit with the FANUC PANEL i and a commercially
available personal computer using Ethernet, see also Chapter 11.

- 68 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

Control unit

Twisted-pair cable

Max. 100m

HUB
(line concentrator)

NOTE
1 To connect the control unit to the 10BASE-T Ethernet interface, use a hub which
satisfies the following conditions:
- Supports 100BASE-TX.
- Has an auto-negotiation function.
- Supports store-and-forward switching.
2 The cable can be up to 100 m long (for the FANUC- recommended cable for
movable sections, up to 50 m). Do not make the cable longer than necessary.
3 An Ethernet cable needs clamping to make system operation stable. For details
of clamping, see Subsection 3.4.6, Cable Clamp and Shield Processing. The
clamp for grounding the shield of the cable can also fix the cable.

Control unit

Ethernet cable

Clamp

Grounding plate

4 Some of the units (hub, transceiver, etc.) required to build a network are not
dust-proof. They should be enclosed in a dust-proof cabinet. Using them in an
atmosphere with dust or oil mist may lead to a communication error or failure.

Pin arrangement of the Ethernet connector (CD38A, CD38S)


Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5

CD38A, CD38S
Signal name
TX+
TXRX+

- 69 -

Description
Transmit +
Transmit Receive +
Not used
Not used

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5.4.2

B-64603EN/01

Pin No.

Signal name

Description

6
7
8

RX-

Receive Not used


Not used

Specification of Twisted-Pair Cable

Cable connection
The connectors of a cable for connecting between the Ethernet interface (CD38A, CD38S) and the hub
have the pin arrangement shown below.
CD38A,CD38S
1

TX+

TX-

RX+

HUB
RJ-45
modular jack

TX+
TX-

RX+

5
6

1
2

5
RX-

RX-

8
Max. 100m

HUB

CD38A, CD38S

TX+
TXRX+
RX-

TX+
TXRX+
RX-

Shield

NOTE
The cable can be up to 100 m long (for the FANUC- recommended cable for
movable sections, up to 50 m). Do not make the cable longer than necessary.

Cable Wires
Many cables without a shield (UTP cables) are commercially available as twisted pair cables conforming
to 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX. To improve noise immunity in factory automation environments,
however, be sure to use twisted pair cables (STP cables) with a common shield in category 5.

Recommended cable wire (for fixed parts)


Manufacturer
Nissei Electric Co., Ltd.

Specification
F-4PWMWMF

- 70 -

Remark
Single-wire cable

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
No cable recommended for use in fixed sections shall be used in movable
sections.
For movable sections, be sure to use the recommended cables for movable
sections listed below.

Recommended cable wire (for movable sections)


Manufacturer
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
SHINKO ELECTRIC
INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

Specification

Remark

AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F (SB)


FNC-118

Dedicated to FANUC products, with no


connector

Specification

Ordering specifications : A66L-0001-0453

Electrical characteristic : Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3 and 5

Structure
: Common-shield braided cable with drain wire
The conductors of the cable are AWG26 annealed-copper strand wire, with a
sheath 0.8 mm thick and an outer diameter of 6.7 0.3 mm

Fire resistance : UL1581 VW-1

Oil resistance : As per FANUC's internal standard (Equivalent to conventional oil-resistant


electrical cable)

Flex resistance : Million or more bending cycles with a bending radius of 50 mm (U-shaped
bend test)

UL style No.
: AWM2027680/30V/VW-1

NOTE
When using this cable, keep the length between the control unit and hub within
50 m because of its attenuation performance. Be sure to use the
TM21CP-88P(03) connector manufactured by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
About cable assemblies
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. can offer a cable assembly that uses the TM21CP-88P(03) connector made
by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. To get this cable assembly, negotiate directly with the manufacturer on its
specifications (cable length, shipping test, package, etc.).

Connector specification
An 8-pin modular connector called the RJ-45 is used with a twisted-pair cable for Ethernet interfaces. Use
the connector listed below or equivalent.
Manufacturers
model number
Connector used with cable AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB)

- 71 -

TM21CP-88P(03)

Manufacturer
Hirose Electric
Co., Ltd.

Remark
(Note)

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
About TM21CP-88P(03)
Ordering specifications: A63L-0001-0823#P
Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3 and 5
Ask Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. for explanations about how to attach the connector
to a cable. (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. offers the TM21CP-88P(03) Wiring
Procedure Specification (Engineering Specification No. ATAD-E2367) to explain
the related technical information.)

5.4.3

Network Installation

Even when the machine satisfies its grounding requirements, noise from the machine may get on
communication lines depending on the way the machine is installed and its environment, resulting in a
communication error. Separating and isolating the Ethernet backbone cable and PC from the machine can
prevent noise from getting on the communication lines.
An example of connection is shown below.
[Example of connection]

Note 1
HUB

Power supply
for the HUB

PC and backbone cable side


Electrical separation by
connection with
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

STP cable

STP cable

Machine system side


Machine

Machine

Machine

Note 1

Note 1

Note 1

NOTE
1 Ground the PC and backbone cable separately from the machine system.
If this is impossible because there is only one grounding point, use separate
grounding wires for the PC/backbone cable and the machine system up to the
grounding point.
The grounding resistance must not be higher than 100 (class 3 grounding).
The grounding wire must not be thinner than the AC power line conductor, and its
cross-sectional area must not smaller than 5.5 mm2.
2 In some cases, the aforementioned isolation/separation method based on
10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX cannot assure normal communication because of
influence by noise. In such worst environments, use optical fiber media to
completely isolate the machine from the PC.

- 72 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

5.4.4

Ethernet Connector Panel

Ethernet Connector Panel enables user to connect/disconnect Ethernet cable at the front panel of the
cabinet with ease.

Specification
Name

Specification

Ethernet Connector Panel

Ethernet Cable for Connector Panel

A02B-0303-C194
A02B-0303-C195
A02B-0303-C196
A02B-0303-K820
A02B-0303-K821
A02B-0303-K822
A02B-0303-K823

with 1m cable
with 2m cable
with 5m cable
cross cable 1.5m
cross cable 5m
straight cable 1.5m
straight cable 5m

Component
Ethernet Connector Panel

CPD20
Connector for DC24V
power supply

CD51
Connector
for
Ethernet Cable for
Connector Panel
CD38
Connect to CNC

FG
Connect to cabinet
(Crimp terminal M4)

Ethernet Cable for Connector Panel

CD51

Connect to the
PC or HUB

Connect to the Ethernet


Connector Panel

- 73 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

Connection of Ethernet Connector Panel


Ethernet Connector Panel

CNC
CD38x

CD51

TPTX

TPTX

TPRX

CD38

TPTX

TPTX

(0V)

(+24V)

TPRX

TPRX

(+24V)

(0V)

Attached cable

4
5
6

TPRX

CPD20
24V input (*1)

(+24V)

(0V)

3
FG
(*1)When DC24V is used at CD51, CPD20 connect to DC24V power supply. Do not connect when
it is unnecessary.

Cable connection
CD38
CD51

(RJ-45)
TPTX
TPTX
TPRX
TPRX

SHIELD

CPD20
(+24V)

(0V)

- 74 -

TPTX
TPRX
TPRX
(0V)

(+24V)

(+24V)

(0V)

Grounding plate

TPTX

FG

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

Connection of Ethernet Cable for Connector Panel


Ethernet Connector Panel
CD51
1

TPTX

TPTX

(0V)

(+24V)

TPRX

TPRX

Peripherals side
connector

CD51

PC or HUB (line
concentrator)

(+24V)

(0V)

Cable connection

[Cross cable]
CD51
TPTX+
TPTXTPRX+
TPRX(0V)
(+24V)
(+24V)
(0V)

Peripherals
side connector
1

Connector
Frame

TPRX+
TPRX(0V)
(+24V)
(+24V)
(0V)
Connector
Frame

TPTX-

Connector
Frame

SHIELD

Peripherals
side connector

CD51
TPTX-

TPRXTPTX+

[Straight cable]

TPTX+

TPRX+

TPTX+
TPTXTPRX+

SHEILD

Recommended cable side connector


CD51 side: JB5DT08YN121 (Japan Aviation Electronics)
Peripheral side: TMP21P-88P (Hirose Electric)
Recommended cable conductor : A66L-0001-0453
- 75 -

TPRX-

Connector
Frame

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS


-

B-64603EN/01

Maximum cable length: 40m (in case of recommended cable)


Do not make the cable longer than necessary.
Recommended cable specification
[Cross cable]
A02B-0303-K820 (Cable length: 1.5m)
A02B-0303-K821 (Cable length: 5m)
[Straight cable]
A02B-0303-K822 (Cable length: 1.5m)
A02B-0303-K823 (Cable length: 5m)

NOTE
Technical information about connecting wires and the assembly of the connector
is prepared. Refer to this information.
- Japan Aviation Electronics: JB5DT08YN121 Operators Manual (No.
JAHL-50007)
- Hirose Electric: TM21CP-88P(03) Wiring Procedure Specification
(Engineering Specification No.ATAD-E2367)

- 76 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

5.5

USB PORT

The LCD-mounted type control unit have a USB port for a USB memory. Via the USB port, data can be
input to the control unit and output from it.
Refer to the next paragraph for the USB port of basic unit G (15LCD).

USB port (front)

NOTE
1 This USB port is dedicated to a USB memory. Do not connect other USB devices
to the port.
2 It is not guaranteed that every commercially available USB memory can operate
normally. For example, a USB memory with a security function does not operate.
Some commercially available USB memories may not be designed for the use in
an FA environment.
CAUTION
1 While the control unit is accessing the USB memory, do not turn the power to the
control unit off or remove the USB memory.
2 Close the cover of the USB port when no USB memory is inserted.
3 The maximum USB power supply (USB_5V) current is 500 mA in total.

- 77 -

5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B-64603EN/01

Basic unit G (15LCD)


Basic unit G (15 LCD) has two USB ports for a USB memory.
Via the USB port, data can be input to the control unit and output from it.

USB port

USB port (rear side)


1

USB_5V

USB -

USB +

USB_0V

1 2 3 4

NOTE
1 The connected USB cable must not become longer than 5m surely. When using
USB device through the relay cable, confirm the operation enough in the machine
maker.
2 These USB ports are dedicated to a USB memory. Do not connect other USB
devices to the port.
3 It is not guaranteed that every commercially available USB memory can operate
normally. For example, a USB memory with a security function does not operate.
Some commercially available USB memories may not be designed for the use in
an FA environment.
CAUTION
1 While the control unit is accessing the USB memory, do not turn the power to the
control unit off or remove the USB memory.
2 Close the cover of the USB port when no USB memory is inserted in front USB
port.
3 The maximum USB power supply (USB_5V) current on the front and rear sides is
500mA in total.

- 78 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

6.1

OVERVIEW
Control unit

COP10A

Separate
detector interface
unit
Optical fiber cable

Power
supply

Spindle amplifier
Servo amplifier

This figure is an example of connecting to control unit a


LCD-mounted type.

- 79 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

This chapter describes how to connect the control unit to the servo amplifiers, spindle amplifiers, and
separate detector interface units.
The control unit is connected to servo amplifiers, spindle amplifiers, and separate detector interface units
via serial buses using optical fiber cables (called FSSBs below). A FSSB lines can be connected to the
control unit. For the FSSB lines, optical connectors are located on the main board.
Slave units to be connected to the control unit must support the 30i-B series. Slave units include servo
amplifiers, spindle amplifiers, and separate detector interface units.

6.2

Interface to the Amplifiers

Control unit

Main board

Slave unit

Servo amplifier
FSSB line

2)

COP10A

COP10B
Optical fiber cable

COP10A
3)
COP10B

Maximum allowable cable length


1) The total cable length on each line shall satisfy the following
conditions.
2) Between the control unit and 1st slave unit:
- When A66L-6001-0026#~ is used: 50 m
- When A66L-6001-0049#~ is used: 100 m
3) Between slave units: 40 m
Note: Slave units include servo amplifiers, spindle amplifiers, and
separate detector interface units.

COP10A
3)

Spindle amplifier
COP10B
COP10A

Separate detector
interface unit
3)
COP10B
COP10A

<Total cable length on each line>


Control mode Maximum total cable length
HRV2
HRV3

500m
200m

- 80 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

<Optical fiber cable types>


Usage

Cable drawing number

For internal
connection

A02B-0236-K851 to -K856 and


-K860 to K862
(A66L-6001-0023#~)
A66L-6001-0026#~
A66L-6001-0049#~

For external
connection

6.2.1

Cable length
Length of 10 m or less

Length of 50 m or less (40 m or less between slave units)


Length of 100 m or less (40 m or less between slave units)

Number of Units That Can Be Connected

The maximum total number of servo and spindle axes is the table below.

Without
loader control

1path
system
2path
system

With
loader control

1path
system
2path
system

maximum total control axes (Note)


maximum feed axes
maximum spindle axes
maximum total control axes (Note)
maximum feed axes
maximum spindle axes
maximum total control axes with loader
(Note)
maximum total control axes with loader
(Note)
maximum total connection axes of servo
motor with loader

FS0i-TF

FS0i-MF

9 (Note)
7 (Note)
3
11 (Note)
9 (Note)
4
15(HRV2)
13(HRV3)
16(HRV2)
14(HRV3)
12(HRV2)
10(HRV3)

9 (Note)
7 (Note)
2
11 (Note)
9 (Note)
4
14(HRV2)
12(HRV3)
16(HRV2)
14(HRV3)
12(HRV2)
10(HRV3)

NOTE
No count Cs axis and virtual axis for number of feed axes.
Maximum total control axes are number of axes with feed axes and spindle axes.

- 81 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

6.3

SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE

6.3.1

Overview
Separate detector interface
unit
Basic unit

Additional unit

Digital output
Linear encoder or rotary encoder

Control unit or the


previous-stage servo
amplifier or spindle amplifier
Optical fiber cable

Separate detector interface


unit
Basic unit
Optical fiber cable

Digital output
Linear encoder or rotary encoder

When a separate detector such as a separate rotary encoder or linear encoder is used, a separate detector
interface unit is required. The separate detector interface unit is connected through an optical fiber cable
as an unit on an FSSB line.
A separate detector interface unit consists of a separate detector I/F unit for basic four axes (called a basic
unit below) and a separate detector I/F unit for additional four axes (called an additional unit below) (the
additional unit may not be provided). The basic and additional units are connected through a flat cable.
Up to four separate detectors can be connected for each of the basic and additional units. A separate
detector refers to a detector that outputs A and B rectangular waveforms (parallel) or a FANUC serial
interface output detector (serial).
The maximum number of separate detector interface units that can be connected to an FSSB line is
description below.
4 for HRV2, 2 for HRV3, and 1 for HRV4 regardless of the control unit model and software series type.
Therefore, for HRV2, up to 32 separate detectors can be connected for each line.
In case of 5 servo motors connected in HRV3, separate detector interface unit can to connect max three
units. In case from 6 to 10 servo motors connected in HRV3, separate detector interface unit can to
connect max six units. In case of HRV2, separate detector interface unit can to connect max 8 units.
In addition to the digital input type of parallel/serial basic unit as described above, the analog input type
of analog basic unit is also available.
- 82 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

When a basic unit is solely described in this chapter, it refers to a basic unit of the digital input type.

NOTE
1 All units of a separate detector interface unit must support the 30i-B series (Refer
to Item 6.3.3).

6.3.2

Connection Diagram
Control unit

Servo amplifier

Main board
COP10A

Optical fiber cable

COP10B
COP10A

COP10B
COP10A

Spindle amplifier
COP10B
Optical fiber cable

COP10A

Separate detector interface unit (basic unit)

24VDC

COP10B

JF101

Encoder axis 1

COP10A

JF102

Encoder axis 2

CP11A

JF103

Encoder axis 3

JF104
CNF1
Flat cable

JA4A

Encoder axis 4
Battery for separate
absolute Pulsecoder

Separate detector interface unit (additional unit)


CNF2

- 83 -

JF105

Encoder axis 5

JF106

Encoder axis 6

JF107

Encoder axis 7

JF108

Encoder axis 8

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

6.3.3

B-64603EN/01

Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification


Item

Specification

Power supply
capacity
Consumption
power
Ordering
information
Method of
installation

6.3.4

Voltage 24 VDC 10%


Current: 0.9 A (basic unit only), 1.5 A (basic unit + additional unit)
Includes the power to be supplied to the detectors.
9W
(for basic four axes)
14W (for basic four axes + additional four axes)
Basic unit
: A02B-0323-C205 (Separate detector I/F unit for basic four axes)
Additional unit
: A02B-0323-C204 (Separate detector I/F unit for additional four axes)
Analog basic unit : A06B-6061-C202 (Analog input separate detector I/F unit for basic four axes)
An interface unit can be installed by using screws or a DIN rail.

Connection of Power Supply

Power to the separate detector interface unit should be supplied from an external 24 V DC power supply.
An additional unit is powered by a basic unit.
Separate detector interface unit
(basic unit or analog basic unit)

External power supply

CP11A
1
2
3

24 VDC regulated power


supply
24 VDC 10%

+24V
0V
GND

Cable
CP11A
Tyco Electronics
1-178288-3 (housing)
1-175218-5 (contact)

Use a terminal available with the


24 VDC power supply.
External power supply
+24V

+24V (1)
0V (2)

0V
FG

Make a jumper between 0 V


Cable material
: AWG20-16
and FG to connect ground.
Recommended cable : A02B-0124-K830(5m)
(Crimp terminal of size M3 is available
on the external power supply side)

The 24 VDC input to CP11A can be output at CP11B for use in branching. A cable with the same
specifications as for CP11A can be connected to connector CP11B. In this case, the power supplied to
CP11A should be equal to the sum of the rating of the separate detector interface unit and that of the units
after CP11B. A current of up to 1.5 A can be supplied via CP11A.
Be sure to ground the 0-V line of the power supply to the separate detector interface unit. In addition,
keep any noise source (such as an AC power cable and contactor) away from the power line of the
separate detector interface unit as far as possible to prevent noise from being picked up through the power
line.
For all units of the separate detector interface unit, secure the ground line to the ground terminal (GND)
for signals, which is located at the bottom of each unit, with an M3 screw as shown in the figure below.
Connect the ground line to the ground plate of the cabinet.
- 84 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

GND

To ground plate of cabinet

NOTE
The torque with which a screw is tightened is 0.5 Nm or less.

- 85 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

6.3.5

Separate Detector Interface (Digital Input)

6.3.5.1

FANUC serial interface


Separate detector interface unit
(Basic unit or additional unit)

Separate detector

JF101 to JF108
(PCR-EV20MDT)
1

SD

11

SD

12

0V

13
14

0V

3
4
5

REQ

15

6
7

REQ 16
(+6V) 17

0V

18

+5V

+5V

19
20

10

The +6V signal is provided for absolute


position detectors that require battery backup.

+5V

Cable connection

SD
SD
REQ
REQ
(+6V)
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V

SD

SD

REQ

REQ

(+6V)

18,9

+5V

20

+5V

12

0V

14

0V

16

Shielded drain wire


Shield
Ground plate

FG

(Frame
ground)

Recommended cable:
A66L-0001-0286(#20AWG6+#24AWG3-pair)
Recommended connectors:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (FUJITSU COMPONENT)
52622-2011 (Molex)
FI40B-2015S (Hirose Electric)

NOTE
1 The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to the detectors. The supply
current per detector is 0.35 A maximum.
The lower limit of the 5V signals is 4.95 V for the basic unit or 4.9 V for the
additional unit. Determine the specifications and length of the cable to be used so
that the specification of the detector is not exceeded.
- 86 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
2 Ask the manufacturer of each detector whether it supports the FANUC serial
interface.

6.3.5.2

Parallel interface
Separate detector interface unit
Separate detector

(Basic unit or additional unit)


JF101 to JF108
(PCR-EV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

PCA
PCA
PCB
PCB
PCZ
PCZ
(+6V)
(REQ)
+5V

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

0V
0V
0V
+5V
+5V

The +6V and REQ signals are provided for


absolute position detectors that require
battery backup.

Cable connection

PCA
PCA
PCB
PCB
PCZ
PCZ
(+6V)
(REQ)
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V

PCA

PCA
PCB

3
4
5

PCB
PCZ

PCZ
(+6V)

7
8

(REQ)

+5V

18

+5V

20

+5V

12

0V

14

0V
Shielded drain wire

16

0V
Shield
Ground plate

Recommended cable:
A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG6 + #24AWG3-pair)

Recommended connectors:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (FUJITSU COMPONENT)
52622-2011 (Molex)
FI40B-2015S (Hirose Electric)

- 87 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to the detectors. The supply
current per detector is 0.35 A maximum.
The lower limit of the 5V signals is 4.95 V for the basic unit or 4.9 V for the
additional unit. Determine the specifications and length of the cable to be used so
that the specification of the detector is not exceeded.

6.3.5.3

Input Signal Requirements (Parallel interface)

The feedback signals from the separate detectors connected via the parallel interface are defined as
follows:
(1) A and B phase signal input
This is a method to input position information by the mutual 90 degree phase slip of A and B phase
signals.
Detection of the position is performed with the state in which the B phase is leading taken as a shift
in the plus direction, and the state in which the A phase is leading as a shift in the minus direction.
A phase signal
Shift in plus direction
B phase signal
A phase signal
Shift in minus direction
B phase signal

(2) Phase difference and minimum repeat frequency


A
PCA/*PCA
0.5V
*PCA/PCA
B
PCB/*PCB
0.5V
*PCB/PCB
Td

Td

Td

Td
Tp

(3) Z phase signal input


*PCZ
0.5V
PCZ
Tw
Z

- 88 -

TOFF

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

Time requirements
Requirements for the signals at the input pins of input connectors JF101 to JF108. The signals for these
connectors are differential input signals with A and B phases. An important factor is time Td from point
A, when the potential difference between PCA and *PCA exceeds 0.5V, to point B, when the potential
difference between PCB and *PCB becomes lower than 0.5V. The minimum value of Td is 0.15 s. The
period and pulse width of the signals must be long enough to satisfy the above requirements.
The Z phase signals are also differential signals. There are the following requirements for the time from
when the potential difference between PCZ and *PCZ exceeds 0.5 V to when it becomes lower than 0.5
V:
Tw 1/4 frequency of the A or B phase signals
TOFF > 1.5 msec

Input voltage requirements


The voltage of the A and B phase signals must meet the following requirements:
High level: 2.4 V or more
Low level: 0.8 V or less

Receiver circuit
5V

5V

620

560
PCZ

PCA
A phase
signal

110

Z phase
signal

120
*PCZ

*PCA

620
The same circuit is used for the
B-phase signals (PCB and *PCB)

0V

Rotation directions of a servo motor and separate Pulsecoder


If a separate Pulsecoder rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of servo motor rotation when the
servo motor is rotating, the connection of the feedback cable from the separate Pulsecoder must be
changed as follows:
(1) Exchange signal PCA with signal PCB.
(2) Exchange signal *PCA with signal *PCB.
The rotation direction can also be changed using a parameter.
For details, refer to the servo parameter manual.

- 89 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

6.3.6

B-64603EN/01

Overview of the Analog Basic Unit


Separate detector interface
unit
Analog
basic unit

Additional unit

Digital output
Linear encoder or rotary encoder

Control unit or the


previous-stage servo
amplifier or spindle amplifier

Analog 1Vp-p output


Linear encoder or rotary encoder

Optical fiber cable

To use a separate detector with an analog output of 1 Vp-p requires an analog basic unit, which is a basic
unit of the analog input type. The analog basic unit is connected as a unit on the FSSB line via an optical
fiber cable.
Up to four separate detectors with an analog output of 1 Vp-p can be connected to an analog basic unit.
Four separate detectors with digital output can be connected to the additional unit regardless of whether
an analog or digital basic unit is used.

NOTE
1 All units of a separate detector interface unit must support the 30i-B series (Refer
to Item 6.3.3).
2 No 1-Vp-p output detector can be connected to additional units.

- 90 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

6.3.7

Connection Diagrams of an Analog Basic Unit

(1) When encoders with an analog output of 1 Vp-p are connected to the 1st to 4th axes
Control unit

Servo amplifier

Main board
Optical fiber cable

COP10A

COP10B
COP10A

COP10B
COP10A
Spindle amplifier
COP10B
Optical fiber cable

COP10A

Separate detector interface unit (analog basic unit)

24VDC

COP10B
COP10A

JF111

1Vp-p output encoder for 1st axis

JF112

1Vp-p output encoder for 2nd axis

CP11A

JF113

1Vp-p output encoder for 3rd axis

JF114

1Vp-p output encoder for 4th axis

CNF1

JA4A

(2) When encoders with an analog output of 1 Vp-p are connected to the 5th to 8th axes
Optical fiber cable
Separate detector interface unit (analog basic unit)

Optical fiber cable


24VDC

COP10B
COP10A

JF111

1Vp-p output encoder for 1st axis

JF112

1Vp-p output encoder for 2nd axis

CP11A

JF113

1Vp-p output encoder for 3rd axis

JF114

1Vp-p output encoder for 4th axis

CNF1

JA4A

Separate detector interface unit (analog basic unit)


COP10B
COP10A

JF111

1Vp-p output encoder for 5th axis

JF112

1Vp-p output encoder for 6th axis

CP11A

JF113

1Vp-p output encoder for 7th axis

JF114

1Vp-p output encoder for 8th axis

CNF1

JA4A

- 91 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

(3) When encoders with an analog output of 1 Vp-p are connected to the 1st to 4th axes and digital
output encoders are connected to the 1st to 4th axes
Optical fiber cable
Separate detector interface unit (analog basic unit)

24VDC

COP10B
COP10A

JF111

1Vp-p output encoder for 1st axis

JF112

1Vp-p output encoder for 2nd axis

CP11A

JF113

1Vp-p output encoder for 3rd axis

JF114

1Vp-p output encoder for 4th axis

CNF1

JA4A

Battery for separate absolute


Pulsecoder (for additional unit (Note))

Flat cable
Separate detector interface unit (additional unit)
CNF2

JF105

Digital output encoder for 1st axis

JF106

Digital output encoder for 2nd axis

JF107

Digital output encoder for 3rd axis

JF108

Digital output encoder for 4th axis

(4) When encoders with an analog output of 1 Vp-p are connected to the 1st to 4th axes and digital
output encoders are connected to the 5th to 8th axes
Optical fiber cable
Separate detector interface unit (analog basic unit)

Optical fiber cable


24VDC

COP10B
COP10A

JF111

1Vp-p output encoder for 1st axis

JF112

1Vp-p output encoder for 2nd axis

CP11A

JF113

1Vp-p output encoder for 3rd axis

JF114

1Vp-p output encoder for 4th axis

CNF1

JA4A

Separate detector interface unit (basic unit)

24VDC

COP10B
COP10A

JF101
JF102

Digital output encoder for 1st axis


Digital output encoder for 2nd axis

CP11A

JF103

Digital output encoder for 3rd axis

JF104

Digital output encoder for 4th axis

CNF1

JA4A

Battery for separate absolute


Pulsecoder

Flat cable

Separate detector interface unit (additional unit)


CNF2

JF105
JF106

Digital output encoder for 5th axis


Digital output encoder for 6th axis

JF107

Digital output encoder for 7th axis

JF108

Digital output encoder for 8th axis

NOTE
When a separate absolute position detector that requires battery backup is
connected to an additional unit, a battery case for the separate absolute pulse
coder must be connected to JA4A on the analog basic unit. The battery voltage is
supplied to the additional unit via the flat cable.

- 92 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

6.3.8

Separate Detector Interface (Analog Input)

6.3.8.1

Analog 1Vp-p Interface


Separate detector interface unit
(Analog basic unit)

Analog 1Vp-p output encode

JF111JF114
(PCR-EV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11 NC(ADIF)
12
0V
13 NC(BDIF)
14
0V
15 NC(T0)
16
0V
17
18 +5V
19 NC(PZ)
20 +5V

A
XA
B
XB
Z
XZ

+5V

Leave NC (No Connection) open.

Cable connection

A
XA
B
XB
Z
XZ
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V

XA

XB

XZ

+5V

18

+5V

20

+5V

12

0V

14
16

0V
Shielded drain wire
Shield

FG
(Frame
ground)

Ground plate
Recommended cable:
A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3-pair)
Recommended connectors:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (FUJITSU COMPONENT)
52622-2011 (Molex)
FI40B-2015S (Hirose Electric)

NOTE
The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to the detectors. The supply
current per detector is 0.35 A maximum.
The lower limit of the 5V signals is 4.95 V for the basic unit or 4.9 V for the
additional unit. Determine the specifications and length of the cable to be used so
that the specification of the detector is not exceeded.

- 93 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

6.3.8.2

B-64603EN/01

Input signal requirements (analog 1Vp-p interface)

A/B (Type I)
VB

a/2

VXA,VXB

TZ,LZ

VA

a/2

c/2

VXZ
VOA,VOB

VOZ

0V

Effective
component c

c/2

VZ
0V

A/B (Type II)


VB
VA

b/2
b
b/2

VXA
VXB

VOA,VOXA
VOB,VOXB

0V

Item
Amplitude (phase A/B)

Amplitude (phase Z)
Center value
(DC level)
Offset voltage
(phase A/B)
Offset voltage (phase Z)
Pulse width of phase Z
Length of phase Z
Input impedance
Input frequency

Symbol
Type I a of phase A and phase B
Type II Sum of b of phase A and b
of phase XA Sum of b of phase B
and b of phase XB
Sum of c of Z and c of XZ (analog
signal)
Type I VOA,VXA ,VOB,VXB
Type II VOA,VOXA ,VOB,VOXB
VOZ,VOXZ
Type I VOA-VXA , VOB-VXB
Type II VOA-VOXA , VOB-VOXB
VOZ-VOXZ
TZ
LZ

Min.
spec.

Standard
spec.

Max.
spec.

0.6

1.0

1.5

0.2

0.4

2.0

2.5

3.0

-0.1

+0.1

-0.05
600
1/4
100
-

0
120
-

+0.05
140
200

V
nSec
Pitch of A (or B)

kHz

The detection precision depends on the precision of signals from the encoder.

- 94 -

Unit
VP-P

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

6.3.8.3

Method for checking the encoder signals

The check pin board can be used to observe ADIF (differential amplified signal from A and XA input
signals), BDIF (differential amplified signal from B and XB input signals), T0 (reference voltage), and
PZ (compared digital signal from Z and XZ input signals).
(1) Ordering specifications A06B-6071-K290
Details
A20B-1005-0340
Printed circuit board with check pins
A660-2042-T031#L200R0 200-mm cable
(2) Connection
Connect the check pin board to the cable of which axis you want to observe the signals.
Analog input separate detector interface unit
Check pin board
JF111

1Vp-p output encoder for 1st axis

JF112

1Vp-p output encoder for 2nd axis

JF113

1Vp-p output encoder for 3rd axis

JF114

1Vp-p output encoder for 4th axis

JA4A

(3) Signal output

CN1

Pin number

CN2

Signal name

ADIF

BDIF

T0
PZ
+5V
0V

Remarks
Differential amplified signal from A and XA input signals
ADIF = 2 (XA A)
Differential amplified signal from B and XB input signals
BDIF = 2 (XB B)
Reference voltage 2.5VDC (=1/2Vcc)
Compared digital signal from Z and XZ input signals
Power
Signal ground

- 95 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

6.3.9

B-64603EN/01

Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector


Separate detector interface unit
(Basic unit or analog basic unit)

Battery case for the separate


absolute Pulsecoder

When a separate absolute position detector that requires battery backup is connected, a battery case for
the separate absolute pulse coder must be connected to JA4A on the basic unit (or analog basic unit).
The battery voltage is supplied to the additional unit via the flat cable.
Separate detector interface unit
(Basic unit or analog basic unit)

Battery case for the separate


absolute Pulsecoder

JA4A
(PCR-EV20MDT)
01
02
03 0V
04
05
06
07 +6V
08
09
10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

(M3 terminal)
+
+6V

- 96 -

0V

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

Cable connection
JA4A

+6V
0V

Battery case

7
3

+
-

+6V
0V

Shield
Ground plate
Recommended cable material:
2
0.2mm (7/0.18)
Recommended connectors:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (FUJITSU COMPONENT)
52622-2011 (Molex)

CAUTION
If the cable is connected to JA4A when the separate absolute pulse coder battery
case contains the battery, the battery voltage is applied to the battery power
supply pin (+6V) for each of the feedback connectors (JF105 to JF108). In this
case, if the battery line and 0 V are short-circuited, the battery may heat up or the
protection circuit within the separate detector interface unit may fail. First, make
sure the battery case contains no battery or the cable is not connected to JA4A.
Then, complete all cabling work and confirm cables are correctly connected.
Finally, place the battery or connect the cable to JA4A.

- 97 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

6.3.10

B-64603EN/01

Connection Between the Basic Unit and Additional Unit

A flat cable is used to connect the basic unit (or analog basic unit) and additional unit as shown below.
The flat cable is 100 mm long.

Units viewed from top


Basic unit or analog
basic unit

Additional unit
Mounting
surface

CNF1

CNF2

Marking

mark

mark

Place an order on a flat cable together with separate detector interface units.

6.3.11

Connector Locations

Connector locations on the basic unit

GND

- 98 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

Connector locations on the additional unit

Connector locations on the analog basic unit

GND

For the outside dimensions, see Appendix A, OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS AND
CONNECTORS.

- 99 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

6.3.12
1)

B-64603EN/01

Installation

Notes on installation
(1) Use an interface unit in a completely enclosed cabinet.
(2) Install an interface unit on a vertical surface, and provide a space of 100 mm above and below
the unit. Below an interface unit, do not place equipment that generates a large amount of heat.
(3) When using a basic unit (or analog basic unit) and additional unit, place the units as shown
below so that the flat cable connecting the units does not block the vent holes on the basic unit
(or analog basic unit). A flat cable not longer than 100 mm must be used.
Vent holes

Flat cable

Basic unit or analog


basic unit

2)

Additional unit

Installation using screws


Basic unit or analog
basic unit

Additional unit

When using both a basic unit (or analog basic unit) and additional unit, install the units as shown above,
with the mounting holes horizontally separated by 70 to 80 mm.

- 100 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

6.3.13

Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit

NOTE
Since a screwdriver must be inserted obliquely to install or remove this unit and
heat is radiated from the sides of the unit, sufficient access clearances are
required on both sides of the unit.
As a guideline, if the front of an adjacent unit appears flush with the unit or slightly
set back, allow a clearance of about 20 mm between the unit and the adjacent
unit. If the front of an adjacent unit protrudes beyond the front of the unit, allow a
clearance of about 70 mm between the unit and the adjacent unit. Also, when
installing the unit near a side of the cabinet, allow a clearance of about 70 mm
between the unit and the side of the cabinet.

Access clearance near a separate detector interface unit

- 101 -

6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES

B-64603EN/01

Installing the unit on the DIN rail


Installing the unit on
the DIN rail

DIN rail

Removing the unit


from the DIN rail
DIN rail

Installing the unit:


1. Hook the unit on the top of the DIN rail.
2. Push the unit in until it clicks.
Removing the unit:
1. Push down the lock by using a screwdriver.
2. Remove the unit by pulling the lower end of the unit towards you.

DIN rail
When the unit is
installed on the DIN
rail, do not pull the unit
upward.

CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the lock by applying excessive force to the installed
unit. When installing and removing the unit, hold the upper and lower ends of the
unit so that stress is not applied to the side (surface with the slits) of the unit.
When the unit is installed on the DIN rail, do not pull the unit upward, or the case
may be damaged.
- 102 -

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i


WARNING
An I/O unit may not operate normally due to a control unit, I/O unit, or input power
failure, or communication error. To prevent accidents even in this case, design
the machine to operate safely by making a safety circuit outside the I/O unit.
All DO signals of an I/O unit are designed to be turned off if a system alarm
occurs in the control unit which controls the I/O unit, or if the power to the control
unit or I/O unit is turned off. However, it cannot be guaranteed that DO signals of
the I/O unit will certainly be turned off. Therefore, manage the signals related to
safety by making a safety circuit outside of the I/O unit. The dual check safety
function can be used to detect a single failure in the safety-related section. For
details of the dual check safety function, refer to the FANUC Series
30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Dual Check Safety Connection Manual (B-64483EN-2).

7.1

OVERVIEW

The I/O Link i is a serial interface which connects the control unit, I/O Unit-MODEL A, Power Mate, and
other units and transfers I/O signals (bit data) at high speed between units. In I/O Link i control, this is the
master station and its slave stations. The master is the control unit, and the slaves are other I/O units.
The status of input signals from the slaves is sent to the master at specified intervals. Output signals from
the master are also sent to the slaves at specified intervals.
With the I/O Link i, the communication transfer rate is increased. More signals and slaves (groups) can be
connected.
Specification of the I/O Link i
I/O Link i

Item
2 ms
0.5 ms
2048/2048
512/512
512/512
24 groups
5 groups
1 channel

Transfer cycle
Maximum number of I/O signals (per channel)
Maximum number of I/O signals (per group)
Maximum number of groups (per channel)
Number of channels required for dual check safety

*
*
*

(normal mode)
(high-speed mode)
(normal mode)
(high-speed mode)
(normal mode)
(high-speed mode)

The normal and high-speed modes can be used simultaneously. For the setting of the high-speed
mode, refer to the FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B PMC Programming Manual (B-64513EN).
The transfer cycle means the cycle of DI/DO transfer between the master and slaves. For the actual
delay time, the slave driver and receiver delay times and ladder scan period must be considered.
When dual check safety (safety I/O mode) is used, the maximum number of I/O signals that can be
used is limited to 28 bytes per group. For details, refer to the FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B
PMC Programming Manual (B-64513EN).
The high-speed mode is applied to I/O module for connector panel, I/O module for power magnetics
cabinet and Terminal type I/O module.

It is a total of two channels of I/O Link i interfaces.

- 103 -

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Number of channels available for the I/O Link i


I/O Link i

Item
Number of available channels

7.2

Up to 2

CONNECTION

Interface connector for the I/O Link i JD51A (for two channels) is located on the main board.
In I/O control, there are the master station and its slave stations. The master is the control unit, and the
slaves are other I/O units. The slaves are divided into groups. Up to 24 slave groups can be connected to
one channel with the I/O Link i.
The I/O Link i is connected in different ways depending on the types of units actually used and the
number of I/O signals. Therefore, the assignment and addresses of the I/O signals have been made
programmable with the PMC program. The maximum number of I/O signals available for each channel is
2048/2048 for the I/O Link i.
Up to 2048/2048 signals in total can be used for the entire system.

NOTE
1 The total number of I/O signals that can be used differs depending on the model.
An I/O unit has I/O Link i interface connectors JD1A and JD1B. All units with the I/O Link i function
have these connectors. A cable must always be connected from JD1A to JD1B. Although connector JD1A
on the last unit is not used and left open, it is not necessary to connect JD1A with a terminator.
The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all units with the I/O Link i function.
They are described in Subsection 7.2.1. Fig. 7.2 shows a connection diagram of the I/O Link i.

Control unit
I/O Link i
JD51A

Group 0

JD1B
JD1A
Group 1

JD1B

Group 2

JD1B
Maximum number of groups per channel
I/O Link i (normal mode): 24
I/O Link i (high-speed mode): 5

JD1A

Group n

JD1B

Maximum number of I/O signals per channel


I/O Link i (normal mode): 2048 / 2048
I/O Link i (high-speed mode): 512/512

JD1A

Fig. 7.2 I/O Link i connection diagram

- 104 -

Magnetic circuit

JD1A
Maximum number of I/O signals per group
I/O Link i : 512 / 512

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

The I/O Link i is connected by an electric cable (Subsection 7.2.1) or by an optical fiber cable
(Subsection 7.2.2). When an electric cable is used, the maximum cable length between units is 10 m.
When the cable is laid within the same cabinet(NOTE), however, the maximum length is 15 m. The
maximum cable length between units can be extended to 200 m with optical fiber cables using an optical
adapter.
If any of the following conditions is satisfied, use an optical fiber cable for connecting units:

The cable laid within the same cabinet is longer than 15 m.


The cable is run between different cabinets and is longer than 10 m or the cabinets cannot be
connected with each other via a ground wire of 5.5 mm2 or more.
The cable may be influenced by strong noise.
For example, there is a strong electromagnetic noise source such as a welding machine beside the
cable or a noise generating cable such as a power cable or power magnetic cable runs for a long
distance in parallel with the cable.

NOTE
Different cabinets connected at low impedance by a closed metal duct can be
assumed to be one cabinet.

7.2.1

Connection of I/O Link i by Electric Cable

When an electric cable is used, the maximum cable length between units is 10 m.
When the cable is laid within the same cabinet, however, the maximum length is 15 m.

NOTE
1 The +5 V terminals in parentheses are for supplying the power to an optical
adapter to be used for connection by an optical fiber cable. Do not connect the +5
V terminals when using no optical adapter.
2 Do not connect the pins in brackets. They are used for connecting channels 2
with JD51A.
3 Do not connect any pin for which no signal is assigned.
4 Take sufficient measures against noise. See Section 3.4, Countermeasures
against Noise and Grounding.

- 105 -

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Cable wiring

SIN
*SIN
SOUT
*SOUT
0V
0V
0V
0V

1
2
3
4
11
12
13
14

3
4
1
2
11
12
13
14

SOUT
*SOUT
SIN
*SIN
0V
0V
0V
0V

Shield
Ground plate

Recommended wire material

A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)

Recommended cable connectors

PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)


FCN-247J020-G/E (FUJITSU COMPONENT)
52622-2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)

7.2.2

Connection of FANUC I/O Link i by Optical Fiber Cable

The I/O Link i can be extended to a maximum length of 200 m with optical fiber cables using an optical
adapter. The length of the electric cable connected to the optical adapter must not exceed 2 m (when the
recommended wire material is used).

Connection
Connecting cable
between units

Optical
fiber cable

Connecting cable
between units

Unit

Optical
fiber cable

Connecting cable
between units

Unit
Optical adapter

JD51A/JD1A

Connecting cable
between units

JD1

COPx

Unit

Optical adapter

COPx

JD1

Optical adapter

JD1B

JD1A

JD1

COPx

Optical fiber cable connection: One stage

Optical fiber cable connection: Two stages

- 106 -

Optical adapter

COPx

JD1

JD1B

JD1A

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Connecting cable between units


Unit side

Optical adapter side


,JD51A

[]
[]
[]
[]

[]
[]
[]

[]

Recommended wire material

A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)

Recommended cable connectors PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)


FCN-247J020-G/E (FUJITSU COMPONENT)
52622-2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)

NOTE
1 The length of the cable for connecting units must not exceed 2 m (when the
recommended wire material is used).
2 Do not connect the pins in brackets. They are used for connecting channels 2
with JD51A.
3 Do not connect any pin for which no signal is assigned.

Specifications of optical adapters and optical fiber cables


The following table lists the specifications of the optical adapter for the I/O Link i.
Specifications

A13B-0154-B101

Transfer
mode

Maximum
transmission
distance

Maximum number
of connectable
stages

Relay with an
optical fiber
relay adapter

Normal mode

200m
100m

5
16

None
Up to one point

High-speed
mode

100m

10

Up to one point

Weight

About
100 g

The specifications of the optical fiber cable are A66L-2001-0026#~. For details, see Appendix D.
The specification of the optical fiber relay adapter is A63L-0020-0002. For its external dimensions, see
Appendix D.

- 107 -

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

External dimension of optical adapter


66
4-M3

40

Optical connector
COP23 (for I/O Link i)
COP1 (for I/O Link)

FANUC

18

45

Connector for unit


connecting JD1

Unit: mm

Optical adapter installation conditions


(a) The optical adapter enclosure is not fully sealed; install it with the control unit in the fully enclosed
cabinet.
(b) Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical adapter.
(c) The optical adapter is light, and it may not be necessary to mount it with screws. However, keep it
from coming in contact with other circuits to prevent possible short-circuits. When mounting the
optical adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an L-type fitting using the case fixing screws (M3) of the
optical link adapter.

7.2.3

Connection When Multiple Channels of the I/O Link i is Used

Up to two channels of the I/O Link i interface can be used.


Signals for two channels are assigned to the connector (JD51A) on the main board. When using only
channel 1, see Subsection 7.2.1.
When using the channel 2, use the I/O Link branching adapter for two channels to branch the I/O Link i.

Using the channel 2


When using channel 2, use the 2ch I/O Link signal divider for two channels to branch the I/O Link i.

Connection
Main board

JD51A

2ch I/O Link signal


divider
JD44B

JD1A-1

Channel 1
I/O Link i

JD1A-2

Channel 2
I/O Link i

Connection after the 2ch I/O Link signal divider is the


same as that for the I/O Link i

Specification of the 2ch I/O Link signal divider: A20B-1007-0680 (Weight: 60g)
- 108 -

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Connection between the main board and 2ch I/O Link signal divider
Main board

2ch I/O Link signal divider

(such as PCR-E20MDK-SL-A)

NOTE
1 The +5 V terminals in parentheses are for supplying the power to an optical
adapter to be used for connection by an optical fiber cable. Do not connect the +5
V terminals when using no optical adapter.
2 Do not connect any pin for which no signal is assigned.

Cable connection
2ch I/O Link signal
divider

Main board
JD51A
SIN1
*SIN1
SOUT1
*SOUT1
SIN2
*SIN2
SOUT2
*SOUT2
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
(+5V)
(+5V)
(+5V)

JD44B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
18
20
9

3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
11
12
13
14
15
18
20
9

SOUT1
*SOUT1
SIN1
*SIN1
SOUT2
*SOUT2
SIN2
*SIN2
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
(+5V)
(+5V)
(+5V)

Shield
Ground plate
*

Do not connect the +5 V terminals when using no optical adapter.

Recommended wire material:

A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)

Recommended cable connectors: PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)


FCN-247J020-G/E (FUJITSU COMPONENT)
52622-2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
- 109 -

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Connection between the 2ch I/O Link signal divider and I/O units
The 2ch I/O Link signal divider can be connected to I/O units in the same way as for the I/O Link i.
See Subsection 7.2.1.

Cable length
Main board
JD51A

2ch I/O Link signal divider

I/O Unit

LA
JD44B
LB
JD1A-1

JD1B

JD1A-2

NOTE
The total of LA and LB must not exceed 10 m, where LA is the length of the cable
between connector JD51A on the main board and connector JD44B on the 2ch
I/O Link signal divider, and LB is the length of the cable between connector
JD1A-1 or JD1A-2 on the 2ch I/O Link signal divider and connector JD1B on the
I/O unit. When all cables are laid within the same cabinet, however, a total cable
length of up to 15 m is allowed.

- 110 -

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Installation of the 2ch I/O Link signal divider


Install the 2ch I/O Link signal divider in a hermetically sealed cabinet like the control unit.

External dimensions of the 2ch I/O Link signal divider


60

JD44B

JD1A-1

JD1A-2

34
23

45

85
Unit:mm

Allow a clearance of about 10 cm above the adapter for connection and routing of cables.

Installation of the 2ch I/O Link signal divider


1)

Installation on the DIN rail


The following figure shows the external dimensions of a recommended DIN rail.
35
25

Unit: mm

External dimensions of a recommended DIN rail

2)

Screwing
The following figure shows drilling on the plate.

11.6

2-M4

70
Unit: mm

Drilling on the plate

- 111 -

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

7.3

ASSIGNMENT FOR I/O UNITS

7.3.1

Assignment of Signals

The unit of slaves connected to the I/O Link i is called a group. One group of connected I/O units may
consist of multiple modules. This unit is called a slot.
On the I/O Link i, to allow the control unit as the master to control other I/O units as slaves, the I/O
signals of each I/O unit must be assigned to X addresses (input) and Y addresses (output) of the control
unit. Assign signals in units of slots for the I/O Link i.
In assignment for the I/O Link i, each of basic and extension modules connected to I/O modules for
connector panel is treated as a slot.

Control unit

Group 0

Group 1

(Slot 10)

(Slot 9)

(Slot 8)

(Slot 7)

(Slot 6)

Slot 10

Slot 9

Slot 8

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 5

Slot 4

Slot 3

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 4

Slot 3

Slot 2

Slot 1

Slot
MPG

Slot 1

7.3.2

(Slot 5)

I/O Unit-MODEL A

I/O module for connector panel


Assignment for the I/O Link i

(Slot 4)

(Slot 3)

(Slot 2)

(Slot 1)

IF module

Extension module

Manual pulse
generator

Extension module

module

Extension module

panel I/O

Basic module

Operators

Group 2

Fixed Signals

Some DI signals are monitored directly by the control unit. Fixed addresses are assigned to these directly
monitored signals. Select I/O units and assign addresses with attention to the polarity of each signal.
Whether addresses are assigned to signals are determined according to the machine control type, number
of controlled axes, and parameter setting. For details, refer to the FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F
Connection Manual (Function) (B-64603EN-1).

CAUTION
The emergency stop signal (*ESP) must be a DI signal at an address for which
the common voltage is fixed to 24 V so that it functions to the safety side if a
failure such as cable disconnection occurs.

- 112 -

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Examples of fixed addresses the control unit directly monitors


7
6
5
4
3
2
X004
X005
X006
X007
X008
X009

7.3.3

SKIP

SKIP6

SKIP5

SKIP4

SKIP3

SKIP2

SKIP8

SKIP7

*DEC8

*DEC7

*DEC6

*ESP
*DEC5

*DEC4

*DEC3

*DEC2

*DEC1

Status Alarm

Some I/O units have a function which detects unit errors including DO alarms (DO ground faults) and DO
common voltage errors.
With the I/O Link i, detected information is called a status alarm, and the CNC is notified of the status
alarm separate from DI signals. For this reason, it is not necessary to assign the information to X
addresses. If an error occurs, a PMC alarm message is displayed on the PMC alarm screen and the
information is also output to the system relay (R or Z) area. The information only for one group per
channel is output to the system relay area. Only the information for the first group in which a status alarm
is detected is output.
The following figure shows an address map of a system relay area to which to output a status alarm. For
details of status alarms actually detected by units, see the section for each unit in Chapter 8.

Channel 1
R9268(Z268)
R9269(Z269)
R9270(Z270)
R9271(Z271)
R9272(Z272)
R9273(Z273)
R9274(Z274)
R9275(Z275)

System relay area related to a status alarm address map


Channel 2
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
R9276(Z276)
Status
Type
R9277(Z277)
Group number
R9278(Z278)
Slot number
R9279(Z279)
Alarm information number
R9280(Z280)
Y address
R9281(Z281)
R9282(Z282)
PMC path
R9283(Z283)
Alarm data

#0

Note : Status alarm information is output to either R address or Z address, which depends on selected
PMC memory type. For relation between PMC memory type and R/Z address, refer to the
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B PMC Programming Manual (B-64513EN).

Name
Status
Type
Group number
Slot number
Alarm information
number
Y address

PMC path

Simple description of signals in previous figure


Description
Indicates that a status alarm occurs when this signal is set to 1.
Indicates the type of status alarm.
0: DO alarm (a ground fault), 1: Other alarm (such as a DO common voltage error)
Outputs a group number (0 to 23).
Outputs a numeric value 1 to 32, which indicates slot number 1 to 32.
Outputs the byte position in the slot or other alarm information
When DO alarm occurs(Type=0), a numeric value 0 to 31 is output.
When other alarm occurs(Type=1), the meaning of output number depends on each unit..
Outputs the Y address binary number of the relevant DO signal
(R9273 : upper, R9272 : lower)
(Yn : n=0 to 127, 200 to 327, 400 to 527, 600 to 727, 1000 to 1127)
Valid when DO alarm occurs(Type=0)
ex. Y511 : R9273 = 00000001, R9272 = 11111111
Outputs the PMC path at the Y address assigned to the relevant DO signal. (PMC1 to PMC5 :
1 to 5, DCSPMC : 9)
Valid when DO alarm occurs(Type=0)
Outputs 0 when other alarm occurs (Type=1)

- 113 -

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Name
Alarm data

7.4

Description
Outputs information on the alarm which occurs or other alarm information.
Outputs 1 to the bit corresponding to the alarm which occurs when DO alarm occurs(Type=0)
When other alarm occurs(Type=1), the meaning of output number depends on each unit..

MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR

When multiple I/O units having a manual pulse generator interface are connected, the manual pulse
generator interface of the I/O unit nearest the control unit on the I/O Link i is enabled in the initial status.
The manual pulse generator interface of a desired I/O unit can be enabled by setting the relevant
parameter.
For the parameter setting, refer to the FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Parameter Manual (B-64610EN).

7.4.1

Manual Pulse Generator Connection

The following figure shows an example in which three manual pulse generators are connected.
I/O Unit

Manual pulse generator

JA3 (PCR-E20LMDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

HA1
HB1
HA2
HB2
HA3
HB3

+5V

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

0V
0V
0V
+5V
+5V

Cable connection

Manual pulse generator #1


(M3 screw terminal)
3
4
5
+5V
0V
HA1

6
HB1

Manual pulse generator #2


(M3 screw terminal)
3
4
5
+5V
0V
HA2

6
HB2

Manual pulse generator #3


(M3 screw terminal)
3
4
5
+5V
0V
HA3

6
HB3

Terminal
block

1
HA1
2
HB1
9
+5V
12
0V

7 Red
7 White
5 Red
2 Black

3
HA2
4
HB2
18
+5V
14
0V

8 Red
8 Black
4 Red
3 Black

5
HA3
6
HB3
20
+5V
16
0V

9 Black
9 White
6 Red
1 Black

Manual pulse
generator
5
6
3
4

HA1
HB1
+5V
0V

5
6
3
4

HA2
HB2
+5V
0V

5
6
3
4

HA3
HB3
+5V
0V
Shield

#1
HA1
HB1
+5V
0V
#2
HA2
HB2
+5V
0V
#3
HA3
HB3
+5V
0V

Ground plate
Cable

Recommended wire material :


Recommended connector
:

Wire

A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG6+#24AWG3 pairs)


A02B-0120-K303 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: FI40-2015S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
(Case: FI40-20-CV5 (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))

- 114 -

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Recommended cables

A02B-0120-K841 (7m) (for connecting three manual pulse generators)


A02B-0120-K848 (7m) (for connecting two manual pulse generators)
A02B-0120-K847 (7m) (for connecting one manual pulse generator)
(These cables do not include the wire shown in the above figure.)

NOTE
The number of connectable manual pulse generators depends on the option
configuration.

7.4.2

Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator

The manual pulse generator operates on 5 VDC. The supply voltage drop due to the cable resistance must
be held below 0.2 V (when those of the 0-volt and 5-volt wires are combined), as expressed in the
following expression:
0.2

0.1R2L
m

where
0.1 = manual pulse generator supply current (0.1 A)
R = resistance per unit cable length (/m)
m = number of 0-volt and 5-volt wires
L = cable length (m).

Therefore, the cable length can be determined using the following expression.
L

m
R

As an example, obtain the cable length when recommended cable wire A66L-0001-0286 is used.
This cable wire has three paired signal wires and six power connection wires. Since the electric resistance
of a power connection wire is 0.0394 /m, if three wires are used for 0 V and 5 V, the cable length is:
L

3
0.0394

= 76.75[m]

According to the FANUC specifications, however, the maximum transmission distance of a pulse signal
from a manual pulse generator must not exceed 50 m.
Therefore, when one manual pulse generator is connected, the maximum cable length is 50 m.
The maximum cable length is:
When two manual pulse generators are connected
38.37 m
When three manual pulse generators are connected
25.58 m

7.4.3

Manual Pulse Generator Signal Specifications

If the customer will use a manual pulse generator which is not manufactured by FANUC, the following
conditions must be satisfied.
The relationship between signals HAn and HBn, and pulses issued to the control unit is as shown in the
figure below. A cycle of a pulse T1 must be at least 200 sec and T1/4 must be at least 50 sec.

- 115 -

7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

T1
HAn
T1
4

T1

HBn
T1
4

T1
4

Pulse for the + direction


Pulse for the - direction
Forward rotation

Reverse rotation
Reverses the rotation.

Click point

The following figure shows the receiver circuit for signals in the manual pulse generator.
Manual pulse
generator

+5V
Filter
10k
R

Connector

+
C

0V

0V
Internal receiver
circuit

The points (thresholds) at which the input signal to the receiver changes are:
3.7 V or higher when the input signal state changes from the low level to the high level
1.5 V or lower when the input signal state changes from the high level to the low level

7.5

POWER SUPPLY

WARNING
1 Supply the +24V power to the slave I/O units connected with the I/O Link i when
or before the power to the control unit is turned on at the power-on of the system.
At the power-off of the system, turn the +24 V off when or after the power to the
control unit is turned off. For detailed timing specifications at power-on and -off,
see Section 4.2, Turning On and Off the Power to the Control Unit. Do not turn
the +24V power to any slave I/O unit off during operation, otherwise the control
unit will be in the status of communication alarm.
2 For the safety of the system, dont supply the power for the load (DOCOM) when
the power for the I/O Unit is off. If the power for the load (DOCOM) is supplied
when the power for the I/O Unit is off, invalid output or malfunction may cause an
accident.
- 116 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.1

GENERAL UNITS

Basically, 0i-F can be connected to any unit that has a FANUC I/O Link i slave interface. The following
table lists general units that can be connected. For detailed description of each unit, see the section or
manual indicated in Detailed description in the table below.
General units that can be connected to 30i-B/31i-B/32i-B
Unit
I/O module for connector panel

I/O module for operator's panel


(for Matrix Input)
I/O module for operator's panel

I/O module for power magnetics


cabinet
I/O module type-2 for connector
panel
Terminal type I/O module

FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL A

Description
Distribution type I/O module that can flexibly support a
combination of input/output signals required by a power
magnetics circuit. Has a manual pulse generator interface.
Unit having an interface with a machine operator's panel; it
has an interface with a manual pulse generator.
Unit having an interface with a machine operator's panel
that handles the input/output signals required by the
power magnetics circuit; it has an interface with a manual
pulse generator.
Unit that has an interface with the power magnetics
cabinet. This unit can also handle input/output signals
required for the power magnetics circuit.
Distribution type I/O module that can flexibly support a
combination of input/output signals required by a power
magnetics circuit. Has a manual pulse generator interface.
I/O module that is equivalent to a connector panel I/O
module. Input/output signals are connected on a
spring-type terminal block (ferrule terminal block).
I/O unit with a module configuration that can flexibly
handle a combination of input/output signals required for
the power magnetics circuit

FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL B

I/O unit of distribution type that can flexibly handle a


combination of input/output signals required for the power
magnetics circuit

Fanuc I/O Link connection unit

Unit that makes a connection with a FANUC I/O Link i


master to transfer DI/DO signals
Unit that makes a connection with a control unit through
the FANUC I/O Link i for servo motor control
The appearance of this machine operator's panel is
consistent. The panel can easily be customized.
Compact handy operation panel, used for operation on the
machine side, that consists of the manual pulse generator,
emergency stop switch, enable switch, display unit, and
input key.
Unit having an interface with a machine operators panel.

Servo amplifier i SV series (I/O


Link i interface)
Standard machine operator's
panel
Handy machine operator's panel

Operators panel connection unit


(source DO)
Safrty IO unit
I/O module for operators panel
supporting safety function

I/O unit to connect duplicated safety signals.


I/O module for a machine operators panel that has a
terminal to input duplicated safety signals.

- 117 -

Detailed
description
Section 8.2

Section 8.3
Section 8.4

Section 8.4

Section 8.5

Section 8.6

Connection and
Maintenance
Manual
B-61813E
Connection and
Maintenance
Manual
B-62163E
Section 8.7
Descriptions
B-65322EN
Section 8.8
Connection
Manual
B-63753EN
Section 8.10
Section 8.11
Section 8.12

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i


Unit
I/O Unit for power magnetics
cabinet
Mult Sensor Unit

B-64603EN/01

Description
Unit that has an interface with the power magnetics
cabinet. This unit can also handle input/output signals
required for the power magnetics circuit.
I/O unit with the Shock Input, the Temperature Input, and
the Analog Input for machine state monitoring.

Detailed
description
Section 8.13

WARNING
If the load current of a unit or module with no output protection function exceeds
its rating continuously for a long time, it is likely that smoke or ignition may occur.
In order to prevent burnout, it is recommended to use a fuse rated twice the
output rating at every external terminal.
Some modules have a built-in fuse for each common. However, no such output
module can be protected from overload. Be sure to use them within their rating. In
order to protect modules from overload, it is recommended to attach an external
fuse to each of them.
It is likely that, if a short circuit occurs, an external fuse (even if provided) for an
output module may fail to protect its components. If an external load is
short-circuited, ask for repair.
As for modules having an output protection element, the protection function is
intended to protect the components internal to the modules rather than external
units.
No protection function of modules can protect their internal components in all
cases. Once any protection function has worked, remove the cause promptly. If
an absolute maximum rating is exceeded, for example, it is likely that protection
functions may not work or an IC may break down before the related protection
function works, depending on the way or situation in which the modules are used.
If an output protection function is defective, it is likely that, if the load current
exceeds its rating continuously for a long time, smoke or ignition may occur.

NOTE
1 To use a unit listed in the table above that supports, be sure to specify a unit of the
ordering specifications described in the relevant section.

- 118 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE regarding Input module


1 Pay attention to the contact chattering and noise sufficiently may cause these
input modules to read incorrect inputs.
2 If an input contact is connected to an input module and inductive load in parallel,
a surge voltage that occurs across the load when the contact becomes off may
cause the input module to malfunction. If this is the case, attach a surge arrester
to the load in parallel to suppress the surge voltage.
AC input
module

DC input
module

Surge arrester (like snubber circuit)

Inductive load

Diode

Inductive load

3 The maximum current described in Signal Specifications of each units includes


the permissible rush current.

- 119 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE regarding Output module


1 Even if the sequence program has turned off an output module, its internal stray
capacity may cause an output current to flow instantaneously through it when a
voltage is applied abruptly to the load. In order to evade this symptom, use the
configuration that the load power is turned on/off on the primary side, as shown
Primary side
Secondary side
below.

Load power

2 Be sure to connect the power supply and common pins. Otherwise, current flow
may get in the output circuit, resulting in the output being turned on.
3 Measures for inductive loads
Do not turn on/off the output module repeatedly within a short period of time. The
maximum permissible ON/OFF frequency is: ON for at least 1 second and OFF
for at least 1 second.
If the output load is inductive, connect a protection circuit like a surge killer or
diode to the load in parallel. Note, however, that, connection of a protection
circuit may cause a delay in recovery time. If this is a problem, use a CR snubber
circuit instead of a surge killer or diode.
Inductive load
Inductive load
AC output
module

Diode
DC output
module
Source type

DC output
module
Sink type

L
Surge arrester (like snubber circuit)

Inductive load

Diode

4 If the output module is used to control a lamp load, it is likely that output turn-on
rush current may damage the output element. Do not even instantaneously fail to
observe the current and voltage ratings. If a dark lighting resistor is used in the
source type DC output module, connect a leakage prevention diode as shown
below.
Lamp

Dark lighting resistor


DC output
module
Source type

DC output
module
Sink type

Lamp

Dark lighting resistor

Leakage prevention diode

5 The maximum current described in Signal Specifications of each units includes the
permissible rush current.

- 120 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.2

CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR CONNECTOR PANEL

8.2.1

Configuration

As shown in the figure below, an I/O module for connector panel consists of the basic module and
extension modules (up to three modules).
Flat cable for module connection

Direction to be
used when the
modules are
mounted using
DIN rails or
screws

Direction to be used
when the modules
are connected
directly to the
connection
printed circuit board

Extension module 3

JD1A
JD1B

Extension module 2
Extension module 1

I/O Link cable

Basic module

Manual pulse generator cable

NOTE
Be sure to install I/O modules for connector panel so that the basic module and
extension modules are placed as shown in the figure above.
When the modules are directly connected to the connection printed circuit board
designed by the machine tool builder:
Install the extension modules to the right of the basic module on the
installation plane.
When the modules are installed using DIN rails or screws:
Install the extension modules to the left of the basic module on the installation
plane.

- 121 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.2.2

B-64603EN/01

Connection Diagram

The following figure shows an example of connecting extension module A, extension module C, and
extension module D as extension modules.
I/O UNIT

CNC

JD1B
JD51A

JD1A

JD1B
CA137

CB150

Manual pulse
generator

Manual pulse
generator

JA3

Manual pulse
generator

+24V power
supply
L1

DI/DO
module

CA138
CA137
Extension module 1(

Note 1

Connector panel

CB150

Machine side
DI/DO

2A output
module

CA138

CB154
CA137
Extension module 2

CA138

Analog input
module
CB157

CA137
Extension module 3

NOTE
Extension modules A, B, C, and D can be installed in any position of extension
modules 1, 2, and 3. If a manual pulse generator interface is required,
however, be sure to install extension module A in extension module 1. Other
modules cannot be installed in extension module 1.

- 122 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.2.3

Module Specifications
Name

Types of modules
Ordering
Specifications
specifications

Weight

Reference
item

220g

Subsec. 8.2.4

210g

Subsec. 8.2.4

200g

Subsec. 8.2.4

230g

Subsec. 8.2.5

I/O module for connector panel


(basic module)
I/O module for connector panel
(extension module A)
I/O module for connector panel
(extension module B)
I/O module for connector panel
(extension module C)
I/O module for connector panel
(extension module D)
Terminal conversion adapter
TA1
Terminal conversion adapter
TA2
Terminal conversion adapter
TA3
Fuse (spare parts)

A03B-0824-C005

Analog input module

210g

Subsec. 8.2.6

A03B-0824-K151
(A20B-2005-0160)
A03B-0824-K152
(A20B-2005-0190)
A03B-0824-K153
(A20B-1009-0720)
A03B-0815-K002

For basic module and extension


module A, B

60g

Subsec.8.2.13

For extension module C

45g

Subsec.8.2.13

For extension module D

50g

Subsec.8.2.13

Flat cable between modules

A03B-0815-K100

A03B-0824-C001
A03B-0824-C002
A03B-0824-C003
A03B-0824-C004

DI/DO : 24/16
DI/DO : 24/16
With MPG interface
DI/DO : 24/16
Without MPG interface
DO : 16
2A output module

1A(For basic module)


20 mm long
Suitable for a module interval of
32 mm

NOTE
Be sure to use modules with the ordering specifications listed above in
combination. Do not configurate them with other modules not supported I/O Link
i.
For the specifications (such as signal input requirements) specific to each module, see the relevant pages
of each item.

Installation conditions
(1) Use each I/O module in a completely sealed cabinet.
(2) Use the units under the following ambient temperature conditions:
Operation:
0C to 55C
Storage and transportation: -20C to 80C
(3) For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.
(4) For ventilation within each I/O module, each module must be installed in shown below. Moreover,
for ventilation and wiring, allow a clearance of 100 mm or more above and below each module.
Never place a device that generates a large amount of heat below an I/O module.
(5) Install the basic module and extension modules so that the connection flat cables lie on the top of
them. Also ensure that the flat cable does not block the vent holes on the basic unit. (See Subsection
8.2.8.)

- 123 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

I/O Link connection


MPG connection

Expansion module 3

Expansion module 2

Expansion module 1

Basic module

Upper side

Lower side

(6) Install the basic module and extension modules so that they are placed as shown in the figure in
Subsection 8.2.1.

When the modules are directly connected to the connection printed circuit board designed by
the machine tool builder:
Install the extension modules to the right of the basic module on the installation plane.

When the modules are installed using DIN rails or screws:


Install the extension modules to the left of the basic module on the installation plane.

Power supply rating


Module
Basic module
Expansion modules A and B
Expansion module C (2A output
module)
Expansion module D (analog input
module)

Power supply voltage


24 VDC 10% is fed through
the I/O connector (CB150) of
the basic module;
10% includes momentary
variations and ripples.

Power supply rating


0.2A+7.3mADI
0.1A+7.3mADI

Remarks
Number of DI
points with DI=ON
Number of DI
points with DI=ON

0.1A
0.1A

As a guideline for the heat dissipation, assume [above power supply capacity 24 (W)].

NOTE
1 The above power supply rating does not include that to be input to DOCOM for
DO output.
2 To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and
JD1B on the basic module, the above power supply rating + 70 mA is required for
the power supply of the basic module.
3 If the Terminal conversion adapter is used, in order to light the LED, the power
supply rating will increase as follow.
TA1:The power supply rating of 24VDC power supply will increase up to 5.5mA.
The power supply rating of DOCOM will increase up to 95mA.
TA2:The power supply rating of DOCOM will increase up to 95mA.
TA3:There is no LED.

- 124 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.2.4

Connection of the Basic Module, and Extension Modules A


and B

8.2.4.1

Connector pin arrangement

The following figure shows the connector pin arrangement of the basic module and extension modules A
and B.
CB150(HONDA MRH-50RMAST)

CAUTION
Pins 18 and 50 (+24V) of connector CB150 are used to apply +24 V externally to
a module. Be sure to connect these pins because the +24 V is used internally.
Also be sure to connect pins 19 to 23 (0V).

- 125 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.2.4.2

B-64603EN/01

DI (Input Signal) Connection

This subsection describes the DI (input signal) connections of the basic module and expansion modules A
and B.
The following figures show DI connection per module. A maximum of 96 signals are available in a
configuration of one basic module (24 signals) and three extension modules (24 signals each).

0V

0V

- 126 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

0V
0V

NOTE
As listed in the table below, Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 are DI pins for which a
common voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the DICOM0 CB150(24)
pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can be input with its logical state
reversed. If, however, a cable is connected to ground, it has the same effect as
inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent such accidents, the connection of the
DICOM0 CB150(24) pin to the 0 V power supply is recommended wherever
possible.
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed
(from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7), the input is 0. For the
unconnected pins at the addresses for which a common voltage can be selected
(from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7), the input is 0 when the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is
connected to the 0 V power supply or 1 when it is connected to the +24 V power
supply. Connect DICOM0 when used. When addresses from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7
are not used, connect DICOM0 to the 0 V power supply.
Common voltage for the basic module, and extension modules A and B
Address
Common voltage
Xm
Xm+1
Xm+2

Can externally be selected with DICOM0.


Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.

- 127 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.2.4.3

B-64603EN/01

DO (Output Signal) Connection

This subsection describes the DO (output signal) connections of the basic module and expansion modules
A and B.
The following figures show DI connection per module. A maximum of 64 signals are available in a
configuration of one basic module (16 signals) and three extension modules (16 signals each).

0V

- 128 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.2.4.4

DI/DO Signal Specifications

This section describes the specifications of the DI/DO signals used with the basic module and expansion
modules A and B.
DI (input signal specifications)
Number of points
Rated input
Delay time

24 points (per module)


DC24V, 7.3mA
The receiver delay time is 2 ms (maximum). In addition, [I/O Link transfer time
between CNC and I/O module] and [ladder scan period (depending on CNC)]
must be considered.

DIcontact specification
Contact rating
Leakage current between
contacts when opened
Voltage decrease between
contacts when closed

30 VDC, 16 mA or more
1mA or less (26.4V)

Number of points
Maximum load current when ON
Saturation voltage when ON
Withstand voltage
Leakage current when OFF
Delay time

16 points (per module)


200 mA or less including momentary variations
1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA
24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
20 A or less
The driver delay time is 50 s (maximum). In addition, [I/O Link transfer time
between CNC and I/O module] and [ladder scan period (depending on CNC)]
needs to be considered.

2 V or less (including a cable voltage decrease)

DO (output signal specifications)

CAUTION
1 When inductive load is connected to DO terminal, connect a diode in parallel in
order to reduce the noise.
2 When capacitive load is connected to DO terminal, connect a resistor in series in
order to diminish the rush current.

Power supply for DO load (DOCOM)


Input voltage range : min 0V, max 26.4V
Be sure to connect all power supply for DO load (DOCOM) pins.
Turn on the power supply for DO load (DOCOM) at the same time as the power for the control unit.
Turn off the power supply for DO load (DOCOM) when or before the power for the control unit is turned
off.

Warning
For the safety of the system, dont supply the power for the load (DOCOM) when
the power for the I/O Unit is off. If the power for the load (DOCOM) is supplied
when the power for the I/O Unit is off, invalid output or malfunction may cause an
accident.

- 129 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

By turning off (opening) the power supply (DOCOM) for the DO signals (output signals), all the DO
signals of each module can be turned off at the same time. At this time, the DO state is as shown below.

DOCOM

ON
OFF

DO state when DO is ON
on in the sequence
OFF
DO state when DO is ON
OFF
off in the sequence

NOTE
When DO is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state of DOCOM is directly reflected
in the DO state as indicated above by the dashed box.
Dont connect the inductive load or the capacitive load to the power supply for DO
load (DOCOM). If the power supply for DO load (DOCOM) is turned on/off in the
condition that it is connect to the inductive load or the capacitive load, it will cause
the DO to malfunction.

Parallel DO (output signal) connection


A DO load current of twice the level can be obtained by connecting DO points in parallel and exercising
ON/OFF control at the same time in the sequence. Namely, the maximum load current per DO point is 200
mA. By connecting two DO points in parallel and turning on the two DO points at the same time, 400 mA
can be obtained. In this case, however, the leakage current is doubled up to 40 mA when the DO points are
turned off.

CAUTION
Be sure to connect the bit at the same address for parallel connection.
Do not connect three or more signals in parallel.

DOCOM

CB150(01),(33)

+24V
0V
+24 V regulated
power supply

Relay
DV

DV

0V

- 130 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.2.5

Connection of Extension Module C (2A Output Module)

8.2.5.1

Connector pin arrangement

The following figure shows the connector pin arrangement of the extension module C (2A output module).
CB154(HONDA MRH-50RMAST)

- 131 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.2.5.2

B-64603EN/01

2A Output Signal Connection

This subsection describes the connection of extension module C (2A output module).

0V

- 132 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.2.5.3

2A output signal specifications

This subsection describes the specifications of the signals used with extension module C (2A output
module).
DO (output signal specifications)
Number of points
Maximum load current when ON
Withstand voltage
Leakage current when OFF
Delay time

16 points (per module)


2 A or less per point.
12 A maximum for the entire module (DO: 16 points) (including
momentary variations).
24 V +20% or less (including momentary variations)
100 A or less
The driver delay time is 120ns(MAX). In addition, [I/O Link transfer time
between CNC and I/O module] and [ladder scan period (depending on
CNC)] needs to be considered.

CAUTION
If the over current is continued for a long time, 2A module might emit smoke or
take fire.
It is recommend to connect a fuse about two times rating of the rated output to
each output for burnout prevention.
However, the fuse cant protect the device in any case when short-circuit is
occurred. Replace the module if short-circuit is occurred because the device
might be broken.

Parallel DO (output signal) connection


The 2A output module does not allow parallel DO connections.

8.2.6

Connection of Extension Module D (Analog Input Module)

8.2.6.1

Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation

This subsection describes the pin allocation of extension module D (analog input module).
CB157(HONDA MRH-50RMAST)

- 133 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.2.6.2

B-64603EN/01

Analog Input Signal Connections

This subsection provides a connection diagram of extension module D (analog input module).

0V
0V

0V
0V

NOTE
1 In the diagram above, n represents each channel (n = 1, 2, 3, 4).
2 Current input or voltage input can be selected on a channel-by-channel basis. For
current input, be sure to connect JMPn to INPn.
3 For the connection, use a shielded twisted pair.
4 In the diagram above, the shield of each channel is connected to FGNDn, and
FGND is used for shield processing of all channels. However, the shield of a
channel may be directly connected to frame ground with a cable clamp, instead of
using FGNDn.
- 134 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
5 If the voltage (current) source has a GND pin, as shown in the figure above,
connect COMn to this pin. Otherwise, connect INMn and COMn together in the
analog input module.

8.2.6.3

Analog Input Signal Specifications

This subsection describes the specifications of the input signals used with extension module D (analog
input module).
Item
Number of input channels
(Note)
Analog input

Digital output (Note)


Input/output correspondence

Specifications

DC -10 to +10 V (Input resistance: 4.7 M)


DC -20 to +20 mA (Input resistance: 250 )
12 bits (binary)
Analog input

Digital output

+10V

+2000

+5V or +20mA

+1000

0V or 0mA

Resolution
Overall precision
Maximum input
voltage/current
Minimum conversion time

Number of occupied
input/output points (Note)

Remarks

Four channels
Voltage input or current input
can be selected on
channel-by-channel basis.
Represented as two's
complement

-5V or -20mA

-1000

-10V

-2000

5 mV or 20 A
Voltage input: 0.5%
Current input: 1%
15V/30mA

With respect to full scale

[I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O


module] and [ladder scan period (depending on
CNC)] needs to be considered.
DI = 3 bytes, DO = 2 bytes

NOTE
Extension module D (analog input module) has four input channels. The digital
output section consists of a group of 12 bits within the three-byte occupied input
points. This means that the channel to be used can be dynamically selected by the
ladder. The channel switching DO point for channel selection is included in the
two-byte occupied output points.

8.2.6.4

Channel selection and A/D conversion data

NOTE
For allocation, see Subsection 8.2.10.
(Channel selection)
With extension module D (analog input module), which of the four analog input channels is to be the
target of A/D conversion must be determined with a PMC program. The DO points used for this selection
are CHA and CHB (two-byte occupied output points). These are mapped as indicated below.
- 135 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i


Address in the module

7
X
X

Yn
Yn+1

6
X
X

B-64603EN/01

5
X
X

4
X
X

3
X
X

2
X
X

1
X
CHB

0
X
CHA

Yn is the first address to which the analog input module is allocated.


By writing the values indicated below to CHA and CHB, the corresponding channel is selected, and the
A/D converted data of the channel and the data of the selected channel can be read as DI data. The
character X indicated above represents an unused bit, so that either 1 or 0 may be written in place of X.
CHB

CHA

Channel selected

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4

(Address)
A/D conversion data of the channel selected by the above setting is output to two bytes of the three bytes
of DI (input signals) of the slot to which this module is allocated. The A/D conversion data output
addresses are as shown below, depending on where extension module D (analog input module) is installed.

CAUTION
Be sure to allocate the start address of the slot as shown below, according to
where the analog input module is installed:
When connected to extension module 1 (slot 2):
Xm2 must always be allocated at an odd-numbered address.
When connected to extension module 2 (slot 3):
Xm3 must always be allocated at an even-numbered address.
When connected to extension module 3 (slot 4):
Xm4 must always be allocated at an odd-numbered address.

When extension module D (analog input module) is installed in extension module 1 (slot 2)
Address
Xm2(odd-numbered address)
Xm2+1(even-numbered address)
Xm2+2(odd-numbered address)

D07
0

D06
0

D05
CHB

4
3
Undefined
D04
D03
CHA
D11

D02
D10

D01
D09

D00
D08

Xm2 is the start address of slot 2.

When extension module D (analog input module) is installed in extension module 2 (slot 3)
Address
Xm3(even-numbered address)
Xm3+1(odd-numbered address)
Xm3+2(even-numbered address)

7
D07
0

6
D06
0

5
D05
CHB

4
3
D04
D03
CHA
D11
Undefined

2
D02
D10

1
D01
D09

0
D00
D08

Xm3 is the start address of slot 3.

When extension module D (analog input module) is installed in extension module 3 (slot 4)
Address
Xm4(odd-numbered address)
Xm4+1(even-numbered address)
Xm4+2(odd-numbered address)

D07
0

D06
0

D05
CHB

Xm4 is the start address of slot 4.

- 136 -

4
3
Undefined
D04
D03
CHA
D11

D02
D10

D01
D09

D00
D08

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

(A/D conversion data)


A/D conversion data for the selected channel is output to the above address as 12-bit data in the following
format.
Address in the module

7
Xm D07
Xm+1
0

6
D06
0

5
D05
CHB

4
D04
CHA

3
D03
D11

2
D02
D10

1
D01
D09

0
D00
D08

D00 to D11 represent 12-bit digital output data. D00 corresponds to weighting of 20 and D10 corresponds
to that of 210.
D11 is a sign bit expressed as a twos complement. CHA and CHB represent an analog input channel.
This means that when the two bytes above are read with a PMC program, the A-D converted data of the
input channel represented by CHA and CHB can be read from D11 to D00.(Refer to the following table)

Decimal

Digital data
Hexadecimal
Binary (D11~D00)

2047
2001
2000
1999
1001
1000
999
2
1
0
-1
-2
-999
-1000
-1001
-1999
-2000

7
7
7
7
3
3
3
0
0
0
F
F
C
C
C
8
8

F
D
D
C
E
E
E
0
0
0
F
F
1
1
1
3
3

F
1
0
F
9
8
7
2
1
0
F
E
9
8
7
1
0

h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h

-2001

8 2 F h

0111
0111
0111
0111
0011
0011
0011
0000
0000
0000
1111
1111
1100
1100
1100
1000
1000

1111
1101
1101
1100
1110
1110
1110
0000
0000
0000
1111
1111
0001
0001
0001
0011
0011

1111
0001
0000
1111
1001
1000
0111
0010
0001
0000
1111
1110
1001
1000
0111
0001
0000

1000 0010 1111

Analog data
Voltage input
Current input
Outside of the
specification range
10V
9.995V
5.005V
5V
4.995V
10mV
5mV
0V
-5mV
-10mV
-4.995V
-5V
-5.005V
-9.995V
-10V
Outside of the
specification range

Outside of the
specification range

20mA
19.98mA
40uA
20uA
0mA
-20uA
-40uA
-19.98mA
-20mA

Outside of the
specification range

NOTE
When two-byte digital output addresses are to be referenced with a PMC
program, a read must always be performed word-by-word (16 bits).

- 137 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.2.7

B-64603EN/01

Manual Pulse Generator Connection

For an I/O module for connector panel, three manual pulse generators can be connected to extension
module A. For the connection, see Subsection 7.4.1.

NOTE
To use extension module A having a manual pulse generator interface, connect the
module next to the basic module.

8.2.8

Connection of Basic and Extension Modules

Flat cable-side connector specification:


HIF3BA-34DA-2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
Module connector-side connector specification:
HIF3BA-34PA-2.54DS(Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) or
FAP-3403-1202-0BS (Yamaichi Denki Co., Ltd.)

- 138 -

CA137

CA138

CA137

CA138

CA137

Modules can be connected in the same way, regardless of whether you are connecting the basic module to
an extension module or connecting two extension modules. Connect the modules by using 34-pin flat
cable connectors as shown in the figure below. Ensure that all 34 pins at one end of the cable are
connected to the corresponding pins at the other end; e.g., connect the A1 pin to the pin having the same
designation (A1) at the other end.

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
Install the basic module and extension modules so that they are placed as shown
in the figure above.
- When the modules are directly connected to the connection printed circuit
board designed by the machine tool builder:
Install the extension modules to the right of the basic module on the
installation plane.
- When the modules are installed using DIN rails or screws:
Install the extension modules to the left of the basic module on the installation
plane.
Modules need to be spaced at least 32 mm apart, in which case a flat cable of
about 20 mm in length is required. To install modules further away from each
other, the cable length will be 20 mm plus the extra distance. Note that the
maximum length of a flat cable is 300 mm.
To ensure adequate ventilation, install the modules in such a way that the flat
cables lie on top of them.
The basic module has a vent at the top (as indicated by the dotted lines in the
above figure). Install the modules so that the flat cable does not block the vent.
Be sure to connect the flat cable from CA137 on a module to CA138 on the next
module.

8.2.9

Module Installation

Board thickness: 1.6mm


0.9
Prohibited area
on component
28
side

Prohibited area on
soldered side

57.1

89

R2

106

11

12

Square hole

No. 1 pin
Square hole

Prohibited area on
soldered side

Prohibited area on
component side

I/O Link
interface

10
I/O interface

Dimensions of connector panel


printed circuit board 0.2

JD1A

JD1B

MPG interface
(for extension module)

Connector panel printed circuit board connector specification: HONDA MRH-50FDST (50-pin female straight connector without fitting)

When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly (external module view and mounting
diagram)

- 139 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
1 A connector with a fitting (HONDA MRH-50RMAST) is used for the module-side I/O
interface. Always use a connector having no fitting for the connector panel printed
circuit board.
2 Area where pattern printing is prohibited
: Prohibited area on soldered side
: Prohibited area on component side

Hook

Stopper
connector panel
printed circuit board

Mounting the module


1. Insert the hook of the module into the square hole located at the upper part of the connector panel printed circuit board.
2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, push the module in the direction of B , and attach the module's connector to the connector on
the printed circuit board.
3. Push the stopper into the lower hole of the printed circuit board until it clicks into place.
Dismounting the module
1. Press the stopper C upward.
2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, pull the lower part of the module in the direction of A .

When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly (mounting and dismounting a module)

NOTE
When mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and bottom
surfaces. Avoid applying force to the sides where there are slits.

- 140 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Mount the DIN rail here.

Note)

I/O interface
I/O Link i interface

MPG interface
(for extension module)

JD1A

JD1B

When mounting a DIN rail (external module view and mounting diagram)

NOTE
Recommended connector:
A02B-0098-K891 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: HONDA MR-50F solder type)
(Case: HONDA MR-50NSB angled type)
Recommended wire material:
A66L-0001-0042(7/0.18, 50 pins)

- 141 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

When mounting a DIN rail (mounting and dismounting a module)

NOTE
When dismounting the module, take care not to damage the stopper by applying
excessive force with the screwdriver.
When mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and bottom
surfaces. Avoid applying force to the sides where there are slits.

- 142 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

Screw
holes

I/O interface
I/O Link interface

MPG interface
(for extension module)
JD1A

JD1B

When mounting a module using screws (external module view and mounting diagram)

NOTE
Recommended connector:
A02B-0098-K891 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: HONDA MR-50F solder type)
(Case: HONDA MR-50NSB angled type)
Recommended wire material:
A66L-0001-0042(7/0.18, 50 pins)

- 143 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.2.10

B-64603EN/01

Other Notes

Address allocation
For the I/O module for connector panel, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.

DI space map
Xm1
Xm1 + 1
Xm1 + 2

Basic module

Xm2
Xm2 + 1
Xm2 + 2

DO space map
Slot 1

Yn1
Yn1 + 1

Basic module

Slot 1

Extension module 1

Slot 2

Yn2
Yn2 + 1

Extension module 1

Slot 2

Xm3
Xm3 + 1
Xm3 + 2

Extension module 2

Slot 3

Yn3
Yn3 + 1

Extension module 2

Slot 3

Xm4
Xm4 + 1
Xm4 + 2

Extension module 3

Slot 4

Yn4
Yn4 + 1

Extension module 3

Slot 4

Extension module 1

Slot MPG

Xmmpg (for 1st MPG)


Xmmpg + 1(for 2nd MPG)
Xmmpg + 2(for 3rd MPG)

Xm1, Xm2, Xm3, Xm4, Xmmpg, Yn1, Yn2, Yn3, and Yn4 indicate the start address at allocation.

Each module is treated as a slot and addresses are allocated for each module. When only the basic module
is used, allocate 3-byte DI addresses and 2-byte DO addresses to slot 1. When extension modules are
added, allocate 3-byte DI addresses and 2-byte DO addresses to slots 2, 3, and 4.
An I/O module for connector panel has an interface for three manual pulse generators. To use manual
pulse generators, allocate addresses to slot MPG. With this setting, addresses can be allocated to the three
manual pulse generators at a time (addresses cannot be allocated individually to manual pulse generators).
Do not use the DI space with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.

NOTE
1 Be sure to allocate addresses to the basic module. (DI: 3 bytes, DO: 2 bytes)
2 Extension module C (2A output module) has no DI signals. For connection to the
I/O Link i, it is not necessary to allocate addresses to the DI section of extension
module C.

DO (output signal) error detection


The DO driver of the Basic and Extension module A/B is capable of detecting an overcurrent and
measuring its own temperature. If an accident, such as the connecting of the cable to ground, causes an
abnormal increase in the load current or in the driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided
for each DO driver, is activated and keeps the DO signal in the OFF state until the cause of the problem is
eliminated. Even if this occurs, the CNC and I/O module continue operating without entering the alarm
status, but the PMC is notified of the location of the error detected by the DO driver. This information can
be checked on the PMC status screen or alarm processing can be performed in advance using a ladder to
help error check and recovery.
A DO error such as a ground fault is detected for each signal. This DO error is transferred to the PMC
system relay area as a status alarm. The following table lists system relay area information and
corresponding DO data related to a status alarm. When an alarm data bit is set to 1, the DO driver
corresponding to the bit detects an error. Also see Subsection 7.3.3, Status Alarm.
- 144 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
Information output to the system relay area
Alarm
information
Y address
Group
PMC
Slot
number
Type
(DO address)
number path number
(Intra-slot byte
address)
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

1
2
0

0 to 23

1 to 5, 9
3
4

Yn1
Yn1+1
Yn2
Yn2+1
Yn3
Yn3+1
Yn4
Yn4+1

Faulty location

0th byte DO
1st byte DO
0th byte DO
1st byte DO
0th byte DO
1st byte DO
0th byte DO
1st byte DO

of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of

Basic module
Basic module
Extension module1
Extension module1
Extension module2
Extension module2
Extension module3
Extension module3

Output values of Group number, PMC path, and Y address depends on unit connection and I/O
address assignment.
Yn1, Yn2, Yn3 and Yn4 indicate the start address at allocation.
Description of Alarm data in the system relay area
Alarm data
#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

DO ground
fault at bit 7

DO ground
fault at bit 6

DO ground
fault at bit 5

DO ground
fault at bit 4

DO ground
fault at bit 3

DO ground
fault at bit 2

DO ground
fault at bit 1

DO ground
fault at bit 0

CAUTION
1 The output protection function is not for external equipment but for internal device
of the module.
2 The output protection function cant protect the internal device in any case. If the
output protection function is activated, remove the cause immediately. If the
output exceed the absolute maximum rating, the output protection function may
not operate normally or the internal device may break before the output
protection function operates.
3
If the over current is continued with a condition that the output protection
function cant operate normally, the internal device might emit smoke or take fire.
NOTE
This function is not supported by the extension module C (2A output module) or
extension module D (analog input module).

- 145 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.2.11

B-64603EN/01

Rotary Switch Setting

Extension module 1 (slot 2) is


omitted.

Extension module 2 (slot 3) is


omitted.

Extension module
(slot 4)

Extension module
(slot 3)

Extension module
(slot 2)

Basic module
(slot 1)

Extension module
(slot 4)

Extension module
(slot 3)

Extension module
(slot 2)

Basic module
(slot 1)

Extension module
(slot 4)

Extension module
(slot 3)

Extension module
(slot2)

Basic module
(slot 1)

By changing the setting (rotary switch) for the expansion modules, connections can be made by omitting
some expansion modules (slots) as shown below.

Extension module 1 (slot 2) and


extension module 2 (slot 3) are
omitted.

Method of setting (control and method of setting the control)


As shown below, the control (rotary switch) is located on an expansion module. To change the setting,
turn the switch with a flat-bladed screwdriver with a tip width of about 2.5 mm.

The setting position of the control (rotary switch) has the following meaning.
Setting position

Meaning of setting

This is the standard setting. The rotary switch is factory-set to this position. This setting is used
when no expansion module is omitted.
Set the rotary switch on an expansion module to this position when the preceding expansion
module is omitted.
Set the rotary switch on an expansion module to this position when the preceding two expansion
modules are omitted.
This setting is prohibited.

1
2
3 to F

- 146 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Extension module 3
(slot 4)

Extension module 2
(slot 3)

Extension module 1
(slot 2)

Basic module (slot 1)

(When extension module 1 (slot 2) is


omitted)
On extension module 2, set the rotary switch to
setting position 1. On extension module 3,
keep the rotary switch set to setting position 0.

Extension module 3
(slot 4)

Extension module 2
(slot 3)

Extension module 1
(slot 2)

Basic module (slot 1)

(When extension module 2 (slot 3) is


omitted)
On extension module 3, set the rotary switch to
setting position 1. On extension module 1,
keep the rotary switch set to setting position 0.

Extension module 3
(slot 4)

Extension module 2
(slot 3)

Extension module 1
(slot 2)

Basic module (slot 1)

(When extension module 1 (slot 2) and


extension module 2 (slot 3) is omitted)
On extension module 3, set the rotary
switch to setting position 2.

NOTE
Extension module A is fitted with an additional rotary switch as other types of
modules are modified. However, extension module A is always mounted at the
location of extension module 1, so that its factory setting need not be changed.

- 147 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.2.12

B-64603EN/01

Connection of the Grounding Terminal of the Module

Connect the 0V line in the basic module to the cabinets metal plate that is connected to ground or signal
ground bar nearby via the protective ground terminal. About Multipoint grounding or Single-point
grounding, refer to Item 3.4.1
Use fasten terminal for series 250 as cable terminal.

Cable(2mm2 or thicker)

Protective ground terminal


(Faston terminal

In case of Multipoint grounding


Connect to the cabinet metal
plate which is connected to
ground
In case of Single-point grounding
Connect to the signal ground bar

- 148 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.2.13

Terminal Conversion Adapter

TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER converts method of cable connection of I/O MODULE FOR
CONNECTOR PANEL to the terminal block connection from the connector connection.
TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER has TA1 for Basic module and Extension module A, B, and
TA2 for Extension module C, and TA3 for Extension module D, and has the following features:
z
z
z
z
z
z

LED for state indication of +24V power supply is provided. (TA1)


LED for state indication is provided for each I/O signal. (TA1, TA2)
Since the terminal block for distribute signals and PCB for connector panel is not required, space
saving is possible.
Wiring time can be reduced compared to the screw type terminal block, because the push-in type
terminal block is used.
Possible to replace the I/O MODULE FOR CONNECTOR PANEL without removing wire.
Even if user requests the terminal block connection, it is possible to use the I/O MODULE FOR
CONNECTOR PANEL which space-saving.

I/O MODULE FOR CONNECTOR PANEL


TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER

- 149 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.2.13.1 Connection diagram

- 150 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.2.13.2 Component names


TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA1

LED indication
Item
Power LED

LED for Xm+0.0


to Xm+0.7

LED for other DI/DO

Function
Lights when the +24V power supply is turned on.
Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 are DI that common voltage can be selected.
If DICOM0 is connected to 0V, LED of P column indicate the state of Xm+0.0 to
Xm+0.7.
If DICOM0 is connected to 24V, LED of N column indicate the state of Xm+0.0 to
Xm+0.7.
When DI is ON, corresponding LED will light.
When DI/DO is ON, corresponding LED will light.

- 151 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA2

LED indication
Item

Function

LED for each DO

When DO is ON, corresponding LED will light.

- 152 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA3

- 153 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.2.13.3 External view and dimensions


Dimensions when connect to the I/O MODULE FOR CONNECTOR PANEL is as follows.

NOTE
The width of the adapter is wider than the width of I/O MODULE FOR
CONNECTOR PANEL.
If the adapter is used, cable length of Flat cable for module connection needs
25mm or more.

- 154 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.2.13.4 Installation
Method of install to I/O MODULE FOR CONNECTOR PANEL is as follows.

Mounting the ADAPTER


1. As A, Hook the hollow of TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER to the hook of I/O MODULE
FOR CONNECTOR PANEL.
2. Using the hook as fulcrum, push the ADAPTER in the direction of B, and attach the connector on
the ADAPTER to the connector on the I/O MODULE.
3. Push the ADAPTER until it clicks into place.
Dismounting the ADAPTER
1. Press the stopper C upward.
2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, pull the lower part of the ADAPTER in the direction of D.

NOTE
Leads of the terminal block are exposed.
Be careful to avoid injury.

- 155 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.2.13.5 Cable connection to the terminal block


The wire that cross-sectional area is from 0.3mm2(AWG22) to 0.75mm2(AWG18) can be connected to
the terminal block of the ADAPTER.
Ferrules that have the size of following are suitable for connect to the terminal block of the ADAPTER.
Electric wire size

Ferrule terminal
D3
D2
Insulation cover

L1

L2
D1

Cross sectional
area of electric
wire (mm2)

AWG

0.3
0.5
0.75

22
20
18

The dimensions indicated below are based on the products of Weidmuller Co.,Ltd.
Outer
Inner
Inner
Length of
Overall
Electric wire
metallic part diameter of diameter of diameter of
length
sheath
sheath
sheath
conductor
L2(mm)
L1(mm)
stripped
D3(mm)
D2(mm)
D1(mm)
length (mm)
10
14
8
0.8
2
2.5
10
14
8
1
2.6
3.1
10
14
8
1.2
2.8
3.3

NOTE
Use a ferrule terminal from the viewpoint of long-term reliability.
Use a ferrule terminal which length of metallic part L2 is 8mm.
Pin pitch of the terminal block is as follows.
Use a ferrule terminal which outer diameter of sheath D3 is smaller than pin pitch
ADAPTER
TA1
TA2
TA3

Terminal block

Pin pitch

XT1, XT2
XT3, XT4
XT1, XT2
XT1, XT2

3.81mm
3.50mm
3.81mm
3.50mm

- 156 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

Connect cable
Insert the cable with ferrule into the terminal block.

- 157 -

Disconnect cable
While pushing the button at the side of the
terminal insertion hole, remove the cable.

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.2.13.6 Connection

Connection of TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA1


TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA1 distributes the signals of the connector CB150 of I/O
MODULE FOR CONNECTOR PANEL Basic module and Extension module A,B to the terminal
block XT1, XT2, XT3 and XT4
Pin number of the terminal block XT1, XT2, XT3 and XT4 is corresponding to the pin number of
the connector CB150. (NOTE)

- 158 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

NOTE
24V pin is assigned at two-terminals (18pin and 50pin) in the connector CB150,
but assigned at three-terminals (18pin, 50pin and EXpin) in the terminal block
XT1.
18pin, 50pin and EXpin of the terminal block XT1 are connected to 18pin and
50pin of the connector CB150 in TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA1.
DOCOM pin is assigned at two-terminals (01pin and 33pin) in the connector
CB150, but assigned at one-terminal (01pin) in the terminal block XT1.
01pin of the terminal block XT1 is connected to 01pin and 33pin of the connector
CB150 in TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA1.
0V pin is assigned at five-terminals (19-23pin) in the connector CB150, but
assigned at three-terminal (19-21pin) in the terminal block XT2.
19-21pin of the terminal block XT2 are connected to 19-23pin of the connector
CB150 in TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA1.
NOTE
As shown in the following figure, it is possible to branch external 24V to I/O
MODULE FOR CONNECTOR PANEL Basic module or Extension module A, B.
(It is not possible to branch to Extension module C, D.
Possible branch number is up to one, cannot branch two or more. )
In addition, it is also possible to take out 24V for DOCOM from EX pin.
Sum of the current consumed in the I/O MODULE FOR CONNECTOR PANEL,
and consumed in the branch-destination module, and consumed as DOCOM,
must be supplied from external power supply. To connect to external power
supply, please use wire that can tolerate the above current.
0V that is connected to terminal block XT2 is same as 24V.

- 159 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Connection of TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA2


TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA2 distributes the signals of the connector CB154 of I/O
MODULE FOR CONNECTOR PANEL Extension module C to the terminal block XT1, XT2.
Pin number of the terminal block XT1, XT2 is corresponding to the pin number of the connector
CB154. (NOTE)

NOTE
DOCOMA pin is assigned at six-terminals (01,17,18,33,49,50pin) in the
connector CB154, but assigned at three-terminal (01,17,18pin) in the terminal
block XT1.
01,17,18pin of the terminal block XT1 is connected to 01,17,18,33,49,50pin of the
connector CB154 in TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA2.
GNDA pin is assigned at five-terminals (19-23pin) in the connector CB154, but
assigned at three-terminal (19-21pin) in the terminal block XT2.
19-21pin of the terminal block XT2 are connected to 19-23pin of the connector
CB154 in TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA2.
Be sure to connect all DOCOMA pins.
Also be sure to connect all GNDA pins.

- 160 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

Conncetion of TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA3


TERMINAL CONVERSION ADAPTER TA3 distributes the signals of the connector CB157 of I/O
MODULE FOR CONNECTOR PANEL Extension module D to the terminal block XT1, XT2.
Pin number of the terminal block XT1, XT2 is corresponding to the pin number of the connector
CB157. (NOTE)

Example of wiring (n=1,2,3,4)

- 161 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
1 Because when current input is specified, it is necessary to connect JMPn and
INPn, there are two-INPn terminals in the terminal block XT1, XT2.
2 Because if voltage(current)source does not have a GND pin, it is necessary to
connect INMn and COMn in order to fix the reference voltage, there are two-INMn
terminals in the terminal block XT1, XT2.
3 COMn of each channel are connected to common analog GND in module
through the adapter.
4 Connect the shield of the cable to FGnI, and be sure to ground at FGnO.
Because FGnI of each channel is not connected each other, and FGnO of each
channel is also not connected each other, be sure to ground at each channel.
However, the shield may be directly connected to frame ground by using a cable
clamp without using FGnI and FGnO.
5 However, both ends grounding or both ends opening may be more effective
depending on the environment where the unit is used. Select one of the
grounding types, whichever is appropriate, depending on what the ambient noise
is like.

- 162 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.3

CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR OPERATOR'S PANEL


(FOR MATRIX INPUT)

8.3.1

Overall Connection Diagram


I/O UNIT

CNC

JD1B
JD51A

JD1A

JD1B

CE53

Manual pulse
generator
Manual pulse
generator
Manual pulse
generator

CE54
+24V power supply

CPD1(IN)

+24V power supply

CPD1(OUT)

Machine operators panel

JA3

NOTE
The following screw type connectors, newly incorporated into the main board of
control unit, cannot be used to connect the I/O Link i or manual pulse generator.
Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side
Connector case
Connector case and connector

- 163 -

Specification

Manufacturer

FI-20-CV7
FI30-20S-CV7

Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.


Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.3.2

B-64603EN/01

Power Connection

Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the power necessary for printed circuit board
operation and that for DI operation. To facilitate power division, the power is output to CPD1 (OUT)
exactly as it is input from CPD1 (IN). When power division is required, use CPD1 (OUT). Up to 1.0 A can
be supplied by branching.

CPD1(IN)

24 V power
supply

01

+24V

02

0V

03
CPD1(OUT)

24 V power
supply

01

+24V

02

0V

03

Recommended cable-side connector:


A02B-0120-K324 (including the following connector housing and contacts)
(Housing: Tyco Electronics 1-178288-3)
(Contacts: Tyco Electronics 1-175218-5)

NOTE
The specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN) is the same as that for
CPD1 (OUT). There are no indications on the printed circuit board to distinguish
between the IN and OUT connectors.

- 164 -

B-64603EN/01

8.3.3

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement

CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CD53 (B02) and CE54 (B02) is for DI signals.
Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.

- 165 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.3.4

DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection

0V

0V

- 166 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
Xm+1.0 through Xm+1.7 are DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected.
That is, by connecting the COM1 CE54(A02) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI
signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected
to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent this
from occurring, the connection of the COM1 CE54(A02) pin to the 0 V power supply
is recommended whereever possible.
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed
(from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7), the input is 0. For the unconnected pins at the
addresses for which a common voltage can be selected (from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7),
the input is 0 when the COM1 CE54(A02) pin is connected to the 0 V power
supply or 1 when it is connected to the +24 V power supply. Connect COM1 when
used. When addresses from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 are not used, connect COM1 to the
0 V power supply.
Common voltage for general-purpose DI
Address
Xm
Xm+1

Common voltage
Cannot be selected.
Can externally be selected with COM1.

CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CD53 (B02) and CE54 (B02) is for DI signals.
Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.

- 167 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.3.5

B-64603EN/01

DI (Matrix Input Signal) Connection

A maximum of 56 points are provided.

NOTE
Detour prevention diodes must be incorporated for matrix signal input, as shown in
the following figure. Otherwise, only two signals can be input at the same time.
Inputting three or more signals simultaneously without using detour prevention
diodes may result in data input errors.

*KCMn

*KYDn

- 168 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.3.6

DO (Output Signal) Connection

A maximum of 56 points are provided.

0V

- 169 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

0V

- 170 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

0V

- 171 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

0V

8.3.7

Manual Pulse Generator Connection

For an I/O module for operators panel, three manual pulse generators can be connected.
For the connection, see Subsection 7.4.1.

- 172 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.3.8

External View
5-3.2
65

95

95

I/O Link signal connection

24 V power supply
connection
Manual pulse generator connection

Weight: 170g

Operator's panel DI/DO interface

Note) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear face of the printed circuit
board. Ensure that printed circuit boards are spaced 5 mm or more from one
another to prevent interference.

: : Polarity guide
: : A1 pin mark

Rear mounting area (Perspective drawing


viewed from the front)

- 173 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.3.9

B-64603EN/01

Specifications

Installation specifications
Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.

Ordering specifications
Item

Ordering specifications

I/O module for operator's panel


Fuse (spare parts)

A03B-0824-K200
A03B-0815-K001

Remarks
1A

Module specifications
Item

Specification

General-purpose DI
Matrix DI
DO points
MPG interface

16 points
56 points (8 7)
56 points (8 7)
Max. 3 units

Remarks
24-V input
5-V input
24 V source type output

Power supply rating


Module

Supply voltage

Current rating

24 VDC 10% supplied from the


power supply connector CPD1. The
I/O module for
allowance of 10% should include 0.35A
operator's panel
instantaneous voltage and ripple
voltage.

Remarks
The total power consumption of DI points
is included. (This is true when all
general-purpose DI points are turned on.)
The power consumption of DO points is not
included.

NOTE
To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and JD1B,
the above power supply rating + 70 mA is required.

DI (input signal specifications)


(General-purpose input signal)
Signal specifications
Number of points
Rated input
Delay time

16 points (per module)


DC24V, 7.3mA
The receiver delay time is 2 ms (maximum). In addition, [I/O Link transfer time
between CNC and I/O module] and [ladder scan period (depending on CNC)]
must be considered.

Contact rating
Leakage current between
contacts when opened
Voltage decrease between
contacts when closed

30 VDC, 16 mA or more
1mA or less (26.4V)

Contact specification

2 V or less (including a cable voltage decrease)

- 174 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

(Matrix input signal)


Signal specifications
Number of points
Delay time

56 points (per module)


The maximum matrix period of 16 ms (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.

Contact rating
Leakage current between
contacts when opened
Voltage decrease between
contacts when closed

6VDC, 2mA or more

Contact specification

0.2mA or less(6V)
0.9V or less(with a current 1mA)

NOTE
When detour prevention diodes are used, the voltage drop across closed contacts
indicated above must be maintained, including the diode voltage drop.
DO (output signal specifications)
Maximum load current when ON
Saturation voltage when ON
Withstand voltage
Leakage current when OFF
Delay time

200 mA or less including momentary current per signal. 3.5 A or less for
DO signals in all
1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA
24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
20A or less
The driver delay time is 50 s (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.

CAUTION
1 When inductive load is connected to DO terminal, connect a diode in parallel in
order to reduce the noise..
2 When capacitive load is connected to DO terminal, connect a resistor in series in
order to diminish the rush current.

Power supply for DO load (DOCOM)


Input voltage : min 0V, max 26.4V
Be sure to connect all power supply for DO load (DOCOM) pins.
Turn on the power supply for DO load (DOCOM) at the same time as the power for the control unit.
Turn off the power supply for DO load (DOCOM) when or before the power for the control unit is turned
off.

WARNING
For the safety of the system, dont supply the power for the load (DOCOM) when
the power for the I/O Unit is off. If the power for the load (DOCOM) is supplied
when the power for the I/O Unit is off, invalid output or malfunction may cause an
accident.

- 175 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.3.10

B-64603EN/01

Other Notes

Address allocation
For the I/O module for operators panel, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.

Xm1
Xm1 + 1
Xm1 + 2
Xm1 + 3
Xm1 + 4
Xm1 + 5
Xm1 + 6
Xm1 + 7
Xm1 + 8
Xm1 + 9
Xm1 + 10
Xm1 + 11
Xmmpg
(for 1st MPG)
Xmmpg + 1 (for 2nd MPG)
Xmmpg + 2 (for 3rd MPG)

DI space map
General-purpose
input signal
Reserved

Slot 1
Matrix input signal

DO space map
Yn1
Yn1 + 1
Yn1 + 2
Yn1 + 3
Output signal
Yn1 + 4
Yn1 + 5
Yn1 + 6
Yn1 + 7
Reserved

Slot 1

Reserved

Basic module

Slot MPG

Xm1, Xmmpg, and Yn1 indicate the start address at allocation.


Basically, for an I/O module for operators panel, allocate 12-byte DI addresses to slot 1 and 8-byte DO
addresses to slot 1.
An I/O module for operators panel has an interface for three manual pulse generators. To use manual
pulse generators, allocate addresses to slot MPG. With this setting, addresses can be allocated to the three
manual pulse generators at a time (addresses cannot be allocated individually to manual pulse generators).
Do not use the addresses with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.

ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output signals)
For ON/OFF of the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO signals (output signals), see Subsection
8.2.4.4.

Parallel DO (output signal) connection


For parallel connections of DO signals (output signals), see Subsection 8.2.4.4.

DO (output signal) alarm detection


The DO driver of an I/O module for operators panel is capable of detecting an overcurrent and measuring
its own temperature. If an accident, such as connecting the cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in
the load current or in the driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided for each DO driver, is
activated which keeps the DO signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFF state until the cause of the problem
is eliminated. Even if this occurs, the CNC and I/O module continue operating without entering the alarm
status, but the PMC is notified of the location of the error detected by the DO driver. This information can
be checked on the PMC status screen or alarm processing can be performed in advance using a ladder to
help error check and recovery.
A DO error such as a ground fault is detected for each byte. This DO error is transferred to the PMC
system relay area as a status alarm. The following table lists system relay area information and
corresponding DO data related to a status alarm. When alarm data bit 0 is set to 1, the DO driver
indicated by the slot number and byte offset detects an error as listed in the table below. Also see
Subsection 7.3.3, Status Alarm.
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred

- 176 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Information output to the system relay area


Alarm
information
Y address
Group
PMC
Slot
number
Type
(DO address)
number path number
(Intra-slot byte
address)

0 to 23

1 to 5, 9

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Faulty location

Yn
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3
Yn+4
Yn+5
Yn+6
Yn+7

0th byte DO
1st byte DO
2nd byte DO
3rd byte DO
4th byte DO
5th byte DO
6th byte DO
7th byte DO

Output values of Group number, PMC path, and Y address depends on unit connection and I/O
address assignment.
Yn indicates the start address at allocation.
Description of Alarm data in the system relay area
Alarm data
#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

Note : DO alarm is detected not for each bit but for each byte in this module. It cannot be detected in
which bit a DO alarm occurs. 01H is output to Alarm data in the system relay area whichever
bit a DO alarm occurs.

CAUTION
1 The output protection function is not for external equipment but for internal device
of the module.
2 The output protection function cant protect the internal device in any case. If the
output protection function is activated, remove the cause immediately. If the
output exceed the absolute maximum rating, the output protection function may
not operate normally or the internal device may break before the output
protection function operates.
3 If the over current is continued with a condition that the output protection function
cant operate normally, the internal device might emit smoke or take fire.

- 177 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.3.11

B-64603EN/01

Connection of the Grounding Terminal of the Module

Connect the 0V line in the basic module to the cabinets metal plate that is connected to ground or signal
ground bar nearby via the protective ground terminal. About Multipoint grounding or Single-point
grounding, refer to Item 3.4.1

Protective ground terminal


(Fixed by M3 screw)
Cable(2mm2 or thicker)

In case of Multipoint grounding


Connect to the cabinet metal
plate which is connected to
ground
In case of Single-point grounding
Connect to the signal ground bar

- 178 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.4

CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR OPERATOR'S PANEL


AND I/O MODULE FOR POWER MAGNETICS CABINET

The difference between the I/O module for operator's panel and the I/O module for power magnetics
cabinet lies in whether an interface to a manual pulse generator is provided. The power magnetics cabinet
does not provide an interface to a manual pulse generator.

8.4.1

Overall Connection Diagram


I/O UNIT
CNC

JD1B
I/O Link i
JD51A

JD1A

JD1B

Manual pulse
generator

JA3

Manual pulse
generator
Manual pulse
generator

CE57
+24V power supply

CPD1(IN)

+24V power supply

CPD1(OUT)

Machine operators panel

CE56

NOTE
The following screw type connectors, newly incorporated into the main board of
control unit, cannot be used to connect the I/O Link i or manual pulse generator.
Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side
Specification
Connector case
Connector case and connector

FI-20-CV7
FI30-20S-CV7

- 179 -

Manufacturer
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.4.2

B-64603EN/01

Power Connection

Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the power necessary for the printed circuit board
operation and that for DI operation. To facilitate power division, the power is output to CPD1 (OUT)
exactly as it is input from CPD1 (IN). When power division is required, use CPD1 (OUT).
Up to 1.0 A can be supplied by branching.

CPD1(IN)

24 V power
supply

01

+24V

02

0V

03
CPD1(OUT)

24 V power
supply

01

+24V

02
03

0V

Recommended cable-side connector:


A02B-0120-K324 (including the following connector housing and contacts)
(Housing: Tyco Electronics 1-178288-3)
(Contacts: Tyco Electronics 1-175218-5)

NOTE
The specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN) is the same as that for
CPD1 (OUT). There are no indications on the printed circuit board to distinguish
between the IN and OUT connectors.

- 180 -

B-64603EN/01

8.4.3

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement

CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CE56 (B01) and CE57 (B01) is for DI signals.
Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.

- 181 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.4.4

DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection

0V

0V

- 182 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

0V

0V

- 183 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

0V

0V

- 184 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 and Xm+5.0 through Xm+5.7 are DI pins for which a
common voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the DICOM0 CE56(A14)
or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can be input with
its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected to ground, it has the
same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent this from occurring, the
connection of the DICOM0 CE56(A14) and DICOM5 CE57(B14) pins to the 0 V
power supply is recommended whereever possible.
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed,
the input is 0. For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which a common
voltage can be selected, the input is 0 when the DICOMx common select pin is
connected to the 0 V power supply or 1 when it is connected to the +24 V power
supply. Connect DICOM0 and DICOM5 when used. When addresses from Xm+0.0
to Xm+0.7 and Xm+5.0 to Xm+5.7 are not used, connect DICOM0 and DICOM5 to
the 0 V power supply.
Common voltage for general-purpose DI
Address
Common voltage
Xm
Xm+1
Xm+2
Xm+3
Xm+4
Xm+5

Can be selected with DICOM0.


Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.
Can be selected with DICOM5.

CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CE56 (B01) and CE57 (B01) is for DI signals.
Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.

- 185 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.4.5

DO (Output Signal) Connection

0V

- 186 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

0V

8.4.6

Manual Pulse Generator Connection

For an I/O module for operators panel, three manual pulse generators can be connected.
For the connection, see Subsection 7.4.1.

- 187 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

External View
5-3.2

95

65

95

8.4.7

B-64603EN/01

24 V power supply
connection

Manual pulse generator connection

Weight: 180g

I/O Link signal connection


Operator's panel DI/DO interface
24-V power supply

Note)

Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear face of the
printed circuit board. Ensure that the printed circuit boards are
spaced 5 mm or more from one another to prevent interference.

: Polarity guide
: A1 pin mark

Rear mounting area (Perspective drawing


viewed from the front)

- 188 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.4.8

Specifications

Installation specifications
Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.

Ordering specifications
Item

Ordering specifications

I/O module for operators panel B1


(with MPG interface)

Remarks
DI : 48 points
DO : 32 points
With MPG interface
DI : 48 points
DO : 32 points
Without MPG interface
1A

A03B-0824-K202

I/O module for power magnetics cabinet


B2
(without MPG interface)
Fuse (spare parts)

A03B-0824-K203
A03B-0815-K001

Module specifications
Item

Specification

DI points
DO points
MPG interface

48 points
32 points
Max. 3 units

Remarks
24-V input
24 V source type output
For A03B-0824-K202

Power supply rating


Module
I/O module for operators
panel and I/O module for
power magnetics cabinet

Supply voltage
24 VDC 10% supplied from the power
supply connector CPD1. The allowance
of 10% should include instantaneous
voltage and ripple voltage.

Power supply
rating
0.3A+7.3mADI

Remarks
DI = number of DI
points in the ON state

NOTE
To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and JD1B,
the above power supply rating + 70 mA is required.

DI (input signal specifications)


(General-purpose input signal)
Rated input
Contact rating
Leakage current between contacts when
opened
Voltage decrease between contacts
when closed
Delay time

24 VDC, 7.3 mA
30 VDC, 16 mA or more
1 mA or less (26.4 V)
2 V or less (including a cable voltage decrease)
The receiver delay time is 2 ms (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.

- 189 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

DO (output signal specifications)


Maximum load current when ON
Saturation voltage when ON
Withstand voltage
Leakage current when OFF
Delay time

200 mA or less including momentary current per signal. 5.6 A or less for
DO signals in all
1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA
24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
20A or less
The driver delay time is 50 s (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.

CAUTION
1 When inductive load is connected to DO terminal, connect a diode in parallel in
order to reduce the noise..
2 When capacitive load is connected to DO terminal, connect a resistor in series in
order to diminish the rush current.

Power supply for DO load (DOCOM)


Input voltage : min 0V, max 26.4V
Be sure to connect all power supply for DO load (DOCOM) pins.
Turn on the power supply for DO load (DOCOM) at the same time as the power for the control unit.
Turn off the power supply for DO load (DOCOM) when or before the power for the control unit is turned
off.

WARNING
For the safety of the system, dont supply the power for the load (DOCOM) when
the power for the I/O Unit is off. If the power for the load (DOCOM) is supplied
when the power for the I/O Unit is off, invalid output or malfunction may cause an
accident.

- 190 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.4.9

Other Notes

Address allocation
For this I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
DI space map
Xm1
Xm1 + 1
Xm1 + 2
Xm1 + 3
Xm1 + 4
Xm1 + 5
Xmmpg
(for 1st MPG)
Xmmpg + 1 (for 2nd MPG)
Xmmpg + 2 (for 3rd MPG)

Input signal

Manual pulse
generator

Slot 1

DO space map
Yn1
Output signal
Yn1 + 1
Yn1 + 2
Yn1 + 3

Slot 1

Slot MPG

Xm1, Xmmpg, and Yn1 indicate the start address at allocation.


Basically, for this I/O module, allocate 6-byte DI addresses to slot 1 and 4-byte DO addresses to slot 1.
An I/O module for operators panel has an interface for three manual pulse generators. To use manual
pulse generators, allocate addresses to slot MPG. With this setting, addresses can be allocated to the three
manual pulse generators at a time (addresses cannot be allocated individually to manual pulse generators).
Do not use this area with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.

ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output signals)
For ON/OFF of the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO signals (output signals), see Subsection
8.2.4.4.

Parallel DO (output signal) connection


For parallel connections of DO signals (output signals), see Subsection 8.2.4.4.

DO (output signal) alarm detection


The DO driver of the I/O module is capable of detecting an overcurrent and measuring its own
temperature. If an accident, such as the connecting of the cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase
in the load current or in the driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided for each DO driver,
is activated and keeps the DO signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFF state until the cause of the problem
is eliminated. Even if this occurs, the CNC and I/O module continues operating without entering the alarm
status, but the DO driver which detected the error can be checked. If a DO error occurs, this information
can be checked on the CNC DGN screen or alarm processing can be performed in advance using a ladder
to help error check and recovery.
For connection to the I/O Link i, a DO error such as a ground fault is detected for each point. This DO
error is transferred to the PMC system relay area as a status alarm. The following table lists system relay
area information and corresponding DO data related to a status alarm. When an alarm data bit is set to 1,
the DO driver corresponding to the bit detects an error. Also see Subsection 7.3.3, Status Alarm.
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred

- 191 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Information output to the system relay area


Alarm
information
Y address
Group
PMC
Slot
number
Type
(DO address)
number path number
(Intra-slot byte
address)

0 to 23

1 to 5, 9

0
1
2
3

Faulty location

Yn
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3

0th byte DO
1st byte DO
2nd byte DO
3rd byte DO

Output values of Group number, PMC path, and Y address depends on unit connection and I/O
address assignment.
Yn indicates the start address at allocation.
Description of Alarm data in the system relay area
Alarm data
#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

DO ground
fault at bit 7

DO ground
fault at bit 6

DO ground
fault at bit 5

DO ground
fault at bit 4

DO ground
fault at bit 3

DO ground
fault at bit 2

DO ground
fault at bit 1

DO ground
fault at bit 0

CAUTION
1 The output protection function is not for external equipment but for internal device
of the module.
2 The output protection function cant protect the internal device in any case. If the
output protection function is activated, remove the cause immediately. If the
output exceed the absolute maximum rating, the output protection function may
not operate normally or the internal device may break before the output
protection function operates.
3 If the over current is continued with a condition that the output protection function
cant operate normally, the internal device might emit smoke or take fire.

- 192 -

B-64603EN/01

8.4.10

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

Connection of the Grounding Terminal of the Module

Connect the 0V line in the basic module to the cabinets metal plate that is connected to ground or signal
ground bar nearby via the protective ground terminal. About Multipoint grounding or Single-point
grounding, refer to Item 3.4.1

Protective ground terminal


(Fixed by M3 screw)
Cable(2mm2 or thicker)

In case of Multipoint grounding


Connect to the cabinet metal
plate which is connected to
ground
In case of Single-point grounding
Connect to the signal ground bar

- 193 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.5

CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE TYPE-2 FOR CONNECTOR


PANEL

8.5.1

Configuration

I/O module for connector panel type-2 consists of the basic module and up to one extension module as
shown in the figure below.
I/O Link i connector

Fuse
Inter-module flat cable

Installed on
connector panel
PC board

I/O Link i connector


Connector for manual pulse generator

Extension module
Basic module

NOTE
As shown in the figure above, be sure to install the basic module to the left of the
extension module, viewed from the side of the flat cable for connecting modules.
This unit cannot be installed on the DIN rail.
In a maximum configuration, one basic module plus one expansion module can
be installed per group as shown above (DI/DO=96/64).

- 194 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.5.2

Connector Layout Diagram


Basic module
Fuse
FANUC I/O link i
connector (JD1B)

Connector for connector


panel PC board connection
(CB161)

FANUC I/O link i


connector (JD1A)

Connector for
inter-module connection
(CA140)

Connector for manual


pulse generator (JA3)

Front

Rear

Extension module

Connector for
inter-module
connection (CA141)

Connector for connector


panel PC board connection
(CB162)

Front

Rear

- 195 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.5.3

B-64603EN/01

Connection Diagram

CNC or preceding
I/O Link slave unit

Following I/O Link


slave unit

JD1B
JD1A(JD51A)

JD1A

JD1B
JA3

CB161
Manual pulse
generator
Manual pulse
generator

CA140

Flat cable

Connector panel

Manual pulse
generator

+24V
power

Basic module

CA141

CB161

DI/DO on
machine
side

Expansion module

NOTE
The maximum configuration of a group consists of one basic module plus one
expansion module as shown above. At this time, the number of input points is 96,
and the number of output points is 64. To add points, connect an additional slave
onto the I/O Link.

- 196 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.5.4

Module Specifications

Types of modules
Item

Ordering specifications

I/O module type-2 for connector panel (basic


module B1)
I/O module type-2 for connector panel (basic
module B2)
I/O module type-2 for connector panel (extension
module E1)
Fuse (spare parts)
Inter-module flat cable

A03B-0824-C040
A03B-0824-C041
A03B-0824-C042
A03B-0815-K002
A03B-0815-K102

Specification
DI/DO=48/32
With MPG interface
DI/DO=48/32
Without MPG interface
DI/DO=48/32
1 A (for basic module)
Cable length: 35 mm
Module interval: 5 mm

NOTE
Be sure to use modules with the ordering specifications listed above in
combination. Do not use other modules.

Installation conditions
(1) Use this I/O module in a completely sealed cabinet.
(2) Use the units under the following ambient temperature conditions:
Operation:
0C to 55C
Storage and transportation: -20C to 80C
(3) For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.
(4) For ventilation within each I/O module, allow a clearance of 40 mm or more between modules.
Moreover, allow a clearance of 50 mm or more above and below each module. Never place a device
that generates a large amount of heat below an I/O module.
(5) When mounting I/O modules, ensure that the basic module is mounted on the left side when viewed
from the flat cable.

Power supply rating


Module
Basic module
Extension module

Supply voltage
24 VDC 10% is fed through CB161 and
CB162; 10% includes momentary
variations and ripples.

Power supply rating


0.3A+7.3mADI
0.2A+7.3mADI

Remarks
DI = number of DI points
in the ON state
DI = number of DI points
in the ON state

As a guideline for heat dissipation, assume [power supply rating 24 (W)].

NOTE
1 The above power supply rating does not include that to be input to DOCOM for
DO output.
2 To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and
JD1B on the basic module, the above power supply rating + 70 mA is required for
the power supply of the basic module.

- 197 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.5.5

B-64603EN/01

DI/DO Connector Pin Assignment

This subsection describes the DI/DO connector pin assignment of the basic module and extension
modules.
Basic module
CB161(HONDA MRF-96MLST)
A

32
+24V
+24V
31
0V
0V
30
0V
0V
29
DICOM0
28
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
27
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
26
Xm+0.7
Xm+1.0
25
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
24
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.6
23
Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
22
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4
21
Xm+2.6
Xm+2.7
20
Xm+3.1
Xm+3.2
19
Xm+3.4
Xm+3.5
18
Xm+3.7
Xm+4.0
17
Xm+4.2
Xm+4.3
16
Xm+4.5
Xm+4.6
15
Xm+5.0
Xm+5.1
14
Xm+5.3
Xm+5.4
13
Xm+5.6
Xm+5.7
12
Yn+3.5
Yn+3.6
11
Yn+3.2
Yn+3.3
10
Yn+2.7
Yn+3.0
9
Yn+2.4
Yn+2.5
8
Yn+2.1
Yn+2.2
7 DOCOM23 DOCOM23
6
Yn+1.5
Yn+1.6
5
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.3
4
Yn+0.7
Yn+1.0
3
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.5
2
Yn+0.1
Yn+0.2
1 DOCOM0 DOCOM01

Extension module
CB162(HONDA MRF-96MLST)

+24V
0V
0V
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.6
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.7
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.5
Xm+3.0
Xm+3.3
Xm+3.6
Xm+4.1
Xm+4.4
Xm+4.7
Xm+5.2
Xm+5.5
DICOM3
Yn+3.7
Yn+3.4
Yn+3.1
Yn+2.6
Yn+2.3
Yn+2.0
Yn+1.7
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.1
Yn+0.6
Yn+0.3
Yn+0.0

32
+24V
31
0V
30
0V
29
28
Xm+6.1
27
Xm+6.4
26
Xm+6.7
25
Xm+7.2
24
Xm+7.5
23
Xm+8.0
22
Xm+8.3
21
Xm+8.6
20
Xm+9.1
19
Xm+9.4
18
Xm+9.7
17 Xm+10.2
16 Xm+10.5
15 Xm+11.0
14 Xm+11.3
13 Xm+11.6
12
Yn+7.5
11
Yn+7.2
10
Yn+6.7
9
Yn+6.4
8
Yn+6.1
7 DOCOM67
6
Yn+5.5
5
Yn+5.2
4
Yn+4.7
3
Yn+4.4
2
Yn+4.1
1 DOCOM45

+24V
0V
0V
DICOM6
Xm+6.2
Xm+6.5
Xm+7.0
Xm+7.3
Xm+7.6
Xm+8.1
Xm+8.4
Xm+8.7
Xm+9.2
Xm+9.5
Xm+10.0
Xm+10.3
Xm+10.6
Xm+11.1
Xm+11.4
Xm+11.7
Yn+7.6
Yn+7.3
Yn+7.0
Yn+6.5
Yn+6.2
DOCOM67
Yn+5.6
Yn+5.3
Yn+5.0
Yn+4.5
Yn+4.2
DOCOM45

+24V
0V
0V
Xm+6.0
Xm+6.3
Xm+6.6
Xm+7.1
Xm+7.4
Xm+7.7
Xm+8.2
Xm+8.5
Xm+9.0
Xm+9.3
Xm+9.6
Xm+10.1
Xm+10.4
Xm+10.7
Xm+11.2
Xm+11.5
DICOM9
Yn+7.7
Yn+7.4
Yn+7.1
Yn+6.6
Yn+6.3
Yn+6.0
Yn+5.7
Yn+5.4
Yn+5.1
Yn+4.6
Yn+4.3
Yn+4.0

NOTE
1 Each of Xm and Yn represents the start address of the module on the I/O Link.
2 The A32, B32, and C32 pins of each connector are used to feed 24 V to the module
externally. Be sure to connect these pins. Be sure to connect the A30, A31, B30,
B31, C30, and C31 pins to the 0 V power supply.

- 198 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.5.6

DI (Input Signal) Connection

This subsection describes the DI (input signal) connections of the basic module and extension moduless.
96 points maximum (Up to 48 points (basic module) + 48 points (extension modules) can be
connected.)
Address number

Pin number

Bit number

Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7

CB161(C29)

RV
RV

CB161(A28)

RV

CB161(B28)

RV

CB161(C28)

RV

CB161(A27)

RV

CB161(B27)

RV

CB161(C27)

RV

CB161(A26)

Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 are DI


signals for which a common
DICOM0
voltage can be selected.

CB161(A31,B31,C31,
A30,B30,C30)

0V
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.7

CB161(B29

CB161(B26)

RV

CB161(C26)

RV

CB161(A25)

RV

CB161(B25)

RV

CB161(C25)

RV

CB161(A24)

RV

CB161(B24)

RV

CB161(C24)

RV

+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized
power supply

0V

- 199 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Address number

Pin number

Bit number

Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.6
Xm+2.7

CB161(A23)

RV

CB161(B23)

RV

CB161(C23)

RV

CB161(A22)

RV

CB161(B22)

RV

CB161(C22)

RV

CB161(A21)

RV

CB161(B21)

RV

0V
Xm+3.0
Xm+3.1
Xm+3.2
Xm+3.3
Xm+3.4
Xm+3.5
Xm+3.6
Xm+3.7

CB161(C21)

RV

CB161(A20)

RV

CB161(B20)

RV

CB161(C20)

RV

CB161(A19)

RV

CB161(B19)

RV

CB161(C19)

RV

CB161(A18)

RV

Xm+3.0 to Xm+3.7 are DI


signals for which a common
DICOM3
voltage can be selected.

CB161(C1

CB161(A31,B31,C31,
A30,B30,C30)

0V

+24V
0V
+24V stabilized
power supply

- 200 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Address number

Pin number

Bit number

Xm+4.0
Xm+4.1
Xm+4.2
Xm+4.3
Xm+4.4
Xm+4.5
Xm+4.6
Xm+4.7

CB161(B18)

RV

CB161(C18)

RV

CB161(A17)

RV

CB161(B17)

RV

CB161(C17)

RV

CB161(A16)

RV

CB161(B16)

RV

CB161(C16)

RV

0V
Xm+5.0
Xm+5.1
Xm+5.2
Xm+5.3
Xm+5.4

CB161(B15)

RV

CB161(C15)

RV

CB161(A14)

RV

CB161(B14)

RV

Xm+5.5

RV

Xm+5.6

RV

Xm+5.7

CB161(A15)

RV

CB161(C14)
CB161(A13)
CB161(B13)

RV

0V

CB161(A31,B31,C31,
A30,B30,C30)

+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized
power supply

- 201 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Address number

Pin number

Bit number

Xm+6.0
Xm+6.1
Xm+6.2
Xm+6.3
Xm+6.4
Xm+6.5
Xm+6.6
Xm+6.7

CB162(C29)

RV

CB162(A28)

RV

CB162(B28)

RV

CB162(C28)

RV

CB162(A27)

RV

CB162(B27)

RV

CB162(C27)

RV

CB162(A26)

RV

Xm+6.0 to Xm+6.7 are DI


signals for which a common
voltage can be selected.

CB162(B29)

CB162(A31,B31,C31,
A30,B30,C30)

0V
Xm+7.0
Xm+7.1
Xm+7.2
Xm+7.3
Xm+7.4
Xm+7.5
Xm+7.6
Xm+7.7

CB162(B26)

RV

CB162(C26)

RV

CB162(A25)

RV

CB162(B25)

RV

CB162(C25)

RV

CB162(A24)

RV

CB162(B24)

RV

CB162(C24)

RV

+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized
power supply

0V

- 202 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Address number

Pin number

Bit number

Xm+8.0
Xm+8.1
Xm+8.2
Xm+8.3
Xm+8.4
Xm+8.5
Xm+8.6
Xm+8.7

CB162(A23)

RV

CB162(B23)

RV

CB162(C23)

RV

CB162(A22)

RV

CB162(B22)

RV

CB162(C22)

RV

CB162(A21)

RV

CB162(B21)

RV

0V
Xm+9.0
Xm+9.1
Xm+9.2
Xm+9.3
Xm+9.4
Xm+9.5
Xm+9.6
Xm+9.7

CB162(C21)

RV

CB162(A20)

RV

CB162(B20)

RV

CB162(C20)

RV

CB162(A19)

RV

CB162(B19)

RV

CB162(C19)

RV

CB162(A18)

RV

Xm+9.0 to Xm+9.7 are DI


signals for which a common
voltage can be selected.

CB162(C13)
DICOM9

CB162(A31,B31,C31,
A30,B30,C30)

0V

+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized
power supply

- 203 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Address number

Pin number

Bit number

Xm+10.0
Xm+10.1
Xm+10.2
Xm+10.3
Xm+10.4
Xm+10.5
Xm+10.6
Xm+10.7

CB162(B18)

RV

CB162(C18)

RV

CB162(A17)

RV

CB162(B17)

RV

CB162(C17)

RV

CB162(A16)

RV

CB162(B16)

RV

CB162(C16)

RV

0V
Xm+11.0
Xm+11.1
Xm+11.2
Xm+11.3
Xm+11.4
Xm+11.5
Xm+11.6
Xm+11.7

CB162(A15)

RV

CB162(B15)

RV

CB162(C15)

RV

CB162(A14)

RV

CB162(B14)

RV

CB162(C14)

RV

CB162(A13)

RV

CB162(B13)

RV

CB162(A31,B31,C31,
A30,B30,C30)

0V
+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized
power supply

- 204 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
A common voltage can be selected for DI signals at Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7, Xm+3.0 to
Xm+3.7, Xm+6.0 to Xm+6.7, and Xm+9.0 to Xm+9.7. That is, by connecting the
DICOM0, DICOM3, DICOM6, and DICOM9 pins to the +24 V power supply, a DI
signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected
to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent
such accidents, the connection of these pins to the 0 V power supply is
recommended wherever possible.
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed,
the input is 0. For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which a common
voltage can be selected, the input is 0 when the DICOMx common select pin is
connected to the 0 V power supply or 1 when it is connected to the +24 V power
supply. Connect DICOM0, DICOM3, DICOM6, and DICOM9 when used. When the
corresponding address input is not used, connect the DICOM pins to the 0 V power
supply.
Common voltage for general-purpose DI
Address
Xm
Xm+1
Xm+2
Xm+3
Xm+4
Xm+5
Xm+6
Xm+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11

Common voltage
Can be selected with DICOM0.
Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.
Can be selected with DICOM3.
Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.
Can be selected with DICOM6.
Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.
Can be selected with DICOM9.
Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.

- 205 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.5.7

B-64603EN/01

DO (Output Signal) Connection

This subsection describes the DO (output signal) connections of the basic module and extension modules.
64 points maximum (Up to 32 points (basic module) + 32 points (extension modules) can be
connected.)
Pin number
DOCOM01

CB161(A01,B01)

Address number

+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized
power supply

Bit number

Yn+0.0

CB161(C01)
DV

Yn+0.1

DV

CB161(A02)

Yn+0.2

DV

CB161(B02)

Yn+0.3

DV

CB161(C02)

Yn+0.4

DV

CB161(A03)

Yn+0.5

DV

CB161(B03)

Yn+0.6

DV

CB161(C03)

Yn+0.7

DV

CB161(A04)

Yn+1.0

DV

CB161(B04)

Yn+1.1

DV

CB161(C04)

Yn+1.2

DV

CB161(A05)

Yn+1.3

DV

CB161(B05)

Yn+1.4

DV

CB161(C05)

Yn+1.5

DV

CB161(A06)

Yn+1.6

DV

CB161(B06)

Yn+1.7

DV

CB161(C06)

CB161(A31,B31,C31,
A30,B30,C30)

0V

- 206 -

Relay

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Pin number
DOCOM23

CB161(A07,B07)
+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized
power supply

Address number
Bit number

Yn+2.0

CB161(C07)
DV

Yn+2.1
Yn+2.2
Yn+2.3
Yn+2.4
Yn+2.5
Yn+2.6
Yn+2.7

DV

CB161(A08)

DV

CB161(B08)

DV

CB161(C08)

DV

CB161(A09)

DV

CB161(B09)

DV

CB161(C09)

DV

CB161(A10)

Yn+3.0

DV

CB161(B10)

Yn+3.1

DV

CB161(C10)

Yn+3.2

DV

CB161(A11)

Yn+3.3

DV

CB161(B11)

Yn+3.4

DV

CB161(C11)

Yn+3.5

DV

CB161(A12)

Yn+3.6

DV

CB161(B12)

Yn+3.7

DV

CB161(C12)

CB161(A31,B31,C31,
A30,B30,C30)

0V

- 207 -

Relay

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Pin number
DOCOM45

CB162(A01,B01)

+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized
power supply

Address number
Bit number

Yn+4.0

CB162(C01)
DV

Yn+4.1
Yn+4.2
Yn+4.3
Yn+4.4
Yn+4.5
Yn+4.6
Yn+4.7
Yn+5.0
Yn+5.1
Yn+5.2
Yn+5.3
Yn+5.4
Yn+5.5
Yn+5.6
Yn+5.7

DV

CB162(A02)

DV

CB162(B02)

DV

CB162(C02)

DV

CB162(A03)

DV

CB162(B03)

DV

CB162(C03)

DV

CB162(A04)

DV

CB162(B04)

DV

CB162(C04)

DV

CB162(A05)

DV

CB162(B05)

DV

CB162(C05)

DV

CB162(A06)

DV

CB162(B06)

DV

CB162(C06)

CB162(A31,B31,C31,
A30,B30,C30)

0V

- 208 -

Relay

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Pin number
DOCOM67

CB162(A07,B07)
+24V
0V
+24 V stabilized
power supply

Address number
Bit number

Yn+6.0

CB162(C07)
DV

Yn+6.1
Yn+6.2
Yn+6.3
Yn+6.4
Yn+6.5
Yn+6.6
Yn+6.7
Yn+7.0
Yn+7.1
Yn+7.2
Yn+7.3
Yn+7.4
Yn+7.5
Yn+7.6
Yn+7.7

DV

CB162(A08)

DV

CB162(B08)

DV

CB162(C08

DV

CB162(A09)

DV

CB162(B09)

DV

CB162(C09)

DV

CB162(A10)

DV

CB162(B10)

DV

CB162(C10)

DV

CB162(A11)

DV

CB162(B11)

DV

CB162(C11)

DV

CB162(A12)

DV

CB162(B12)

DV

CB162(C12)

CB162(A31,B31,C31,
A30,B30,C30)

0V

- 209 -

Relay

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.5.8

B-64603EN/01

DI/DO Signal Specifications

This subsection describes the specifications of the DI/DO signals used with the basic module and
extension modules.
DI (input signal specifications)
Number of points
Rated input
Delay time

48 points (per module)


DC24V, 7.3mA
The receiver delay time is 2 ms (maximum). In addition, [I/O Link transfer time
between CNC and I/O module] and [ladder scan period (depending on CNC)]
must be considered.

Contact rating
Leakage current between
contacts when opened
Voltage decrease between
contacts when closed

30 VDC, 16 mA or more
1mA or less(26.4V)

DIcontact specification

2 V or less (including a cable voltage decrease)

DO(output signal specifications)


Number of points
Maximum load current when ON
Saturation voltage when ON
Withstand voltage
Leakage current when OFF
Delay time

32 points (per module)


200 mA or less including momentary variations
1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA
24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
20A or less
The driver delay time is 50 s (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module] and [ladder
scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.

CAUTION
1 When inductive load is connected to DO terminal, connect a diode in parallel in
order to reduce the noise..
2 When capacitive load is connected to DO terminal, connect a resistor in series in
order to diminish the rush current.

Power supply for DO load (DOCOM)


Input voltage : min 0V, max 26.4V
Be sure to connect all power supply for DO load (DOCOM) pins.
Turn on the power supply for DO load (DOCOM) at the same time as the power for the control unit.
Turn off the power supply for DO load (DOCOM) when or before the power for the control unit is turned
off.

WARNING
For the safety of the system, dont supply the power for the load (DOCOM) when
the power for the I/O Unit is off. If supply the power for the load (DOCOM) when
the power for the I/O Unit is off, invalid output or malfunction may cause an
accident.

- 210 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output signals)
For ON/OFF of the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO signals (output signals), see Subsection
8.2.4.4.

Parallel DO (output signal) connection


For parallel connections of DO signals (output signals), see Subsection 8.2.4.4.

8.5.9

Power Supply Connection

+24V

CB161(A32,B32,C32)
CB162(A32,B32,C32)

+24V

0V

+24V stabilized power supply

0V

8.5.10

CB161(A31,B31,C31, A30,B30,C30)
CB162(A31,B31,C31, A30,B30,C30)

Manual Pulse Generator Connection

For I/O module for connector panel type-2, three manual pulse generators can be connected to the basic
module.
For the connection, see Subsection 7.4.1.

8.5.11

Connection between Modules

Connect the basic module with an extension modules by using a 34-pin flat cable. At this time, install an
extension modules on the right side of the basic module to prevent the I/O Link i connector from being
covered by the flat cable.

- 211 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

40 mm

A1 pin mark
34-pin flat cable

I/O Link i
connector

Basic module

Expansion module

Front view

Flat cable-side connector : Hirose Electric:HIF3BA-34DA-2.54R


Module-side connector : Hirose Electric:3BA-34PA-2.54DS or
Yamaichi Denki:FAP-3403-1202-0BS

NOTE
When installing a flat cable, ensure that all pins are connected on a one-to-one
basis.
The modules must be spaced at least 40 mm apart.
In this case, the length of the flat cable is about 35 mm. When the modules are
separated furthermore, the length of the flat cable is:
35 mm + (module spacing - 40 mm)
Note, however, that the maximum allowable flat cable length is 300 mm.

- 212 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.5.12

Unit Dimensions

The basic module and extension modules have the same dimensions.

Weight: Basic module


Extension modules

280 g
210 g

- 213 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.5.13

B-64603EN/01

Mounting the Module

Mounting the module


1. Insert the hook of the module into the square hole located at the upper part of the connector panel
printed circuit board.
2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, push the module in the direction of A and mate the module's connector
with the connector on the printed circuit board.
3. Push the stopper into the square hole located at the lower part of the connector panel printed circuit
board until it clicks into place.
Dismounting the module
1. Press point B of the stopper.
2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, pull the lower part of the module in the direction of C.

NOTE
When mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and
bottom surfaces. Avoid applying force to the sides (where slits are provided).

Connector panel PC board

Hook

Stopper

- 214 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.5.14

Connector Panel Printed Circuit Board


PC board thickness: 1.70.1mm
Square hole (1412), R1
Printing prohibited
area on solder side
(145)

I/O module
mounting area
(component
mounting
prohibited)

Connector panel PC board mounting plane

Printing
prohibited area
on component
side (4 - 53)

Provide pedestals on
solder side to
prevent warpage at
I/O module insertion
time

MRF-96MD
A1 pin

Printing
prohibited area
on solder side
(143)

Square hole (146), R1

Connector panel PC board


Provide a clearance of at least
6 mm.
Connector specifications of the connection printed circuit board: HONDA MRF-96FDST(straight, 96 pins, female)

- 215 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

50mm

10mm

10mm

Basic
module

Expansion module

50mm
When two modules are placed side by side, the
modules must be spaced at least 40 mm apart.

NOTE
1 To ensure adequate ventilation within an I/O module, allow a clearance of 50 mm
or more above and below the module and a clearance of 10 mm or more on the
left and right sides. Never place a device that generates a large amount of heat
below an I/O module.
2 To the front panel of an I/O module, the cables for the I/O Link i and manual pulse
generator are connected.
For cabling, allow a clearance of about 70 mm at the front of an I/O module.
3 Space the basic module and extension modules at least 40 mm apart from each
other.
4 An I/O module is secured to the connector panel by inserting the hook into a hole
on the connector panel as with the current distribution I/O module. Allow a
clearance for hooking on the rear side of the connector panel.
5 For securing an I/O module, four printing prohibited areas are provided on the
surface of the connector panel, and a printing prohibited area is also provided
beside the upper and lower square holes on the rear side.
6 When mounting the basic module and extension modules side by side, ensure
that the basic module is mounted on the left side when viewed from the I/O Link i
connector.
7 When inserting an I/O module into the connector panel, provide pedestals at
positions nearest to the connector of the connector panel to support the top and
bottom areas of the connector from the rear side to protect the connector panel
from being warped.
8 Ensure that the thickness of the connector panel printed circuit board is 1.7 mm
0.1 mm.
- 216 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

Dimensions of the connector (HONDA MRF-96FDST) for the connector panel printed circuit board
(Part order specification drawing number: A03B-0815-K030)

<1>
<2>
<3>

Unit: mm
<1> Insulator
<2> Locking hardware
<3> Contact

- 217 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.5.15

B-64603EN/01

Other Notes

Address allocation
For this I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follow:
DI space map
Xm1
Xm1 + 1
Xm1 + 2
Xm1 + 3
Xm1 + 4
Xm1 + 5

Basic module

Slot 1

Xm2
Xm2 + 1
Xm2 + 2
Xm2 + 3
Xm2 + 4
Xm2 + 5

Extension
module

Slot 2

Xmmpg
(for 1st MPG)
Xmmpg + 1 (for 2nd MPG)
Xmmpg + 2 (for 3rd MPG)

Basic module

Slot MPG

DO space map
Yn1
Basic module
Yn1 + 1
Yn1 + 2
Yn1 + 3

Yn2
Yn2 + 1
Yn2 + 2
Yn2 + 3

Extension
module

Slot 1

Slot 2

Xm1, Xm2, Xmmpg, Yn1, and Yn2 indicate the start address at allocation.
Each module of I/O module for connector panel type-2 is treated as a slot and addresses are allocated for
each module. When only the basic module is used, allocate 6-byte DI addresses and 4-byte DO addresses
to slot 1. When an extension module is used, allocate 6-byte DI addresses and 4-byte DO addresses to slot
2.
I/O module for connector panel type-2 has an interface for three manual pulse generators. To use manual
pulse generators, allocate addresses to slot MPG. With this setting, addresses can be allocated to the three
manual pulse generators at a time (addresses cannot be allocated individually to manual pulse generators).
Do not use these addresses with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.

DO (output signal) alarm detection


The DO driver of this I/O module is capable of detecting an overcurrent and measuring its own
temperature. If an accident, such as connecting the cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in the
load current or in the driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided for each DO driver, is
activated which keeps the DO signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFF state until the cause of the problem
is eliminated. Even if this occurs, the CNC and I/O module continues operating without entering the alarm
status, but the DO driver which detected the error can be checked. If a DO error occurs, this information
can be checked on the CNC DGN screen or alarm processing can be performed in advance using a ladder
to help error check and recovery.
A DO error such as a ground fault is detected for each point. This DO error is transferred to the PMC
system relay area as a status alarm. The following table lists system relay area information and
corresponding DO data related to a status alarm. When an alarm data bit is set to 1, the DO driver
corresponding to the bit detects an error. Also see Subsection 7.3.3, Status Alarm.

- 218 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
Information output to the system relay area
Alarm
information
Y address
Group
PMC
Slot
number
Type
(DO address)
number path number
(Intra-slot byte
address)
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3

1
0

0 to 23

1 to 5, 9
2

Yn1
Yn1+1
Yn1+2
Yn1+3
Yn2
Yn2+1
Yn2+2
Yn2+3

Faulty location

0th
1st
2nd
3rd
0th
1st
2nd
3rd

byte DO of
byte DO of
byte DO of
byte DO of
byte DO of
byte DO of
byte DO of
byte DO of

Basic module
Basic module
Basic module
Basic module
Extension module
Extension module
Extension module
Extension module

Output values of Group number, PMC path, and Y address depends on unit connection and I/O
address assignment.
Yn1 and Yn2 indicate the start address at allocation.
Description of Alarm data in the system relay area
Alarm data
#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

DO ground
fault at bit 7

DO ground
fault at bit 6

DO ground
fault at bit 5

DO ground
fault at bit 4

DO ground
fault at bit 3

DO ground
fault at bit 2

DO ground
fault at bit 1

DO ground
fault at bit 0

CAUTION
1 The output protection function is not for external equipment but for internal device
of the module.
2 The output protection function cant protect the internal device in any case. If the
output protection function is activated, remove the cause immediately. If the
output exceed the absolute maximum rating, the output protection function may
not operate normally or the internal device may break before the output
protection function operates.
3 If the over current is continued with a condition that the output protection function
cant operate normally, the internal device might emit smoke or take fire.

- 219 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.5.16

B-64603EN/01

Connection of the Grounding Terminal of the Module

Connect the 0V line in the basic module to the cabinets metal plate that is connected to ground or signal
ground bar nearby via the protective ground terminal. About Multipoint grounding or Single-point
grounding, refer to Item 3.4.1
Use fasten terminal for series 250 as cable terminal.

Cable(2mm2 or thicker)

Protective ground terminal


(Faston terminal)

In case of Multipoint grounding


Connect to the cabinet metal
plate which is connected to
ground
In case of Single-point grounding
Connect to the signal ground bar

- 220 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.6

CONNECTION OF TERMINAL TYPE I/O MODULE

8.6.1

Overview

The terminal type I/O module has the following features:

Input/output signals are connected on a spring-type terminal block (ferrule terminal block).
A terminal block can be attached to or detached from the main body of the module.
An LED for state indication is provided for each I/O signal.
The terminal type I/O module can be installed on the DIN rail.
By using extension modules, the maximum number of digital input points can be extended to 96 and
the maximum number of digital output points can be extended to 64.
An extension module with a manual pulse generator (MPG) interface is available.

NOTE
Extension modules D and E have no LED for state indication.
CNC, etc.
Operator's
panel I/O

I/O Link

I/O Link

Terminal type I/O


module
(Basic module)

Terminal type I/O


module
(Extension module)

Input
Output
24 points 16 points

- 221 -

Input
Output
24 points 16 points

Up to 3 extension
modules can be
connected.

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.6.2

Module Specifications

8.6.2.1

Types of modules
Item

Ordering specifications

Basic module

A03B-0823-C011

Extension module A

A03B-0823-C012

Extension module B

A03B-0823-C013

Extension module C

A03B-0823-C014

Extension module D
Extension module E
Fuse (spare parts)
Spare terminal block set
(for basic module and extension
module A/B)
Spare terminal block set
(for extension module C)
Spare terminal block set
(for extension module D)
Spare terminal block set
(for extension module E)

A03B-0823-C015
A03B-0823-C016
A03B-0823-K001

Inter-module cable A

A03B-0823-K100

A03B-0823-K020
A03B-0823-K011
A03B-0823-K012
A03B-0823-K013

B-64603EN/01

Specification
DI/DO: 24/16
DI/DO : 24/16
With MPG interface
DI/DO : 24/16
Without MPG interface
DO : 16
2-A output module
Analog input module
Analog output module
2A (for basic module)
Cable-side terminal block set (including each
of T1 through T4)
Cable-side terminal block set (including each
of T1 and T2)
Cable-side terminal block set (including each
of T1 and T2)
Cable-side terminal block set (including each
of T1 and T2)
Cable length: 100 mm
Used for extension module connection

NOTE
A cable-side terminal block is shipped with the main unit. Spare terminal blocks are
used for replacement.
Module specifications (common items)
Item
Interface between basic module
and extension modules

Specification
Bus connection using a flat cable

Remarks
Up to three extension modules connectable
per basic module. Up to two extension
modules D connectable, however.

For the specifications (such as signal input requirements) specific to each module, see the relevant pages
of each item.

NOTE
Be sure to use modules with the ordering specifications listed above in combination.
Do not use other modules.

- 222 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.6.2.2

Installation conditions

(1) Use this I/O module in a completely sealed cabinet.


(2) Use the units under the following ambient temperature conditions:
Operation:
0C to 55C
Storage and transportation: -20C to 80C
(3) For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.
(4) Be sure to install this module on a vertical surface and provide a clearance of 100 mm or more both
above and below the module. Do not place equipment that generates a large amount of heat below
the I/O module.

8.6.2.3

I/O signal specifications

Basic module, Extension modules A and B


Digital input
Number of points
Common
Rated input voltage
Rated input current
Polarity

24 points
8 points/common (6 common terminals)
24 VDC (+10%, 10%)
7 mA (average)
Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7: Sink or source type selectable
Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7, Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7: Sink type
20 VDC or more, 6 mA or more
8 VDC or less, 1.5 mA or less
The receiver delay time is 2 ms (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.

ON voltage/current
OFF voltage/current
Response time

Digital output
Number of points
Common
Rated output voltage
Rated output current
Polarity
Maximum voltage decrease when ON
Maximum leakage current when OFF
Output protection function
Response time

16 points
8 points/common (8 common terminals)
12 VDC to 24 VDC (+20%, 15%)
0.2A/pt
Source type
0.63 V (load current 1.25)
40 A
Protection against overheat and overcurrent
The driver delay time is 50 s (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.

Output protection and abnormal detection


Connection

Module name

I/O Link i

Basic module
Extension module A
Extension module B

Unit of output

Unit of abnormal

Area of abnormal

protection

detection

detection information

1point
1point
1point

1point
1point
1point

System relay area


System relay area
System relay area

- 223 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

CAUTION
1 The protection function is intended to protect the components internal to the
modules rather than external units.
2 No protection function of modules can protect their internal components in all
cases. Once any protection function has worked, remove the cause promptly. If
an absolute maximum rating is exceeded, for example, it is likely that protection
functions may not work or an IC may break down before the related protection
function works, depending on the way or situation in which the modules are used.
3 If an output protection function is defective, it is likely that, if the load current
exceeds its rating continuously for a long time, smoke or ignition may occur.
Extension module C
Digital output
Number of points
Common
Rated output voltage
Rated output current
Polarity
Maximum voltage decrease when ON
Maximum leakage current when OFF
Insulation method
Output protection function
Response time

16 points
4 points/common
12 VDC to 24 VDC (+20%, 15%)
2 A/pt (4 A/common)
Source type
0.18 V (load current 0.09)
0.1mA
Photocoupler insulation
Protection against overheat, overcurrent, short-circuiting, and
disconnection detection
The driver delay time is 50 s (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.

Output protection and abnormal detection


Connection
I/O Link i

Unit of output

Unit of abnormal

Area of abnormal detection

protection

detection

information

1point

1point

DI area (See 8.6.6.4)

CAUTION
1 The protection function is intended to protect the components internal to the
modules rather than external units.
2 No protection function of modules can protect their internal components in all
cases. Once any protection function has worked, remove the cause promptly. If
an absolute maximum rating is exceeded, for example, it is likely that protection
functions may not work or an IC may break down before the related protection
function works, depending on the way or situation in which the modules are used.
3 If an output protection function is defective, it is likely that, if the load current
exceeds its rating continuously for a long time, smoke or ignition may occur.
4 For connection at Extension module C, the area of abnormal detection
information is not system relay area, but DI area.
Extension module D
Analog input
Number of input channels
Analog input range

4 channels
-10 VDC to +10 VDC
(Input resistance: 4.7 M)
-20 VDC to +20 mA
(Input resistance: 250)

- 224 -

Voltage input or current input can


be selected on a
channelbychannel basis by
wiring.

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Digital conversion range

12 bits (binary), two's complement representation


See Subsection 8.6.6.2, Channel selection and A/D conversion data for
extension module D.

Input/output correspondence

Resolution
Overall precision
Maximum input voltage/current
A-D conversion time
Minimum update period of digital output
Number of occupied input/output points

Analog input
+10
+5V or +20mA
0V or 0mA
-5V or -20mA
-10V

Digital output
+2000
+1000
0
-1000
-2000

5 mV or 20 A
Voltage input: 0.5 (with respect to full scale)
Current input: 1.0 (with respect to full scale)
15 V/30 mA
2 ms or less
Ladder scan period of CNC connected
(NOTE)
DI = 3 bytes, DO = 2 bytes

NOTE
This module has four analog input channels but has only one 12-bit digital output
channel within the occupied input points (3 bytes). Namely, a channel for
conversion is selected dynamically using a ladder program. Channel switching DO
points for selecting a channel are present in the occupied output points (2 bytes).
(See Subsection 8.6.6.2, Channel selection and A/D conversion data for extension
module D.)
Extension module E
Analog output
(Note 1)

Number of input channels


(Note 2)
Analog output range
Digital conversion range

4 channels
-10 VDC to +10 VDC (external load resistance 10k or more)
0 VDC to +20 mA (external load resistance 400 or less)
12 bits (binary), two's complement representation
See Subsection 8.6.6.3, Channel selection and D/A conversion
data for extension module E.

Input/output correspondence

Digital input
+2000
+1000
0
-1000
-2000
Resolution
Overall precision
(Note 3)

D- conversion time
Minimum update period of digital input
(Note 4)
Number of occupied input/output points

Analog output
Voltage output
Current output
+10V
+5V
0V
-5V
-10V

+20mA
0mA
-

5 mV or 20 A
Voltage input: 0.5 (with respect to full scale)
Current input: 1.0 (with respect to full scale)
1ms or less
Ladder scan period of CNC connected
For connection to the I/O Link i: DO = 2 bytes

- 225 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
1 One of the four channels must be selected for output using a ladder program.
(See Subsection 8.6.6.3, Channel selection and D/A conversion data for
extension module E.)
2 There is a choice between use for voltage output or use for current output during
connection to the terminal section.
3 The conversion time refers to that only within the module. The actual response
time includes the scan time determined depending on the system.

8.6.2.4

Power supply rating

Module name
Basic module

Supply voltage
24 VDC 10%

Extension modules A, B

Supplied from the basic module

Extension module C
Extension module D
Extension module E

Supplied from the basic module


Supplied from the basic module
Supplied from the basic module

Current rating
0.2 A + 7.3 mA DI
(DI: Number of DI points in the ON state)
0.1 A + 7.3 mA DI
(DI: Number of DI points in the ON state)
0.1A
0.1A
0.16A

NOTE
1 The above power supply rating does not include that to be input to DOCOM0 and
DOCOM1 for DO output.
2 To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and
JD1B on the basic module, the above power supply rating + 70 mA is required for
the power supply of the basic module.

8.6.2.5

Heat dissipation

The heat dissipation of a module is the sum of "Basic heat dissipation" in the table below plus the total
obtained by multiplying each of "Heat dissipation per input point" and "Heat dissipation per output point"
in the table below by the number of points that are turned on at the same time.
Module name

Basic heat dissipation


(W)

Heat dissipation per


input point (W)

Basic module
Extension modules A, B
Extension module C
Extension module D
Extension module E

4.8
2.4
2.4
2.4
3.8

0.23
0.23
-

Heat dissipation per


output point (W)
IL: Output load current
2
0.04+0.9IL
2
0.04+0.9IL
2
0.04+0.1IL
-

[Calculation example]
When 16 input points, eight 0.1-A output points, and four 0.2-A output points are used for the basic
module, and eight 2-A output points are used for extension module C
P=4.8+0.2316+(0.04+0.90.12)8+(0.04+0.90.22)4+1.0+(0.04+0.0922)8
=13.4W

8.6.2.6

Weight
Module name
Basic module
Extension module A
Extension module B
Extension module C

Weight (g)
420
400
380
440

- 226 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Module name
Extension module D
Extension module E

8.6.2.7

Weight (g)
400
400

Applicable wire

Electric wires and ferrule terminals used for connection with a terminal block of this module should have
the following dimensions:
Electric wire size

Ferrule terminal
D3
D2
Insulation cover

L2

D1

Cross sectional area


of electric
wire
2
(mm )

JIS VSF
KIV
2
(mm )

JIS IV
(mm2)

0.5

0.75

0.5

1.0

0.75

0.9

The dimensions indicated below are based on the products of


Weidmuller Color., Ltd.
Outer
Inner
Length of
Inner
Electric wire
diamUL1007 UL1015 sheath
Overall
diameter of
stripped
metallic
diameter
coneter of
length
length
part
of sheath
ductor
sheath
(AWG) (AWG)
L1 (mm)
(mm)
L2 (mm) D1 (mm) D2 (mm)
D3 (mm)
10
14
8
20
1
2.6
3.1
12
16
10
10
14
8
18
20
1.2
2.8
3.3
12
16
10
10
14
8
18
1.4
3
3.5
12
16
10

NOTE
Use a ferrule terminal from the viewpoint of long-term reliability.

- 227 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.6.3

External View and Dimensions

8.6.3.1

Dimensions (common to the modules)

B-64603EN/01

Unit: mm

8.6.3.2

Dimensions in a maximum configuration (one basic module +


three extension modules)
Unit: mm

- 228 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.6.3.3

Component names

Basic module A03B0823C011

A (See figure at right.)

DI/DO status display LED

As seen from A in figure at left.

T2
T1
Communication
status display
LED
Alarm status
display LED
T4
T3
JD1A

CP11

JD1B

Ground terminal
Blown fuse display LED

Fuse, 2 A

- 229 -

CA105
Connector /
terminal
Use
board
number
CP11
24-VDC power supply input
JD1A
Second I/O link stage
JD1B
First I/O link stage
CA105
Extension module connection
T1
DO terminal board with aqua label
T2
DO terminal board with lime green
label
T3
DI terminal board with yellow label
T4
DI terminal board with pink label

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i


Extension module A

A (See figure at right.)

A03B0823C012

B-64603EN/01

As seen from A in figure at left.


(Common to A03B-0823-C012 and A03B-0823-C013)

DI/DO status display LED


CA105
CA106

T1

T2

T4

T3

JA3

Rotary switch

Extension module B

A (See figure at right.)

A03B0823C013

DI/DO status display LED

Connector /
terminal
Use
board
number
CA105
Extension module connection
(to next-stage extension module)
CA106
Extension module connection
(to previous-stage basic module)
T1
DO terminal board with aqua label
T2
DO terminal board with lime green
label
T3
DI terminal board with yellow label
T4
DI terminal board with pink label

T2
T1

T4
S

Connector /
terminal
Use
board
number
JA3
MPG interface
CA105
Extension module connection
(to next-stage extension module)
CA106
Extension module connection
(to previous-stage basic module)
T1
DO terminal board with aqua label
T2
DO terminal board with lime green
label
T3
DI terminal board with yellow label
T4
DI terminal board with pink label

T3
Rotary switch

NOTE
Be sure to connect extension module A next to the basic module.
- 230 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Extension module C

A (See figure at right.)

As seen from A in figure at left. (Common to


A03B-0823-C014 and A03B-0823-C015)

A03B0823C014
DO status display LED (green)

CA105

DO alarm display LED (red)

CA106

T1
Connector /
terminal
board
number
CA105
CA106

T1
T2

T2

Use
Extension module connection
(to next-stage expansion module)
Extension module connection
(to previous-stage basic or extension
module)
DO terminal board with aqua label
DO terminal board with lime green label

Rotary switch

Extension module D

A03B0823C015

A (See figure at right.)

T1
Connector /
terminal
board
number
CA105
CA106

T2

T1
T2

Rotary switch

- 231 -

Use
Extension module connection
(to next-stage expansion module)
Extension module connection
(to previous-stage basic or extension
module)
Analog input CH1 and CH2 terminal board
with yellow label
Analog input CH3 and CH4 terminal board
with pink label

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i


Extension module E

B-64603EN/01

A03B0823C016
As seen from A in figure at left.

A (See figure at right.)


CA105
CA106
T1

Connector /
terminal
board
number
CA105
CA106

T2

T1
T2

Use
Extension module connection
(to next-stage expansion module)
Extension module connection
(to previous-stage basic or extension
module)
Analog output CH1 and CH2 terminal
board with lime green label
Analog output CH3 and CH4 terminal
board with sky blue label

Rotary switch

8.6.4

Installation

Mounting holes for screwing


Front view of the module

- 232 -

Unit: mm

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

Using a DIN rail for mounting


1) Method of mounting

DIN rail

Locking section

1)
2)

Place the hook of the module onto the top of the DIN rail.
Push the module until it clicks into place.

NOTE
Ensure that the locking section is not left lowered.
2) Method of dismounting

DIN rail

1)
2)

Lower the locking section with a flat-blade screwdriver.


Pull the lower part of the module toward you.

NOTE
When dismounting the module, be careful not to damage the locking section by
applying an excessive force.

- 233 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.6.5

Connection

8.6.5.1

Overall connection diagram

B-64603EN/01

CNC
I/O Link
JD51A

FANUC I/O Link


JD1B

JD1A
I/O Unit, etc.

Power supply for load

JD1A

CA105

Switch, etc.

T4

Inter-module
cable A

16 DO points
Relay, etc.

T3

GND

Relay, etc.

T2

Basic module

Terminal block

CP11

T1

JD1B
24 VDC power supply

Switch, etc.

24 DI
points

Power supply for load

Relay, etc

16 DO points

T3 T4

CA105

Relay, etc.

T2

Manual pulse
generator

CA106

T1

Manual pulse
generator

JA3

Extension module A
With manual pulse
generator
or
Extension module B, C, D
or E
Without manual pulse
generator

Terminal block

Manual pulse
generator

Switch, etc.

24 DI
points

Switch, etc.
Power supply for load

T2
T3 T4

CA105

T1

CA106

Extension module B, C, D
or E
Without manual pulse
generator

Terminal block

Inter-module cable
A

Relay, etc.
16 DO points
Relay, etc.
Switch, etc.
Switch, etc.

24 DI
points

Power supply for load

Relay, etc.

T2

16 DO points
Relay, etc.

T3 T4

CA105

T1

CA106

Extension module B, C, D
or E
Without manual pulse
generator

Terminal block

Inter-module
cable A

Switch, etc.
Switch, etc.

24 DI
points

NOTE
1 Extension module C does not have DI points. Only the terminal blocks for DO, T1
and T2, are available.
2 With extension module D, only the terminal blocks for analog input, T1 and T2,
are available.
3 With extension module E, only the terminal blocks for analog output, T1 and T2,
are available.
- 234 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.6.5.2

Power connection

Supply power to the basic module from the CNC or an external 24 VDC regulated power supply.
Basic module

Connected for input

CP11A
For input
A3

A2

24 VDC power supply


Regulated
power supply

A1

24 VDC

0V +24V
Tyco Electronics
1-178288-3 (housing)
Key arrangement

1-175218-5 (contact)

Make a selection matching


the power supply used.

Recommended cable (for using external power): A02B-0124-K830


(5 m long, with an M3 terminal on the 24 V power supply side)

NOTE
1 Ensure that +24 V is supplied either when or before the power to the CNC is
turned on, and that +24 V is removed either when or after the power to the CNC
is turned off.
2 When turning off the power to the CNC control unit, be sure to turn off the power
to the terminal type I/O module and other slave I/O units connected via the I/O
Link as well.

- 235 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.6.5.3

B-64603EN/01

Signal assignment on terminal blocks

Basic module, Extension modules A and B


-

Assignment of signals for output


T1 (Label color: Light blue)

DOCOM0

Yn+0.0

0V

Yn+0.2

Yn+0.4

0V

Yn+0.6

DOCOM1

Yn+1.0

10

0V

11

Yn+1.2

12

Yn+1.4

13

0V

14

Yn+1.6

V
0
G
2
4
G
6
V
0
G
2
4
G
6

T2 (Label color: Yellow green)

DOCOM0

Yn+0.1

0V

Yn+0.3

Yn+0.5

0V

Yn+0.7

DOCOM1

Yn+1.1

10

0V

11

Yn+1.3

12

Yn+1.5

13

0V

14

Yn+1.7

Label indication

V
1
G
3
5
G
7
V
1
G
3
5
G
7

Assignment of signals for input


T3 (Label color: Yellow)

Label indication

DICOM0

Xm+0.0

Xm+0.2

Xm+0.4

Xm+0.6

DICOM1

Xm+1.0

Xm+1.2

Xm+1.4

10

Xm+1.6

11

DICOM1

12

Xm+2.0

13

Xm+2.2

14

Xm+2.4

15

Xm+2.6

Label indication

S
0
2
4
6
C
0
2
4
6
C
0
2
4
6

T4 (Label color: Pink)

Label indication

DICOM0

Xm+0.1

Xm+0.3

Xm+0.5

Xm+0.7

DICOM1

Xm+1.1

Xm+1.3

Xm+1.5

10

Xm+1.7

11

DICOM1

12

Xm+2.1

13

Xm+2.3

14

Xm+2.5

15

Xm+2.7

S
1
3
5
7
C
1
3
5
7
C
1
3
5
7

Terminal block specification


Terminal block
name

Terminal block specification on


cable side

Remarks

T1
T2
T3
T4

Weidmuller BLZF3.5/14F

Each of terminal blocks T1 and T2 has a different color


assigned by the label attached to the main unit.
Each of terminal blocks T3 and T4 has a different color
assigned by the label attached to the main unit.

Weidmuller BLZF3.5/15F

NOTE
The terminal blocks on the cable side are shipped with the terminal type I/O
module.
- 236 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Extension module C
-

Assignment of signals for output


T1 (Label color: Light blue)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Label indication

V
0
G
1
2
G
3
V
4
G
5
6
G
7

DOCOM0
Yn+0.0
0V-0
Yn+0.1
Yn+0.2
0V-0
Yn+0.3
DOCOM1
Yn+0.4
0V-1
Yn+0.5
Yn+0.6
0V-1
Yn+0.7

T2 (Label color: Yellow green)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Label indication

DOCOM2
Yn+1.0
0V-2
Yn+1.1
Yn+1.2
0V-2
Yn+1.3

V
0
G
1
2
G
3

DOCOM3
Yn+1.4
0V-3
Yn+1.5
Yn+1.6
0V-3
Yn+1.7

V
4
G
5
6
G
7

Terminal block specification


Terminal block name

Terminal block specification on cable side

T1
T2

Weidmuller BLZF3.5/14F
Weidmuller BLZF3.5/15F

Extension module D
-

Assignment of signals for analog input


T1 (Label color: Yellow) Label indication
JMP0
1
J
2
3
4
5
6

INP0
INM0
COM0
FG0I
FG0O

+
C
F
F

7
8
9
10
11
12
13

JMP1
INP1
INM1
COM1
FG1I
FG1O

J
+
C
F
F

14

T2 (Label color: Pink)


JMP2
1
INP2
2
INM2
3
COM2
4
FG2I
5
FG2O
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

JMP3
INP3
INM3
COM3
FG3I
FG3O

Label indication

J
+
C
F
F
J
+
C
F
F

14
15

Terminal block specification


Terminal block name

Terminal block specification on cable side

T1
T2

Weidmuller BLZF3.5/14F
Weidmuller BLZF3.5/15F

NOTE
The terminal blocks on the cable side are shipped with the terminal type I/O
module.
- 237 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Extension module E
-

Assignment of signals for analog output


T1 (Label color: Yellow green) Label indication
VP1
A
1
VN1
2
B
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

IP1
IN1

C
D

VP2
VN2

E
F

IP2

G
H

12
13
14

IN2

T2 (Label color: Light blue)


VP3
1
VN3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Label indication

A
B

IP3
IN3

C
D

VP4
VN4

E
F

IP4

G
H

IN4

Terminal block specification


Terminal block name

Terminal block specification on cable side

T1
T2

Weidmuller BLZF3.5/14F
Weidmuller BLZF3.5/15F

NOTE
The terminal blocks on the cable side are shipped with the terminal type I/O
module.

- 238 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.6.5.4

DI/DO connection

Basic module, Extension modules A and B


DI connection (When sink type input is selected in Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7.)
Inside module

Indication on terminal block label


A common voltage can be selected. Terminal block and pin No.
In case of sink type input.

S T3-1
S T4-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

T3-2
T4-2
T3-3
T4-3
T3-4
T4-4
T3-5
T4-5

DICOM0
DICOM0
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

C T3-6
C T3-11
C T4-6
C T4-11

DICOM1
DICOM1
DICOM1
DICOM1

0 T3-7
1 T4-7
2 T3-8
3 T4-8
4 T3-9
5 T4-9
6 T3-10
7 T4-10

Xm+1.0
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.7

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

T3-12
T4-12
T3-13
T4-13
T3-14
T4-14
T3-15
T4-15

Address number
Bit number

Terminal name

I0

Input circuit 0
LED

Input pin

Receiver

DICOM0


1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

LE

I1

LED

0V

Receiver
Input pin

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.6
Xm+2.7

Input circuit 1

0V

24V

Switch, etc.

Fuse
A1
CP11
A2

24V

2A

Expansion connector
(Connected to extension module)

+24VD 0V
DC24V Power
supply

0V
0V

: Control circuit

Fig.8.6.5.4 (a) DI connection of Basic module and Extension module A and B.


(When sink type input is selected in Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7.)

NOTE
The circuitry enclosed in the dashed rectangle shown above is mounted on the
basic module only. In the case of an extension module, 24 V for DICOM1 is
supplied via the extension cable from the basic module or the extension module at
the preceding stage.

- 239 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

DI connection (When source type input is selected in Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7.)


Inside module

Indication on terminal block label


A common voltage can be selected.
In case of source type input.

Terminal block and pin No.

S T3-1
S T4-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

T3-2
T4-2
T3-3
T4-3
T3-4
T4-4
T3-5
T4-5

DICOM0
DICOM0
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

C T3-6
C T3-11
C T4-6
C T4-11

DICOM1
DICOM1
DICOM1
DICOM1

0 T3-7
1 T4-7
2 T3-8
3 T4-8
4 T3-9
5 T4-9
6 T3-10
7 T4-10

Xm+1.0
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.7

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

T3-12
T4-12
T3-13
T4-13
T3-14
T4-14
T3-15
T4-15

Address number
Bit number

Terminal name

I0

Input circuit 0
LED

Input pin

Receiver

DICOM0


1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

LE

I1

LED

0V

Receiver
Input pin

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.6
Xm+2.7

Input circuit 1

0V

24V

Switch, etc.

Fuse
A1
CP11
A2

24V

2A

Expansion connector
(Connected to extension module)

+24VD 0V
DC24V Power
supply

0V
0V

: Control circuit

Fig.8.6.5.4 (b) DI connection of Basic module and Extension module A and B.


(When source type input is selected in Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7.)

NOTE
The circuitry enclosed in the dashed rectangle shown above is mounted on the
basic module only. In case of an extension module, 24 V for DICOM1 is supplied via
the extension cable from the basic module or the extension module at the preceding
stage.

- 240 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
As listed in the table below, Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 are DI terminals for which a
common voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting DICOM0 (T3-1 and T4-1
pins) to +24 V, a DI signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a
cable is connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI
signal. From the safety viewpoint, the connection of DICOM0 (T3-1 and T4-1
pins) to 0 V is recommended wherever possible.
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed
(from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7), the input is 0. For the
unconnected terminals at the addresses for which a common voltage can be
selected (from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7), the input is 0 when DICOM0 (T3-1 and T4-1
pins) is connected to 0 V or 1 when it is connected to +24. Connect DICOM0 when
used. When addresses from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 are not used, connect DICOM0 to
the 0 V power supply.
Common voltage for the basic module, and extension modules A and B
Address
Common voltage
Xm
Xm+1
Xm+2

Can externally be selected with DICOM0.


Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.

- 241 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

DO connection
Inside module

Indication on terminal
block label

Regulated power
supply for load

Terminal block and pin No. Terminal name

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

Regulated power
supply for load

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

: Load

V
V
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
G
G
G
G

T1-1
T2-1
T1-2
T2-2
T1-4
T2-4
T1-5
T2-5
T1-7
T2-7
T1-3
T2-3
T1-6
T2-6

V T1-8
V T2-8
0 T1-9
1 T2-9
2 T1-11
3 T2-11
4 T1-12
5 T2-12
6 T1-14
7 T2-14
G T1-10
G T2-10
G T1-13
G T2-13

DOCOM0
DOCOM0
Yn+0.0
Yn+0.1
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.3
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.5
Yn+0.6
Yn+0.7
0V
0V
0V
0V
DOCOM1
DOCOM1
Yn+1.0
Yn+1.1
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.3
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.5
Yn+1.6
Yn+1.7
0V
0V
0V
0V

O
O
O
O
O

Address number
Bit number

O
O
O

0V

O
O
O

: Output circuit
DOCOM0
or
DOCOM1

O
O
O
O
O

Output pin

Internal
circuit

LED
0V
0V

Fig.8.6.5.4 (c) DO connection of Basic module and Extension module A and B.

CAUTION
Be sure to connect the 0 V signal from the regulated power supply for load to the 0
V terminal (with label indication "G") of the module. Otherwise, a load error can
occur.

- 242 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Extension module C
Inside module
Indication on
terminal block label
Terminal block and pin No.

Regulated power
supply for load

V T1-1

DOCOM0

0 T1-2

Yn+0.0

1 T1-4

Yn+0.1

2 T1-5

Yn+0.2

3 T1-7

Yn+0.3

G T1-3

0V-0

G T1-6

0V-0

V T1-8

DOCOM1

4 T1-9

Yn+0.4

5 T1-11

Yn+0.5

O
O
O

Regulated power

Terminal name

supply for load

6 T1-12

Yn+0.6

7 T1-14

Yn+0.7

G T1-10

0V-1

G T1-13

0V-1

V T2-1

DOCOM2

0 T2-2

Yn+1.0

Regulated power

1 T2-4

Yn+1.1

supply for load

2 T2-5

Yn+1.2

3 T2-7

Yn+1.3

G T2-3

0V-2

G T2-6

0V-2

V T2-9

Bit number

: Output circuit

DOCOM3

4 T2-10

Yn+1.4

Regulated power

5 T2-12

Yn+1.5

supply for load

6 T2-13

Yn+1.6

7 T2-15

Yn+1.7

G T2-11

0V-3

G T2-14

0V-3

Address number

DOCOMn
Internal
circuit

Output pin

LED
0V-n
n:0-3

: Load
Fig.8.6.5.4 (d) DO connection of Extension module C.

CAUTION
Be sure to connect the 0 V signal from the regulated power supply for load to the 0
V terminal (with label indication "G") of the module. Otherwise, a load error can
occur.

- 243 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Extension module D
In the example of connection below, CH1 is used for voltage input, CH3 is used for current input, and
CH2 and CH4 are not used.
Inside module

Label indication
Terminal block No.

Terminal
name

J T1-1

JMP0

Voltage

+ T1-2

INP0

source

- T1-3

INM0

GND

C T1-4

COM0

F T1-5

FG0I

F T1-6

FG0O

For voltage input

CH1

250

T1-7
NOTE 4
NOTE 3

NOTE 2

CH2

NOTE 1

J T1-8

JMP1

+ T1-9

INP1

- T1-10

INM1

C T1-11

COM1

F T1-12

FG1I

F T1-13

FG1O

T1-14
For current input

CH3

250

J T2-1

JMP2

Current

+ T2-2

INP2

source

- T2-3

INM2

GND

C T2-4

COM2

F T2-5

FG2I

F T2-6

FG2O

T2-7
NOTE 4
NOTE 3

CH4

250

Internal
circuit

250

J T2-8

JMP3

+ T2-9

INP3

- T2-10

INM3

C T2-11

COM3

F T2-12

FG3I

F T2-13

FG3O

T2-14
T2-15

Fig.8.6.5.4 (e) Analog input connection of Extension module D.

NOTE
1 When JMPn and INPn (n=0, 1, 2, 3) are connected with each other, the channel
becomes a current input channel.
2 For the connection cable, use a shielded twisted pair.
3 In the figure above, the shield is connected to FGnI for grounding to FGnO.
However, the shield may be directly connected to frame ground by using a cable
clamp without using FGnI and FGnO.
4 When a voltage source (current source) has a GND terminal as shown above,
connect COMn to the terminal. When no GND terminal is provided, connect INMn
and COMn with each other on the analog input module as indicated by the dotted
line. COMn of each channel is connected to the common analog ground inside
the module.
- 244 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Extension module E
In the example of connection below, CH1 is used for voltage input, CH3 is used for current input, and
CH2 and CH4 are not used.
Terminal
name

CH1
DA
converter

CH2
DA
converter

Terminal
block No.

Label indication

VP1TNB1-1

VN1TNB1-2

IP1TNB1-4

IN1TNB1-5

VP2TNB1-8

VN2TNB1-9

For voltage output

Load
10k or
more

IP3TNB1-11 G
IN3TNB1-12 H

CH3
DA
converter

VP3TNB2-1

VN3TNB2-2

IP3TNB2-4

IN3TNB2-5

VP4TNB2-8

VN4TNB2-9

For current output

CH4
DA
converter

Load
400 or less

IP4TNB2-11 G
IN4TNB2-12 H

Fig.8.6.5.4 (f) Analog output connection of Extension module E.

CAUTION
1 For connection, use a shielded two-core twisted pair.
2 Ground the shield of the cable on the load side.
3 When another unit requiring a power supply is connected to this module, turn the
power to the basic module on first. If the power to the unit connected to this
module is turned on first, invalid output or malfunction may cause an accident.

- 245 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.6.5.5

B-64603EN/01

Manual pulse generator connection

Up to three manual pulse generators can be connected to extension module A.


For details, see Subsection 7.4.1.

8.6.5.6

Inter-module connection

The same inter-module connection method is applied to between the basic module and an extension
module and between extension modules. For inter-module connection, connect a 52-pin flat cable
connector to the expansion connectors CA105 and CA106 provided on each module as shown below. At
this time, connect all 52 pins, paying attention to the connector orientation.
Inter-module
cable A

Inter-module
cable A

CA105

Basic module

Inter-module
cable A

CA105

CA105

CA106

CA106

Expansion module
, , , D, or E

Expansion module
, , D, or E

CA106

Expansion module
, , D, or E

<Cross sectional view>

Method of detaching a connected cable

When detaching a connected cable from a module, release the lock by


pushing the latch of the connector on the cable side in the arrow directions
shown at the left.

- 246 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.6.5.7

Cable connection to a terminal block

(1) Insert a flat-blade screwdriver with a tip width of about 2.5 mm into a clamp of a terminal block to
open the fixing bracket.
Screwdriver
Clamp

Recommended screwdriver
Weidmuller
Product number: SDI 0.4X2.5X80

(2) Insert a cable with a ferrule terminal.

(3) Extract the screwdriver from the clamp to complete cabling.

NOTE
Do not pry the screwdriver in a clamp. Otherwise, the terminal block can be
damaged.

- 247 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.6.5.8

B-64603EN/01

Detaching a terminal block

A terminal block can be detached from the main module by loosening the mounting screws at the both
ends of the terminal block.
Mounting screw

Terminal block

Mounting screw

Tightening torque for the mounting screw: 0.4 Nm maximum

- 248 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.6.5.9

Connection of the ground terminal

Ground the ground terminal of a basic module.

Ground terminal
250 series
Ground terminal

Wire size
Cross-sectional area at least
2

2 mm large

- 249 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.6.6

Settings

8.6.6.1

Address map

B-64603EN/01

Address allocation
For terminal type I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.

DI space map

Xm1
Xm1 + 1
Xm1 + 2

Basic module

Xm2
Xm2 + 1
Xm2 + 2

DO space map
Slot 1

Yn1
Yn1 + 1

Basic module

Slot 1

Extension module 1

Slot 2

Yn2
Yn2 + 1

Extension module 1

Slot 2

Xm3
Xm3 + 1
Xm3 + 2

Extension module 2

Slot 3

Yn3
Yn3 + 1

Extension module 2

Slot 3

Xm4
Xm4 + 1
Xm4 + 2

Extension module 3

Slot 4

Yn4
Yn4 + 1

Extension module 3

Slot 4

Xmmpg
(For 1st MPG)
Xmmpg + 1(For 2nd MPG)
Xmmpg + 2(For 3rd MPG)

Extension module 1

Slot MPG

Xm1, Xm2, Xm3, Xm4, Xmmpg, Yn1, Yn2, Yn3, and Yn4 indicate the start address at allocation.

Each module is treated as a slot and addresses are allocated for each module. When only the basic module
is used, allocate 3-byte DI addresses and 2-byte DO addresses to slot 1. When extension modules are
added, allocate 3-byte DI addresses and 2-byte DO addresses to slots 2, 3, and 4.

NOTE
1 Extension module A has an interface for three manual pulse generators. To use
manual pulse generators, allocate addresses to slot MPG. With this setting,
addresses can be allocated to the three manual pulse generators at a time
(addresses cannot be allocated individually to manual pulse generators). Do not
use the DI space with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse
generator signals directly.
2 Extension modules C (2A output module) has no DI signals. However when a DO
error occurs, the DO alarm is transferred in the area at the DI address in spite of
connection to the I/O Link i. (With the I/O Link i, the DO alarm is not transferred to
the system relay (R or Z) area.) For this reason, it is necessary to allocate
addresses to the DI section of extension modules C.
3 Extension modules E (analog output module) have no DI signals. For connection
to the I/O Link i, it is not necessary to allocate addresses to the DI section of
extension modules E.

- 250 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.6.6.2

Channel selection and A/D conversion data for extension


module D

<Channel selection>
With extension module D, which of the four analog input channels is to be the target of A/D conversion
must be determined with a PMC program. The DO points used for this selection are CHA and CHB
(two-byte occupied output points). These are mapped as indicated below.
Address in the module
Yn
Yn+1

CHB

CHA

Yn is the first address to which the analog input module is allocated.


By setting the values listed below to CHA and CHB, the corresponding channel is selected, and the A/D
conversion data of the channel and the data of the selected channel are written in the DI area. The
character X above represents an unused bit, so either 1 or 0 may be written in place of X.
CHB

CHA

Channel selected

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4

<Address>
A/D conversion data of the channel selected by the above setting is output to two bytes of the three bytes
of DI (input signals) of the slot to which this module is allocated. The A/D conversion data output
addresses are as shown below, depending on where extension module D (analog input module) is installed.

NOTE
Be sure to allocate the start address of the slot as shown below, according to
where the extension module D is installed:
When connected to extension module 1 (slot 2):
Xm2 must always be allocated at an odd-numbered address.
When connected to extension module 2 (slot 3):
Xm3 must always be allocated at an even-numbered address.
When connected to extension module 3 (slot 4):
Xm4 must always be allocated at an odd-numbered address.

When extension module D (analog input module) is installed in extension module 1 (slot 2)
Address
Xm2(odd-numbered address)
Xm2+1(even-numbered address)
Xm2+2(odd-numbered address)

D07
0

D06
0

D05
CHB

4
3
Undefined
D04
D03
CHA
D11

D02
D10

D01
D09

D00
D08

Xm2 is the start address of slot 2.

When extension module D (analog input module) is installed in extension module 2 (slot 3)
Address
Xm3(even-numbered address)
Xm3+1(odd-numbered address)
Xm3+2(even-numbered address)

7
D07
0

6
D06
0

5
D05
CHB

Xm3 is the start address of slot 3.

- 251 -

4
3
D04
D03
CHA
D11
Undefined

2
D02
D10

1
D01
D09

0
D00
D08

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

When extension module D (analog input module) is installed in extension module 3 (slot 4)
Address

Xm4(odd-numbered address)

Undefined

Xm4+1(even-numbered address)

D07

D06

D05

D04

D03

D02

D01

D00

Xm4+2(odd-numbered address)

CHB

CHA

D11

D10

D09

D08

Xm4 is the start address of slot 4.

< A/D conversion data>


A/D conversion data for the selected channel is output to the above address as 12-bit data in the following
format.
Address in the module D
Xm

D07

D06

D05

D04

CHB

CHA

Xm+1

D03

D02

D01

D00

D11

D10

D09

D08

Xm is the first address to which extension module D is allocated.

D00 to D11 represent 12-bit digital output data (complement representation). D00 corresponds to
weighting of 20 and D11 corresponds to that of -211. That is, D11 is a sign bit represented as a twos
complement.(Refer to following table.)

Decimal
2047
2001
2000
1999
1001
1000
999
2
1
0
-1
-2
-999
-1000
-1001
-1999
-2000
-2001
-2048

Digital data
Hexadecimal
Binary (D11~D00)
7
7
7
7
3
3
3
0
0
0
F
F
C
C
C
8
8
8
8

F
D
D
C
E
E
E
0
0
0
F
F
1
1
1
3
3
2
0

F
1
0
F
9
8
7
2
1
0
F
E
9
8
7
1
0
F
0

h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h

0111
0111
0111
0111
0011
0011
0011
0000
0000
0000
1111
1111
1100
1100
1100
1000
1000
1000
1000

1111
1101
1101
1100
1110
1110
1110
0000
0000
0000
1111
1111
0001
0001
0001
0011
0011
0010
0000

1111
0001
0000
1111
1001
1000
0111
0010
0001
0000
1111
1110
1001
1000
0111
0001
0000
1111
0000

Analog data
Voltage input
Current input
Outside of the
specification range
10V
9.995V
5.005V
5V
4.995V
10mV
5mV
0V
-5mV
-10mV
-4.995V
-5V
-5.005V
-9.995V
-10V

Outside of the
specification range

20mA
19.98mA
40uA
20uA
0mA
-20uA
-40uA
-19.98mA
-20mA

Outside of the
specification range

Outside of the
specification range

CHA and CHB represent the channel of which data is converted. This means that when the two bytes
above are read with a ladder program, the A-D converted data of the input channel represented by CHA
and CHB can be read from D11 to D00.

NOTE
When two-byte digital output addresses are to be referenced with a ladder
program, a read must always be performed word-by-word (16 bits).

- 252 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.6.6.3

Channel selection and D/A conversion data for extension


module E

<Channel selection>
Extension module E has four analog output channels. Which of the four analog output channels is to be
output must be determined with a ladder program. CHA and CHB, which are used to select a channel, are
allocated in the DO address area for the module as shown below.
Address in the module
Yneven-numbered address

7
D07

6
D06

5
D05

4
D04

3
D03

2
D02

1
D01

0
D00

Yn+1odd-numbered address

CHB

CHA

D11

D10

D09

D08

Yn is the start address of the extension module E connected to this module.

By setting the values listed below to CHA and CHB, the corresponding channel is selected.
CHB
0
0
1
1

CHA
0
1
0
1

Channel selected
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4

< D/A conversion data>


By writing 12-bit digital data in D00 to D11 in the above address map, desired voltage and current are
output.D11 is a sign bit represented as a twos complement. (Refer to following table.)

Decimal
2047
2001
2000
1999
1001
1000
999
2
1
0
-1
-2
-1999
-2000
-2001
-2048

Digital data
Hexadecimal
Binary (D11~D00)
7
7
7
7
3
3
3
0
0
0
F
F
8
8
8
8

F
D
D
C
E
E
E
0
0
0
F
F
3
3
2
0

F
1
0
F
9
8
7
2
1
0
F
E
1
0
F
0

h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h

0111
0111
0111
0111
0011
0011
0011
0000
0000
0000
1111
1111
1000
1000
1000
1000

1111
1101
1101
1100
1110
1110
1110
0000
0000
0000
1111
1111
0011
0011
0010
0000

1111
0001
0000
1111
1001
1000
0111
0010
0001
0000
1111
1110
0001
0000
1111
0000

Analog data
Voltage output
Current output
Outside of the
specification range
10V
9.995V
5.005V
5V
4.995V
10mV
5mV
0V
-5mV
-10mV
-9.995V
-10V

Outside of the
specification range

20mA
19.98mA
40uA
20uA
0mA

Outside of the
specification range

Outside of the
specification range

NOTE
1 When an extension module E is used, be sure to allocate the start address of the
slot which assigned the extension module E at an even-numbered address.

- 253 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
1 Be sure to write the target data for D-A conversion with a PMC program
word-by-word (16 bits).
2 The output value of each channel is held until another data is written in that
channel.
3 Multiple channels cannot be selected within the same ladder scan period.
After selecting a channel, wait at least the ladder scan period before selecting
another channel.

DO alarm detection
The DO driver of the basic module and extension modules A, B, and C is capable of detecting an
overcurrent and measuring its own temperature. If an accident, such as connecting the cable to ground,
causes an abnormal increase in the load current or in the driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is
provided for each DO driver, is activated and keeps the DO signal in the OFF state until the cause of the
problem is eliminated. Even if this occurs, the CNC and I/O module continue operating without entering
the alarm status, but the PMC is notified of the location of the error detected by the DO driver. This
information can be checked on the PMC status screen or alarm processing can be performed in advance
using a ladder to help error check and recovery.
Eliminate a cause after checking the location of the detected error.

Basic module, Extension module A and B


A DO error such as a ground fault is detected for each signal. This DO error is transferred to the PMC
system relay area as a status alarm. The following table lists system relay area information and
corresponding DO data related to a status alarm. When an alarm data bit is set to 1, the DO driver
corresponding to the bit detects an error. Also see Subsection 7.3.3, Status Alarm.
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
Information output to the system relay area
Alarm
information
Y address
Group
PMC
Slot
number
Type
(DO address)
number path number
(Intra-slot byte
address)
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

1
2
0

0 to 23 1 to 5, 9
3
4

Yn1
Yn1+1
Yn2
Yn2+1
Yn3
Yn3+1
Yn4
Yn4+1

Faulty location

0th byte DO
1st byte DO
0th byte DO
1st byte DO
0th byte DO
1st byte DO
0th byte DO
1st byte DO

of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of

Basic module
Basic module
Extension module1
Extension module1
Extension module2
Extension module2
Extension module3
Extension module3

Output values of Group number, PMC path, and Y address depends on unit connection and I/O
address assignment.
Yn1, Yn2, Yn3 and Yn4 indicate the start address at allocation.
Description of Alarm data in the system relay area
Alarm data
#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

DO ground
fault at bit 7

DO ground
fault at bit 6

DO ground
fault at bit 5

DO ground
fault at bit 4

DO ground
fault at bit 3

DO ground
fault at bit 2

DO ground
fault at bit 1

DO ground
fault at bit 0

- 254 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Extension module C
With extension module C, a DO error such as a ground fault is detected for each signal. The DO error is
input not in the PMC system relay area, but in the area at the DI address listed in the table below.

DO alarm bit addresses when extension module C is allocated as extension modules 1 to 3 (0: No DO
alarm issued, 1: DO alarm issued).
Bit
Address
Xm1
Xm1+1
Xm2
Xm2+1
Xm3
Xm3+1

7
Bit 7 of
Yn1
Bit 7 of
Yn1+1
Bit 7 of
Yn2
Bit 7 of
Yn2+1
Bit 7 of
Yn3
Bit 7 of
Yn3+1

6
Bit 6 of
Yn1
Bit 6 of
Yn1+1
Bit 6 of
Yn2
Bit 6 of
Yn2+1
Bit 6 of
Yn3
Bit 6 of
Yn3+1

5
Bit 5 of
Yn1
Bit 5 of
Yn1+1
Bit 5 of
Yn2
Bit 5 of
Yn2+1
Bit 5 of
Yn3
Bit 5 of
Yn3+1

4
Bit 4 of
Yn1
Bit 4 of
Yn1+1
Bit 4 of
Yn2
Bit 4 of
Yn2+1
Bit 4 of
Yn3
Bit 4 of
Yn3+1

3
Bit 3 of
Yn1
Bit 3 of
Yn1+1
Bit 3 of
Yn2
Bit 3 of
Yn2+1
Bit 3 of
Yn3
Bit 3 of
Yn3+1

2
Bit 2 of
Yn1
Bit 2 of
Yn1+1
Bit 2 of
Yn2
Bit 2 of
Yn2+1
Bit 2 of
Yn3
Bit 2 of
Yn3+1

1
Bit 1 of
Yn1
Bit 1 of
Yn1+1
Bit 1 of
Yn2
Bit 1 of
Yn2+1
Bit 1 of
Yn3
Bit 1 of
Yn3+1

Module

0
Bit 0 of
Yn1
Bit 0 of
Yn1+1
Bit 0 of
Yn2
Bit 0 of
Yn2+1
Bit 0 of
Yn3
Bit 0 of
Yn3+1

DO alarm on
extension
module 1
DO alarm on
extension
module 2
DO alarm on
extension
module 3

How to view the table above


DO alarm data assigned to bit 5 of address Yn1+1 is written to bit 5 of Xm1+1.

States when the protection function is activated in extension module C


The following table lists the DO output and alarm data states when a DO error occurs in extension
module C and the protection function is activated.
State

Normal operation
Overheat protection
function operation
Over voltage protection
function operation
Disconnection detection

PMC
output

Module DO
output

DO state
indication
LED (green)

DO alarm
LED (red)

Alarm data

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON

Turned off
Turned on
Turned off
Turned off
Turned off
Turned off
Turned off
Turned on

Turned off
Turned off
Turned off
Turned on
Turned off
Turned off
Turned off
Turned on

0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1

NOTE
1 If the overheat protection function or over voltage protection function among the
protection functions above is activated, the DO bit is kept OFF until the cause is
eliminated. When the cause is eliminated, the DO bit is set to ON without
restarting the system.
2 Disconnection detection is performed by monitoring, with an output element in the
module, the current flowing through a load when DO output is ON. When the
detected current value is about 200 mA or less, disconnection detection is
assumed. So, when a device (such as an LED) with a small load current is
connected, the DO alarm state results, assuming disconnection detection. Unlike
the other protection functions, however, this function does not turn off DO output.
If a connection is reactivated after the state of disconnection is once set,
disconnection detection is canceled without restarting the system.

- 255 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
3 When the ratings current value of the load is larger than the disconnection
detection current value, and the rise time of the current that flows to the
connected load (such as an solenoid) is late, the disconnection detection function
might work. For that case, the disconnection detecting function when DO output
is ON can be evaded by programming it to refer to DO alarm allocated to DI after
the fixed time has passed since DO was turned on.

8.6.6.4

Setting the rotary switch

NOTE
In the description in this subsection, slots are applicable only for the I/O Link i.
By changing the setting (rotary switch) for the extension modules, connections can be made by omitting
some extension modules (slots). Use the same setting method as for I/O modules for connector panel. For
details, see Subsection 8.2.11.

Location of the rotary switch


As shown below, the control (rotary switch) is located on an extension module. To change the setting, turn
the switch with a flat-bladed screwdriver with a tip width of about 2.5 mm.

Standard setting

- 256 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.6.7

Others

8.6.7.1

Method of common pin expansion

Additional common pins can be provided by mounting (screwing) a commercially available terminal block
on the top cover of an extension module.

Commercial
terminal block

Examples of commercial terminal blocks


Manufacturer

Model

Maximum number of poles

WAGO
Weidmuller
OSADA

869 series
ZDUB2.5 series
TWM10B series

12
10
14

For details of the terminal blocks, contact the respective manufacturers.

- 257 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i


Mounting dimensions of a commercial terminal block

Unit: mm

NOTE
To fasten a terminal block, use M3 tap screws not longer than 10 mm.

- 258 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.6.7.2

Parallel DO (output signal) connection

Basic module, Extension modules A and B


With the basic module and extension modules A and B, a DO load current two times larger can be
obtained by connecting DO points in parallel and exercising ON/OFF control at the same time in the
sequence as shown below. Namely, the maximum load current per DO point is 200 mA, but 400 mA can
be obtained by connecting two DO points in parallel and turning on the two DO points at the same time. In
this case, however, the leakage current is also doubled up to 40 A when the DO points are turned off.
Terminal type I/O module

+24 stabilized power


supply

Load

NOTE
1 Be sure to connect the bit at the same address for parallel connection. Three or
more signals cannot be connected in parallel.
2 Extension module C does not allow parallel DO connection.

- 259 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

8.7

B-64603EN/01

I/O Link CONNECTION UNIT

The I/O Link connection unit connects I/O Link i master devices such as CNCs via an I/O Link to enable
the transfer of DI/DO data between I/O Link master devices on different systems.

8.7.1

Overview
System A

I/O Link master

System B
I/O Link i
or
I/O Link

I/O Link connection unit

I/O Link
channel 1

JD51A

I/O Link i
or
I/O Link

I/O Link
channel 2

I/O Link master

JD51A
(JD1A)

(JD1A)
JD1B1

I/O Link
slave

JD1B2

DI

DI

DO

DO

JD1A1

JD1A2
Optical adapter
I/O Link
slave

JD1B

JD1A

JD1B
CP1 (IN)

CP2 (IN)
Optical adapter

JD1A

24V power supply

24V power supply

Specification of operation
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

6)
7)

The I/O Link connection unit has two channels of I/O Link slave interfaces.
The two I/O Link slave channels can independently operate, and the power to each channel can also
turned on and off independently.
When both systems operate normally, DO data of one system is transferred as DI data to the other
system.
When either system stops (NOTE 1), DI data of the other system that is operating is automatically
set to all zeros.
When both systems normally operate, then either system stops (NOTE 1), it takes up to 200 ms until
DI data of the other system that is operating is automatically set to all zeros. During this period, DO
data immediately before that system stops is transferred as DI data.
When either system that has stopped starts operation, DI data is transferred after the I/O Link
communication is established.
If an alarm is issued due to a failure in the I/O Link connection unit itself, the I/O Link enters an
alarm state in both I/O Link channels.

- 260 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
1 The stopped state here means the status in which the power to the system is off
for adjustment or maintenance or that in which the I/O Link stops due to an error
in the I/O Link master device or another slave device.
2 The specification of operation does not guarantee that the system always
operates according to the specification. Therefore, for the signals related to
safety, configure a safety circuit outside the I/O Link connection unit.

8.7.2

Specification

Ordering information
Item

Specification

I/O Link connection unit


Fuse, 1A (one as a spare part)

A02B-0333-C250
A03B-0815-K001

Installation conditions
(1) When installing the I/O Link connection unit, satisfy the CNC installation conditions.
(2) Install this unit on a vertical surface, and provide a space of at least 100 mm above and below the
unit. Do not place any device that generates a large amount of heat below this unit.

Power supply rating


Item
Voltage
Current
Heat output

Specification

Remarks
10% includes momentary variations and ripples.
When two or less optical adapters are connected
When three or more optical adapters are connected
When two or less optical adapters are connected
When three or more optical adapters are connected

24VDC10%
0.3A/channel
0.4A/channel
7.5W
10W

I/O Link specification


Item
Number of DI/DO data
items

Specification
For each I/O Link slave channel
DI: Up to 256, DO: Up to 256
(The number of data items actually used varies depending on the amount of data
assigned in the I/O Link master device.)

NOTE
Note the following points when assigning DI/DO data items to each channel:
The number of DI data items assigned to channel 1 is the same as that of DO
data items assigned channel 2.
The number of DO data items assigned to channel 1 is the same as that of DI
data items assigned to channel 2.

- 261 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

External dimensions/weight

Connector layout
F1 (FUSE1)

F2 (FUSE2)

CP1 (IN)
CP2 (IN)

JD1B1
JD1A1

JD1B2
JD1A2

GND

Connector number and fuse number


CP1 (IN)
CP2 (IN)
JD1B1, JD1A1
JD1B2, JD1A2
GND
F1 (FUSE1)
F2 (FUSE2)

Purpose
24VDC power input (channel 1)
24VDC power input (channel 2)
I/O Link interface (channel 1)
I/O Link interface (channel 2)
Ground terminal for signals
Fuse for channel 1
Fuse for channel 2

- 262 -

B-64603EN/01

8.7.3

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

Installation

Mounting hole for screwing

Front view of the unit


Unit: mm

NOTE
1 A screwdriver is inserted on a slant to mount and dismount the unit, so that a
sufficient maintenance space is required on both sides of the unit. When the front
face of an adjacent unit is flush with the front face of the unit or is recessed,
provide a clearance of about 20 mm from the adjacent unit. When the front face
of an adjacent unit is more projected toward you than the front face of the unit,
provide a clearance of about 70 mm from the adjacent unit.
2 When the unit is to be installed near a side plane of the cabinet, provide a
clearance of about 70 mm between the unit and the side plane of the cabinet.

- 263 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

Unit: mm

View from top

- 264 -

B-64603EN/01

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

Using a DIN rail for mounting


Method of mounting

DIN rail

Method of dismounting

DIN rail

Method of mounting
1. Place the hook of the unit onto the top of the DIN rail.
2. Push the unit until it clicks into place.
Method of dismounting
1. Lower the locking section with a flat-blade screwdriver.
2. Pull the lower part of the unit toward you.

DIN rail

When the unit is


installed on the DIN
rail, do not pull up
the unit.

CAUTION
When the unit is installed, be careful not to damage the lock by applying
excessive force.
When installing and removing the unit, hold the upper and lower ends of the unit
so that stress is not applied to the side (that surface with the slits) of the unit.
When the unit is installed on the DIN rail, do not pull up the unit. Pulling up the
unit may damage the case.
- 265 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

8.7.4

Connection

8.7.4.1

I/O Link connection

B-64603EN/01

Sample connection
System A
I/O Link master

JD51A

System B
I/O Link i
or
I/O Link

I/O Link connection unit

I/O Link
channel 1

I/O Link i
or
I/O Link

I/O Link
channel 2

JD51A

(JD1A)

(JD1A)
JD1B1

I/O Link
slave

I/O Link master

JD1B2

DI

DI

DO

DO

JD1A1

JD1A2
Optical adapter
I/O Link
slave

JD1B

JD1A

JD1B
CP1 (IN)

CP2 (IN)
Optical adapter

JD1A

24V power supply

24V power supply

For details of I/O Link connection, see Section 7.2.

NOTE
1 A conventional I/O Link connection unit has an optical interface. This model has
electric interfaces only. When an optical interface is required, use an optical
adapter for connection.
2 To an electric interface on this unit, 5 V power is supplied for an optical adapter,
though it is not supplied for an optical adapter to an electric interface on a
conventional I/O Link connection unit.
3 When optical adapters are connected, the power supply rating of the 24 V power
supply differs depending on the number of optical adapters connected to the I/O
Link connection unit. For the power supply rating, see Subsection 8.7.2.

- 266 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

8.7.4.2

Power connection

Supply the power required for operation of this unit to the connectors shown in the figure below, CP1(IN)
and CP2(IN).
Supplying the power to CP1(IN) operates the I/O Link of channel 1.
Supplying the power to CP2(IN) operates the I/O Link of channel 2.

CP1(IN)
24V power
supply

01

+24V

02

0V

03
CP2(IN)
24V power
supply

01

+24V

02

0V

03

Recommended connector for cable :


A02B-0120-K324(Including the following connector housing and contacts)
(Housing: Tyco Electronics 1-178288-3)
(Contact: Tyco Electronics 1-175218-5)

Ground terminal for signals


Secure the ground line to the ground terminal (GND) for signals, which is located at the bottom of each
unit, with an M3 screw as shown in the figure below. Connect the ground line to the ground plate of the
cabinet.

GND

To ground plate of cabinet

NOTE
The torque with which a screw is tightened is 0.5 Nm or less.
- 267 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

8.8

CONNECTION TO MACHINE OPERATOR'S PANEL

8.8.1

Overview

0i-F can be using the following machine operators panel.

Standard machine operators panel main panel


The standard machine operators panel main panel is connected. It has 55 key switches and 55 LED
displays. All key tops are detachable.

Safety machine operators panel


The safety machine operators panel is connected. It has 55 key switches and 55 LED displays. All
key tops are detachable.
Moreover, all the key switches are dual contacts.
The general-purpose input signals of 8 pair are inputted into dual circuit.
By using dual check safety function (DCS function), the signal of the key switch and the
external dual input signal can use as the safety-related input signal.
Conforming with the safety standard like ISO23125 or EN12417 is easy.

Safety machine operators panel type B


Safety machine operators panel type B has the same function as safety machine operators panel.
Width is the same 400mm as 15"LCD. It is designed so that it can be used combining
15"LCD.
It has 55 key switches, 55 LED displays, an emergency stop switch, a power ON/OFF
control switch, a feed rate override switch and a spindle override switch.
Safety machine operators panel,
Safety machine operators panel type B

30i-B/31i-B/32i-B
PMC

I/O Link i

PMC
communication
circuit

Key switch

External input signal


+24V

Cross check
input circuit
DCSPMC
communication
circuit

CNC
(DCSPMC)

input circuit

DI
DI

Next I/O device

The standard machine operators panel main panel and safety machine operators panel can be use with
the following sub panel.

Sub panel AA, D


Sub panel AA and D are operators panels with a power ON/OFF switch, an emergency stop switch,
a program protect switch, a feed rate override switch and a spindle override switch.
The signal from each switch can be transmitted to the power magnetics cabinet via the main panel or
safety machine operators panel. ON-switch has a LED.

- 268 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

The following figure is the example of composition when using the standard machine operators panel
main panel or the safety machine operators panel.

Main panel
Safety machine
operators panel

Sub panel AA

Main panel
Safety machine
operators panel

- 269 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

The following figure is the example of composition when using the safety machine operators panel type
B.

620

320

15LCD

145

MDI

155

Safety machine
operators panel
type B

400
Unit = mm

- 270 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

8.8.2

Total Connection Diagram

Standard machine operators panel main panel


CNC

Standard MDI unit


CNK2
CNK1

MDI (CA55)

Main panel

CM68
I/O Link, I/O Link i
(JD51A)

General-purpose DI/DO

JD1B
CM69
JD1A
JA3

Manual pulse generator


Manual pulse generator

Next I/O device

Manual pulse generator

+24V Power

CA64(IN)

+24V Power

CA64(OUT)

Power magnetics cabinet

CA65

JA58

Pendant type manual


pulse generator

Sub panel AA or D
CM65

(SA1)

CM66

(SA2)

CM67

(SA3,SB1 to 3)

NOTE
Manual pulse generators cannot be connected to JA3 and JA58 simultaneously.

- 271 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

Safety machine operators panel


CNC

Standard MDI unit


CNK2
CNK1

MDI (CA55)

Safety machine operators panel

CM68
I/O Link i (JD51A)

General-purpose DI/DO

JD1B
CM69
JD1A
CA157

General-purpose DI

Next I/O device


JA3

Manual pulse generator


Manual pulse generator

+24V Power

CA64(IN)

+24V Power

CA64(OUT)

Manual pulse generator

JA58

Pendant type
Manual pulse generator

Sub panel AA or D
CM65

(SA1)

CM66

(SA2)

CM67

(SA3,SB13)

NOTE
Manual pulse generators cannot be connected to JA3 and JA58 simultaneously.

- 272 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

Safety machine operators panel type B


CNC

Standard MDI unit


CNK2
CNK1
Safety machine operators
panel type B

MDI (CA55)

CM68
I/O Link i (JD51A)

JD1B
CM69

General-purpose DI/DO

JD1A
CM67
Next I/O device

CA157

JA3
+24V

General-purpose DI

Manual pulse generator

CA64(IN)
Manual pulse generator

+24V

CA64(OUT)

Manual pulse generator

JA58

Pendant type
Manual pulse generator

CM65

CM66

Feed rate override


switch
Spindle override
switch
ESP switch
ON/OFF switch

ESP circuit
Power ON/OFF circuit

NOTE
Manual pulse generators cannot be connected to JA3 and JA58 simultaneously.

- 273 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

8.8.3

B-64603EN/01

DI/DO Address Map

Standard machine operators panel main panel

DI space map
Xm1
Xm1 + 1
Xm1 + 2
Xm1 + 3
Xm1 + 4
Xm1 + 5
Xm1 + 6
Xm1 + 7
Xm1 + 8
Xm1 + 9
Xm1 + 10
Xm1 + 11

DO space map
Yn1
Matrix output
Yn1 + 1
signal
Yn1 + 2
(key LED)
Yn1 + 3
Including
Slot 1
Yn1 + 4
general-purpose
Yn1 + 5
output signal
Yn1 + 6
Yn1 + 7

General purpose
input signal

Slot 1
Matrix input signal
(key switch)

Xmmpg
(for 1st MPG)
Xmmpg + 1(for 2nd MPG)
Xmmpg + 2(for 3rd MPG)

Manual pulse
generator

Slot MPG

Xm1, Xmmpg, and Yn1 indicate the start address at allocation.


For the main panel, allocate 12-byte DI addresses to slot 1 and 8-byte DO addresses to slot 1. The main
panel has an interface for three manual pulse generators. To use manual pulse generators, allocate
addresses to slot MPG. With this setting, addresses can be allocated to the three manual pulse generators at
a time (addresses cannot be allocated individually to manual pulse generators). Do not use the addresses
with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals directly.

Safety machine operators panel, Safety machine operators panel type B


1st group (PMC DI/DO) address
DI space map
X1m
X1m + 1
X1m + 2
X1m + 3
X1m + 4
X1m + 5
X1m + 6
X1m + 7
X1m + 8
X1m + 9
X1m + 10
X1m + 11
X1mmpg
(for 1st MPG)
X1mmpg + 1(for 2nd MPG)
X1mmpg + 2(for 3rd MPG)

DO space map
Y1n
Y1n + 1
Matrix output
Y1n + 2
signal
Y1n + 3
(key LED)
Slot-1
Including
Y1n + 4
general-purpose
Y1n + 5
output signal
Y1n + 6
Y1n + 7

General purpose
input signal

Matrix input signal


(Key switch input
signal of the 1st
contact)

Manual pulse
generator

Slot-1

Slot-MPG

X1m, X1mmpg, and Y1n indicate the start address at allocation.

- 274 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

2nd group (DCSPMC DI/DO) address

X2m
X2m + 1
X2m + 2
X2m + 3
X2m + 4
X2m + 5
X2m + 6
X2m + 7
X2m + 8

DI space map
General purpose
input signal

Matrix input signal


(Key switch input
signal of the 2nd
contact)

DO space map

Slot-1

X2m indicate the start address at allocation.

The safety machine operators panel and the safety machine operators panel type B allocated to two
continuous group of I/O Link i. In I/O Link i, allocate 12-byte DI address and 8-byte DO address to slot-1
of 1st group as PMC DI/DO, and allocate 9-byte DI address to slot-1 of 2nd group as DCSPMC DI.
The safety machine operators panel and the safety machine operators panel type B have an interface for
three manual pulse generators. To use manual pulse generators, allocate addresses to slot-MPG. With this
setting, addresses can be allocated to the three manual pulse generators at a time (addresses cannot be
allocated individually to manual pulse generators). Do not use the addresses with the ladder because the
CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals directly.

- 275 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

8.8.4

Each Connections

8.8.4.1

Pin assignment

B-64603EN/01

Standard machine operators panel main panel


CA64 (Power source)
A3
B3

A2
B2

0V
0V

CA65 (Power magnetic cabinet)


A1 +24V
B1 +24V

Recommended connector for cable:


Housing : Tyco Electronics 1-178288-3 (3 pins type)
Contact : Tyco Electronics 1-175218-5

CM67(ON/OFF, Program protect, ESP)


A01 EON B01 EOFF
A02 COM1 B02 COM2
A03 Xm+1.4 B03 KEYCOM
A04 *ESP B04 ESPCM1
A05
TR1
B05
TR2

A01
A02
A03
A04
A05
A06
A07
A08
A09
A10

EON
COM1
*ESP
TR1
TR3
TR5
TR7

B01 EOFF
B02 COM2
B03 ESPCM1
B04
TR2
B05
TR4
B06
TR6
B07
TR8
B08
B09
B10

Recommended connector for cable:


Hirose electric : HIF3BA-20D-2.54R

Recommended connector for cable:


Housing : Tyco Electronics 178289-5
Contact : Tyco Electronics 1-175218-5

CM65 (General-purpose DI)

CM66 (General-purpose DI)

A01
B01
A02
B02
A03 Xm+0.1 B03
A04 +24V B04
A05 Xm+0.2 B05

A01
B01
A02
B02 Xm+1.3
A03 Xm+0.7 B03 Xm+1.1
A04 +24V B04 Xm+1.2
A05 Xm+1.0 B05 Xm+0.6

Xm+0.5
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.0

Recommended connector for cable:


Hirose electric : HIF3BA-10D-2.54R

Recommended connector for cable:


Hirose electric : HIF3BA-10D-2.54R

CM68 (General-purpose DI/DO)

CM69 (General-purpose DI/DO)

A01
A02
A03
A04
A05
A06
A07
A08
A09
A10

+24V
Xm+1.6
Xm+2.0
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.4
TR3
TR5
Yn+5.3
Yn+6.3
DOCOM

B01
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10

Xm+1.5
Xm+1.7
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.5
TR4
TR6
Yn+5.7
Yn+6.7
0V

A01
A02
A03
A04
A05
A06
A07
A08
A09
A10

Recommended connector for cable:


Housing : Tyco Electronics 178289-8
Contact : Tyco Electronics 1-175218-5

+24V
Xm+2.7
Xm+3.1
Xm+3.3
Xm+3.5
Xm+3.7
TR7
Yn+7.3
Yn+7.5
DOCOM

B01
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08

Xm+2.6
Xm+3.0
Xm+3.2
Xm+3.4
Xm+3.6
DICOM
TR8
Yn+7.4
B09 Yn+7.6
B10
0V

Recommended connector for cable:


Housing : Tyco Electronics 178289-8
Contact : Tyco Electronics 1-175218-5

- 276 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

JA3 (Manual pulse generator)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

HA1
HB1
HA2
HB2
HA3
HB3

+5V

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

JA58 (Pendant type manual pulse generator)


1
2
3
4
5

0V
0V
0V

HA1
HB1
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4

11 Xm+1.5
12
0V
13 Xm+1.6
14
0V
15 Xm+1.7

6 Xm+2.5 16
0V
7 Yn+5.3 17 Xm+2.0
8 Xm+2.1 18
+5V
9
+5V
19
+24V
10 +24V 20
+5V

+5V
+5V

Recommended connector for cable of JA3 and JA58


When the depth of the main panel is 60mm min.
Recommended connector for cable:
Hirose electric FI30-20S (Connector)
FI-20-CV7 (Case)
When the depth of the main panel is 80mm min.
Recommended connector for cable of JA3:
Hirose electric : FI40B-2015S (Connector)
FI-20-CV (Case)
Recommended connector for cable of JA58:
Honda : PCR-E20FA (Connector)
PCR-V20LA (Case)
Hirose electric : FI30-20S (Connector)
FI-20-CV2 (Case)
Fujitsu : FCN-247J020-G/E (Connector)
FCN-240C020-Y/S (Case)
Molex : 52622-2011 (Connector)
52624-2015 (Case)

NOTE
1 DI/DO pins and MPG signal pins (1 axis) in shaded by
are in pairs. Main
panel has connector JA58 to connect the pendant-type MPG. In this connector,
there are DIs (9 points) used to selection of axes and multiplier, DO (1 point) for
LED, and signals for MPG (1 axis). These signals are in CM68 for
general-purpose DI/DO and JA3 for MPG too. Only one in each pair is usable.
2 Pins shaded by
are used for the relay. There are two uses in these signals
as follows.
(1) When a sub panel is connected to the main panel, signals in CM67 from the
sub panel are out to CA65.
(2) Open pins (TR1-TR8) in CM68, CM69 for general-purpose DI/DO and CM67
for connection to the sub panel are connected directly to CA65.
These signals can be relayed to the power magnetic cabinet by using a flat cable.

- 277 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

Safety machine operators panel, Safety machine operators panel type B


CA157 (General-purpose DI, Relay)

CA64 (Power source)


A3
B3

A2
B2

0V
0V

A1 +24V
B1 +24V

Recommended connector for cable:


Housing : Tyco Electronics 1-178288-3 (3 pins type)
Contact : Tyco Electronics 1-175218-5

CM67(General-purpose DI, Relay)


A01 EON
A02 COM1
A03 X1m+1.4
A04 *ESP
A05
TR1

B01 EOFF
B02 COM2
B03 KEYCOM
B04 ESPCM1
B05
TR2

A01
A02
A03
A04
A05
A06
A07
A08
A09
A10

EON
COM1
*ESP
TR1
TR3
TR5
X2m+0.0
X2m+0.2
X2m+0.4
X2m+0.6

B01
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10

EOFF
COM2
ESPCM1
TR2
TR4
TR6
X2m+0.1
X2m+0.3
X2m+0.5
X2m+0.7

Recommended connector for cable:


Housing : Tyco Electronics 178289-8
Contact : Tyco Electronics 1-175218-5

Recommended connector for cable:


Housing : Tyco Electronics 178289-5
Contact : Tyco Electronics 1-175218-5

CM65 (General-purpose DI)


A01
A02
A03 X1m+0.1
A04 +24V
A05 X1m+0.2

B01
B02
B03
B04
B05

CM66 (General-purpose DI)


A01
A02
A03 X1m+0.7
A04
+24V
A05 X1m+1.0

X1m+0.5
X1m+0.3
X1m+0.4
X1m+0.0

Recommended connector for cable:


Hirose electric : HIF3BA-10D-2.54R

+24V
X1m+1.6
X1m+2.0
X1m+2.2
X1m+2.4
TR3
TR5
Y1n+5.3
Y1n+6.3
DOCOM

B01
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10

X1m+1.3
X1m+1.1
X1m+1.2
X1m+0.6

Recommended connector for cable:


Hirose electric : HIF3BA-10D-2.54R

CM68 (General-purpose DI/DO, Relay)


A01
A02
A03
A04
A05
A06
A07
A08
A09
A10

B01
B02
B03
B04
B05

CM69 (General-purpose DI/DO)


A01
A02
A03
A04
A05
A06
A07

X1m+1.5
X1m+1.7
X1m+2.1
X1m+2.3
X1m+2.5
TR4
TR6
Y1n+5.7
Y1n+6.7
0V

+24V
X1m+2.7
X1m+3.1
X1m+3.3
X1m+3.5
X1m+3.7

B01
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07

X1m+2.6
X1m+3.0
X1m+3.2
X1m+3.4
X1m+3.6
DICOM

A08 Y1n+7.3 B08 Y1n+7.4


A09 Y1n+7.5 B09 Y1n+7.6
A10 DOCOM B10
0V

Recommended connector for cable:


Housing : Tyco Electronics 178289-8
Contact : Tyco Electronics 1-175218-5

Recommended connector for cable:


Housing : Tyco Electronics 178289-8
Contact : Tyco Electronics 1-175218-5

- 278 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

JA3 (Manual pulse generator)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

HA1
HB1
HA2
HB2
HA3
HB3

+5V

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

JA58 (Pendant type manual pulse generator)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

0V
0V
0V
+5V
+5V

HA1
HB1
X1m+2.2
X1m+2.3
X1m+2.4
X1m+2.5
Y1n+5.3
X1m+2.1
+5V
+24V

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

X1m+1.5
0V
X1m+1.6
0V
X1m+1.7
0V
X1m+2.0
+5V
+24V
+5V

Recommended connector for cable of JA3 and JA58


When the depth of the safety machine operators panel or safety machine
operators panel type B is 50mm min.
Recommended connector for cable:
Hirose electric FI30-20S (Connector)
FI-20-CV7 (Case)
When the depth of the safety machine operators panel or safety machine
operators panel type B is 70mm min.
Recommended connector for cable of JA3:
Hirose electric : FI40B-2015S (Connector)
FI-20-CV (Case)
Recommended connector for cable of JA58:
Honda : PCR-E20FA (Connector)
PCR-V20LA (Case)
Hirose electric : FI30-20S (Connector)
FI-20-CV2 (Case)
Fujitsu : FCN-247J020-G/E (Connector)
FCN-240C020-Y/S (Case)
Molex : 52622-2011 (Connector)
52624-2015 (Case)

NOTE
1 DI/DO pins and MPG signal pins (1 axis) in shaded by
are in pairs. Safety
machine operators panel has connector JA58 to connect the pendant-type
MPG. In this connector, there are DIs (9 points) used to selection of axes and
multiplier, DO (1 point) for LED, and signals for MPG (1 axis). These signals are
in CM68 for general-purpose DI/DO and JA3 for MPG too. Only one in each pair
is usable.
2 Pins shaded by
are used for the relay. There are two uses in these signals
as follows.
1) When a sub panel is connected to the safety machine operators panel,
signals in CM67 from the sub panel are out to CA157.
Safety machine operators panel type B is not used with sub panel. Use it for
the relay of the other signals.
2) Open pins (TR1-TR6) in CM68, CM69 for general-purpose DI/DO and CM67
for connection to the sub panel are connected directly to CA157.
These signals can be relayed to the power magnetic cabinet by wiring.
3 X1m is PMC DI. Y1n is PMC DO. X2m is DCSPMC DI.

- 279 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

8.8.4.2

B-64603EN/01

Power supply connection

The power required for the operation of the machine operator's panel and for a general DI must be
supplied to connector CA64 (IN) in the following figure. Since the power input from CA64 (IN) is output
to CA64 (OUT) for easy branching, use the power from CA64 (OUT) when the power must be branched.
Up to 1.0 A can be supplied by branching.

24VDC

CA64(IN)
A1 +24V
A2 0V
A3

24VDC

CA64(OUT)
B1 +24V
B2 0V
B3

NOTE
1 Both connectors CA64(IN) and CA64(OUT) are same specification. And there is
not indication of (IN) and (OUT) on the PCB.
2 Power supply for the machine operators panel must not turn off at operation. If
+24V is turned off at operation, CNC happen to get system alarm
(Communication alarm between CNC and machine operators panel). +24V for
operators panel must be supplied before or same time CNC power on.

- 280 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

8.8.4.3

I/O Link i connection

For I/O Link i connection, see Section 7.2.

8.8.4.4

Using the channel 2 of I/O Link i

The signal for two channels of I/O Link i is located at the connector of the machine operator panel.
The 2ch I/O Link signal divider is connectable after the machine operators panel. When using only
channel 1, see Subsection 7.2.

Main board

JD51A

machine
operators panel
JD1B

2ch I/O Link signal


divider
JD44B

JD1A

JD1A-1

Channel 1
I/O Link i

JD1A-2

Channel 2
I/O Link i

Connection after the 2ch I/O Link signal divider is the


same as that for the I/O Link i.

Connection between the main board and machine operators panel


Main board

Machine operators panel

JD51A

JD1B

(PCR-E20MDK-SL-A)
1
SIN1
11
0V
2
*SIN1
12
0V
3
SOUT1 13
0V
4 *SOUT1 14
0V
5
SIN2
15
0V
6
*SIN2
16
7
SOUT2 17
8 *SOUT2 18
(+5V)
9
(+5V)
19
10
20
(+5V)

(PCR-E20MDK-SL-B, SLC4-125442-00)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

SIN1
*SIN1
SOUT1
*SOUT1
SIN2
*SIN2
SOUT2
*SOUT2
(+5V)

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

NOTE
1 Do not connect the +5 V terminals.
2 Do not connect any pin for which no signal is assigned.

- 281 -

0V
0V
0V
0V
0V

(+5V)
(+5V)

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

Cable connection between the main board and machine operators panel
Machine operators
panel

Main board
JD51A
SIN1
*SIN1
SOUT1
*SOUT1
SIN2
*SIN2
SOUT2
*SOUT2
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V

JD1B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15

3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
11
12
13
14
15

SOUT1
*SOUT1
SIN1
*SIN1
SOUT2
*SOUT2
SIN2
*SIN2
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V

Shield
Ground plate
When the depth of the main panel is 80mm min,
When the depth of the safety machine operators panel or
safety machine operators panel type B is 70mm min.

Recommended wire material:


A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)
When the depth of the main panel is 60mm min,
When the depth of the safety machine operators panel or
safety machine operators panel type B is 50mm min.

Recommended connector for cable:


Honda : PCR-E20FA (Connector)
PCR-V20LA (Case)
Hirose electric : FI30-20S (Connector)
FI-20-CV2 (Case)
Fujitsu : FCN-247J020-G/E (Connector)
FCN-240C020-Y/S (Case)
Molex : 52622-2011 (Connector)
52624-2015 (Case)

Recommended connector for cable:


Hirose electric FI30-20S (Connector)
FI-20-CV7 (Case)

Connection between the machine operators panel and 2ch I/O Link signal divider
Machine operators panel

2ch I/O Link signal divider

JD1A

JD44B

(PCR-E20MDK-SL-B, SLC4-125442-00)

(PCR-E20MDT)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

SIN1
*SIN1
SOUT1
*SOUT1
SIN2
*SIN2
SOUT2
*SOUT2
(+5V)

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

0V
0V
0V
0V
0V

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

(+5V)
(+5V)

SIN1
*SIN1
SOUT1
*SOUT1
SIN2
*SIN2
SOUT2
*SOUT2
(+5V)

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

0V
0V
0V
0V
0V

(+5V)
(+5V)

NOTE
1 The +5 V terminals in parentheses are for supplying the power to an optical
adapter to be used for connection by an optical fiber cable. Do not connect the +5
V terminals when using no optical adapter after the 2ch I/O Link signal divider.
2 Do not connect any pin for which no signal is assigned.

- 282 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

Cable connection between the machine operators panel and 2ch I/O Link signal divider
Machine operators
panel

2ch I/O Link signal


divider

JD1A
SIN1
*SIN1
SOUT1
*SOUT1
SIN2
*SIN2
SOUT2
*SOUT2
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
(+5V)
(+5V)
(+5V)

JD44B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
18
20
9

3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
11
12
13
14
15
18
20
9

SOUT1
*SOUT1
SIN1
*SIN1
SOUT2
*SOUT2
SIN2
*SIN2
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
(+5V)
(+5V)
(+5V)

Shield
Ground plate
*

Do not connect the +5 V terminals when using no optical adapter.


When the depth of the main panel is 80mm min,
When the depth of the safety machine operators panel or
safety machine operators panel type B is 70mm min.

Recommended wire material:


A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)
When the depth of the main panel is 60mm min,
When the depth of the safety machine operators panel or
safety machine operators panel type B is 50mm min.
Recommended connector for cable:
Hirose electric FI30-20S (Connector)
FI-20-CV7 (Case)

Cable length

2ch I/O Link signal divider

Machine
operators panel
JD1A

Recommended connector for cable:


Honda : PCR-E20FA (Connector)
PCR-V20LA (Case)
Hirose electric : FI30-20S (Connector)
FI-20-CV2 (Case)
Fujitsu : FCN-247J020-G/E (Connector)
FCN-240C020-Y/S (Case)
Molex : 52622-2011 (Connector)
52624-2015 (Case)

I/O Unit

LA
JD44B
LB
JD1A-1

JD1B

JD1A-2

NOTE
The total of LA and LB must not exceed 10 m, where LA is the length of the cable
between connector JD1A on the machine operators panel and connector JD44B
on the 2ch I/O Link signal divider, and LB is the length of the cable between
connector JD1A-1 or JD1A-2 on the 2ch I/O Link signal divider and connector
JD1B on the I/O unit. When all cables are laid within the same cabinet, however,
a total cable length of up to 15 m is allowed.
- 283 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

8.8.4.5

B-64603EN/01

Emergency stop signal connection

Standard machine operators panel main panel, Safety machine operators panel
The signal from the emergency stop switch on the sub panel can be connected to the power magnetics
cabinet via the main panel or safety machine operators panel. (This signal is not sent to the CNC via the
I/O Link).
In the sub panel AA and D, wirings had been connected to the connector form the emergency stop switch.
(1 contact) Then, connect this connector to CM67 in the main panel or safety machine operators panel.
Machine operator's panel
Main panel, Safety
machine operators panel

Sub panel AA,D


Emergency stop switch
(SB1)

Power
magnetics
cabinet

P.C.B. CA65,
CA157

CM67
*ESP

A04

A04

A03

B04

B04

B03

*ESP

*ESP

(2a2b)
ESPCM1

ESPCM1

+24V

Connector

NOTE
When using two contacts of an emergency stop switch, Do wiring form an
emergency stop switch.
Safety machine operators panel type B
The safety machine operators panel type B does not have the wiring from emergency stop switch.
Do wiring from the emergency stop switch. The emergency stop switch on the safety machine
operators panel type B has 1 a-contact and 2 b-contacts.
As follows, input dual emergency stop signal into PMCDI and DCSPMCDI of the safety machine
operators panel type B. And monitor the emergency stop signal by DCS function.
Example of connection of emergency stop switch
Safety machine operator's panel type B
Emergency stop switch
1b(NC)

(1a2b)

P.C.B

ESP signal
X8.4 (PMCDI)

1b(NC)

ESP signal

+24V
X8.4 (DCSPMCDI)
+24V

1a(NO)

- 284 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

8.8.4.6

Power ON/OFF control signal connection

Standard machine operators panel main panel, Safety machine operators panel
The signal from the ON/OFF switch on the sub panel can be connected to the power magnetics cabinet via
the main panel or safety machine operators panel. (This signal is not sent to the CNC via the I/O Link).
In the sub panel AA and D, wirings had been connected to the connector form the ON/OFF switch. (1
contact) Then, connect this connector to CM67 in the main panel or safety machine operators panel.
Machine operator's panel
Main panel, Safety
machine operators panel

Sub panel AA,D

P.C.B.
ON switch (SB2)

CM67

NC
C

NO

EON

NC
C

CA65
CA157

Power
magnetics
cabinet

A01

A01

A01

EON

A02

A02

A02

COM

B01

B01

B01

EOFF

B02

B02

B02

NO

LED
X1

X2

0V

COM1
OFF switch (SB3)
NC
C

EOFF

NO

COM2

NOTE
1 ON switch of Sub panel AA and D has 2 c-contacts and LED.
To make luminous of LED, the power supply of 24V10% DC must be supplied to
X1 and X2 pin of ON switch.
(Circuit of LED part of ON switch built in the limitation current resistance.
Rated current of circuit of LED part is 10mA.)
2 OFF switch has 1 c-contact and no LED.

- 285 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

Safety machine operators panel type B


The safety machine operators panel type B does not have the wiring from power ON/OFF control switch.
Do wiring from the power ON/OFF control switch.

Example of connection of Power ON/OFF control switch


Safety machine operators panel type B
ON switch
NC
C

NO

EON

NC
C

NO

LED
0V
X1

X2

COM1
OFF switch (With a switch cover)
NC
C

NO

EOFF
COM2

NOTE
1 ON switch has 2 c-contacts and LED.
To make luminous of LED, the power supply of 24V10% DC must be supplied to
X1 and X2 pin of ON switch.
(Circuit of LED part of ON switch built in the limitation current resistance.
Rated current of circuit of LED part is 10mA.)
2 OFF switch has 1 c-contact and no LED.
3 When fast on terminal is used, use 110 series, and conformity tab thickness
0.5mm. Wire size uses the cross-sectional area 0.2~0.5mm2.

- 286 -

B-64603EN/01

8.8.4.7

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

General-purpose DI signal connection

Standard machine operators panel main panel

Sub panel AA, D


Feed rate
override
rotary switch
(SA1)

Spindle
override
rotary switch
(SA2)

Program protect

+24V (Next page)

- 287 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

+24V (Preceding page)

CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CM68 (A1), CM69 (A1), CM65 (A04), CM66
(A04), CM67 (B03), JA58 (10), and JA58 (19) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24
VDC to these pins from the outside.
NOTE
1 Connection of Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7, Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.4 shows when the Sub panel
AA or D is used.
2 As for sub panel AA and D, the wiring form the program protect switch is
connected to the connector. Connect this connector to CM67 in the main panel.
And wiring form rotary switches is connected to the connector. Connect this
connector to CM65, CM66 in the main panel.
3 JA58 DI signals can be used as a signal for axis selection or multiplier setting
when a pendant type manual pulse generator is connected. Do not connect any
DI signal used for axis selection or multiplier setting to CM68.

- 288 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
4 Xm+3.0 to 3.7 have a common line that is possible to select the source/sink type.
If DICOM (CM69-B06pin) is connected to +24V, the DI signal logic is negative.
But in this connection, if the DI signal wires happen to drop the ground level, the
status of the DI signal is same as the DI signal is "ON". From the safety viewpoint,
DICOM should be connected 0V.
5 From the safety viewpoint, Emergency Stop signal must be assigned on the
address Xm+0.0 to 0.7 or Xm+1.0 to 1.7 or Xm+2.0 to 2.7. As refer to the
Subsection 8.8.3, assign the Emergency stop DI.
6 For the unconnected pins at addresses for which the common voltage is fixed
(from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7, from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7, and from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7),
the input is 0. For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which a common
voltage can be selected (from Xm+3.0 to Xm+3.7), the input is 0 when the
DICOM (CM69 (B06) pin) is connected to 0 V or 1 when it is connected to +24
V. Connect DICOM (CM69 (B06) pin) when used. When addresses from Xm+3.0
to Xm+3.7 are not used, connect DICOM to 0 V.

- 289 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

Safety machine operators panel, Safety machine operators panel type B


Pin number
+24V
Address number

CM68(A01),CM69(A01),
JA58(10),JA58(19)

Bit

X1m+0.0
X1m+0.1
X1m+0.2
X1m+0.3
X1m+0.4

RV
RV
RV
RV
RV

X1m+0.5

X1m+0.6
X1m+0.7

X1m+1.0
X1m+1.1
X1m+1.2
X1m+1.3

RV
RV

RV
RV
RV
RV

CM65(A04)

CM65(B05)

CM65(A05)

Feed rate
override
F rotary switch
(SA1)
B

CM65(B03)

CM65(B04)

CM65(B02)

CM66(A04)

CM65(A03)

CM66(A03)

Spindle
rotary
A override
switch
(SA2)
F

CM66(A05)

CM66(B03)

CM66(B04)

CM66(B02)

CM66(B05)

CM67(B03)
X1m+1.4

RV

CM67(A03)

Program protect
(SA3)

JA58(11)
X1m+1.5

RV

CM68(B01)
JA58(13)

X1m+1.6

RV

CM68(A02)
JA58(15)

X1m+1.7

RV

CM68(B02)

+24V (Next page)

- 290 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

Address number
Bit
X1m+2.0
X1m+2.1
X1m+2.2
X1m+2.3
X1m+2.4
X1m+2.5
X1m+2.6
X1m+2.7

X1m+3.0
X1m+3.1
X1m+3.2
X1m+3.3
X1m+3.4
X1m+3.5
X1m+3.6
X1m+3.7

RV

JA58(8)
CM68(B03)

RV

JA58(3)
CM68(A04)

RV

JA58(4)
CM68(B04)

RV

JA58(5)
CM68(A05)

RV

JA58(6)
CM68(B05)

RV

CM69(B01)

RV

CM69(A02)

RV

CM69(B02)

RV

CM69(A03)

RV

CM69(B03)

RV

CM69(A04)

RV

CM69(B04)

RV

CM69(A05)

RV

CM69(B05)

RV

CM69(A06)

X2m+0.0

X2m+0.2
X2m+0.3
X2m+0.4
X2m+0.5

JA58(17)
CM68(A03)

RV

DICOM
X2m+0.1

Pin number

CM69(B06)

RV

CA157(A07)

RV

CA157(B07)

RV

CA157(A08)

RV

CA157(B08)

RV

CA157(A09)

RV

CA157(B09)

RV

CA157(A10)

X2m+0.6
X2m+0.7
RV

CA157(B10)

- 291 -

0V

+24V(Preceding page)

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CM68 (A01), CM69 (A01), CM65 (A04), CM66
(A04), CM67 (B03), JA58 (10), and JA58 (19) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24
VDC to these pins from the outside.
NOTE
1 Connection of X1m+0.0~X1m+0.7, X1m+1.0~X1m+1.3 shows when the rotary
switches of the sub panel AA or D or safety machine operators panel type B is
used.
2 Connection of X1m+1.4 shows when the program protect switch of the sub panel
AA or D is used. Safety machine operators panel type B does not have the
program protect switch. Use X1m+1.4 as general purpose DI.
3 As for sub panel AA and D, the wiring form the program protect switch is
connected to the connector. Connect this connector to CM67 in the safety
machine operators panel. And the wiring from rotary switches is connected to the
connector. Connect this connector to CM65, CM66 in the safety machine
operators panel. As for the safety machine operators panel type B, the wiring
from rotary switch is connected to connector CM65 and CM66.
4 JA58 DI signals can be used as a signal for axis selection or multiplier setting
when a pendant type manual pulse generator is connected. Do not connect any
DI signal used for axis selection or multiplier setting to CM68.
5 X1m+3.0~3.7 have a common line that is possible to select the source/sink type.
If DICOM (CM69-B06pin) is connected to +24V, the DI signal logic is negative.
But in this connection, if the DI signal wires happen to drop the ground level, the
status of the DI signal is same as the DI signal is ON. From the safety viewpoint,
DICOM should be connected 0V.
6 From the safety viewpoint, emergency stop signal must be assigned on the
address X1m+0.0 to 0.7 or X1m+1.0 to 1.7 or X1m+2.0 to 2.7. As refer to the 3.
DI/DO mapping, assign the emergency stop DI.
7 For the unconnected pins at addresses for which the common voltage is fixed
(from X1m+0.0 to X1m+0.7, from X1m+1.0 to X1m+1.7, from X1m+2.0 to
X1m+2.7 and from X2m+0.0 to X2m+0.7), the input is 0. For the unconnected
pins at the addresses for which a common voltage can be selected (from
X1m+3.0 to X1m+3.7), the input is 0 when the DICOM (CM69 (B06) pin) is
connected to 0 V or 1 when it is connected to +24 V. Connect DICOM (CM69
(B06) pin) when used. When addresses from X1m+3.0 to X1m+3.7 are not used,
connect DICOM to 0 V.
8 PMCDI is X1m and DCSPMCDI is X2m. Dual input signals are connected to
safety machine operators panel as PMCDI and DCSPMCDI.

- 292 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

8.8.4.8

General-purpose DO signal connection

Standard machine operators panel main panel


Pin number
DOCOM
CM68(A10),CM69(A10)
Address No.
Bit
+24V

0V

+24V Power
JA58(7)
CM68(A08)

Yn+5.3

Relay

DV
Yn+5.7
Yn+6.3
Yn+6.7
Yn+7.3
Yn+7.4
Yn+7.5
Yn+7.6

DV

CM68(B08)

DV

CM68(A09)

DV

CM68(B09)

DV

CM69(A08)

DV

CM69(B08)

DV

CM69(A09)

DV

CM69(B09)
CM68(B10),CM69(B10)

NOTE
Yn+5.3 can be used when a pendant type manual pulse generator is connected to
JA58. In this case, however, do not connect Yn+5.3 to CM68.

- 293 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

Safety machine operators panel, Safety machine operators panel type B


Pin number
DOCOM
CM68(A10),CM69(A10)
Address No.
Bit
+24V

0V

+24V Power
JA58(7)
CM68(A08)

Y1n+5.3

Relay

DV
Y1n+5.7
Y1n+6.3
Y1n+6.7
Y1n+7.3
Y1n+7.4
Y1n+7.5
Y1n+7.6

DV

CM68(B08)

DV

CM68(A09)

DV

CM68(B09)

DV

CM69(A08)

DV

CM69(B08)

DV

CM69(A09)

DV

CM69(B09)
CM68(B10),CM69(B10)

NOTE
Y1n+5.3 can be used when a pendant type manual pulse generator is connected to
JA58. In this case, however, do not connect Y1n+5.3 to CM68.

- 294 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

8.8.5

Manual Pulse Generator

8.8.5.1

Manual pulse generator connection

When a manual pulse generator is connected using JA3, see Subsection 7.4.1.

8.8.5.2

Pendant type manual pulse generator connection

To use a pendant type manual pulse generator, connect it to JA58.

Standard machine operators panel main panel


Pendant-type manual
pulse generator

Main panel
JA58
(PCR-E20MDK-SL-B)
1
HA1
11 Xm+1.5
2
HB1
12
0V
3 Xm+2.2 13 Xm+1.6
4 Xm+2.3 14
0V
5 Xm+2.4 15 Xm+1.7
6 Xm+2.5 16
0V
7 Yn+5.3 17 Xm+2.0
8 Xm+2.1 18
+5V
9
+5V
19
+24V
10
+24V
20
+5V

Axis
Multiplier
Selection Setting

NOTE
1 When Xm+1.5 to Xm+2.5 of connector JA58 are allocated as the DIs used for the
axis selection and multiplier setting, Xm+1.5 to Xm+2.5 of connector CM68 cannot
be used.
2 One DO is available for the manual pulse generator side at the user's direction.
When this is used, Yn+5.3 of CM68 cannot be used, as in the case for DIs above.
Safety machine operators panel, Safety machine operators panel type B
Safety machine operators panel,
Safety machine operatorspanel type B

Pendant-type manual
pulse generator

JA58
(SLC4-125442-00)
1
HA1
11
2
HB1
12
3 X1m+2.2 13
4 X1m+2.3 14
5 X1m+2.4 15
6 X1m+2.5 16
7 Y1n+5.3 17
8 X1m+2.1 18
9
+5V
19
10
+24V
20

X1m+1.5
0V
X1m+1.6
0V
X1m+1.7
0V
X1m+2.0
+5V
+24V
+5V

Axis
Multiplier
Selection Setting

- 295 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
1 When X1m+1.5~X1m+2.5 of connector JA58 are allocated as the DIs used for the
axis selection and multiplier setting, X1m+1.5~X1m+2.5 of connector CM68 cannot
be used.
2 One DO is available for the manual pulse generator side at the users direction.
When this is used, Y1n+5.3 of CM68 cannot be used, as in the case for DIs above.

- 296 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

8.8.6

Connector (on the cable side) specifications

Connector
JD1A, JD1B, JA3, JA58
(Main panel depth=60 mm min,
Safety machine operators panel or
Safety machine operators panel type B
depth=50 mm min)

Manufacture specification
Stand wire
Hirose
press-mount type FI30-20S (Connector)
FI-20-CV7 (Case)

Order specification
A02B-0236-K302

JD1A, JD1B, JA58


(Main panel depth=80 mm min,
Safety machine operators panel or
Safety machine operators panel type B
depth=70 mm min)

Soldering type

Honda
PCR-E20FS (Connector)
PCR-V20LA (Case)
Hirose
FI40B-20S (Connector)
FI-20-CV2 (Case)
Stand wire
Honda
press-mount type PCR-E20FA (Connector)
PCR-V20LA (Case)
Hirose
FI30-20S (Connector)
FI-20-CV2 (Case)
Soldering type
Hirose
FI40B-2015S (Connector)
FI-20-CV (Case)

A02B-0120-K301

Tyco Electronics
1-178288-3 (Housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact)
Tyco Electronics
178289-5 (Housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact)
Tyco Electronics
178289-8 (Housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact)
Hirose
HIF3BA-10D-2.54R
Hirose
HIF3BA-20D-2.54R

A02B-0120-K324

JA3
(Main panel depth=80 mm min,
Safety machine operators panel or
Safety machine operators panel type B
depth=70 mm min)
CA64 (IN), CA64 (OUT)

CM67

CM68, CM69, CA157

CM65, CM66
CA65

8.8.7

A02B-0120-K302

A02B-0120-K303

A02B-0236-K312

A02B-0236-K313

A02B-0236-K314
A02B-0120-K343

DI/DO Addresses for the Keyboard

Standard machine operators panel main panel


DI/DO address of Key switches (matrix input) and LED (matrix output) on the keyboard of Main panel are
as follows.
BIT
Key/LED
Xm+4/Yn+0
Xm+5/Yn+1
Xm+6/Yn+2
Xm+7/Yn+3
Xm+8/Yn+4
Xm+9/Yn+5
Xm+10/Yn+6
Xm+11/Yn+7

B4
D4
A8
C8
E8

B3
D3
A7
C7
E7
B11
D11

B2
D2
A6
C6
E6
B10
D10

B1
D1
A5
C5
E5
B9
D9

A4
C4
E4
B8
D8

A3
C3
E3
B7
D7
A11
C11
E11

A2
C2
E2
B6
D6
A10
C10
E10

A1
C1
E1
B5
D5
A9
C9
E9

- 297 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

Safety machine operators panel, Safety machine operators panel type B


DI/DO address of key switches of dual contact and LED on the keyboard is as follows.
1st group (PMC DI/DO) address
BIT

B4
D4
A8
C8
E8

B3
D3
A7
C7
E7
B11
D11

B2
D2
A6
C6
E6
B10
D10

B1
D1
A5
C5
E5
B9
D9

A4
C4
E4
B8
D8

A3
C3
E3
B7
D7
A11
C11
E11

A2
C2
E2
B6
D6
A10
C10
E10

A1
C1
E1
B5
D5
A9
C9
E9

Key/LED
X1m+4/Y1n+0
X1m+5/Y1n+1
X1m+6/Y1n+2
X1m+7/Y1n+3
X1m+8/Y1n+4
X1m+9/Y1n+5
X1m+10/Y1n+6
X1m+11/Y1n+7

2nd group (DCSPMC DI/DO) address


BIT

B4
D4
A8
C8
E8

B3
D3
A7
C7
E7
B11
D11

B2
D2
A6
C6
E6
B10
D10

B1
D1
A5
C5
E5
B9
D9

A4
C4
E4
B8
D8

A3
C3
E3
B7
D7
A11
C11
E11

A2
C2
E2
B6
D6
A10
C10
E10

A1
C1
E1
B5
D5
A9
C9
E9

Key
X2m+4
X2m+5
X2m+6
X2m+7
X2m+8
X2m+9
X2m+10
X2m+11

NOTE
1 All the key switches have dual contacts, and the input signal of the key is inputted
into the address of PMC and DCSPMC. Monitor only the safety-related input signal
by DCS function.
2 When a signal state changes, the signals of pair may not match for some period.
Set the value of safety-related I/O check timer (Parameter number 1945) or more
500.
Keyswitches / LED position

LED
Keyswitches
A

Address

- 298 -

10

11

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

8.8.8

Code Output for the Rotary Switch

Standard machine operators panel main panel


When sub panel AA or D is used, a real Gray code is output from the rotary switches as listed in the tables
below.

Feed rate override rotary switch (SA1)


%
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5

10

15

20

30

40

50

60

80

90

70

95 100 105 110 120



Spindle override rotary switch (SA2)


%
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

120

NOTE
Xm+0.5 and Xm+1.2 are parity bits.
Safety machine operators panel, Safety machine operators panel type B
When sub panel AA or D is used with safety machine operators panel or safety machine operators panel
type B is used, a real Gray code is output from the rotary switches as listed in the tables below.

Feed rate override rotary switch (SA1)


%
X1m+0.0
X1m+0.1
X1m+0.2
X1m+0.3
X1m+0.4
X1m+0.5

10

15

20

30

40

50

60

80

90

70

Spindle override rotary switch (SA2)


%
X1m+0.6
X1m+0.7
X1m+1.0
X1m+1.1
X1m+1.2
X1m+1.3

50

60

70

80

90

100

NOTE
X1m+0.5 and X1m+1.2 are parity bits.

- 299 -

110

120

95 100 105 110 120



8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

8.8.9

Outline

8.8.9.1

Outline of main panel

B-64603EN/01

Note1

Packing attachment area

Mass: 1.3kg

NOTE
1 When a low screw-fixing housing HIROSE FL-20-CV7 is used, the depth is 60mm.
When a usual housing is used, the depth is 80mm.
2 Secure the unit with the screws from outside of the cabinet and then attach the caps.
3 Install the main panel in a vertical direction.

- 300 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

8.8.9.2

Outline of Safety machine operators panel

50(70)

290
5

280

NOTE1

120

130
7

20

140

4-4

270

Mass: 1.3kg
288

4-M3

124

130

138

280

274

Panel cut drawing

Packing attachment area

Unit: mm

NOTE
1 When a low screw-fixing housing HIROSE FL-20-CV7 is used, the depth is
50mm.
When a usual housing is used, the depth is 70mm.
2 Secure the unit with the screws from outside of the cabinet and then attach the
caps.
3 Install the safety machine operators panel in a vertical direction.

- 301 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

8.8.9.3

B-64603EN/01

Outline of Safety machine operators panel type B

400

135

155

50(70) NOTE1

20

12

Mass: 1.8kg
55

380
398
150

110

110

7-5

136

153
145

Packing attachment area

381

180

180

Unit: mm

Panel cut drawing

NOTE
1 When a low screw-fixing housing HIROSE FL-20-CV7 is used, the depth is
50mm.
When a usual housing is used, the depth is 70mm.
The depth of emergency stop switch is 70mm.
2 This unit is mounted on the outside of a cabinet and a nut fastens it from the
inside.
3 Install the safety machine operators panel type B in a vertical direction.

- 302 -

B-64603EN/01

8.8.9.4

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

Outline of sub panel AA

Ground stud
(M410)

Mass: 0.7kg

Unit: mm

Panel-cut drawing

- 303 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

8.8.9.5

Outline of sub panel D

- 304 -

B-64603EN/01

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

8.8.9.6

Connector locations of main panel


Ground stud
(M410)

Fuse (1A)

Ground
terminal
(M3 screw)

Unit: mm

View from rear side

8.8.9.7

Connector locations of safety machine operators panel


Ground stud (M410)

16

110

JD1B

31

CM65

70

CM66

48

View from rear side

16 14

CM67

19 15 17 17

CA64

18

21

CA157

CM69

CM68

JA58

41

45

JA3

46

JD1A

209

50

19

25

Ground terminal
(M3 screw)

22

25
Fuse
(1A)

Unit: mm

NOTE
The locations of connector CM65 and CM66 is different from the main panel.
- 305 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

Connector locations of safety machine operators panel type B

16

15 17 17

31

CM66

CM65

70

24 14

49

CM67

71

CA64

26

29

CA157

CM69

CM68

JA58

45

JA3

JD1B

57

104

117

209

71

Ground stud
M412

JD1A

8.8.9.8

B-64603EN/01

48

25

22

84
Fuse
(1A)

Ground terminal
(M3 screw)

View from rear side

8.8.10

Unit: mm

Specifications of the Machine Operators Panel

8.8.10.1 Installation conditions


Install the machine operators panel in a fully enclosed cabinet of flat side.
For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.

8.8.10.2 Order specification


Name

Order
specification

Standard machine operators panel main panel

A02B-0323-C231

Safety machine operators panel


Safety machine operators panel type B
Standard machine operators panel Sub panel AA
Standard machine operators panel Sub panel D
Set of transparent key tops

A02B-0323-C234
A02B-0323-C235
A02B-0236-C237
A02B-0236-C244
A02B-0236-K170
A02B-0323-K170

Set of blank key tops

A02B-0236-K171
A02B-0323-K171

- 306 -

Remarks

I/O Link i connection Symbol and


alphabet keys
I/O Link i connection
Symbol and alphabet keys

For Standard machine operators panel


main panel, 55 key tops
For safety machine operators panel and
safety machine operators panel type B,
55 key tops
For Standard machine operators panel
main panel, 55 key tops
For safety machine operators panel and
safety machine operators panel type B,
55 key tops

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

Order
specification

Name

Set of symbol English key tops

A02B-0236-K174

A02B-0323-K174

Set of blank key tops (color: red)

A02B-0236-K175

A02B-0323-K175

A02B-0236-K176

Set of blank key tops (color: green)

A02B-0323-K176

Set of blank key tops (color: blue)

A02B-0236-K177

A02B-0323-K177

Set of blank key tops (color: yellow)

A02B-0236-K178

A02B-0323-K178

Keyboard cover

A02B-0323-K041

Screw caps (with 5 pieces included)


Fuse (spare parts)

A02B-0319-K191
A02B-0815-K001

Remarks

For Standard machine operators panel


main panel,
34 labeled key tops + 21 blank key tops
For safety machine operators panel and
safety machine operators panel type B,
34 labeled key tops + 21 blank key tops
For Standard machine operators panel
main panel,
100 red blank key tops
For safety machine operators panel and
safety machine operators panel type B,
100 red blank key tops
For Standard machine operators panel
main panel,
100 green blank key tops
For safety machine operators panel and
safety machine operators panel type B,
100 green blank key tops
For Standard machine operators panel
main panel,
100 blue blank key tops
For safety machine operators panel and
safety machine operators panel type B,
100 blue blank key tops
For Standard machine operators panel
main panel,
100 yellow blank key tops
For safety machine operators panel and
safety machine operators panel type B,
100 yellow blank key tops
For main panel, safety machine operators
panel and safety machine operators
panel type B,
Protection from dust and coolant.
1A

8.8.10.3 Main panel specification


Item

General-purpose DI points
General-purpose DO points
Key switches
LED
Manual pulse generator interface
Interface to CNC

Specification

Remarks

32 points
8 points
55 keys
Green
Max. 3 units
I/O Link i connection

24VDC type input


12VDC to 24VDC type output
Matrix DI
Attached to all key switches, Matrix DO

8.8.10.4 Safety machine operators panel and safety machine


operators panel type B specification
Item

General-purpose DI points
General-purpose DO points

Specification
C234
C235

40 points
8 points

- 307 -

Remarks

24VDC type input


12VDC to 24VDC type output

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link


Specification
C234
C235

Item

Key switches
LED
Manual pulse generator interface
Interface to CNC

Remarks

55 keys
Green
Max. 3 units
I/O Link i connection

Feed rate override switch


Spindle override switch

1
1

Emergency stop switch

ON switch

OFF switch

B-64603EN/01

All key switch is dual contacts, Matrix DI


Attached to all key switches, Matrix DO

5 bit real gray code output (with a parity bit)


Number of contact: 3 (contact a 1, contact b 2)
M3.5 Screw
Contact c 2, illumination type (24 VDC, resistance
contained, LED color: Milk white)
Contact c 1, With a switch cover

8.8.10.5 Sub panel AA, D specification


Specification of
Sub panel
AA
D

Item

Feed rate override switch


Spindle override switch
Emergency stop switch
Program protect key
ON switch
OFF switch

1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

Remarks

5 bit real gray code output (with a parity bit)


Number of contact: 4 (contact a 2, contact b 2), M3.5 Screw
The key cannot be removed in the program protect off state.
Contact c 2, illumination type (24 VDC, resistance contained)
Contact c 1

8.8.10.6 Power supply specification


Item

Standard machine operators panel


main panel
Safety machine operators panel
Safety machine operators panel type B

Voltage

Specification

DC24V10% (from
Power connector
CA64, including
momentary values)

0.6A

Remarks

Including all DI consumption.


The power supply rating does
not include that to be input to
DOCOM for DO output.

8.8.10.7 Heat output


Item

Heat output

Standard machine operators panel main panel


Safety machine operators panel
Safety machine operators panel type B

15W

Remarks

When 50% of general-purpose input signals


and key LEDs on the main panel are on

8.8.10.8 General-purpose DI signal definition


Number of points
Rated input voltage
Rated input current

Standard machine operators panel main panel: 32 points


Safety machine operators panel, Safety machine operators panel type B:
40 points
24VDC (+10%, -10%)
7.3mA (average)

- 308 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

Standard machine operators panel main panel:


Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7, Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7, Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7: Sink type
Xm+3.0 to Xm+3.7: Sink or source type selectable
Safety machine operators panel and Safety machine operators panel type
B:
X1m+0.0 to X1m+0.7, X1m+1.0 to X1m+1.7, X1m+2.0 to X1m+2.7,
X2m+0.0 to X2m+0.7: Sink type
X1m+3.0 to X1m+3.7: Sink or source type selectable
18VDC or more, 6mA or more
6VDC or less, 1.5mA or less

Polarity

ON voltage/current
OFF voltage/current
Permission self-diagnostics pulse
width

Pulse width: 150s or less, Cycle: 4ms or more


The receiver delay time is 2ms (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.

Response time

8.8.10.9 General-purpose DO signal definition


Number of points
Rated output voltage
Rated output current
Polarity
Maximum voltage decrease when ON
Maximum leakage current when OFF
Output protection function
Response time

8 points
12VDC to 24VDC (+20%, -15%)
200mA/pt (An instant is contained)
Source type
28mV
5A
Protection against overheat, over current, and short circuit
The driver delay time is 50s (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.

CAUTION
1 The protection function is intended to protect the components internal rather than
external units.
2 No protection function can protect their internal components in all cases. Once
any protection function has worked, remove the cause promptly. If an absolute
maximum rating is exceeded, for example, it is likely that protection functions
may not work or an IC may break down before the related protection function
works, depending on the way or situation in which the modules are used.
3 If an output protection function is defective, it is likely that, if the load current
exceeds its rating continuously for a long time, smoke or ignition may occur.

8.8.11

Keyboard

8.8.11.1 Meaning of key symbols


Symbol

English

Meaning of key

AUTO

AUTO mode selection signal; Sets automatic operation mode.

EDIT

EDIT mode selection signal; Sets program edit operation mode.

MDI

MDI mode selection; Sets MDI mode.

REMOTE

DNC operation mode; Sets DNC operation mode.

- 309 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link


Symbol

B-64603EN/01

English

Meaning of key

REF
RETURN

Reference position return mode selection; Sets reference position return mode.

JOG

JOG feed mode selection; Sets jog feed mode.

INC
JOG

Step feed mode selection; Sets step feed mode.

HANDLE
TEACH
SINGLE
BLOCK
BLOCK
DELETE
PRG
STOP
OPT
STOP
RESTART

DRY
RUN
MC
LOCK
CYCLE
START
CYCLE
STOP

Manual handle feed mode selection; Sets manual handle feed mode.
Teach-in jog (reach-in handle) mode selection signal; Sets teach-in jog
(teach-in handle) mode.
Single block signal; Executes program one by one. This key is used to check
a program.
Block delete; Skips the execution of the blocks d ending with the end of block
(;) when this button is pressed during automatic operation.
Program stop(output only); Turns on the LED on the button when automatic
operation is stopped by M00 specified in the program.
Optional stop; Stops automatic operation after execution of the block of a
program where M01 is specified in the program.
Program restart; A program may be restart at a block by specifying the
sequence number of the block, after automatic operation is stopped because of
a broken tool or for holidays.
Dry run; Sets the axis feedrate to the jog feedrate instead of a programmed
feedrate when automatic operation is performed by setting this button to on.
This function is used to check only the movement of the tool when no
workpiece is mounted.
Machine lock; Updates only position display on the screen without making any
axis movement, when automatic operation is performed by setting this button
to on. This function is used to check a program.
Cycle start; Start automatic operation.
Cycle stop; Stops automatic operation.
Manual handle feed magnification:
Magnification for manual handle feed.
Magnified by 1, 10, 100, 1000.
Manual feed axis selection; Axes are selected, when these buttons are set to
on in the jog feed mode or step feed mode.
Manual feed operation; Performs movement along selected axes when these
buttons are set on in the jog feed mode or step feed mode.

RAPID

Traverse; Performs jog feed at rapid traverse rate when this button is set to on.

SPDL
CW

Positive spindle rotation direction; Rotates the spindle motor in the positive
direction.

SPDL
CCW

Negative spindle rotation direction; Rotates the spindle motor in the negative
direction.

SPDL
STOP

Spindle stop; Stops the spindle motor rotation.

- 310 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

8.8.11.2 Detachable key top on the main panel


All key tops on the machine operators panel are detachable, which allows you to make your original key
layout easily. A transparent key top (available as an option) can be used to insert a film sheet with
marking into the key.
Symbolic key top or
Blank key top

Transparent key top

Film sheet (Note)


For main panel:
(12.5mm12.5mm, Thickness: Up to 0.1 mm)
For safety machine operators panel and safety
machine operators panel type B:
(11.0mm11.0mm, Thickness: Up to 0.1 mm)

NOTE
1 Use the coolant-proof sheet in the environment which coolant is used for.
2 The size of film sheet changes with kinds of machine operators panel.

8.8.11.3 Keyboard cover


Use the keyboard cover when using the system under environments with higher degree of dust or coolant.

137.5

261.3

Sticky tapes area


Unit: mm

How to setting
1. Clean the face of machine operators panel type B.
- 311 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

2. Confirm the cover direction for setting.


3. Remove the all of sheets from sticky tapes on the outline of this cover.
4. Avoid swells of LED from sticky tapes, post it on this panel face.
See Appendix F for more information.

WARNING
Use the keyboard cover, when it may become impossible to operate key switch
because the dust, cutting chips, etc. get in the crevice between keyboards.

8.8.12

DO (Output Signal) Error Detection

The DO driver of the main panel has the output protection function for each output signal. If an accident,
such as connecting the cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in the load current or in the driver
temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided for each DO driver, is activated and keeps the DO
signal in the OFF state. Even if this occurs, the CNC and I/O module continue operating without entering
the alarm status, but the PMC is notified of the location of the error detected by the DO driver. This
information can be checked on the PMC status screen or alarm processing can be performed in advance
using a ladder to help error check and recovery.

Standard machine operators panel main panel


When the above protection function is activated by the DO driver, the relevant error is output as a status
alarm and transferred to the PMC system relay area. The following table lists system relay area
information and corresponding DO data related to a status alarm. When an alarm data bit is set to 1, the
DO driver corresponding to the bit detects an error. For details of the status alarm, see Subsection 7.3.3,
Status Alarm.
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
Information output to the system relay area

Type

Group
number

PMC
path

Slot
number

Alarm
information
number
(Intra-slot byte
address)

0 to 23

1 to 5, 9

5
6
7

Faulty location

Y address
(DO address)

Yn+5
Yn+6
Yn+7

5th byte DO
6th byte DO
7th byte DO

Output values of Group number, PMC path, and Y address depends on unit connection and I/O
address assignment.
Yn indicates the start address at allocation.
Description of Alarm data in the system relay area
Alarm data
#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

DO ground
fault at bit 7

DO ground
fault at bit 6

DO ground
fault at bit 5

DO ground
fault at bit 4

DO ground
fault at bit 3

DO ground
fault at bit 2

DO ground
fault at bit 1

DO ground
fault at bit 0

- 312 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link

B-64603EN/01

Safety machine operators panel, Safety machine operators panel type B


When the above protection function is activated by the DO driver, the relevant error is output as a status
alarm and transferred to the PMC system relay area. The following table lists system relay area
information and corresponding DO data related to a status alarm. When an alarm data bit is set to 1, the
DO driver corresponding to the bit detects an error. For details of the status alarm, see Subsection 7.3.3,
Status Alarm.
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
Information output to the system relay area

Type

Group
number

PMC
path

Slot
number

Alarm
information
number
(Intra-slot byte
address)

0 to 23

1 to 5, 9

5
6
7

Faulty location

Y address
(DO address)

Y1n+5
Y1n+6
Y1n+7

5th byte DO
6th byte DO
7th byte DO

Output values of Group number, PMC path, and Y address depends on unit connection and I/O
address assignment.
Yn indicates the start address at allocation.
Description of Alarm data in the system relay area
Alarm data
#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

DO ground
fault at bit 7

DO ground
fault at bit 6

DO ground
fault at bit 5

DO ground
fault at bit 4

DO ground
fault at bit 3

DO ground
fault at bit 2

DO ground
fault at bit 1

DO ground
fault at bit 0

- 313 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.9

B-64603EN/01

CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL CONNECTION


UNIT (SOURCE DO)

Two operator's panel connection units are available according to the number of I/Os.

8.9.1

Specification

Input

Output

A16B-2204-0260
A16B-2204-0261

96
64

64
32

Overall Connection Diagram


Operator's panel connection unit (source DO)
A16B-2204-0260
A16B-2204-0261
CNC

I/O UNIT
JD51A

JD1B

JD1B

JD1A

Machine operators panel

CM51

+24 V power supply

CP61
CM52

CMB3

CMB4

Ground mounting plate

8.9.2

Power Connection

Provide the CP61 connector, shown below, with the power necessary for the printed circuit board
operation and that for DI operation.
CP61

+24 V power supply


Recommended cable-side connector
SORIAU JAPAN (former Nippon Burndy)
Tri-pole connector (Brown)
Housing: A63L-0001-0202#3LN (SMS3PNS-5)
Contact: A63L-0001-0226 (RC16M-SCT3)
2
Power cable30/0.18 (0.75mm ) or thicker

- 314 -

+24V

0V

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.9.3

DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement


CM52

CM51
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

DICOM1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.5
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.6
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.6
Xm+3.1
Xm+3.4
Xm+3.7
Xm+4.2
Xm+4.5
Xm+5.0
Xm+5.3
Xm+5.5
Xm+5.7

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Xm+0.1
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.7
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.5
Xm+2.0
Xm+2.3
Xm+3.0
Xm+3.3
Xm+3.6
Xm+4.1
Xm+4.4
Xm+4.7
Xm+5.2

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

Xm+0.0
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.6
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.7
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.7
Xm+3.2
Xm+3.5
Xm+4.0
Xm+4.3
Xm+4.6
Xm+5.1
Xm+5.4
Xm+5.6
24V

01 Xm+6.0
02 Xm+6.3
19 Xm+6.1
03 Xm+6.6
20 Xm+6.4
04 Xm+7.1
21 Xm+6.7
05 Xm+7.4
22 Xm+7.2
06 Xm+7.7
23 Xm+7.5
07 Xm+8.2
24 Xm+8.0
08 Xm+8.5
25 Xm+8.3
09 Xm+8.7
26 Xm+9.0
10 Xm+9.2
27 Xm+9.3
11 Xm+9.5
28 Xm+9.6
12 Xm+10.0
29 Xm+10.1
13 Xm+10.3
30 Xm+10.4
14 Xm+10.6
31 Xm+10.7
15 Xm+11.1
32 Xm+11.2
16 Xm+11.4
17 Xm+11.6
18
24V

Yn+6.0
Yn+6.3
Yn+6.6
Yn+7.1
Yn+7.4
Yn+7.7
DOCOM

8
9
10
11
12
13

CMB4

CMB3
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

0V
Xm+6.2
Xm+6.5
Xm+7.0
Xm+7.3
Xm+7.6
Xm+8.1
Xm+8.4
Xm+8.6
Xm+9.1
Xm+9.4
Xm+9.7
Xm+10.2
Xm+10.5
Xm+11.0
Xm+11.3
Xm+11.5
Xm+11.7

0V
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.5
Yn+1.0
Yn+1.3
Yn+1.6
Yn+2.1
Yn+2.4
Yn+2.6
Yn+3.1
Yn+3.4
Yn+3.7
Yn+4.2
Yn+4.5
Yn+5.0
Yn+5.3
Yn+5.5
DOCOM

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Yn+0.1
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.7
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.5
Yn+2.0
Yn+2.3
Yn+3.0
Yn+3.3
Yn+3.6
Yn+4.1
Yn+4.4
Yn+4.7
Yn+5.2

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Yn+0.0
Yn+0.3
Yn+0.6
Yn+1.1
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.7
Yn+2.2
Yn+2.5
Yn+2.7
Yn+3.2
Yn+3.5
Yn+4.0
Yn+4.3
Yn+4.6
Yn+5.1
Yn+5.4
DOCOM
DICOM2

Yn+6.2
Yn+6.5
Yn+7.0
Yn+7.3
Yn+7.6
Yn+5.7

01
02
03
04
05
06
07

Yn+6.1
Yn+6.4
Yn+6.7
Yn+7.2
Yn+7.5
Yn+5.6
0V

(Note)
1. Xm+8 through Xm+11 and Yn+4 through Yn+7
can be used only for the A16B-2204-0260.
2. Connector CMB4 is not mounted when
A16B-2204-0261 is selected.

NOTE

CM51, CM52, CMB3: Recommended cable-side connector: A63L-0001-0134#01


(Connector: HONDA MR-50F, Case: HONDA MR-50L)
Recommended wire material: A66L-0001-0042
(7/0.18, 50 pins)
CMB4:
Recommended cable-side connector: A63L-0001-0134#02
(Connector: HONDA MR-20F, Case: HONDA MR-20L)
Recommended wire material: A66L-0001-0041
(7/0.18, 20 pins)

- 315 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CM51 (18) and CM52 (18) is for DI signals. Do
not supply 24 V DC to these pins from the outside.

8.9.4

DI (Input Signal) Connection


Pin number
Address number
Bit number
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7

+24V
CM51(18), CM52(18)
CM51(01)

RV
RV

CM51(19)

RV

CM51(34)

RV

CM51(02)

RV

CM51(20)

RV

CM51(35)

RV

CM51(03)

RV

CM51(21)

DICOM1

CM51(33)
CM52(33), CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)

Xm+1.0
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.7

RV

CM51(36)

RV

CM51(04)

RV

CM51(22)

RV

CM51(37)

RV

CM51(05)

RV

CM51(23)

RV

CM51(38)
CM51(06)

RV
DICOM1

CM51(33)
CM52(33), CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)

- 316 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Pin number
Address number
Bit number
Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.6
Xm+2.7

Xm+3.0
Xm+3.1
Xm+3.2
Xm+3.3
Xm+3.4
Xm+3.5
Xm+3.6
Xm+3.7

+24V
CM51(18), CM52(18)
CM51(24)

RV
RV

CM51(39)

RV

CM51(07)

RV

CM51(25)

RV

CM51(40)

RV

CM51(08)

RV

CM51(41)

RV

CM51(09)

RV

CM51(26)

RV

CM51(42)

RV

CM51(10)

RV

CM51(27)

RV

CM51(43)

RV

CM51(11)

RV

CM51(28)
CM51(44)

RV

- 317 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Pin number
Address number
Bit number
Xm+4.0
Xm+4.1
Xm+4.2
Xm+4.3
Xm+4.4
Xm+4.5
Xm+4.6
Xm+4.7

+24V
CM51(18), CM52(18)
CM51(12)

RV
RV

CM51(29)

RV

CM51(45)

RV

CM51(13)

RV

CM51(30)

RV

CM51(46)

RV

CM51(14)

RV

CM51(31)

DICOM2

CMB3(18)
CM52(33), CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)

Xm+5.0
Xm+5.1
Xm+5.2
Xm+5.3
Xm+5.4
Xm+5.5
Xm+5.6
Xm+5.7

RV

CM51(47)

RV

CM51(15)

RV

CM51(32)

RV

CM51(48)

RV

CM51(16)

RV

CM51(49)

RV

CM51(17)
CM51(50)

RV

- 318 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Pin number
Address number
Bit number
Xm+6.0
Xm+6.1
Xm+6.2
Xm+6.3
Xm+6.4
Xm+6.5
Xm+6.6
Xm+6.7

Xm+7.0
Xm+7.1
Xm+7.2
Xm+7.3
Xm+7.4
Xm+7.5
Xm+7.6
Xm+7.7

+24V
CM51(18), CM52(18)
CM52(01)

RV
RV

CM52(19)

RV

CM52(34)

RV

CM52(02)

RV

CM52(20)

RV

CM52(35)

RV

CM52(03)

RV

CM52(21)

RV

CM52(36)

RV

CM52(04)

RV

CM52(22)

RV

CM52(37)

RV

CM52(05)

RV

CM52(23)

RV

CM52(38)
CM52(06)

RV

- 319 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Pin number
Address number
Bit number
Xm+8.0
Xm+8.1
Xm+8.2
Xm+8.3
Xm+8.4
Xm+8.5
Xm+8.6
Xm+8.7

Xm+9.0
Xm+9.1
Xm+9.2
Xm+9.3
Xm+9.4
Xm+9.5
Xm+9.6
Xm+9.7

+24V
CM51(18), CM52(18)
CM52(24)

RV
RV

CM52(39)

RV

CM52(07)

RV

CM52(25)

RV

CM52(40)

RV

CM52(08)

RV

CM52(41)

RV

CM52(09)

RV

CM52(26)

RV

CM52(42)

RV

CM52(10)

RV

CM52(27)

RV

CM52(43)

RV

CM52(11)

RV

CM52(28)
CM52(44)

RV

- 320 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Pin number
Address number
Bit number
Xm+10.0
Xm+10.1
Xm+10.2
Xm+10.3
Xm+10.4
Xm+10.5
Xm+10.6
Xm+10.7

Xm+11.0
Xm+11.1
Xm+11.2
Xm+11.3
Xm+11.4
Xm+11.5
Xm+11.6
Xm+11.7

+24V
CM51(18), CM52(18)
CM52(12)

RV
RV

CM52(29)

RV

CM52(45)

RV

CM52(13)

RV

CM52(30)

RV

CM52(46)

RV

CM52(14)

RV

CM52(31)

RV

CM52(47)

RV

CM52(15)

RV

CM52(32)

RV

CM52(48)

RV

CM52(16)

RV

CM52(49)

RV

CM52(17)
CM52(50)

RV
DICOM1

CM51(33)
CM52(33), CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)

- 321 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.2, Xm+0.7, Xm+1.0 through Xm+1.2, Xm+1.7, Xm+11.4
through Xm+11.7, and Xm+4.0 through Xm+4.7 are DI pins for which a common
voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the DICOM1 CM51(33) or DICOM2
CMB3(18) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can be input with its logical
state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected to ground, it has the same effect
as inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent this from occurring, the connection of
the DICOM1 CM51(33) and DICOM2 CMB3(18) pins to the 0 V power supply is
recommended whereever possible.
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed,
the input is 0. For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which a common
voltage can be selected, the input is 0 when the DICOMx common select pin is
connected to the 0 V power supply or 1 when it is connected to the +24 V power
supply. Connect DICOM1 and DICOM2 when used. When addresses Xm+0.0
through Xm+0.2, Xm+0.7, Xm+1.0 through Xm+1.2, Xm+1.7, Xm+11.4 through
Xm+11.7, and Xm+4.0 through Xm+4.7 are not used, connect DICOM1 and
DICOM2 to the 0 V power supply.
Address
Xm
Xm+1
Xm+2
Xm+3
Xm+4
Xm+5
Xm+6
Xm+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11

Common voltage for DI


Common voltage
Bit 0, 1, 2, and 7 can be selected with DICOM1.
The others cannot be selected.
Bit 0, 1, 2, and 7 can be selected with DICOM1.
The others cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.
Can be selected with DICOM2
Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected.
Bit 4, 5, 6, and 7 can be selected with DICOM1.
The others cannot be selected.

CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CM51 (18) and CM52 (18) is for DI signals. Do
not supply 24 V DC to these pins from the outside.

- 322 -

B-64603EN/01

8.9.5

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

DO (Output Signal) Connection

CMB3(17,50)
CMB4(20)

CMB3(01)

CMB3(19)
CMB3(34)
CMB3(02)
CMB3(20)
CMB3(35)
CMB3(03)
CMB3(21)

CMB3(36)
CMB3(04)
CMB3(22)
CMB3(37)
CMB3(05)
CMB3(23)
CMB3(38)
CMB3(06)

CM52(33),CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)

- 323 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

CMB3(17,50)
CMB4(20)

CMB3(24)

Yn+2.0

Yn+2.1

CMB3(39)

Yn+2.2

CMB3(07)

Yn+2.3

CMB3(25)

Yn+2.4

CMB3(40)

Yn+2.5

CMB3(08)

Yn+2.6

CMB3(41)

Yn+2.7

CMB3(09)

Yn+3.0

CMB3(26)

Yn+3.1

CMB3(42)

Yn+3.2

CMB3(10)

Yn+3.3

CMB3(27)

Yn+3.4

CMB3(43)

Yn+3.5

CMB3(11)

Yn+3.6

CMB3(28)

Yn+3.7

CMB3(44)

CM52(33),CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)

- 324 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

CMB3(17,50)
CMB4(20)

CMB3(12)

Yn+4.0

Yn+4.1

CMB3(29)

Yn+4.2

CMB3(45)

Yn+4.3

CMB3(13)

Yn+4.4

CMB3(30)

Yn+4.5

CMB3(46)

Yn+4.6

CMB3(14)

Yn+4.7

CMB3(31)

Yn+5.0

CMB3(47)

Yn+5.1

CMB3(15)

Yn+5.2

CMB3(32)

Yn+5.3

CMB3(48)

Yn+5.4

CMB3(16)

Yn+5.5

CMB3(49)

Yn+5.6

CMB4(06)

Yn+5.7

CMB4(13)

CM52(33),CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)

- 325 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

CMB3(17,50)
CMB4(20)

CMB4(14)

Yn+6.0

Yn+6.1

CMB4(01)

Yn+6.2

CMB4(08)

Yn+6.3

CMB4(15)

Yn+6.4

CMB4(02)

Yn+6.5

CMB4(09)

Yn+6.6

CMB4(16)

Yn+6.7

CMB4(03)

Yn+7.0

CMB4(10)

Yn+7.1

CMB4(17)

Yn+7.2

CMB4(04)

Yn+7.3

CMB4(11)

Yn+7.4

CMB4(18)

Yn+7.5

CMB4(05)

Yn+7.6

CMB4(12)

Yn+7.7

CMB4(19)

CM52(33),CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)

- 326 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.9.6

External View
50

10

Approx 100
Mass: 540g (including mounting plate)

8.9.7

Unit: mm

Specifications

Installation specifications
Install this unit in a fully enclosed cabinet.
For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.

Specifications of operator's panel connection unit (source DO)


Item
Operator's panel connection unit
(source DO)
Operator's panel connection unit
(source DO)
Fuse (spare parts)

Ordering specifications
A16B-2204-0260
A16B-2204-0261
A02B-0163-K111

Specification
DI : 96 points
DO : 64 points
DI : 64 points
DO : 32 points
3.2A

Power supply rating


Supply voltage

Power supply rating

24 VDC 10% supplied from the power supply 0.5A+7.3mADI


connector CP61. The allowance of 10%
should include instantaneous voltage and
ripple voltage.

Remarks
DI = number of DI points in the ON
state

NOTE
1 The above power supply rating does not include that to be input to DOCOM for
DO output.
2 To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and JD1B,
the above power supply rating + 70 mA is required.

- 327 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

DI (input signal specifications)


Contact rating
Leakage current between contacts
when opened
Voltage decrease between contacts
when closed
Delay time

30 VDC, 16 mA or more
1 mA or less (26.4 V)
2 V or less (including a cable voltage decrease)
The receiver delay time is 22 ms (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and this unit] and [ladder
scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.

DO (output signal specifications)


Maximum load current when ON
Saturation voltage when ON
Withstand voltage
Leakage current when OFF
Delay time

200 mA or less including momentary current per signal.


6.0 A or less for DO signals in all (For A16B-2204-0260)
4.0 A or less for DO signals in all (For A16B-2204-0261)
1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA
24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
20A or less
The driver delay time is 50 s (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and this unit] and [ladder
scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.

NOTE
Be sure to connect all DO power supply pins DOCOM. The maximum current that
is allowed to pass to each DOCOM terminal pin is 2.0 A, and care must be paid to
prevent the sum of the load current from exceeding the current that is allowed to
pass via the DOCOM terminal.

- 328 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.9.8

Other Notes

Address allocation
For this unit, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
For A16B-2204-0260
DI space map
Xm1
Xm1 + 1
Xm1 + 2
Xm1 + 3
Xm1 + 4
Xm1 + 5
Input signal
Xm1 + 6
Xm1 + 7
Xm1 + 8
Xm1 + 9
Xm1 + 10
Xm1 + 11

For A16B-2204-0261
DI space map
Xm1
Xm1 + 1
Xm1 + 2
Xm1 + 3
Input signal
Xm1 + 4
Xm1 + 5
Xm1 + 6
Xm1 + 7

DO space map
Yn1
Yn1 + 1
Yn1 + 2
Yn1 + 3
Yn1 + 4
Yn1 + 5
Yn1 + 6
Yn1 + 7

Slot 1

Output signal

Slot 1

DO space map
Yn1
Yn1 + 1
Yn1 + 2
Yn1 + 3

Slot 1

Output signal

Slot 1

Xm1 and Yn1 indicate the start address at allocation.


Basically, for this unit, allocate 12-byte DI addresses to slot 1 and 8-byte DO addresses to slot 1 for
A16B-2204-0260, or 8-byte DI addresses to slot 1 and 4-byte DO addresses to slot 1 for
A16B-2204-0261.

ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output signals)
For ON/OFF of the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO signals (output signals), see Subsection
8.2.4.4.

Parallel DO (output signal) connection


For parallel connections of DO signals (output signals), see Subsection 8.2.4.4.

DO (output signal) alarm detection


The DO driver of this unit capable of detecting an overcurrent and measuring its own temperature. If an
accident, such as the connecting of the cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in the load current or
in the driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided for each DO driver, is activated and
keeps the DO signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFF state until the cause of the problem is eliminated.
Even if this occurs, the CNC and I/O continues operating without entering the alarm status, but the DO
driver which detected the error can be checked. If a DO error occurs, this information can be checked on
the CNC DGN screen or alarm processing can be performed in advance using a ladder to help error check
and recovery.
A DO error such as a ground fault is detected for each point. This DO error is transferred to the PMC
system relay area as a status alarm. The following table lists system relay area information and
- 329 -

8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

corresponding DO data related to a status alarm. When an alarm data bit is set to 1, the DO driver
corresponding to the bit detects an error. Also see Subsection 7.3.3, Status Alarm.
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
For A16B-2204-0260
Information output to the system relay area
Alarm information
Y address
number
Group
PMC
Slot
Type
(DO address)
(Intra-slot byte
number path number
address)

0 to 23

1 to 5, 9

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Faulty location

Yn
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3
Yn+4
Yn+5
Yn+6
Yn+7

0th byte DO
1st byte DO
2nd byte DO
3rd byte DO
4th byte DO
5th byte DO
6th byte DO
7th byte DO

For A16B-2204-0261
Information output to the system relay area
Alarm information
Y address
number
Group
PMC
Slot
Type
(DO address)
(Intra-slot byte
number path number
address)

0 to 23

1 to 5, 9

0
1
2
3

Faulty location

Yn
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3

0th byte DO
1st byte DO
2nd byte DO
3rd byte DO

Output values of Group number, PMC path, and Y address depends on unit connection and I/O
address assignment.
Yn indicates the start address at allocation.
Description of Alarm data in the system relay area
Alarm data
#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

DO ground
fault at bit 7

DO ground
fault at bit 6

DO ground
fault at bit 5

DO ground
fault at bit 4

DO ground
fault at bit 3

DO ground
fault at bit 2

DO ground
fault at bit 1

DO ground
fault at bit 0

For A16B-2204-0261
Alarm detection address and bit

DO address

Remarks

Xm+15.0
Xm+15.1
Xm+15.2
Xm+15.3
Xm+15.4
Xm+15.5
Xm+15.6
Xm+15.7

Yn+0
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3

Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved

- 330 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.10

CONNECTION OF SAFETY IO UNIT

8.10.1

Overview

Safety IO unit is a unit which can be used only with I/O Link i, and has the interface to connect
duplicated input and output signals from the safety circuit when the Dual Check Safety (DCS) function is
used.

CAUTION
Safety IO unit is a unit dedicated to I/O Link i. It cannot be used for I/O Link
connection.

8.10.2

Total connection diagram


CNC

Safety IO unit

I/O unit

JD1A
JD51A

JD1B

JD1A

Power magnetic cabinet

24VDC Power supply


CP1

CNA1 - CNA10

CNB1 - CNB9

- 331 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.10.3

B-64603EN/01

Power supply connection

The power required for the operation of this safety IO unit and for DI/DO must be supplied to connector CP1 in
the following figure.

CP1
24VDC power supply

01

+24V

02

0V

03

8.10.4

I/O Link i Connection

For I/O Link i connection, see Section 7.2.

- 332 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.10.5

DI/DO Address

Safety IO unit must be used in safety I/O mode, and allocated to two continuous groups of I/O Link i. In I/O
Link i, allocate 6-byte DI address and 2-byte DO address to slot 1 of 1st group as PMC DI/DO, and allocate
4-byte DI address and 2-byte DO address to slot 1 of 2nd group as DCSPMC DI/DO.
DI/DO addresses are as follows.
1st group (PMC DI/DO) address
Address

bit 7

bit 6

bit 5

bit 4

bit 3

bit 2

X1m+0

MONI

MONI

X1m+1

MONI

MONI

bit 1

bit 0

X1m+2

DI: 6-byte
X1m+3
X1m+4

MONI

MONI

MONI

MONI

MONI

MONI

MONI

X1m+5

MONI

MONI

MONI

MONI

MONI

MONI

MONI

MONI

Y1n+0

DO: 2-byte

Y1n+1

2nd group (DCSPMC DI/DO) address


Address

bit 7

bit 6

bit 5

bit 4

bit 3

bit 2

bit 1

bit 0

X2m+0
X2m+1

DI: 4-byte
X2m+2
X2m+3
Y2n+0

DO: 2-byte
Y2n+1

NOTE
1 DI shaded by
cannot use.
2 DI written MONI is signal to monitor DO status. So it cannot be used as an input
signal from machine side.

- 333 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.10.6

B-64603EN/01

Pin assignment of DI/DO


CNA1
01
02
03
04
CNA2
01
02
03
CNA3
01
02
03
CNA4
01
02
03
04
CNA5
01
02
03
CNA6
01
02
03
CNA7

CNB1
B
X1m+0.0
X1m+0.1
Y1n+0.0 (X1m+0.2)
+24V

A
0V
X2m+0.0

A
0V
X2m+2.0
+24V

X1m+2.0

+24V

B
X1m+2.6
X2m+2.6
+24V

A
0V
+24V
+24V

B
X1m+0.4
X1m+0.5
Y1n+1.0 (X1m+0.6)
+24V

A
0V
X2m+0.4

A
0V
X2m+2.1
+24V

X1m+2.1

B
X1m+2.7
X2m+2.7
+24V

B
01
X1m+1.0
02
X1m+1.1
03 Y1n+0.1 (X1m+1.2)
04
+24V
CNA8
B
01
X1m+2.2
02
X1m+2.3
03
X1m+2.4
04 Y2n+1.2 (X1m+4.1)
05
+24V
06
+24V
CNA9
B
01
X1m+2.5
02 Y1n+0.5 (X1m+4.2)
03
+24V
CNA10
B
01
X1m+1.4
02
X1m+1.5
03 Y1n+1.1 (X1m+1.6)
04
+24V

B
01 Y1n+1.4 (X1m+5.0)
02
X1m+3.4
03 Y2n+1.4 (X1m+5.1)
CNB2
B
01
X1m+3.5
02 Y1n+1.5 (X1m+5.2)
03
X2m+3.5
CNB3
B
01
X1m+3.6
02 Y1n+1.6 (X1m+5.4)
03
X2m+3.6
CNB4
B
01
X1m+3.0
02
X2m+3.0
03
+24V
CNB5
B
01
X1m+3.1
02
X2m+3.1
03
+24V
CNB6
B
01
X1m+3.2
02
X2m+3.2
03
+24V
CNB7
B
01
X1m+1.7
02 Y1n+0.2 (X1m+4.3)
03
X2m+1.7
CNB8
B
01
X1m+3.3
02 Y1n+1.3 (X1m+4.5)
03
X2m+3.3
CNB9
B
01
0V
02 Y2n+0.3 (X1m+4.7)
03 Y1n+1.2 (X1m+4.6)

+24V

A
0V
+24V
+24V
A
0V
X2m+1.0
+24V
A
0V
X2m+2.2
X2m+2.3
X2m+2.4
+24V
+24V

A
0V
X2m+3.4
+24V
A
0V
Y2n+1.5 (X1m+5.3)
+24V
A
0V
Y2n+1.6 (X1m+5.5)
+24V
A
0V
+24V
+24V
A
0V
+24V
+24V
A
0V
+24V
+24V
A
0V
Y2n+0.2 (X1m+5.6)
+24V
A
0V
Y2n+1.3 (X1m+5.7)
+24V
A
0V
Y1n+0.3 (X1m+4.4)
0V

X1m, Y1n: PMC DI/DO


X2m, Y2n: DCSPMC DI/DO
Signals in ( ) are DI to monitor DO
status. When DO is ON, DI in ( ) is 1.
When DO is OFF, DI in ( ) is 0.

A
0V
X2m+2.5
+24V
A
0V
X2m+1.4
+24V

- 334 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.10.7

DI/DO connection

Duplicated input and output signals are connected to Safety IO Unit as PMC I/O and DCSPMC I/O.

- 335 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Duplicated input and output signals are connected to Safety IO Unit as PMC I/O and DCSPMC I/O.

- 336 -

B-64603EN/01

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

Duplicated input and output signals are connected to Safety IO Unit as PMC I/O and DCSPMC I/O.
- 337 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Duplicated input and output signals are connected to Safety IO Unit as PMC I/O and DCSPMC I/O.

- 338 -

B-64603EN/01

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

Duplicated input and output signals are connected to Safety IO Unit as PMC I/O and DCSPMC I/O.

- 339 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Duplicated input and output signals are connected to Safety IO Unit as PMC I/O and DCSPMC I/O.

- 340 -

B-64603EN/01

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

Duplicated input and output signals are connected to Safety IO Unit as PMC I/O and DCSPMC I/O.

- 341 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Duplicated input and output signals are connected to Safety IO Unit as PMC I/O and DCSPMC I/O.

- 342 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.10.8

Outline of Safety IO Unit

Weight: 1.4Kg
Unit: mm

- 343 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.10.9

B-64603EN/01

Connector locations of Safety IO Unit

CNB1

CNA1

CNB2

CNA2

CNB3

CNA3

CNB4

CNA4

Connector for DI/DO

Connector for DI/DO


CNB5

CNA5

CNB6

CNA6

CNB7

CNA7

CNB8
CNA8

CNB9

CNA9

1st
GROUP

ALM

CNA10

2nd
GROUP

ALM

LINK

LINK

LED

FUSE

POW
Connector for 24VDC
power supply

LED

JD1B
Connector for I/O Link i

CP1
JD1A

Fasten terminal for frame ground


Connect to FG of power magnetic cabinet

Fuse 1A
A03B-0815-K001

FG

Bottom

- 344 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.10.10

Color labels for connectors of Safety IO Unit

There is color labels placed beside the Tyco Electronics connectors of the safety IO unit.
Attached color labels for the connectors on the cable side are to be affixed to the connectors on the cable
side.
Color labels for the connectors on the cable side (attached to the safety IO unit)

CNA1

White
CNB1

Blue

CNA2

Light green

CNB2

White

CNA3

Blue

CNB3

Orange

CNA4

Orange

CNB4

Light green

CNB5

Gray

CNA5

White
CNB6

Orange

CNA6

Green
CNB7

Green

CNA7

Blue
CNB8

Pink

CNB9

Light blue

CNA8

Light blue

CNA9

Pink

CNA10

Green

- 345 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.10.11

Connector specification of Safety IO Unit

Connector name

Name

Specification of cable-side connector

CP1

3-pin female connector Tyco Electronics


Housing D-3100 (X key) 1-178288-3
Contact (AWG20-16)
Tyco Electronics
1-175218-5
Contact (AWG24-20)
Tyco Electronics
1-175217-5
CNA2, CNA5, CNA9, 6-pin female connector Tyco Electronics
CNB1, CNB3, CNB5, Housing D-2100 (X key) 1-1318119-3
CNB7, CNB9
CNA3, CNA6, CNB2, 6-pin female connector Tyco Electronics
CNB4, CNB6, CNB8 Housing D-2100 (Y key) 2-1318119-3
CNA1, CNA4, CNA7, 8-pin female connector Tyco Electronics
Housing D-2100 (Y key) 2-1318119-4
CNA10
CNA8
12-pin female connector Tyco Electronics
Housing D-2100 (X key) 1-1318118-6
CNA1 - CNA10
Contact (AWG28-24)
Tyco Electronics
CNB1 - CNB9
1318108-1
Contact (AWG22-18)
Tyco Electronics
1318107-1

JD1A, JD1B

FG

8.10.12

B-64603EN/01

Soldering type connector Connector: Honda Tsushin Kogyo


(20 pins, female)
PCR-E20FS
Case: Honda Tsushin Kogyo PCR-V20LA
or
Connector: Hirose Denki FI40B-20S
Case: Hirose Denki FI-20-CV2
Press-mount connector Connector: Honda Tsushin Kogyo
(20 pins, female)
PCR-E20FA
Case: Honda Tsushin Kogyo PCR-V20LA
or
Connector: Hirose Denki FI30-20S
Case: Hirose Denki FI-20CV2
Fasten terminal
Tyco Electronics
170604-1
or
JST
FVDDF 2-250 TYPE I Blue

Order number
A02B-0120-K324
(Housing and three
contacts of
1-175218-5)

A03B-0821-K100
(For one unit)

A03B-0821-K101
(1000 contacts of
1318107-1)
A03B-0821-K102
(150 contacts of
1318107-1)
A02B-0120-K301

A02B-0120-K302

A02B-0166-K330

Specifications of Safety IO Unit

Installation conditions
(1) Use this unit in a completely sealed cabinet.
(2) Use the unit under the following ambient temperature conditions:
Operation:
0C to 55C
Storage transportation:
-20C to 80C
(3) For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.
(4) Be sure to install the unit on a vertical face. Moreover for ventilation, allow a clearance of 100mm or
more above and below. And never place a device that generates a large amount of heat below the
safety IO unit.

- 346 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Order specification
Name
Safety IO Unit
Fuse (Spare parts)

Order specification
A03B-0821-C002
A03B-0815-K001

Remarks
1A

Power supply capacity


Power supply voltage
24V10%
(10% includes momentary
variations and ripples.)

Power supply capacity


5.2A maximum

Remarks
0.5A + 7.3mA x DI + Load current of DO

Heat output
Heat output
19W

Remarks
Value when 50% on input signal are on.

Input signal specification


Number of points
Rated input voltage
Rated input current
Polarity
ON voltage/current
OFF voltage/current
Allowable self-diagnosis pulse width
Delay time

63 points (include DI to monitor DO status)


24VDC (10%)
7.3mA (average)
Sink type
18VDC or more, 6mA or more
6VDC or less, 1.5mA or less
Pulse width: 150s or less, Cycle: 4ms or more
Receiver delay time: 2ms (maximum)
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and Safety IO unit] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.

Output signal specification


Number of points
Rated output voltage
Rated output current
Polarity
Maximum voltage decrease ON
Maximum leakage current when OFF
Output protection function
Delay time

19 points
24VDC (10%)
200mA (15 points), 400mA (4 points), including momentary variations
Source type
28mV (output current is 200mA), 56mV (output current is 400mA)
5A
Protection against overheat, over current, short-circuiting
The driver delay time is 50s (maximum)
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and Safety IO unit] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.

CAUTION
1 The protection function is intended to protect the components internal rather than
external units.
2 No protection function can protect their internal components in all cases. Once
any protection function has worked, remove the cause promptly. If an absolute
maximum rating is exceeded, for example, it is likely that protection functions
may not work or an IC may break down before the related protection function
works, depending on the way or situation in which the modules are used.
3 If an output protection function is defective, it is likely that, if the load current
exceeds its rating continuously for a long time, smoke or ignition may occur.

- 347 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.10.13

B-64603EN/01

DO (Output Signal) Error Detection

The DO driver of the safety IO unit has the output protection function for each output signal. If an accident,
such as connecting the cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in the load current or in the driver
temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided for each DO driver, is activated and keeps the DO signal in
the OFF state. Even if this occurs, the CNC and safety IO unit continue operating without entering the alarm
status, but the PMC is notified of the location of the error detected by the DO driver. This information can be
checked on the PMC status screen or alarm processing can be performed in advance using a ladder to help error
check and recovery.
When the above protection function is activated by the DO driver, the relevant error is output as a status alarm
and transferred to the PMC system relay area. The following table lists system relay area information and
corresponding DO data related to a status alarm. When an alarm data bit is set to 1, the DO driver
corresponding to the bit detects an error. For details of the status alarm, see Subsection 7.3.3, Status Alarm.
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred

Type

Information output to the system relay area


Alarm
information
Y address
Group
PMC
Slot
number
(DO address)
number
path number
(Intra-slot byte
address)
0 to 23
(1st group in
PMC)
0 to 23
(2nd group in
DCSPMC)

1 to 5

Faulty location

Y1 n

DO alarm at 0th byte DO in PMC

Y1n+1

DO alarm at 1st byte DO in PMC

Y2 n

Y2n+1

DO alarm at 0th byte DO in


DCSPMC
DO alarm at 1st byte DO in DCSPMC

Output values of Group number, PMC path, and Y address depends on unit connection and I/O address
assignment.
Y1n, and Y2n indicate the start address at allocation.
Description of Alarm data in the system relay area
Alarm data
#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

DO ground
fault at bit 7

DO ground
fault at bit 6

DO ground
fault at bit 5

DO ground
fault at bit 4

DO ground
fault at bit 3

DO ground
fault at bit 2

DO ground
fault at bit 1

DO ground
fault at bit 0

- 348 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.11

CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR OPERATORS PANEL


SUPPORTING SAFETY FUNCTION

8.11.1

Overview

I/O module for operators panel supporting safety function is a unit dedicated to I/O Link i, which has
an interface for duplicated input signals of safety circuits in using dual check safety (DCS) function.
There are two types of I/O modules for operators panel supporting safety function.
Name

Ordering specification

I/O module for operators panel


supporting safety function (type B)

A20B-2200-0470

I/O module for operators panel


supporting safety function (type A)

A20B-2200-0471

Remarks
General-purpose DI: 21 points
DO: 16 points
Safety input signal: 3 points
One manual pulse generator can be connected.
General-purpose DI: 24 points
DO: 16 points
Safety input signal: 4 points
Three manual pulse generators can be connected.

CAUTION
I/O module for operators panel supporting safety function is a unit dedicated to
I/O Link i. Do not connect it to channels used for I/O Link.

Connection Diagram
CNC

I/O Link i

I/O Unit, etc.

I/O module for operators panel


supporting safety function
I/O Link i

JD1A

I/O Link i

JD51A

JD1B

JD1A

JD1B
I/O Link i

Manual pulse

General-purpose
DI/DO

JA60

generator
CE75
+24V power supply

Machine operators panel

8.11.2

CP1A (IN)
+24V power supply
CP1B (OUT)

CE76
Safety signal

- 349 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link I

8.11.3

B-64603EN/01

Power Connection

Provide the CP1B (IN) connector, shown below, with the power necessary for printed circuit board
operation and that for DI/DO operation. To facilitate power division, the power is output to CP1A(OUT)
exactly as it is input from CP1B (IN). When power division is required, use CP1A (OUT). Up to 2.5 A can
be supplied by branching.

CP1B(IN)
24V Power
supply

01

+24V

02

0V

03
CP1A(OUT)
24V Power
supply

01

+24V

02

0V

03

Connector name
CP1A, CP1B

Cable-side connector
Housing

Cable-side connector specification


Tyco Electronics
AMP1-178288-3
Tyco Electronics
AMP1-175218-5

Contacts

NOTE
1 This unit doesnt have a pin (DOCOM) which supplies power to a driver which
outputs DO.
Power is also supplied for DO through this connector. Use a power supply,
considering DO power supply rating.
2 Both connectors CP1B (IN) and CP1A (OUT) are same specification.
And there is not indication of (IN) and (OUT) on the PCB.

- 350 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.11.4

DI/DO Address Map

I/O module for operators panel supporting safety function is assigned to X addresses (input) and Y
addresses (output) in two successive groups. Assign for I/O Link i as described below.
For Type B
Allocate 4-byte DI addresses and 2-byte DO addresses to PMC-side (group 1) slot1, and 2-byte DI
addresses to DCS-side (group 2) slot1.
For Type A
Allocate 4-byte DI addresses and 2-byte DO address to PMC-side (group 1) slot1, and 1-byte DI address
to DCS-side (group 2) slot1.
DI/DO address maps are as follows for Type A and Type B.
For A20B-2200-0470 (TypeB)
- PMC-side (group 1) address map
Address

bit 7

bit 6

bit 5

bit 4

bit 3

bit 2

bit 1

bit 0

X1m+0
X1m+1

DI: 4 bytes

X1m+2
X1m+3

Y1n+0

DO: 2 bytes

Y1n+1

- DCS-side (group 2) address map


Address

bit 7

bit 6

bit 5

bit 4

bit 3

bit 2

bit 1

bit 0

X2m+0

DI: 2 bytes

X2m+1

For A20B-2200-0471 (Type A)


- PMC-side (group 1) address map
Address

bit 7

bit 6

bit 5

bit 4

bit 3

bit 2

bit 1

bit 0

X1m+0
X1m+1

DI: 4 bytes

X1m+2
X1m+3

Y1n+0

DO: 2 bytes

Y1n+1

- DCS-side (group 2) address map


Address

bit 7

bit 6

bit 5

bit 4

bit 3

bit 2

bit 1

bit 0

DI: 1 byte

X2m+0

- 351 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link I


NOTE
Signals in shaded area (

) can not be used.

- 352 -

B-64603EN/01

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.11.5

DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement

CE75
Pin Arrangement for A20B-2200-0470 (Type B
A
01
0V
02
X1m+0.0
03
X1m+0.2
04
X1m+0.4
05
X1m+0.6
06
X1m+1.0
07
X1m+1.2
08
09
X1m+1.6
10
X1m+2.0
11
X1m+2.2
12
X1m+2.4
13
X1m+2.6
14
0V
15
0V
16
Y1n+0.0
17
Y1n+0.2
18
Y1n+0.4
19
Y1n+0.6
20
Y1n+1.0
21
Y1n+1.2
22
Y1n+1.4
23
Y1n+1.6
24
+24V
25
+24V
Pin Arrangement for A20B-2200-0471 (Type A)
A
01
0V
02
X1m+0.0
03
X1m+0.2
04
X1m+0.4
05
X1m+0.6
06
X1m+1.0
07
X1m+1.2
08
X1m+1.4
09
X1m+1.6
10
X1m+2.0
11
X1m+2.2
12
X1m+2.4
13
X1m+2.6
14
0V
15
0V
16
Y1n+0.0
17
Y1n+0.2
18
Y1n+0.4
19
Y1n+0.6
20
Y1n+1.0
21
Y1n+1.2
22
Y1n+1.4
23
Y1n+1.6
24
+24V
25
+24V

- 353 -

B
+24V
X1m+0.1
X1m+0.3
X1m+0.5
X1m+0.7
X1m+1.1

X1m+1.7
X1m+2.1
X1m+2.3
X1m+2.5
X1m+2.7
0V
0V
Y1n+0.1
Y1n+0.3
Y1n+0.5
Y1n+0.7
Y1n+1.1
Y1n+1.3
Y1n+1.5
Y1n+1.7
+24V
+24V

B
+24V
X1m+0.1
X1m+0.3
X1m+0.5
X1m+0.7
X1m+1.1
X1m+1.3
X1m+1.5
X1m+1.7
X1m+2.1
X1m+2.3
X1m+2.5
X1m+2.7
0V
0V
Y1n+0.1
Y1n+0.3
Y1n+0.5
Y1n+0.7
Y1n+1.1
Y1n+1.3
Y1n+1.5
Y1n+1.7
+24V
+24V

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link I


Connector name
CE75

B-64603EN/01

Cable-side connector

Cable-side connector specification

Two-piece connector, series HIF3B,


complying with MIL standards.

Hirose Electric: HIF3BB-50D-2.54R

CE76
Pin Arrangement for A20B-2200-0470 (Type B
A
01
0V
02
X2m+1.2
03
X2m+1.3
04
X2m+1.5
05
+24V
06
+24V

B
X1m+3.2
X1m+3.3
X1m+3.5
X2m+0.4
+24V
+24V

Pin Arrangement for A20B-2200-0471 (TypeA


A
01
0V
02
X2m+0.2
03
X2m+0.3
04
X2m+0.4
05
X2m+0.5
06
+24V

B
X1m+3.2
X1m+3.3
X1m+3.4
X1m+3.5
+24V
+24V

Connector name
CE76

Cable-side connector
12 pin female connector housing D-2100 X key
Contact

Cable-side connector specification


Tyco Electronics
AMP1-1318118-6
Tyco Electronics
AMP1318107-1

CAUTION

In case of Type B, address X1m+1.6 to address X1m+2.7 are assigned to pins of


JA60 as well as CE75. If address X1m+1.6 to address X1m+2.7 are used in one
type of a connector, do not connect to these addresses in the other type of
connector.
NOTE
Blank pins cannot be used. Do not connect to these pins.

- 354 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.11.6

DIGeneral-purpose Input SignalConnection

DI connection for CE75


Pin number
Address number +24V

CE75(A24,A25,B01,B24,B25)

Bit number

X1m+0.0
X1m+0.1
X1m+0.2
X1m+0.3
X1m+0.4
X1m+0.5
X1m+0.6
X1m+0.7

RV

CE75(A02)

RV

CE75(B02)

RV

CE75(A03)

RV

CE75(B03)

RV

CE75(A04)

RV

CE75(B04)

RV

CE75(A05)

RV

CE75(B05)

0V

- 355 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link I

B-64603EN/01

Pin number
Address number +24V

CE75(A24,A25,B01,B24,B25)

Bit

X1m+1.0

RV

CE75(A06)

X1m+1.1

RV

CE75(B06)

X1m+1.2

RV

CE75(A07)

RV

CE75(B07)

RV

CE75(A08)

(X1m+1.5) (NOTE) RV

CE75(B08)

(X1m+1.3)(NOTE)
(X1m+1.4)(NOTE)

X1m+1.6

RV

CE75(A09)

RV

CE75(B09)

X1m+2.0

RV

CE75(A10)

X1m+2.1

RV

CE75(B10)

X1m+2.2

RV

CE75(A11)

X1m+2.3

RV

X1m+1.7

X1m+2.4
X1m+2.5
X1m+2.6
X1m+2.7

CE75(B11)

RV

CE75(A12)

RV

CE75(B12)

RV

CE75(A13)
CE75(B13)

RV

0V

CAUTION
+24V (A24, A25, B01, B24, B25) are output signals which are used as a common
voltage for input signals.
Do not use these except for a common voltage for input signals. Do not supply
24V to these pins from the outside.
NOTE
X1m+1.3, X1m+1.4, X1m+1.5 can not be used for type B. These addresses can be
used only for Type A.
- 356 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

DI connection for CE76


DI connection for A20B-2200-0470Type B
Pin number

Address number +24V

CE76(A05,A06,B05,B06)

Bit

X2m+0.4
X2m+1.2
X2m+1.3
X2m+1.5
X1m+3.2
X1m+3.3
X1m+3.5

RV

CE76(B04)

RV

CE76(A02)

RV

CE76(A03)

RV

CE76(A04)

RV

CE76(B01)

RV

CE76(B02)

RV

CE76(B03)

0V

DI connection for A20B-2200-0471 (Type A)


Pin number

Address number +24V

CE76(A06,B05,B06)

Bit

X2m+0.2
X2m+0.3
X2m+0.4
X2m+0.5
X1m+3.2
X1m+3.3
X1m+3.4
X1m+3.5

RV

CE76(A02)

RV

CE76(A03)

RV

CE76(A04)

RV

CE76(A05)

RV

CE76(B01)

RV

CE76(B02)

RV

CE76(B03)
CE76(B04)

RV

0V

CAUTION
+24V (A05 (in Type B), A06, B05 and B06) are output signals which are used as
a common voltage for input signals. Do not use these except for a common
voltage for input signals. Do not supply 24V to these pins from the outside.

- 357 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link I

8.11.7

B-64603EN/01

DO (Output Signal) Connection

DO connection for CE75


Address number

+24

Pin number

Bit

Y1n+0.0

CE75(A16)

Y1n+0.1

DV

CE75(B16)

Y1n+0.2

DV

CE75(A17)

Y1n+0.3

DV

CE75(B17)

Y1n+0.4

DV

CE75(A18)

Y1n+0.5

DV

CE75(B18)

Y1n+0.6

DV

CE75(A19)

Y1n+0.7

DV

CE75(B19)

Y1n+1.0

DV

CE75(A20)

Y1n+1.1

DV

CE75(B20)

Y1n+1.2

DV

CE75(A21)

Y1n+1.3

DV

CE75(B21)

Y1n+1.4

DV

CE75(A22)

Y1n+1.5

DV

CE75(B22)

Y1n+1.6

DV

CE75(B23)

Y1n+1.7

DV

CE75(B23)

Relay

CE75(A01,A14,A15,B14,B15)

0V

- 358 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.11.8

Manual pulse generator Connection

Connection of JA60 to manual pulse generators


Connection for type B
One manual pulse generator can be connected. Ten input signals can be used on the connector.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

For A20B-2200-0470(Type B)
HA1
11
X1m+2.0
HB1
12
X1m+2.1
+5V
13
X1m+2.2
0V
14
X1m+2.3
+5V
15
X1m+2.4
0V
16
X1m+2.5
+5V
17
X1m+2.6
0V
18
X1m+2.7
X1m+1.6
19
X1m+1.7
0V
20
+24V

Example of connection
JA60
1
HA1
2
HB1
3,5,7
+5V
4,6,8,10
0V
20
+24V
11
X1m+2.0
12
X1m+2.1
13
X1m+2.2
14
X1m+2.3
15
X1m+2.4
16
X1m+2.5
17
X1m+2.6

Relay connector

Manual pulse
generator

HA1

HA1

HB1

HB1

+5V

+5V

0V

0V

X1m+2.7 18
X1m+1.6 9
X1m+1.7 19

- 359 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link I

B-64603EN/01

Connection for type A

Three manual pulse generators can be connected.


Please refer to section 7.4.1 about the connection.
For A20B-2200-0471(Type A
1
HA1
11
2
HB1
12
0V
3
HA2
13
4
HB2
14
0V
5
HA3
15
6
HB3
16
0V
7
17
8
18
5V
9
5V
19
10
20
5V

Connector name
JA60

Cable-side connector
20 pin half-pitch connector
Solder type connector (20pin, female)

Cable-side connector specification


Connector: Hirose Electric FI40B-20S
Case : Hirose Electric FI-20-CV5

CAUTION
In case of I/O module for operators panel supporting safety function type B,
address X1m+1.6 to address X1m+2.7 are also assigned to pins of CE75. If
address X1m+1.6 to address X1m+2.7 are used in one type of a connector, do not
connect to these addresses in the other type of connector.

8.11.9

External View

Weight 0.2Kg
(Unit:mm)

Save about 50 mm for


wiring cables.

The thickness of the board

- 360 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.11.10

Specifications

Installation specifications
Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.

Ordering specifications
Name

Ordering specification

I/O module for operators panel


supporting safety function (type B)

A20B-2200-0470

I/O module for operators panel


supporting safety function (type A)

A20B-2200-0471

Fuse (spare parts)

A03B-0815-K001

Remarks
General-purpose DI: 21 points
DO: 16 points
Safety input signal: 3 points
One manual pulse generator can be connected
General-purpose DI: 24 points
DO: 16 points
Safety input signal: 4 points
Three manual pulse generators can be connected
1A

Power supply rating


Power supply voltage

Power supply
rating

24VDC10% is fed through the I/O


connector (CPD1)
0.40A
10% includes momentary variation
and ripples.

Remarks

The total power consumption of DI points is included. The


power consumption of DO points is not included. Use a
power supply, considering DO power supply rating.

NOTE
To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to JD1A, the above power supply
rating +35mA is required. An optical adapter for the I/O Link i can not be
connected to JD1B.

Heat dissipation
Unit name

Heat dissipation

I/O module for operators panel supporting safety


4.3W
function type A and B

Remarks
DI8 points when ON

NOTE
The details of the method of calculating heat dissipation are as follows.
2.9 (W) +

0.18 (W)

(N: Number of DI points turned on)


The above heat dissipation is only what this unit produces. This does not include
the power dissipation of peripherals, optical adapters for the I/O Link i, manual
pulse generators and so on.

- 361 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link I

B-64603EN/01

DI (input signal specifications)


Contact rating
30VDC, 16mA or more
Leakage current between contacts when
1mA or less (26.4 V)
opened
Voltage decrease between contacts
2V or less (including a cable voltage decrease)
when closed
The receiver delay time is 2ms (maximum)
Delay time
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module (2ms or
less)] and [ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.

DO (output signal specifications)


Maximum load current when ON
Saturation voltage when ON
Withstand voltage
Leakage current when OFF

200mA or less including momentary current per signal.


1V (maximum) when the load current is 200mA.
24 V +20% or less including momentary variations.
20A or less
The driver delay time is 50s (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module (2ms or
less)] and [ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.

Delay time

8.11.11

DO (output signal) Error Detection

The DO driver of this unit has output protection functions for each output signal. If an accident, such as an
ground fault, causes an abnormal increase in the load current or in the driver temperature, a protection
circuit, which is provided for each DO driver, is activated and keeps the relevant DO signal in the OFF
state. Even if this occurs, the CNC and I/O module continue operating without entering the alarm status,
but the PMC is notified of the location of the error detected by the DO driver. This information can be
checked on the PMC status screen or alarm processing can be performed in advance using a ladder to help
error check and recovery.
When the above protection function is activated by the DO driver, the relevant error is output as a status
alarm and transferred to the PMC relay area. The following table lists relay area information and
corresponding DO data related to a status alarm. When an alarm data bit is set to 1, the DO driver
corresponding to the bit detects an error. For detail of the status alarm, see Subsection 7.3.3, Status
Alarm.
Information output to the relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred

Type

Information output to the system relay area


Alarm information
Y address
number
Group
PMC
Slot
(DO address)
(Intra-slot byte
number
path number
address)
0 to 23
(1st group in
PMC)

1 to 5

Faulty location

Y1n

DO alarm at 0th byte DO in PMC

Y1n+1

DO alarm at 1st byte DO in PMC

Output values of Group number, PMC path, and Y address depends on unit connection and I/O
address assignment.
Y1n indicates the start address at allocation.
Description of Alarm data in the system relay area
Alarm data
#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

DO ground
fault at bit 7

DO ground
fault at bit 6

DO ground
fault at bit 5

DO ground
fault at bit 4

DO ground
fault at bit 3

DO ground
fault at bit 2

DO ground
fault at bit 1

DO ground
fault at bit 0

- 362 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.12

I/O UNIT FOR POWER MAGNETICS CABINET

8.12.1

Overall Connection Diagram

CNC or preceding
I/O Link slave unit

Following I/O Link


slave unit
I/O unit for power
magnetics cabinet

JD1A

JD1A
(JD51A)

Manual pulse
generator

JD1B

JD1A

JD1B

JA3
Machine side
DI/DO

CB104

Manual pulse
generator

DI/DO
Machine side
DI/DO

CB105

Manual pulse
generator

DI/DO

+24V power supply


CP1 (IN)
Machine side
DI/DO

CB106

+24V power supply

CP2 (OUT)

DI/DO
Machine side
DI/DO

CB107
DI/DO

NOTE
The following screw type connectors cannot be used to connect the I/O Link i or
manual pulse generator.
Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side
Connector case
Connector case and connector

Specification

Manufacturer

FI-20-CV7
FI30-20S-CV7

Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.


Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.

- 363 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.12.2

B-64603EN/01

Power Connection

Supply power to the I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet from external power.
I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet

24VDC stabilized
power

CP1
1
2
3

External power

+24V
0V

24VDC 10%

Cable
CP1
AMP Japan
1-178288-3 (housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact)

External power
Select a source that
meets the external
power terminal.

+24V (1)
0V (2)

Recommended cable : A02B-0124-K830 (5m)


(Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the external power side)

Part of the 24 VDC power input to CP1 can be taken out from CP2 by branching. CP2 should be
connected as shown below. In this case, the rating of the external 24 VDC power supplied to CP1 must
be the sum of the power consumed within the control unit and that supplied to external equipment via
CP2. The maximum capacity of power that can be obtained from a branch is 1.0 A.
I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet

External device

CP2
1
+24V
2
0V
3

Cable
CP2
AMP JAPAN
2-178288-3 (Housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact)

External device
Select a connector that
matches the pin layout
of the external device.

+24V (1)
0V (2)

NOTE
Do not interrupt +24V supplied to this connector during operation. Otherwise, an
alarm about communication with the CNC is issued. A voltage of +24V must not
be supplied after power-on of the CNC and +24V must not be interrupted before
power-off of the CNC. When powering off the CNC control unit, be sure to
power off the I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet.

- 364 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.12.3

DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement

CB104
QZ50PIN
HIROSE 50PIN

CB105
QZ50PIN
HIROSE 50PIN

01

0V

+24V

CB106
QZ50PIN
HIROSE 50PIN

01

0V

+24V

01

0V

+24V

CB107
QZ50PIN
HIROSE 50PIN
A

01

0V

+24V

Xm+7.1

02

Xm+0.0

Xm+0.1

02

Xm+3.0

Xm+3.1

02

Xm+4.0

Xm+4.1

02

Xm+7.0

03

Xm+0.2

Xm+0.3

03

Xm+3.2

Xm+3.3

03

Xm+4.2

Xm+4.3

03

Xm+7.2

Xm+7.3

04

Xm+0.4

Xm+0.5

04

Xm+3.4

Xm+3.5

04

Xm+4.4

Xm+4.5

04

Xm+7.4

Xm+7.5

05 Xm+0.6

Xm+0.7

05 Xm+3.6

Xm+3.7

05 Xm+4.6

Xm+4.7

05 Xm+7.6

Xm+7.7

06 Xm+1.0

Xm+1.1

06 Xm+8.0

Xm+8.1

06 Xm+5.0

Xm+5.1

06 Xm+10.0 Xm+10.1

07 Xm+1.2

Xm+1.3

07 Xm+8.2

Xm+8.3

07 Xm+5.2

Xm+5.3

07 Xm+10.2 Xm+10.3

08 Xm+1.4

Xm+1.5

08 Xm+8.4

Xm+8.5

08 Xm+5.4

Xm+5.5

08 Xm+10.4 Xm+10.5

09 Xm+1.6

Xm+1.7

09 Xm+8.6

Xm+8.7

09 Xm+5.6

Xm+5.7

09 Xm+10.6 Xm+10.7

10 Xm+2.0

Xm+2.1

10 Xm+9.0

Xm+9.1

10 Xm+6.0

Xm+6.1

10 Xm+11.0 Xm+11.1

11 Xm+2.2

Xm+2.3

11 Xm+9.2

Xm+9.3

11 Xm+6.2

Xm+6.3

11 Xm+11.2 Xm+11.3

12 Xm+2.4

Xm+2.5

12 Xm+9.4

Xm+9.5

12 Xm+6.4

Xm+6.5

12 Xm+11.4 Xm+11.5

13 Xm+2.6

Xm+2.7

13 Xm+9.6

Xm+9.7

13 Xm+6.6

Xm+6.7

13 Xm+11.6 Xm+11.7

14

14 COM4

14

15

15

16 Yn+0.0
17 Yn+0.2

Yn+0.1

18 Yn+0.4
19 Yn+0.6

Yn+0.5

20 Yn+1.0
21 Yn+1.2

Yn+1.1

22 Yn+1.4
23 Yn+1.6

15

16 Yn+2.0
17 Yn+2.2

Yn+2.1

18 Yn+2.4
19 Yn+2.6

Yn+2.5
Yn+3.1

Yn+1.3

20 Yn+3.0
21 Yn+3.2

Yn+1.5

22 Yn+3.4

Yn+1.7

23 Yn+3.6

Yn+0.3
Yn+0.7

14
15

16 Yn+4.0
17 Yn+4.2

Yn+4.1

18 Yn+4.4
19 Yn+4.6

Yn+4.5
Yn+5.1

Yn+3.3

20 Yn+5.0
21 Yn+5.2

Yn+3.5

22 Yn+5.4

Yn+3.7

23 Yn+5.6

Yn+2.3
Yn+2.7

16 Yn+6.0
17 Yn+6.2

Yn+6.1

18 Yn+6.4
19 Yn+6.6

Yn+6.5
Yn+7.1

Yn+5.3

20 Yn+7.0
21 Yn+7.2

Yn+5.5

22 Yn+7.4

Yn+7.5

Yn+5.7

23 Yn+7.6

Yn+7.7

Yn+4.3
Yn+4.7

Yn+6.3
Yn+6.7
Yn+7.3

24

DOCOM DOCOM

24

DOCOM DOCOM

24

DOCOM DOCOM

24

DOCOM DOCOM

25

DOCOM DOCOM

25

DOCOM DOCOM

25

DOCOM DOCOM

25

DOCOM DOCOM

CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24V at CB104 (B01) , CB105(B01), CB106(B01) and
CE107 (B01) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the
outside.

- 365 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.12.4

B-64603EN/01

DI(General-purpose Input Signal)Connection

96 points maximum

Terminal No.

Address No.

24V

Bit No.

CB104(B01), CB105(B01)
CB106(B01), CB107(B01)

Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7

CB104(A02)

RV

CB104(B02)

RV

CB104(A03)

RV

CB104(B03)

RV

CB104(A04)

RV

CB104(B04)

RV

CB104(A05)

RV

CB104(B05)

RV

0V
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.7

CB104(A06)

RV

CB104(B06)

RV

CB104(A07)

RV

CB104(B07)

RV

CB104(A08)

RV

CB104(B08)

RV

CB104(A09)

RV

CB104(B09)

RV

0V

- 366 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Terminal No.

Address No.

24V

Bit No.

CB104(B01), CB105(B01)
CB106(B01), CB107(B01)

Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.6
Xm+2.7

CB104(A10)

RV

CB104(B10)

RV

CB104(A11)

RV

CB104(B11)

RV

CB104(A12)

RV

CB104(B12)

RV

CB104(A13)

RV

CB104(B13)

RV

0V
Xm+3.0
Xm+3.1
Xm+3.2
Xm+3.3
Xm+3.4
Xm+3.5
Xm+3.6
Xm+3.7

CB105(A02)

RV

CB105(B02)

RV

CB105(A03)

RV

CB105(B03)

RV

CB105(A04)

RV

CB105(B04)

RV

CB105(A05)

RV

CB105(B05)

RV

0V

- 367 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Terminal No.

Address No.

24V

Bit No.

CB104(B01), CB105(B01)
CB106(B01), CB107(B01)

Xm+4.0
Xm+4.1
Xm+4.2
Xm+4.3
Xm+4.4
Xm+4.5
Xm+4.6
Xm+4.7

CB106(A02)

RV

CB106(B02)

RV

CB106(A03)

RV

CB106(B03)

RV

CB106(A04)

RV

CB106(B04)

RV

CB106(A05)

RV

CB106(B05)

RV

Xm+4.0 to Xm+4.7 are DI


signals for which a common
voltage can be selected.

CB106(A14)

COM4

CB104(A01), CB105(A01)
CB106(A01), CB107(A01)

0V
Xm+5.0
Xm+5.1
Xm+5.2
Xm+5.3
Xm+5.4
Xm+5.5
Xm+5.6
Xm+5.7

CB106(A06)

RV

CB106(B06)

RV

CB106(A07)

RV

CB106(B07)

RV

CB106(A08)

RV

CB106(B08)

RV

CB106(A09)

RV

CB106(B09)

RV

0V

- 368 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Terminal No.

Address No.

24V

Bit No.

CB104(B01), CB105(B01)
CB106(B01), CB107(B01)

Xm+6.0
Xm+6.1
Xm+6.2
Xm+6.3
Xm+6.4
Xm+6.5
Xm+6.6
Xm+6.7

CB106(A10)

RV

CB106(B10)

RV

CB106(A11)

RV

CB106(B11)

RV

CB106(A12)

RV

CB106(B12)

RV

CB106(A13)

RV

CB106(B13)

RV

0V
Xm+7.0
Xm+7.1
Xm+7.2
Xm+7.3
Xm+7.4
Xm+7.5
Xm+7.6
Xm+7.7

CB107(A02)

RV

CB107(B02)

RV

CB107(A03)

RV

CB107(B03)

RV

CB107(A04)

RV

CB107(B04)

RV

CB107(A05)

RV

CB107(B05)

RV

0V

- 369 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Terminal No.

Address No.

24V

Bit No.

CB104(B01), CB105(B01)
CB106(B01), CB107(B01)

Xm+8.0
Xm+8.1
Xm+8.2
Xm+8.3
Xm+8.4
Xm+8.5
Xm+8.6
Xm+8.7

CB105(A06)

RV

CB105(B06)

RV

CB105(A07)

RV

CB105(B07)

RV

CB105(A08)

RV

CB105(B08)

RV

CB105(A09)

RV

CB105(B09)

RV

0V
Xm+9.0
Xm+9.1
Xm+9.2
Xm+9.3
Xm+9.4
Xm+9.5
Xm+9.6
Xm+9.7

CB105(A10)

RV

CB105(B10)

RV

CB105(A11)

RV

CB105(B11)

RV

CB105(A12)

RV

CB105(B12)

RV

CB105(A13)

RV

CB105(B13)

RV

0V

NOTE
The delay time of the receiver for input Xm+9 is 5-22ms.
The delay time of the receiver for the other input is 2ms(MAX).

- 370 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Terminal No.

Address No.

24V

Bit No.

CB104(B01), CB105(B01)
CB106(B01), CB107(B01)

Xm+10.0
Xm+10.1
Xm+10.2
Xm+10.3
Xm+10.4
Xm+10.5
Xm+10.6
Xm+10.7

CB107(A06)

RV

CB107(B06)

RV

CB107(A07)

RV

CB107(B07)

RV

CB107(A08)

RV

CB107(B08)

RV

CB107(A09)

RV

CB107(B09)

RV

0V
Xm+11.0
Xm+11.1
Xm+11.2
Xm+11.3
Xm+11.4
Xm+11.5
Xm+11.6
Xm+11.7

CB107(A10)

RV

CB107(B10)

RV

CB107(A11)

RV

CB107(B11)

RV

CB107(A12)

RV

CB107(B12)

RV

CB107(A13)

RV

CB107(B13)

RV

0V

- 371 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

NOTE
Xm+4.0 through Xm+4.7 are DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected.
That is, by connecting the COM4 (CB106-A14) pin to the +24V power supply, these
DI signals can be input with them logical state reversed. If, however, some cable
wires of them are connected to ground, they have the same effect as inputting an
ON state DI signal. To prevent this from occurring, the connection of the COM4
(CB106-A14) pin to the 0V power supply is recommended wherever possible in
terms of safety.
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed,
the input is 0. For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which a common
voltage can be selected (from Xm+4.0 to Xm+4.7), the input is 0 when the COM4
(CB106-A14) pin is connected to the 0 V power supply or 1 when it is connected to
the +24V power supply. Connect COM4 when used. When addresses from Xm+4.0
to Xm+4.7 are not used, connect COM4 to the 0V power supply.
Common voltage for general-purpose DI
Address
Xm
Xm+1
Xm+2
Xm+3
Xm+4
Xm+5
Xm+6
Xm+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11

Common voltage
Internally fixed to 0V.
Internally fixed to 0V.
Internally fixed to 0V.
Internally fixed to 0V.
Externally can be selected with COM4.
Internally fixed to 0V.
Internally fixed to 0V.
Internally fixed to 0V.
Internally fixed to 0V.
Internally fixed to 0V.
Internally fixed to 0V.
Internally fixed to 0V.

CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24V at CB104 (B01), CB105(B01), CB106(B01) and
CE107 (B01) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the
outside.

- 372 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.12.5

DO(Output Signal) Connection

64 points maximum

Terminal No.
DOCOM

CB104(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB105(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB106(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB107(A24,B24,A25,B25)
+24V
0V
+24V stabilized
power supply

Address No.
Bit No.

Yn+0.0

CB104(A16)
DV

Yn+0.1

DV

Yn+0.2

DV

Yn+0.3

DV

Yn+0.4

DV

Yn+0.5

DV

Yn+0.6

DV

Yn+0.7

DV

Yn+1.0

DV

Yn+1.1

DV

Yn+1.2

DV

Yn+1.3

DV

Yn+1.4

DV

Yn+1.5

DV

Yn+1.6

DV

Yn+1.7

DV

CB104(B16)
CB104(A17)
CB104(B17)
CB104(A18)
CB104(B18)
CB104(A19)
CB104(B19)

CB104(A20)
CB104(B20)
CB104(A21)
CB104(B21)
CB104(A22)
CB104(B22)
CB104(A23)
CB104(B23)

CB104(A01)
CB105(A01)
CB106(A01)
CB107(A01)

0V

- 373 -

Relay

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Terminal No.
DOCOM

CB104(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB105(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB106(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB107(A24,B24,A25,B25)
+24V
0V
+24V stabilized
power supply

Address No.
Bit No.

Yn+2.0

CB105(A16)
DV

Yn+2.1

DV

Yn+2.2

DV

Yn+2.3

DV

Yn+2.4

DV

Yn+2.5

DV

Yn+2.6

DV

Yn+2.7

DV

Yn+3.0

DV

Yn+3.1

DV

Yn+3.2

DV

Yn+3.3

DV

Yn+3.4

DV

Yn+3.5

DV

Yn+3.6

DV

Yn+3.7

DV

CB105(B16)
CB105(A17)
CB105(B17)
CB105(A18)
CB105(B18)
CB105(A19)
CB105(B19)

CB105(A20)
CB105(B20)
CB105(A21)
CB105(B21)
CB105(A22)
CB105(B22)
CB105(A23)
CB105(B23)

CB104(A01)
CB105(A01)
CB106(A01)
CB107(A01)

0V

- 374 -

Relay

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Terminal No.
DOCOM

CB104(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB105(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB106(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB107(A24,B24,A25,B25)
+24V
0V
+24V stabilized
power supply

Address No.
Bit No.

Yn+4.0

CB106(A16)
DV

Yn+4.1

DV

Yn+4.2

DV

Yn+4.3

DV

Yn+4.4

DV

Yn+4.5

DV

Yn+4.6

DV

Yn+4.7

DV

Yn+5.0

DV

Yn+5.1

DV

Yn+5.2

DV

Yn+5.3

DV

Yn+5.4

DV

Yn+5.5

DV

Yn+5.6

DV

Yn+5.7

DV

CB106(B16)
CB106(A17)
CB106(B17)
CB106(A18)
CB106(B18)
CB106(A19)
CB106(B19)

CB106(A20)
CB106(B20)
CB106(A21)
CB106(B21)
CB106(A22)
CB106(B22)
CB106(A23)
CB106(B23)

CB104(A01)
CB105(A01)
CB106(A01)
CB107(A01)

0V

- 375 -

Relay

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Terminal No.
DOCOM

CB104(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB105(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB106(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB107(A24,B24,A25,B25)
+24V
0V
+24V stabilized
power supply

Address No.
Bit No.

Yn+6.0

CB107(A16)
DV

Yn+6.1

DV

Yn+6.2

DV

Yn+6.3

DV

Yn+6.4

DV

Yn+6.5

DV

Yn+6.6

DV

Yn+6.7

DV

Yn+7.0

DV

Yn+7.1

DV

Yn+7.2

DV

Yn+7.3

DV

Yn+7.4

DV

Yn+7.5

DV

Yn+7.6

DV

Yn+7.7

DV

CB107(B16)
CB107(A17)
CB107(B17)
CB107(A18)
CB107(B18)
CB107(A19)
CB107(B19)

CB107(A20)
CB107(B20)
CB107(A21)
CB107(B21)
CB107(A22)
CB107(B22)
CB107(A23)
CB107(B23)

CB104(A01)
CB105(A01)
CB106(A01)
CB107(A01)

0V

- 376 -

Relay

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.12.6

Manual Pulse Generator Connection

For an I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet, three manual pulse generators can be connected.
For the connection, see Subsection 7.4.1.

8.12.7

External View

- 377 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

8.12.8

B-64603EN/01

GND Cable Connection

In the case of Multipoint grounding


Connect to the cabinet metal plate
which is connected to ground
In the case of Single-point grounding
Connect to the signal ground bar

Cable (2mm2) or thicker

Connect the 0V line of this unit to the cabinets metal plate which is connected to ground or signal ground
bar nearby via the protective ground terminal. Ground cable can be connected to the terminal from the
bottlom of the unit case. Refer to Item 3.4.1.1 about Multipoint grounding or Single-point grounding.
Use a faston terminal for series 250 as cable terminal.

- 378 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.12.9

Specifications

Installation specifications
Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
Use the units under the following ambient temperature conditions:
Operation:
0C to 55C
Storage and transportation: -20C to 80C
For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.

Ordering specifications
Item

Ordering specifications

I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet


Fuse (spare parts)

A02B-0319-C001
A03B-0815-K001

Remarks
1A

Module specifications
Item

Specification

Remarks

DI points

96 points

24 V input

DO points
MPG interface

64 points
Up to 3 units

24 V source type output

Power supply rating


Module

Supply voltage

Current rating

I/O unit for power


magnetics cabinet

24 VDC 10% supplied from the power


supply connector CP1. The allowance of
10% should include instantaneous
voltage and ripple voltage.

0.3A + 7.3mADI

Remarks
DI = number of DI points in
the ON state.

NOTE
To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and JD1B,
the above power supply rating + 70mA is required.
If you use the power supply which is output from CP2, add the amount to the above
current rating .
DI (intput signal specifications)
Number of points
Rated input
Delay time

24 points (per module)


DC24V, 7.3mA
The receiver delay time is 2 ms (maximum). In addition, [I/O Link transfer time
between CNC and I/O module] and [ladder scan period (depending on CNC)]
must be considered.

DI (contact specifications)
Contact rating
Leakage current between
contacts when opened
Voltage decrease between
contacts when closed

30 VDC, 16 mA or more
1mA or less(26.4V)
2 V or less (including a cable voltage decrease)

- 379 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

DO (output signal specifications)


Maximum load current when ON
Saturation voltage when ON
Withstand voltage
Leakage current when OFF
Delay time

200 mA or less including momentary current per signal. 11.2 A or less for
DO signals in all
1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA
24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
20A or less
The driver delay time is 50 s (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.

CAUTION
1 When inductive load is connected to DO teminal, connect a diode in parallel in
order to reduce the noise..
2 When capacitive load is connected to DO teminal, connect a resistor in series in
order to diminish the rush current.

Power supply for DO load (DOCOM)


Input voltage : min 0V, max 26.4V
Be sure to connect all power supply for DO load (DOCOM) pins.
Turn on the power supply for DO load (DOCOM) at the same time as the power for the control unit.
Turn off the power supply for DO load (DOCOM) when or before the power for the control unit is turned
off.

WARNING
For the safety of the system, dont supply the power for the load (DOCOM) when
the power for the I/O Unit is off. If the power for the load (DOCOM) is supplied
when the power for the I/O Unit is off, invalid output or malfunction may cause an
accident.

- 380 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

8.12.10

Other Notes

Address allocation
For the I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
DI space map
Xm1
Xm1 + 1
Xm1 + 2
Xm1 + 3
Xm1 + 4
Xm1 + 5
Xm1 + 6
Xm1 + 7
Xm1 + 8
Xm1 + 9
Xm1 + 10
Xm1 + 11

General-purpose
input signal

Slot 1

Xmmpg
(for 1st MPG)
Xmmpg + 1 (for 2nd MPG)
Xmmpg + 2 (for 3rd MPG)

Manual pulse
generator

Slot MPG

DO space map
Yn1
Yn1 + 1
Yn1 + 2
Yn1 + 3
Output signal
Yn1 + 4
Yn1 + 5
Yn1 + 6
Yn1 + 7

Slot 1

Xm1, Xmmpg, and Yn1 indicate the start address at allocation.


Basically, for an I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet, allocate 12-byte DI addresses to slot 1 and 8-byte
DO addresses to slot 1.
An I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet has an interface for three manual pulse generators. To use manual
pulse generators, allocate addresses to slot MPG. With this setting, addresses can be allocated to the three
manual pulse generators at a time (addresses cannot be allocated individually to manual pulse generators).
Do not use the addresses with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.

ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output signals)
For ON/OFF of the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO signals (output signals), see Subsection
8.2.4.4.

Parallel DO (output signal) connection


For parallel connections of DO signals (output signals), see Subsection 8.2.4.4.

DO (output signal) alarm detection


The DO driver of the I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet is capable of detecting an overcurrent and
measuring its own temperature. If an accident, such as the connecting of the cable to ground, causes an
abnormal increase in the load current or in the driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided
for each DO driver, is activated and keeps the DO signal in the OFF state until the cause of the problem is
eliminated. Even if this occurs, the CNC and I/O module continue operating without entering the alarm
status, but the PMC is notified of the location of the error detected by the DO driver. This information can
be checked on the PMC status screen or alarm processing can be performed in advance using a ladder to
help error check and recovery.
A DO error such as a ground fault is detected for each point. This DO error is transferred to the PMC
system relay area as a status alarm. The following table lists system relay area information and
corresponding DO data related to a status alarm. When an alarm data bit is set to 1, the DO driver
corresponding to the bit detects an error. Also see Subsection 7.3.3, Status Alarm.

- 381 -

8. UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i

B-64603EN/01

Information output to the relay area and corresponding location where an error occured
Information output to the system relay area
Alarm
information
Y address
Group
PMC
Slot
number
Type
(DO address)
number path number
(Intra-slot byte
address)

0 to 23

1 to 5

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Faulty location

Yn
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3
Yn+4
Yn+5
Yn+6
Yn+7

0th byte DO
1st byte DO
2nd byte DO
3rd byte DO
4th byte DO
5th byte DO
6th byte DO
7th byte DO

Output values of Group number, PMC path, and Y address depends on unit connection and I/O
address assignment.
Yn indicates the start address at allocation.
Description of Alarm data in the system relay area
Alarm data
#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

DO ground
fault at bit 7

DO ground
fault at bit 6

DO ground
fault at bit 5

DO ground
fault at bit 4

DO ground
fault at bit 3

DO ground
fault at bit 2

DO ground
fault at bit 1

DO ground
fault at bit 0

CAUTION
1 he output protection function is not for external equipment but for internal device
of the module.
2 he output protection function cant protect the internal device in any case. If the
output protection function is activated, remove the cause immediately. If the
output exceed the absolute maximum rating, the output protection function may
not operate normally or the internal device may break before the output
protection function operates.
3 f the over current is continued with a condition that the output protection function
cant operate normally, the output might emit smoke or take fire.

- 382 -

9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

B-64603EN/01

STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

9.1

STOP MODES

If the control unit enters the alarm state, the servo and spindle motors stop (Note).

NOTE
A servo motor attached to a vertical axis or spindle which is not manufactured by
FANUC may not stop. And, a stop of the spindle motor depends on a Ladder
program.
There are the following stop modes:
1. Stop by shutting off the motor power
2. Controlled stop without shutting off the motor power
3. Stop by shutting off the motor power after a controlled stop
A controlled stop is the quickest.
power for safety reasons.

However, a stop may be made by immediately shutting off the motor

WARNING
Pressing the RESET key stops the running program. As a result, the servo axis
stops and the spindle axis remains rotating without changing the speed. The
RESET key may not function due to an MDI failure or the like, so, for safety, use
the emergency stop button instead of the RESET key to stop the motor safely.
When a failure of the control unit, machine contact, or connection is also
assumed, further safety actions must be taken.

9.2

SHUTTING OFF THE MOTOR POWER

The motor power may be shut off through an IGBT (transistor) or an electromechanical scheme that
controls mechanical contacts. When an amplifier is used, the motor power is shut off by an IGBT
(transistor) based on the control unit alarm state (or Ladder program). To shut off the motor power
through an electromechanical scheme, a line contactor must be installed on the power input line in the
Power Supply, thereby providing a direct contactor shut-off route. (See Fig. 9.5 (a) in Section 9.5,
"EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL.")
The Power Supply provides MCC control signals (MCCOFF3 and MCCOFF4) for controlling the
contactor. However, these signals are enabled only when the motor power to all servo and spindle
amplifiers connected to the Common Power Supply is shut off through the IGBT.
Example 1)
When the *ESP signal is input to the Power Supply
The motor power to both servo and spindle amplifiers is shut off by the IGBT, after which MCC
control signals are output.

- 383 -

9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

B-64603EN/01

Example 2)
When a servo alarm occurs
The motor power to the servo amplifier is shut off by the IGBT. When the spindle motor works
without any trouble, however, the spindle motor can be controlled independently and the motor
power to the spindle amplifier is not shut off by the IGBT. In this case, MCC control signals are not
output. When a spindle emergency stop signal is input using the Ladder program, the spindle motor
is decelerated to a stop. Then, the motor power is shut off through the IGBT, MCC control signals
are output, and the motor power is shut off electromechanically.
A failure in the amplifier may disable MCC control signals. To ensure motor power shut-off, therefore,
a circuit must be designed in a redundancy configuration having a route that is independent of the shut-off
function of the amplifier.

9.3

STOPPING THE SPINDLE MOTOR

While the spindle motor is running, shutting off the motor power allows the spindle motor to coast at a
speed maintained before shut-off and eventually stop (after a while). However, there may be cases where
the spindle motor should be stopped as soon as possible for safety reasons. In such cases, a stop of the
spindle motor depends on a Ladder program prepared by the machine tool builder. If the CNC detects an
abnormal condition, it outputs an alarm to the PMC. The Ladder program should specify processing to be
performed when an alarm is output: allowing the spindle motor to continue running, decelerating the
spindle to a stop, or causing the spindle to coast, for example.
To decelerate the spindle motor to a stop, a spindle emergency stop signal (such as *ESPA (G71.1) or
*ESPB (G75.1)) can be input in the PMC. Inputting this signal cause the spindle motor to be decelerated
to a stop. (A Ladder program must be created so that this signal is input if an alarm occurs.) The same
effect can be achieved by using the Power Supply emergency stop input (connector CX4). When an
emergency stop signal is connected to the *EMGPSM emergency stop input (connector CX4), therefore,
the spindle is decelerated to a stop if the CNC enters the emergency stop state.

CAUTION
1 If the control unit enters the system alarm state, the Ladder program does not
run. In this case, the spindle amplifier can be decelerated to a stop. Make proper
parameter settings because such a stop depends on the settings.
2 If the spindle motor cannot be controlled due to an alarm in the spindle amplifier
itself or for some other reason, the motor power is shut off by the IGBT
immediately. After the servo motor has stopped, an MCC control signal is output.

9.4

STOPPING THE SERVO MOTOR

Shutting off the motor power brings the servo motor to a dynamic brake stop. A dynamic brake stop is
braking performed by separating the synchronous rotator from the driving power, and consuming
generated electric energies with the coil as well as the built-in resistor of the servo amplifier. With this
function, shutting off the motor power does not allow the servo motor to coast like the
spindle motor.
Servo motor stop mode depends on the type of a control unit alarm.
Example)
1. PS alarm caused by an NC program error or the like
The motor power is not shut off.
2. Control unit fan stop
A single-block stop is made. The motor power is not shut off.
3. Emergency stop state
A dynamic stop is made as a rule. By setting relevant parameters, however, it is also possible to
decelerate the servo motor to a stop, and then to shut off the servo motor power.
- 384 -

9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

B-64603EN/01

4.

System alarm
A dynamic brake stop is made.
If the servo motor cannot be controlled, a dynamic brake stop is unconditionally made.

9.5

EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL


WARNING
The safety machine should be designed based on the evaluation results of
machine risk assessment. Use the emergency stop signal properly in order to
design the safety machine.

To configure an emergency stop circuit in compliance with the safety standards of IEC60204-1 in which
requirements for electrical components of machine are specified, observe the following cautions.
IEC60204-1 specifies that an emergency stop circuit shall function as a category 0 or 1 stop.
Category 0 stop:
Stopping by immediate removal of power to the machine actuators(Uncontrolled stop)
Category 1 stop:
A controlled stop with power to the machine actuators available to achieve the stop and then removal of
power when the stop is achieved
(Controlled stop)
Fig. 9.5(a) or Fig. 9.5(b) shows an example showing how to make connections for the emergency stop
signal with this CNC controller and servo amplifier(i series or i series) to comply with the EU Machine
Instructions. Fig. 9.5(c) shows a flow diagram of the emergency stop circuit signals.
The emergency stop signal is input to the Safety relay module. The output signal from the relay is input to
the CNC controller and Power Supply(PS). The Power Supply outputs control signal for a motor power
magnetic contactor, which can be used to switch the power applied to the Power Supply on and off. An
emergency stop signal is usually generated by closing the B contact of a pushbutton switch.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNC controller enters the emergency stop
released state, such that the servo and spindle motors can be controlled and operated.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact opens, the CNC controller enters the emergency stop
state, and the servo and spindle motors stop. In case of Fig. 9.5(a) or 9.5(b), the spindle motor power is
shut off after the spindle motor is decelerated to a stop (Category 1 stop). Meanwhile, the servo motor is
forced to be a dynamic stop as a rule (Category 0 stop). By setting relevant parameter, however, it is also
possible to decelerate the servo motor to a stop, and then to shut off the servo motor power (Category 1
stop).
Regarding how the Spindle motor or the Servo motor stops when the emergency stop button is pushed,
refer to the Item 9.3 and the Item 9.4. Regarding specifications of parameters related in these matters,
refer to the FANUC AC SERVO parameters manual(B-65270JA).
The example of the emergency stop signal circuit showed in Fig. 9.5(a) or Fig. 9.5(b) complies with the
requirements of the safety standard ISO13849-1, Performance Level(PL) c or d. However, when
calculating PL value concretely, the calculation should be based on the safety standard ISO13849-1 with
the reliability data provided by each parts supplier. In case for the reliability data of CNC, please contact
FANUC sales office.

- 385 -

9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

B-64603EN/01

Emergency stop
button S1
Safety relay
module

Safety input 1

Emergency
Safety input 2

stop K1

Magnetic contactor

Reset/

K0

Ready

S2

feedback input

Emergency stop K1

CNC
+24
*ESP

Emergency stop K1

i series Power Supply

SV

(PS)

SP

+24(CX4)

*ESP

*ESP

*ESP(CX4)

(CXA2A)

(CXA2B)

Emergency stop K1 off delay


MCCOFF3(CX3)
MCCOFF4(CX3)
Surge killer

Power to the magnetic contactor coil

L1 L2 L3

Coil

Breaker

Main Power

Magnetic contactor K0

AC reactor

Break power (+)

Other

CNC conditions

Emergency

conditions

SA

stop K1

Motor brake coil

Break power (-)

Fig. 9.5(a) Example of connections with an i series servo amplifier

NOTE
1 When Emergency stop button S1 is pushed, Emergency stop K1 opens and
Magnetic contactor K0 shuts off the power for Power Supply.
2 Set the off delay timer for shutting the power to the magnetic contactor coil in the
above example as follows:
- Set a value which allows the time required to normally stop by the spindle.
- Set a value which allows the feed axis stop time also when the feed axis quick
stop function and vertical axis fall prevention function are used.
3 Connect the auxiliary contact of Magnetic contactor K0 to feedback input of
Safety relay in order to detect the failure of Magnetic contactor K0.

- 386 -

9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

B-64603EN/01

Emergency stop
button S1
Safety relay
module

Safety input 1

Emergency
Safety input 2

stop K1

Magnetic contactor

Reset/

K0

Ready

S2

feedback input

Emergency stop K1

CNC
+24
*ESP

i series Power Supply

i SV

(PS)
Emergency stop K1

+24(CX30)
*ESP(CX30)

*ESP
(CXA19A)

*ESP
(CXA19B)

Emergency stop K1 off delay


RLY1(CX29)
RLY2(CX29)
Surge killer

Power to the magnetic contactor coil

L1 L2 L3

Coil

Breaker

Main Power

Magnetic contactor K0

AC reactor

Break power (+)

Other

CNC conditions

Emergency

conditions

SA

stop K1

Motor brake coil

Break power (-)

Fig. 9.5(b) Example of connections with an i series servo amplifier

NOTE
1 When Emergency stop button S1 is pushed, Emergency stop K1 opens and
Magnetic contactor K0 shuts off the power for Power Supply.
2 Set the off delay timer for shutting the power to the magnetic contactor coil in the
above example as follows:
- Set a value which allows the time required to normally stop by the spindle.
- Set a value which allows the feed axis stop time also when the feed axis quick
stop function and vertical axis fall prevention function are used.
3 Connect the auxiliary contact of Magnetic contactor K0 to feedback input of
Safety relay in order to detect the failure of Magnetic contactor K0.

- 387 -

9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

B-64603EN/01
Emergency
stop button S1

Broken line indicates

Safety

the signal flow of Data

relay module

or logic.

Emergency
Magnetic contactor K0

Stop

Ready

S2

K1

Emergency stop K1

CNC
+24
*ESP(X8.4)

Contact input

Delay timer

*ESP(spindle)

Internal signal

i series Power Supply


Emergency stop K1

SP

24V

PWM
on

*ESP
Magnetic contactor
on command

Emergency stop K1 off delay

Power to the
magnetic
contactor coil

SV
PWM on
command

(PS)

Contact input

Internal signal

0 after the
spindle
stops

Internal
signal

Delay
timer

Internal
signal

Surge Killer
Power shut-off

Power shut-off

Motor

Motor

Coil

Main Power

Breaker

MCC K0

AC reactor

Fig. 9.5(c) Flow diagram of emergency stop circuit signals

CAUTION
1 This CNC controller can detect overtravel by using a software limit function. If the
software limit function does not operate effectively due to a failure, resulting in a
possible serious accident or loss, install a safety circuit, for example, a stroke end
limit switch arranged in series with the emergency stop button.
2 To use a spindle motor and amplifier produced by a manufacturer other than
FANUC, refer to the corresponding documentation as well as this manual.
Design the emergency stop sequence such that, if the emergency stop signal
contact opens while the spindle motor is rotating, the spindle motor is decelerated
until it stops.

- 388 -

9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

B-64603EN/01

9.6

CAUTIONS ABOUT MULTI-PATH CONTROL

For multi-path control, multiple paths (up to 2 paths) belong to a machine group, and multiple machine
groups (up to three groups) constitute a system.
Example) Multi-path control configuration
Control unit
Machine group 1

Machine group 2

Path 1

Axis

Path 2

Axis

Axis

Axis

Fig. 9.6 (a)

To prevent an emergency stop in one machine group from affecting another within a multi-path control
system, a separate emergency stop circuit (see Fig. 9.6 (b)) must be provided for each machine group.
Machine group 1

Machine group 2
Emergency stop

Emergency stop

button S1

button S1

Safety relay

Safety relay

module

module

Safety input 1

Emergency

Safety input 1

Emergency
Safety input 2

stop K1

Safety input 2

stop K1
MCC

Reset/

K0

Ready S2

MCC

Reset/

feedback input

K0

Ready

S2

feedback input

CNC

Emergency stop K1

CNC

Emergency stop K1

+24

+24

*ESP

Emergency stop K1

*ESP

i series servo amplifier

SV

i series servo amplifier

SV

(PS)

SP

(PS)

SP

Emergency stop K1

+24(CX4)

*ESP

*ESP

*ESP(CX4)

(CXA2A)

(CXA2B)

Emergency stop K1 off delay

*ESP

*ESP

*ESP(CX4)

(CXA2A)

(CXA2B)

Emergency stop K1 off delay


MCCOFF3(CX3)

MCCOFF3(CX3)

MCCOFF4(CX3)
Spark killer

Power to the magnetic contactor coil

+24(CX4)

MCCOFF4(CX3)
Spark killer

Power to the magnetic contactor coil

L1 L2 L3

coil

L1 L2 L3

coil

Main circuit

Main circuit

breaker

breaker

Magnetic

AC reactor

Magnetic

contactor K0

AC reactor

contactor K0

Break power (+)

Break power (+)

Other

CNC conditions

Emergency

conditions

SA

stop K1

Motor brake coil

Break power (-)

Fig. 9.6 (b)

- 389 -

Other

CNC conditions

Emergency

conditions

SA

stop K1

Motor brake coil

Break power (-)

10.CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS

10

B-64603EN/01

CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS

0i- MODEL F can be connected to the following networks. For an explanation of how to make the
connection, refer to the manuals listed below:
Manual title

Manual code

FANUC Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATORS MANUAL


FANUC PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL
FANUC DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL
FANUC CC-Link Board CONNECTION MANUAL
FANUC Industrial Ethernet CONNECTION MANUAL

- 390 -

B-64014EN
B-63993EN
B-64043EN
B-64463EN
B-64013EN

B-64603EN/01

11.CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS

11

CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND


COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS

11.1

OVERVIEW

This chapter describes how to connect the control unit to the FANUC PANEL i or a commercial personal
computer, using the high-speed serial bus (HSSB) or Ethernet.

11.2

CAUTIONS

The FANUC PANEL i or a Windows-compatible personal computer commercially available is to be


connected. The user (machine tool builder or end user) is required to procure and maintain a commercial
personal computer if the user is to use it. FANUC owns the copyright for the driver used to connect a
personal computer. The software mentioned above and the contents of the related manuals may not be
used or reproduced in part or whole without the prior written permission of FANUC.

NOTE
1 IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corp. of the US.
2 Windows is registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp. of the US.
3 The company and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of the respective companies.

11.3

CONNECTION USING THE HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS


(HSSB)

11.3.1

Overview

The high-speed serial bus (HSSB) enables the high-speed transfer of large amounts of data between a
commercial personal computer and the control unit, by connecting them via a high-speed optical fiber.
For an LCD-mounted type control unit, an HSSB interface board is inserted in an optional slot. On the
personal computer, an appropriate interface board is installed. You can use the FANUC PANEL i instead
of a commercial PC. The FANUC PANEL i comes standard with the HSSB interface.

- 391 -

11.CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS

11.3.2

B-64603EN/01

Connection Diagram
COP21N
HSSB interface board for
control unit
(optional slot)

Personal computer interface board


(PCI or PCI Express)

COP21M
LCD-mounted type control unit (rear)

Commercial PC

COP21M
PANEL i

11.3.3

Note: Only an interface board for the PCI bus is provided as the interface board to
be installed in the personal computer.

Specifications of a Commercial PC

NOTE
1 The machine tool builder or end user is required to procure and maintain the
personal computer.
2 FANUC is not liable for any problems resulting from the operation of users'
personal computers, regardless of whether the operations are normal or
abnormal.
3 Perform a connection test between the PC and control unit before using the PC
sufficiently.
(1) The PC must have a PCI slot (5 V, 32bit, and Rev 2.1 or later) or PCI Express x1 (x4, x8, or x16)
slot (Rev 1.0a or later) to install an interface board.
(2) An HSSB driver must be installed on the PC. The HSSB driver is stored on the FOCAS1/2 library
disk (ordering information: A02B-0207-K737).
(3) Following shows the required power of the interface board for PCI type.
Drawing No.
A20B-8101-0162
A20B-8101-0163
A13B-0204-C001
A13B-0204-C002

Specification
2ch specification (for PCI Slot)
1ch specification (for PCI Slot)
1ch specification, Low profile (for PCI Express Slot)
1ch specification, Standard height (for PCI Express Slot)

- 392 -

Power supply requirements


+5V 1.5A
+5V 1A
+3.3V 1A
+3.3V 1A

11.CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS

B-64603EN/01

11.3.4

Installation Environment

(1) HSSB Interface Board For Personal Computer


Ambient temperature
Humidity

Operating
Non-operating
Usual
Short-term (within one month)

0 to 55C
-20 to 60C
10 to 75% (non-condensing)
10 to 95% (non-condensing)

If the environmental requirement of the using personal computer is different from the above, please
keep the environmental requirement to be satisfied by the both equipments.
(2) Connect the connection plate of PC side interface board to the chassis of PC which is securely
connected to the Frame Ground. Ensure that the electrical potential of the Frame Ground is not
fluctuate by external noise.
(3) HSSB Interface Board For control unit
Strictly keep environmental requirement about each control unit in which the interface boards are
installed.

11.3.5

Handling Precautions

(1) Personal computer interface board


(a) Electrostatic interference
The personal computer interface board is shipped in an anti-static bag. To store or transport the
interface board, always place it in the anti-static bag. Before removing the interface board from
the anti-static bag, ground your body.
(b) Protection of card edge terminals
When handling the personal computer interface board, do NOT touch its card edge terminals
(the gold-plated contacts which engage with a mating connector). If you accidentally touch
any card edge terminal, wipe it gently with clean or ethyl alcohol-dipped tissue paper or
absorbent cotton. Do not use any organic solvent other than ethyl alcohol.
(c) The communication speed is different on the kind of the interface board to use, the function to
use, and the communication data size.
(d) HSSB interface board dose not support the sleep and suspend. Please disable the sleep and
suspend.
(2) Optical connector and fiber cable
See Appendix D.

11.3.6

Procedure for Installing Personal Computer Interface Boards

WARNING
Before starting to mount or remove a personal computer interface board, switch
off the personal computer and its peripheral devices, and disconnect their power
supply cables. Otherwise, there is a serious danger of electric shock.
(1) Remove the covering plate of extension slot on the personal computer.
(2) Insert the interface board for the personal computer to the PCI connector or PCI Express connector
tightly.
(3) Screw the plate of interface board to the computer.
(4) Confirm connection (in only case of HSSB multi-connection)
Confirm following items for installing drivers of HSSB interface board in case of HSSB
multi-connection.
PCI slot or PCI Express slot number which HSSB board is mounted (slot number is marked to
PCB normally).
Correspondence between HSSB channel and CNC
- 393 -

11.CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS

B-64603EN/01

(5) Restore the covering plate.

NOTE
Do not touch the leads running to the card edge of the interface board (that match
with connectors).

11.3.7

Cable Connection

HSSB interface board for control unit

Optical fiber cable

Personal computer interface board


or PANELi

COP21N
COP21M

(1) Optical fiber cable for HSSB


Cable for inside wire
A66L-6001-0023#L~ (maximum cable length: 10m)
Cable for outside wire
A66L-6001-0026#L~ (maximum cable length: 50m)
Low-loss cable for outside wire (for relay only)
A66L-6001-0029#L~ (maximum total length of two cables: 35 m)
High-speed low-loss cable for outside wire
A66L-6001-0049#L~ (maximum cable length: 100m, maximum total length of two cables for
relay: 55m)
(2) Low-loss optical junction adapter
A63L-0020-0004

NOTE
1 For explanations about how to specify the length of the underscored portion and
the related cautions, see Appendix D.
2 The machine tool builder cannot cut or connect any optical fiber cable. Be sure to
use the cables above.

- 394 -

B-64603EN/01

11.CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS

11.4

CONNECTION USING Ethernet

11.4.1

Overview

You can connect the control unit with a commercial PC to use the PC as the display unit of the control
unit and transfer data between the control unit and PC, using Ethernet. You can also use the Ethernet
display function to perform maintenance and IPL operation for the control unit from the PC at power-on.
You can use the FANUC PANEL i instead of a commercial PC.

11.4.2

Connection Diagram
LCD-mounted type control unit
(rear)

Fast Ethernet board


(optional slot)

Ethernet port

CD38A (main board)

Commercial PC

CD38U
PANEL i

NOTE
1 For connection to the Ethernet interface, see Section 5.5.
2 For connection using the Fast Ethernet board, refer to the FANUC Fast
Ethernet/Fast Data Server Operators Manual (B-64014EN). When a PC is
connected using Fast Ethernet, the Ethernet display function cannot be used to
perform maintenance and IPL operation for the control unit from the PC at
power-on.
3 The Ethernet display function cannot be used on any LCD-mounted type control
unit or with Fast Ethernet.

- 395 -

12.PANEL i

12

B-64603EN/01

PANEL i

The PANEL i is on an IBM PC compatible panel computer. Connecting the PANEL i to the control unit
via an optical fiber (high-speed serial bus) or Ethernet can provide a system with PC functions.
For details of the PANEL i (including installation environment conditions and connection), refer to the
FANUC PANEL i Connection and Maintenance Manual (B-64223EN). For connection with the control
unit, see Chapter 11.

- 396 -

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS AND


CONNECTORS

Outline drawings for LCD-mounted type control unit


Name

See

Control unit

8.4color LCD/MDI
horizontal
8.4 color LCD/MDI
vertical
10.4 color LCD
15 color LCD

Fig. U1
Fig. U2
Fig. U3
Fig. U4

Other outline drawings


Name

See

MDI unit (small type, 200x140mm)


MDI unit (ONG, 200x260mm)
MDI unit (ONG, 220x230mm)
MDI unit (ONG, 220x290mm)
MDI unit (QWERTY TYPE A, 160x290mm)
MDI unit (QWERTY TYPE B, 145x400mm)
Manual pulse generator
Pendant type manual pulse generator
Separate detector interface unit or analog input separate detector interface unit
Absolute pulse coder battery case for a separate detector
Battery case for external installation
Punch panel (for LCD-mounted type control unit)
Ethernet Connector Panel

- 399 -

Fig. U5
Fig. U6
Fig. U7
Fig. U8
Fig. U9
Fig. U10
Fig. U11
Fig. U12
Fig. U13
Fig. U14
Fig. U15
Fig. U16
Fig. U17

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

Installation stud (8 points)


Installation hole processing picture

Area for pasted


packing
NOTE The unit is installed from outside cabinet.
Fix with M4 nut from the reverse side. The tightening torque is 2.0 N.m.

Fig. U1

B-64603EN/01

Painting color: MUNSELL sign N3 half luster finishing


Weight: 3kg

Touch panel interface unit


(only with touch panel)

APPENDIX

Control unit (8.4 color LCD/MDI horizontal)

- 400 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Installation hole
processing picture

Area for pasted packing

Touch panel interface unit


(only with touch panel)

Painting color: MUNSELL sign N3 half luster finishing


Weight: 3kg
Installation stud (8 points)

NOTE The unit is installed from outside cabinet.


Fix with M4 nut from the reverse side. The tightening torque is 2.0 N.m.

Fig. U2

Control unit (8.4 color LCD/MDI vertical)

- 401 -

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Installation hole
processing picture

Area for pasted


packing

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

Painting color: MUNSELL sign N3 half luster finishing


Weight: 3kg

Fig. U3 Control unit10.4 color LCD

- 402 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

8-M4 stud

8-M4 stud

Dashed line: Area for packing attachment

Weight: 3.5 kg
(Unit: mm)
15 " unit mounting hole machining drawing
(Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet
then secure the unit with nuts from the inside.)

Fig. U4 Control unit15 color LCD

- 403 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

Dashed line:

B-64603EN/01

Area for packing attachment

Weight: 0.6 kg
(Unit: mm)

Fig. U5 MDI unit (small type, 200x140mm)

- 404 -

B-64603EN/01

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

Dashed line:

Area for packing attachment

Weight: 1.0 kg
(Unit: mm)

Fig. U6 MDI unit (ONG, 200x260mm)

- 405 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Dashed line:

Area for packing attachment

Weight: 1.0 kg
(Unit: mm)

Fig. U7 MDI unit (ONG, 220x230mm)

- 406 -

B-64603EN/01

APPENDIX

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment

Weight: 1.2 kg
(Unit: mm)

Fig. U8 MDI unit (ONG, 220x290mm)

- 407 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment

Weight: 1.0 kg
(Unit: mm)

Fig. U9 MDI unit (QWERTY TYPE A, 160x290mm)

- 408 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Top view

Front view
Side view

20

Rear view

7-M4 stud

30

On the back of the


unit, clearance is
required for cable
connection.

Protective grounding stud


(M4)

Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment

Weight:
(Unit:
Panel cut drawing

(Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then secure the unit with nuts from the inside.)

Fig. U10 MDI unit (QWERTY TYPE B, 145x400mm)

- 409 -

1.1 kg
mm)

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

3-M4
72, equally spaced

Mass: 0.2 kg
(Unit: mm)

Fig. U11 Manual pulse generator

Mass: 0.4kg
(Unit: mm)

Fig. U12 Pendant type manual pulse generator

- 410 -

B-64603EN/01

APPENDIX

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

Mass: 0.4kg
(Unit: mm)

Fig. U13 Separate detector interface unit or analog input separate detector interface unit

- 411 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

4-4.3 mounting hole


Minus terminal
with 3-M3
screw holes
Plus terminal with
3-3M screw holes

Countersink for 4-M4

Plus polarity indication


Minus polarity indication

Mass: 0.4 kg (case only)


(Unit: mm)

Mounting hole machining drawing

Fig. U14 Absolute pulse coder battery case for a separate detector

- 412 -

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

Main unit
Lid

Mass: 0.9 kg (case only)


(Unit: mm)

Mounting hole machining drawing

Countersink for 4-M4

Fig. U15 Battery case for external installation

- 413 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

A paint masking zone 8 mm wide is provided on the periphery of the


rear of the plate.

Mounting hole machining drawing

B-64603EN/01

Fig. U16 Punch panel (for LCD-mounted type control unit)

- 414 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

2
35

14

80

125

Crimp terminal M4

Space for the connector


panel cover

4-M3

Dashed line: Area for packing attachment

70
80

115

123

64

109

Space for the


connector panel
cover and cable

78

110

Panel cut drawing

Weight: 0.4kg
(Unit: mm)

Fig. U17 Ethernet Connector Panel

- 415 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Connectors
Fig. title

Specification No.

PCR connector (soldering type)


FI40 connector
Connector case (PCR type manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN
KOGYO)
Connector case (FI type manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC)
Connector case (manufactured by FUJITSU COMPONENT
Connector case (PCR type manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC)
Connector (1) for servo side manufactured by Tyco Electronics
Connector (2) for servo side manufactured by Tyco Electronics
Connector (3) for +24 V power supply manufactured by Tyco
Electronics
Connector (4) for +24 V power supply manufactured by Tyco
Electronics
Contact for connector manufactured by Tyco Electronics
Connector (case) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO
Connector (angled case) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN
KOGYO
Connector (male) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO
Connector (female) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO
Connector (terminal layout) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN
KOGYO
Connector (3 pins/brown) manufactured by SOURIAU Japan KK
Connector for flat cable manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC
Connector (for MDI) manufactured by Japan Aviation Electronics
for CA55
Contact (for MDI) manufactured by Japan Aviation Electronics
for CA55
Punch panel connector for reader/punch interface
Locking plate for reader/punch interface connector
Connector (for distribution I/O connection printed circuit board)
manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO
Faston terminal

- 416 -

Fig. No.

PCR-E20FS
FI40-2015S
PCR-V20LA/PCR-V20LB

Fig. C1 (a)
Fig. C1 (b)
Fig. C2 (a)

FI-20-CV
FCN-240C20-Y/S
FI-20-CV7
AMP1-178128-3
AMP2-178128-3
AMP1-178288-3

Fig. C2 (b)
Fig. C2 (c)
Fig. C2 (d)
Fig. C3 (a)
Fig. C3 (b)
Fig. C3 (c)

AMP2-178288-3

Fig. C3 (d)

AMP1-175218-2/5
AMP1-175196-2/5

Fig. C3 (e)
Fig. C4 (a)
Fig. C4 (b)
Fig. C4 (c)
Fig. C4 (d)
Fig. C4 (e)

SMS3PN-5
HIF3BB-50D-2.54R
HIF3BB-34D-2.54R
LY10-DC20

Fig. C5
Fig. C6

LY10-C2-3

Fig. C7 (b)

MRH-50FD

Fig. C8 (a)
Fig. C8 (b)
Fig. C9

A02B-0166-K330

Fig. C10

Fig. C7 (a)

B-64603EN/01

APPENDIX

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

Fig. C1 (a) PCR connector (soldering type)

- 417 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

Fig. C1 (b) FI40 connector

- 418 -

B-64603EN/01

B-64603EN/01

APPENDIX

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

Fig. C2 (a) Connector case (PCR type manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO)

- 419 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

Fig. C2 (b) Connector case (FI type manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC)

Fig. C2 (c) Connector case (manufactured by FUJITSU COMPONENT)

- 420 -

B-64603EN/01

B-64603EN/01

APPENDIX

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

Fig. C2 (d) Connector case (PCR type manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC)

Fig. C3 (a) Connector (1) for servo side manufactured by Tyco Electronics

- 421 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

Fig. C3 (b) Connector (2) for servo side manufactured by Tyco Electronics

Fig. C3 (c) Connector (3) for +24 V power supply manufactured by Tyco Electronics

- 422 -

B-64603EN/01

B-64603EN/01

APPENDIX

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

Fig. C3 (d) Connector (4) for +24 V power supply manufactured by Tyco Electronics

Fig. C3 (e) Contact for connector manufactured by Tyco Electronics

- 423 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

Fig. C4 (a) Connector (case) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO

Fig. C4 (b) Connector (angled case) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO

- 424 -

B-64603EN/01

B-64603EN/01

APPENDIX

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

Fig. C4 (c) Connector (male) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO

- 425 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

Fig. C4 (d) Connector (female) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO

Fig. C4 (e) Connector (terminal layout) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO

- 426 -

B-64603EN/01

B-64603EN/01

APPENDIX

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

Fig. C5 Connector (3 pins/brown) manufactured by Burndy Japan

- 427 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

Fig. C6 Connector for flat cable manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC

- 428 -

B-64603EN/01

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

(pitch)

Fig. C7 (a) Connector (for MDI) manufactured by Japan Aviation Electronics

- 429 -

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

APPENDIX

Fig. C7 (b) Contact (for MDI) manufactured by Japan Aviation Electronics

Fig. C8 (a) Punch panel connector for reader/punch interface

- 430 -

B-64603EN/01

B-64603EN/01

APPENDIX

A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS

Fig. C8 (b) Locking plate for reader/punch interface connector

Fig. C9 Connector (for distribution I/O connection printed circuit board) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN
KOGYO

17604-1 manufactured by Tyco Electronics or


FVDDF2-250B TYPE manufactured by J.S.T. Mfg.

Fig. C10 Faston terminal

- 431 -

B. 20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND


CABLES

B.1

BOARD-MOUNTED CONNECTORS

B.1.1

Vertical-type Connectors

Models: PCR-EV20MDT (Honda Tsushin)


52618-2011 (Molex Japan)
These board-mounted connectors have been specially developed to achieve the high packing density
required for FANUC products. As explained in the following subsection, Honda PCR series connectors
can be used as cable connectors because the mating mechanism of the newly developed connectors is
compatible with that of the Honda PCR series connectors. To support this specification extensively, many
connector manufacturers are now developing custom-tailored cable connectors. (Note that these cables
cannot be used with screw-fixing cable connector housings.)

B.1.2

Straight and Right-angled Connectors (for Spring and


Screw-fixing Connector Housings)

Models: FI80-20P (straight connector) (Hirose Electric)


DF1R020WB1 (straight connector) (Japan Aviation Electronics)
PCR-E20LMDETZ-SL (right-angled connector) (Honda Tsushin)
These connectors are used for the main and option boards. As cable connectors, they are compatible with
screw-fixing connector housings as well as the spring locking connector housings.

- 432 -

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

B.2

B.20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES

CABLE CONNECTORS

Cable connectors consist of a connector main body and housing. The models listed below are available.
Those connectors not marked with an asterisk are currently being mass-produced as manufacturer's
standard models. Those marked with an asterisk are produced according to custom specifications by
FANUC.

Use
General use
MDI,IO Link i,
etc.

Type
Strand wire
press-mount type

Table B.1 Cable connectors


Connector
Housing model
Manufacture
model
Honda
Tsushin
Hirose
Electric
FUJITSU
COMPONET
Molex Japan
Hirose
Electric

Strand wire
press-mount type
(when a low
screw-fixing housing
is used)
Soldering type
Honda
Tsushin
Hirose
Electric

For Pulsecoder, Soldering type


coaxial cable,
linear scale,
manual pulse
generator, etc.

Hirose
Electric

Honda
Tsushin

B.2.1

Applicable cable
outside diameter

PCR-E20FA

PCR-V20LA*

6mm(5.7 to 6.5)

FI30-20S*

FI-20-CV2*

6.2mm(5.5 to 6.5)

FCN-247J020-G/E

FCN-240C020-Y/S

5.8mm(5.5 to 6.5)

52622-2011*
FI30-20S*

52624-2015*
6.2mm(5.9 to 6.5)
6.2mm(5.5 to 6.5)
FI-20-CV7*
(Low screw-fixing
housing)

PCR-E20FS

PCR-V20LA*

6mm(5.7 to 6.5)

FI40B-20S*
FI-40B-20S*
(FI40A-20S*)
FI40B-20S*
FI40B-2015S*
(FI40-2015S*)
FI40B-20S*
(FI40-20S*)
FI40B-20S*
PCR-E20FS

FI-20-CV2*
FI-20-CV5*

6.2mm(5.5 to 6.5)
9.2mm(8.9 to 9.5)

FI-20-CV6*
FI-20-CV*

10.25mm(9.5 to 11.0)
8.5mm(8.0 to 9.0)

FI-20-CV5*

9.2mm(8.9 to 9.5)

FI-20-CV6*
PCR-V20LA*

10.25mm(9.5 to 11.0)
6mm(5.7 to 6.5)

Strand Wire Press-mount Connector

With this connector, #28AWG wires are press-connected to each pin at the same time. The cost of
producing a cable/connector assembly with this connector model is much lower than with connectors
designed for crimping or soldering.
Connector model
(manufacturer)
FI-20-CV7 (Hirose Electric)

Supplementary description
Low connector housing, more compact than conventional models. The housing
can be fastened to a board-mounted connector by means of a screw lock. It is
intended mainly for connecting the board-mounted connectors used on the main
and option boards of the LCD-mounted type (see Section B.1.2). Note that this
connector housing cannot be used for conventional board-mounted connectors.

- 433 -

B. 20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES

B.2.2

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Soldering Type Connector

Details of soldering type connectors and their housings are summarized below.
Table B.4 Details of soldering type connectors and housings
Connector model
Supplementary description
(manufacturer)
PCR-E20FS (Honda Tsushin)
FI40-20S (Hirose Electric)
FI40B-20S (Hirose Electric)
(formerly, FI40A-20S)

FI40B-2015S (Hirose Electric)


(formerly, FI40-2015S)

Soldering type connector for general signals. This is suitable for producing cable
assemblies in small quantities, as well as on-site.
Equivalent to Honda Tsushin PCR-E20FS
Has the same number of pins as the FI40-20S, but features a wider soldering
pitch, facilitating soldering and enabling the use of thicker wires. Its reinforced
pins allow wires as thick as #17AWG to be soldered to the FI40B-20S (wires no
thicker than #20AWG can be used with the FI40A-20S). Note, however, that a
thick wire, such as #17AWG, should be used with a more robust housing like the
FI-20-CV6.
Features a wider soldering pitch, attained by using the space provided by
thinning out some pins. Also features tougher pins, compared with its
predecessor, the FI40-2015S. These pins can be soldered to wires as thick as
#17AWG, provided that the cable diameter does not exceed 8.5 mm.

Housing model
(manufacturer)

Supplementary description

FI-20-CV5 (Hirose Electric)


FI-20-CV6 (Hirose Electric)

Should be used with the FI40B-20S. This is a plastic housing designed for use
with a cable that is 9.2 mm in diameter.
Should be used with the FI40B-20S. This housing, however, can be used with a
thicker cable (such as 10.25 mm) than is possible with the FI-20-CV5. Its
components are die cast.

In addition to the combinations shown in Table B.1, Hirose soldering-type connectors can be combined
with the housings listed below. Ensure that the diameter of the cable used with each housing satisfies the
requirements of that housing.
Connector model
FI40B-2015S
(formerly FI40-2015S)

FI40-20S
FI40B-20S
(formerly FI40A-20S)

Housing model (applicable cable diameter)


FI-20-CV (8.5 mm in diameter) only

FI-20-CV2 (6.2mm)
FI-20-CV5 (9.2mm)
FI-20-CV6 (10.25mm)

Those listed on the left can be used.

- 434 -

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

B.3

B.20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES

RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE


HOUSINGS, AND CABLES

Connector name
referenced in the
Connection
Manual

Table B.5 Recommended connectors, applicable housings, and cables


Compatible cable
FANUC-approved
FANUC-approved
(cable diameter)
housing
connector
FANUC development
(manufacturer)
(manufacturer)
Ordering specification
PCR-E20FA (Honda
Tsushin)

PCR-E20FA
Strand wire
press-mount type

FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)


FCN-247J020-G/E
(FUJITSU COMPONET)
52622-2011 (Molex Japan)

PCR-E20FA
Strand wire
press-mount type
PCR-E20FS
Soldering type

FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)


PCR-E20FS (Honda
Tsushin)
FI40-20S (Hirose Electric)

FI40B-2015S
(formerly
I40-2015S)
15-pin soldering
type

FI40B-2015S
(formerly FI40-2015S)
(Hirose Electric)

FI40B-20S
(formerly
FI40A-20S)
Soldering type

FI40B-20S
(formerly FI40A-20S)
(Hirose Electric)
FI40B-20S (Hirose
Electric)

PCR-V20LA (Honda
Tsushin)
FI-20-CV2 (Hirose
Electric)
FCN-240C020-Y/S
(FUJITSU
COMPONET)
52624-2015 (Molex
Japan)

Remarks

Plastic
housing
Metal
housing
Plastic
housing
A66L-0001-0284#10P
(6.2 mm in diameter)

Plastic
housing

FI-20-CV7 (Hirose
Electric)

Plastic
housing

PCR-V20LA (Honda
Tsushin)
FI-20-CV2 (Hirose
Electric)

Plastic
housing
Plastic
housing

FI-20-CV (Hirose
Electric)

FI-20-CV5 (Hirose
Electric)
FI-20-CV6 (Hirose
Electric)

A66L-0001-0286 (Note)
A66L-0001-0402 (Note)
(8.5 mm in diameter)
A66L-0001-0367
A66L-0001-0368
(9.2 mm in diameter)
A66L-0001-0403 (Note)
(9.8 mm in diameter)

Plastic
housing

Plastic
housing
Metal
housing

NOTE
As pulse coder cables, the following cables are available: Cable that can be up to
20 m long (A66L-0001-0286), cable that can be up to 30 m long
(A66L-0001-0402), and cable that can be up to 50 m (A66L-0001-0403).
Cables A66L-0001-0402 and A66L-0001-0403 have not only the same level of oil
resistance as conventional cables, but also bending resistance (cable, 100 mm in
diameter, capable of withstanding at least 10 million bending cycles), and are ULand CSA-certified.

- 435 -

B. 20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES

B.3.1

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Recommended Connectors

Press-mount type connector assembly tools and jigs


Connector model
referenced in the
Connection
Manual
PCR-E20FA

FANUC-approved
connector
(manufacturer)
PCR-E20FA
(Honda Tsushin)

FI30-20S
(Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/S
(FUJITSU COMPONET)

52622-2011
(Molex Japan)

Wire forming tool

PCS-K2A
JGPS-015-1/1-20
JGPS-014
FHAT-918A
FI30-20CAT
FI30-20CAT1
FCN-237T-T043/H
FCN-237T-T044/H
FCN-237T-T062/H
57829-5000
57823-5000

Press-mounting tool

FHPT-918A
MFC-K1
PCS-K1

Remark

(Note 1)

FI30-20/ID
HHP-502
FI30-20GP
FCN-237T-T109/H
FCN-247T-T066/H

57830-5000
57824-5000

NOTE
1 Those tools indicated by shading are available from FANUC (specification
number A02B-0120-K391).
2 The tools available from each manufacturer are specifically designed for use with
the connectors manufactured by that manufacturer.

B.3.2

Applicable Cables

Materials for cable assemblies


Machine tool builders are required to manufacture or procure the materials for the cable assemblies to be
used with their products. FANUC recommends the following materials as being suitable for interface
connectors. Individual machine tool builders are encouraged to contact each cable manufacturer for
themselves, as required.
Constitution

FANUC specification
number

Manufacturer

Material

Use

10-pair cable

General use

0.08mm2
10-pair

A66L-0001-0284 #10P

12-conductor
composite
cable

Pulsecoder,
linear scale,
manual pulse
generator

0.5mm2
6-conductor
0.18mm2 3-pair

A66L-0001-0286

0.75mm2
6-conductor
0.18mm2 3-pair
1.25mm2
6-conductor
0.18mm2 3-pair

A66L-0001-0402

Hitachi Metals
Oki Electric Cable
SHINKO ELECTRIC
INDUSTRIES
Hitachi Metals
Oki Electric Cable
SHINKO ELECTRIC
INDUSTRIES
Oki Electric Cable

A66L-0001-0403

Oki Electric Cable

- 436 -

Remark

20 m or less

30 m or less
Usable on
movable parts
50 m or less
Usable on
movable parts

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

B.20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES

10-pair cable
(a) Specifications
Unit

Specifications

Product No.
Manufacturer

Item

Rating

mm

A66L-0001-0284#10P
Hitachi Metals,Ltd.
Oki Electric Cable, Co.,Ltd.
SHINKO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
60C 30V : UL2789
80C 30V : UL80276
Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper (ASTM
B-286)
Cross-linked vinyl
Tinned annealed copper wire
Heat-resistant oil-proof vinyl
10
28
7/0.127
0.38
0.1
Thinnest portion : 0.8 (3.1mm)
0.58

mm
mm

UL15157(80C , 30V)
1.16

mm
-

20 or less
Collect the required number of twisted pairs into
a cable, then wrap binding tape around the
cable. To make the cable round, apply a cable
separator as required.
3.5
Hitachi Metals : Not available
Oki Electric Cable : Available,10/0.12
SHINKO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. :
Not available
0.12
85 or more
Black
1.0
6.2

Material

Conductor
Insulator
Shield braid
Sheath

Number of pairs
Conductor

Insulator

Twisted pair

Size
Structure
Outside diameter
Thickness
Outside diameter
(approx.)
Core style (rating)
Outside diameter
(approx.)
Pitch

Lay

Lay diameter (approx.)


Drain wire

Shield braid
Sheath

Standard length
Packing method
Electrical
performance

Flame resistance

Element wire diameter


Braid density
Color
Thickness
Outside diameter
(approx.)

Electric resistance
(at 20C )
Insulation resistance
(at 20C )
Dielectric strength (AC)

Pairs
AWG
Conductors/mm
mm
mm

mm
Conductors/mm

mm
%
mm
mm
m
/km

200
Bundle
233 or less

M-km

10 or less

V/min.
-

300
Shall pass flame resistance test VW-1SC of UL
standards.

- 437 -

B. 20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

(b) Structure drawing

Composite 12-core cable


(a) Specifications
Item

Unit

Specifications

Product No.
Manufacturer

Rating
Material

A66L-0001-0286
Oki Cable, Ltd.
Hitachi Metals, Ltd.
SHINKO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
80C, 30V
Strand wire of tinned annealed copper (JIS
C3152)

Conductor,
braid-shielded wire, drain
wire
Insulator
Sheath
Number of wires (wire ons.)
Conductor
Size
Structure
Outside diameter
Insulator
Standard thickness (The
minimum thickness is at
least 80% of the
standard thickness.)
Outside diameter
Twisted pair
Outside diameter
Direction of lay
Pitch
Lay

Lay diameter (approx.)

Cores
mm2
Conductors/mm
mm
mm

mm
mm
mm
-

mm

- 438 -

Heat-resistant flame-retardant vinyl


Oil-proof, heat-resistant, flame-retardant vinyl
6 (1 to 6)
6 (three pairs) (7 to 9)
0.5
0.18
20/0.18
7/0.18
0.94
0.54
0.25
0.2

1.50

0.94
1.88
Left
20 or less
Twist the wires at an appropriate pitch so the
outermost layer is right-twisted, and wrap tape
around the outermost layer. Apply a cable
separator as required.
5.7

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Item
Drain wire

Size
Structure
Outside diameter
Element wire diameter
Thickness
Braid density
Outside diameter
Color
Standard thickness (The
minimum thickness is at
least 85% of the
standard thickness.)
Outside diameter

Shield braid

Sheath

Standard length
Packing method
Electrical
performance

Electric resistance (at


20C) (wire nos.)
Insulation resistance (at
20C)
Dielectric strength (AC)

Flame resistance

B.20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES

Unit

Specifications

mm2
Wires/mm
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm

0.3
12/0.18
0.72
0.12
0.3
70
6.3
Black
1.1

mm
m
/km

8.5Max. 9.0 (Note)


100
Bundle
39.4 (1 to 6)
113 (7 to 9)

M-km

15

V/min.
-

500
Shall pass flame resistance test VW-1SC of UL
standards.

NOTE
The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other than the drain wire.
(b) Cable structure
The cable structure is shown below.

(c) Specifications
Item
FANUC specification number
Manufacturer

Specification
A66L-0001-0402
A66L-0001-0403
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
A-conductor
B-conductor
A-conductor
B-conductor

- 439 -

B. 20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Item
Conductor

Insulation
(polyester)

Pair twisting

Constitution
Number of conductors/
mm
Typical outside diameter
(mm)
Color
Typical thickness (mm)
Typical outside diameter
(mm)
Constitution

Direction of twisting

Assembling by
twisting

Braided
shielding

Sheath
(polyurethane)

Finished
assembly
Finished
assembly
performance
Electrical
performance

Insulation
performance

Number of strands or
conductors
Direction of twisting
Taping
Typical outside diameter
(mm)
Typical strand diameter
(mm)
Typical density (mm)
Drain
Typical outside diameter
(mm)
Color
Typical thickness (mm)
Vertical taping
Outside diameter (mm)
Typical length (m)
Short size
Rating
Standard
Flame resistance
Conductor resistance
/km (20C)
Insulation resistance
M/km (20C)
Dielectric strength
V-min
Tensile strength
N/mm2
Elongation %
Tensile strength after
aging %
Elongation after
aging %
Aging condition

Specification
16/0.12
(0.18mm2)

3/22/0.12
(0.75mm2)

16/0.12
(0.18mm2)

7/16/0.12
(1.25mm2)

0.55

1.20

0.55

1.70

White, red,
black
0.16
0.87

Red, black

Red, black

0.23
1.66

White, red,
black
0.16
0.87

White-red,
white-black,
and black-red
Left
Typical pitch:
20 mm
3

White-red,
white-black,
and black-red
Left
Typical pitch:
20 mm
3

Left
Twisting is wrapped with washi, or
Japanese paper, tape.
5.7

0.25
2.20

Left
Twisting is wrapped with washi, or
Japanese paper, tape.
6.9

0.14
80
A 12/0.18 mm wire is roughly wrapped under braided shielding.
6.4
7.6
Black (matted)
1.05
1.1
Vertically taped with washi under sheathing.
8.50.3
9.80.3
100
Basically not approved.
80C 30V
Shall comply with UL STYLE 20236 and CSA LL43109 AWM I/II A
80C 30V FT-1.
Shall comply with VW-1 and FT-1.
103 or lower
25.5 or lower
103 or lower
15.0 or lower
1 or higher
A.C 500
9.8 or higher
100 or higher
At least 70% of that before aging
At least 65% of that before aging
For 168 hours at 113C

- 440 -

B.20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Item
Sheathing
performance

Specification

Tensile strength N/mm2


Elongation %
Tensile strength after
aging %
Elongation after
aging %
Aging condition

9.8 or higher
100 or higher
At least 70% of that before aging
At least 65% of that before aging
For 168 hours at 113C

Cable cross
section

5-core coaxial cable


(a) Specifications
Item

Unit

Description

Specification
Manufacture
Number of Conductors
Inside
Size
Conductor
Components
Material
Diameter (approx.)
Insulator
Material (Color)
Thickness
Diameter (approx.)
Outside
Material
Conductor
Diameter of
Component-Wire
Density
Thickness
Jacket
Material
Color
Thickness
Diameter (approx.)
Twisted Assembly Diameter (approx.)
Thickness of Paper Tape
Shield braid
Wire dia. Material
Density
Thickness
Diameter
Sheath
Material, Color
Thickness
Finish Diameter
Conductor Resistance (20C)
Dielectric strength
(between internal conductor and external
conductor)

Core
mm2
Conductors(PCS)/mm
mm
mm
mm
mm

A66L-0001-0371
Hitachi Metals, LTD.
5
0.14
7/0.16
Tin-coated Soft Copper Wire
0.48
Polyethylene (White), heat-resistant 80C
0.71
1.90
Tin-coated Soft Copper Wire (Rolled)
0.08

%
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
%
mm
mm
mm
mm
/km
-

95 or more
0.2
Vinyl, heat-resistant 80C
Black. White. Red. Green. Blue
0.15
2.6
7.1
0.05
0.12 (Tin-coaded soft copper wire)
80 or more (typ 82%)
0.3
7.8
Oil Tight Vinyl (A), Black, heat-resistant 80C
0.7 (Min. thickness: 0.56)
9.20.3
143 or less
1000 VAC must be withstood for one minute.

- 441 -

B. 20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Item

Unit

Description

Insulation resistance
(between internal conductor and external
conductor, 20C)
Impedance (10MHz)
Standard Capacitance (1MHz)
Standard Attention
Weight
Standard Length
Package form

M-km

1000 or more

nF/km
dB/km
kg/km
m
-

755
56
53
105
200
Bundle

An example of circuit testing 20-pin interface cable

Resistor

Check every
pin

Cable (20-pin interface connector)

PCB connector

- 442 -

PCR-E20LMD-SL (Honda)
Available from general manufacturers

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

C.CONNECTION CABLE
(SUPPLIED FROM US)

CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM


US)
Maximum allowable cable length between units
Cable type

MDI cable
I/O Link i cable

Position coder cable


Manual pulse generator cable
FSSB cable
HSSB cable
RS232-C communication cable
RS-422 communication cable

Use and condition


Control unit-to-MDI unit
Electrical cable
Electrical-to-optical conversion adapter
Optical fiber cable
Control unit-position coder
Connector panel I/O operator's panel I/O
module-to-manual pulse generator
See Appendix D.
See Appendix D.
4800 baud or less
9600 baud
9600 baud or less
19.2K baud

Maximum cable
length (m)
20m
10m
2m
200m
50m
50m

(Note 2)

100m
50m
800m
50m

NOTE
1 The maximum cable lengths listed above apply only when the respective
recommended cables stated in the text are used. If a non-recommended cable is
used, the maximum cable length may not be guaranteed. Cables other than
those listed above are used between units. See the respective descriptions in this
manual for details of these cables.
2 This cable can be extended to up to 15 m if it is used within the cabinet.
Purpose

Power supply cable


for I/O unit

Description

A02B-0236-K843

5m

A02B-0319-K813

45cm

SMS3PNS-5

I/O Unit (CP31)


MDI signal cable

PCR-E20FA-E20SPF1A+

(JA2)

MDI unit
(CK27)
MDI cable

Length

AMP2-178288-3

Control unit (CP1B)

Control unit (Basic


unit A)

Specification

PCR-E20FA-E20SPF1A+
FI-20-CV7

Control unit (Basic


unit G)

A02B-0236-K813

45cm

A02B-0236-K814

1.5m

(CA55)

MDI unit (CK27)

LY10-DC20

- 443 -

C. CONNECTION CABLE
(SUPPLIED FROM US)

APPENDIX

Purpose

B-64603EN/01

Description

Specification

Length

Manual pulse
generator cable (for
one unit)
FI40-2015S

Control unit (JA3)

A02B-0120-K847

7m

A02B-0120-K848

7m

A02B-0120-K841

7m

A02B-0120-K842

5m

A02B-0236-K848

1m

M3 crimp style terminal

Manual pulse
generator terminal
board
Manual pulse
generator cable (for
two units)

Control unit (JA3)

FI40-2015S

M3 crimp style terminal

3
2

M3 crimp style terminal

FI40-2015S

Control unit (JA3)

Manual pulse
generator terminal
board
Manual pulse
generator cable (for
three units)

Manual pulse
generator terminal
board
I/O Link i cable

Control unit (JD51A)

I/O unit (JD1B)


I/O unit (JD1A)

PCR-E20FA

I/O unit (JD1B)


I/O Link i cable

Control unit (JD51A)

I/O Link signal divider


(2 channels)
(JD44B)

PCR-E20FA

- 444 -

C.CONNECTION CABLE
(SUPPLIED FROM US)

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Purpose

Description

Specification

Length

I/O Link i cable

Control unit (JD1A)

I/O Link signal divider


(3 channels)
(JD1B)
I/O Link i cable
between units
(For optical I/O Link
connection)
Control unit power
supply cable

A02B-0303-K849

1m

A03B-0807-K803

1m

A02B-0124-K830

5m

A02B-0323-K850

7m

A02B-0323-K103

14m

PCR-E20FA

PCR-E20FA

M3 crimp style terminal

Stabilized power
supply (24 VDC)
AMP1-178288-3

Control unit (CP1)

Ethernet extension
connector

M3 crimp style terminal


TMP21P-88P
569013-1

Battery cable for an


external LCD-mounted
type control unit

Control unit

Battery connector
(dedicated to FANUC)

(CA131)

M4 crimp style
terminal
(+: white)
(-: black)

Battery for an external


control unit (terminal
block)

- 445 -

D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

0i - MODEL F uses optical fiber cables for the following interfaces.


This table lists the usable combinations.
Interface
I/O Link i interface *1

High-speed serial bus


(HSSB) interface

Serial servo bus (FSSB)


interface

Junction
None
Exist
None
None
None
Exist
Exist
None
None
None

Recommended
optical fiber cable
A66L-6001-0026#L~
A66L-6001-0026#L~
A66L-6001-0023#L~
A66L-6001-0026#L~
A66L-6001-0049#L~
A66L-6001-0029#L~
A66L-6001-0049#L~
A66L-6001-0023#L~
A66L-6001-0026#L~
A66L-6001-0049#L~

Maximum allowable
transmission distance
200m
100m *2
10m
50m
100m
35m *2
55m *2
10m
50m *3
100m *3

Applicable
junction adapter
A63L-0020-0002

A63L-0020-0004
A63L-0020-0004

CAUTION
1 When an optical fiber cable is used for connection.
2 Optical fiber cables can be relayed at up to one point. The total length of the two
cables must not exceed the maximum transmission distance. The two cables
must be optical fiber cables of the same type.
3 There are the following restrictions on the cable length for the FSSB:
Between the control unit and 1st slave unit:
- When A66L-6001-0026#L~ is used: 50 m
- When A66L-6001-0049#L~ is used: 100 m
Between slave units: 40 m
Total cable length per FSSB line in each control mode:
HRV2 500m
HRV3 200m

- 446 -

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

Notes on the specifications of optical fiber cable


(1) Supported optical cables
<1> Internal cord type cable ...................................... A66L-6001-0023#LR
Length ........................................................... 0.15 to 10m
Code diameter .................................................... 2.2mm 2 cords
Tensile strength
Optical fiber cord ............................................. 7kg per cord
Between optical fiber cord and connector .......... 2kg
Minimum bending radius of optical fiber cord .. 25mm
Operating temperature ........................................ -20 to 70 C
Unit: mm
7
6.7

14 max.

100 typ.

Two cords are bound together.

21
Code

Fig. D (a) External dimensions of internal cord type cable

<2> External type cable

........................................................ A66L-6001-0026#LxRxxx
........................................................ A66L-6001-0029#LxRxxx
........................................................ A66L-6001-0049#LxRxxx
Length
.......................................................................... 1 to 200m
Optical fiber cord diameter ................................................. 2.2mm 2 cords
Diameter of cable with reinforced cover ............................. 7.6mm(A66L-6001-0026, -0029)
........................................................ 8.2mm(A66L-6001-0049)
Tensile strength
Cable with reinforced cover .............................................. 75kg
Optical fiber cord .............................................................. 7kg/1 cord
Between optical fiber cord and connector ......................... 2kg
Minimum bending radius of optical fiber cord ................... 25mm
Minimum bending radius of cable with reinforced cover ... 50mm
Bending resistance (cable with reinforced cover)
10 million bending cycles at room temperature
(when the bending radius is 100 mm)
Flame resistance .................................................................. Equivalent to UL VW-1
Operating temperature......................................................... -20 to 70 C
Unit: mm
8.2
6.7

19 max.

150 typ.

35 typ.

21
Code

Bush

Fig. D (b) External dimensions of external cable

- 447 -

Reinforced cover

D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

Specification
L150R0
L200R0
L250R0
L300R0
L400R0
L500R0
L1R003
L2R003
L3R003
L5R003
L7R003
L10R03

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Table D (a) Standard cable length


Internal cord type cable
External cable
A66L-6001-0023#
A66L-6001-0026#
Length
Remarks
Specification
Length
0.15m
0.2 m
0.25 m
0.3 m
0.4 m
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.0 m
3.0 m
5.0 m
7.0 m
10.0 m

For 60mm width of amplifier


For 90mm width of amplifier
For 150mm width of amplifier
For 300mm width of amplifier

L1R003
L2R003
L3R003
L5R003
L7R003
L10R03
L15R03
L20R03
L30R03
L50R03
L100R3
L200R3

1.0 m
2.0 m
3.0 m
5.0 m
7.0 m
10.0m
15.0m
20.0m
30.0m
50.0m
100m
200m

(2) Cable selection

Always use an external cable when the cable is to be laid outside the power magnetics cabinet or
main unit cabinet, where it may be pulled, rubbed, or stepped on.
Use an external cable when part of the cabling is to be subject to movement.
For example, when connecting a movable operation pendant box to the power magnetics cabinet
using an optical fiber cable, use an external cable because the cable is likely to be bent, pulled, or
twisted repeatedly even if frequent system operation is not expected.
The force likely to be applied when the cable is installed or moved for maintenance purposes does
not need to be taken into consideration.
Use an external cable in locations where sparks or flame are a danger. Although the internal cord
type cable (A66L-6001-0023#~) is covered by nonflammable resin, the cover, if exposed to frame
for a long time, may melt, allowing the fiber cable inside to burn.
Use an external cable when the cable is expected to be pulled with considerable force during
installation (the force applied to the cable must be within the specified tensile strength limit at all
times). For example, even though installing a cable in a cable duct can be regarded as internal
cabling, a cable of the appropriate type must be selected according to the tensile force to be applied
to the cable during installation.
Both the internal cord type and external cables have the same oil and heat resistance properties.

- 448 -

D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

(3) Procuring the cable


All optical fiber cables mentioned above are special cable products with optical connectors, which are
designed, produced, and tested to ensure the required system performance and reliability. The users
cannot process and produce these cables on their own. The users cannot also cut or connect them after
purchase on their own. Purchase cables of the necessary length.
Cables are available from either FANUC or any of the FANUC-approved manufacturers listed in Table D
(b). (Purchase A66L-6001-0029#~ and A66L-6001-0049#~ from FANUC, however.)
Table D (b) FANUC-approved cable manufacturers and cable model numbers (retail)

<1> Internal cord type cable : A66L-6001-0023#LR


Manufacturer
Tyco Electronics
Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.

Model number
*-353373-*
PF-2HB209-**M-F-1
H07-P22-F2VCFA-**

Remark
** indicates the cable length (m).
** indicates the cable length (m).

<2> External Cable : A66L-6001-0026#LR


Manufacturer
Tyco Electronics
Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.

Model number
*-353199-*
CF-2HB208-**M-F-1
H07-P22-F2NCFA-**
OPC201HPXF-**MB

Remark
** indicates the cable length (m).
** indicates the cable length (m).
** indicates the cable length (m).

(4) Handling precautions


<1> Protection during storage
When the electrical/optical conversion module mounted on the printed circuit board and the optical
fiber cable are not in use, their mating surfaces must be protected with the lid and caps with which
they are supplied. If left uncovered, the mating surfaces are likely to become dirty, possibly resulting
in a poor cable connection.
Electrical/optical conversion module

Lid

Optical fiber cable

Optical fiber cable caps

Fig. D (c) Protection of electrical/optical conversion module and optical fiber cable (when not in use)

<2> Optical fiber cable

Make sure that the bending radius and tensile strength of the cable are always within their
ranges described in the specifications (see the first item), regardless of whether the cable is
stored or routed and whether operation is in progress or not.

Although the reinforcing cover of the external cable has sufficient mechanical strength, be
careful not to drop heavy objects on the cable.

- 449 -

D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Grasp the optical connector firmly when connecting or disconnecting the cable. Do not pull on
the optical fiber cord itself. (The maximum tensile strength between the fiber cord and
connector is 2 kg. Applying greater force to the cord is likely to cause the connector to come
off, making the cable unusable.)
Once connected, the optical connector is automatically locked by the lock levers on its top. To
remove the connector, release the lock levers and pull the connector.
Although optical connectors cannot be connected in other than the correct orientation, always
take note of the connector's orientation before making the connection.
Before installing an external cable, fix either a wire with a hook or a tension member to the
reinforcing cover of the optical connector and pull the wire or tension member, as shown in Fig.
D (d). This is done to prevent a tensile force from being applied between the fiber cord and
connector. If no tensile force is applied between the fiber cord and connector when installing
the cable, you can hold the reinforcing cover of the connector directly and pull it. In the case of
an internal cord, which does not have a reinforcing cover, apply the same protective measures,
as instructed in Fig. D (d), for that portion of the cable where the two cords are bound together,
in order to prevent a tensile force from being applied between the fiber cord and connector. In
the same way as for an external cable, if no tensile force is applied between the fiber cord and
connector during installation, you can hold the shielded part of the cable directly and pull it.
Because the combined tensile strength of the two cords is only 14 kg, however, avoid applying
too great a force to the cable during installation, regardless of whether you have taken the
protective measures.
Optical connector

Reinforcing cover

Reinforcing cover

Optical connector

Wire with a hook


Tension member

Tape

Tape

2 cords combined

Fig. D (d) Prior to installing a cable

Take care to keep both parts of the optical connector (cable side and PCB side) clean. If they
become dirty, wipe them with tissue paper or absorbent cotton to remove dirt. The tissue paper
or absorbent cotton may be moistened with ethyl alcohol. Do not use any organic solvent other
than ethyl alcohol.
Fix the reinforcing cover of the external cable or the cord binding portion of the internal cord
type cable by using a cable clamp, as shown in Fig. D (e), to prevent the weight of the optical
fiber cable from being applied directly to the connecting part of the optical connector.
(Recommended cable clamp) Recommended cable clamps are listed below. Use a clamp that
grasps the optical fiber cable lightly; the clamp should not apply
excessive pressure to the cable.
For an external cable
CKN-13SP (with sponge) (Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
For an internal cord type cable MN-1 (Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)

- 450 -

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

Optical connector

Optical fiber cord

D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE


Reinforcing cover of external cable or cord
binding portion of internal cord type cable

Bending radius of 25 mm or more


(Make the bending radius as large
as possible.)
Cable clamp

Bending radius of 50 mm or more (for reinforcing cover)


Bending radius of 25 mm or more (for cord binding portion)
(Make the bending radius as large as possible.)

Fig. D (e) Fixing the optical fiber cable with a clamp

Any superfluous portion of the cable may be wound into loops. Should this prove necessary,
make sure the diameter of each loop is at least 150 mm (for an external cable) or at least 100
mm (for an internal cord type cable). Winding the cable into smaller loops may produce sharp
curves that exceed the specified bending radius limit without the user being aware. Such
bending can result in a greater transmission loss, ultimately leading to an optical
communication failure.
When using a nylon band (cable tie) as a cable clamp, follow the instructions given below. Also,
take care not to apply a bending force to one particular part of the cable when fixing it with a
clamp. Failing to clamp the cable correctly may cut or damage it.
(External cable)
Do not clamp the uncovered portion of the cable with a nylon band. When clamping the
cable by the reinforcing cover, the clamping force is not an important factor to consider.
However, ensure that the clamping force is as small as possible to ensure that the
reinforcing cover is not deformed by the clamping. If possible, the clamping force should
be 5 kg or less.
(Internal cord type cable)
Lightly clamp the optical able with a nylon band so that the cable shield is not deformed.
If possible, the clamping force should be 1 or 2 kg (make sure that no force is applied to
the cable). Due care is required when clamping the internal cord type cable because its
cable shield is weaker than the reinforcing cover of the external cable.

- 451 -

D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

(5) Optical fiber cable relay of I/O Link i


When used for the I/O Link i application, optical fiber cables can be connected by using an optical fiber
adapter, as follows.
(a) External view of an optical fiber adapter
320.3
10.16

8.2

6.6

R1.6

210.5

18.20.5

420.5

2.2

3.2

(b) Example of the use of an optical fiber adapter


Optical fiber adapter (A63L-0020-0002)

Optical fiber cable

Optical fiber cable

Mounting board

NOTE
Only one relay point is permitted.

- 452 -

D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

(6) Optical fiber cable relay of FANUC high-speed serial bus


With the high-speed serial bus, special low-loss optical fiber cables can be connected by using a special
low-loss optical relay adapter as an optical fiber relay adapter.
(a) External view of the low-loss optical relay adapter
320.5
10.16

8.2

6.6

R1.6

210.3

18.1

421.0

2.2

3.2

(b) Example of use of the optical fiber relay adapter


Low-loss optical relay adapter (A63L-0020-0004)

Low-loss optical fiber cable

Low-loss optical fiber cable

Mounting board

NOTE
Only one relay point is permitted.

- 453 -

D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

(7) Precautions for connection with low-loss optical junction adapter

Features and attention in use of low-loss optical junction adapter (A63L-0020-0004)


When optical connectors for a conventional optical junction adapter (A63L-0020-0002) are jointed,
the facing ferrules(Note 1) are located about 60 um from each other. This is because the optical
fiber of conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cables (A66L-6001-0008, -0009, -0026) may
protrude from the tip of the ferrules (by up to about several um), resulting in the fiber protrusion
being damaged when the ferrules are butted against each other.
In the low-loss optical junction adapter, the ferrules are butted against each other, thus greatly
reducing the reduction in repeater loss. Therefore, the two optical cables used with the low-loss
optical junction adapters must be dedicated to the adapters.
If a conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cable (A66L-6001-0008, -0009, -0026) is used as
even one of the two optical fiber cables for joining the low-loss optical junction adapter, both cables
may be damaged, resulting in deteriorated characteristics.

NOTE
Ferrule: Movable metal at the tip of an optical connector; the fiber is bonded to
the ferrule.

Ferrule
Protective cover

Optical fiber cable


Optical connector

Features of low-loss optical fiber cable (A66L-6001-0029#~)


A low-loss optical fiber cable is selected from conventional PCF optical fiber cables
(A66L-6601-0026). The selected cable offers low loss, and its connector section is given special
treatment; the fiber ends are provided with a depression so that the ferrules can be butted against
each other.
Features of high-speed low-loss optical fiber cable (A66L-6001-0049#~)
To achieve high-speed and long-distance communication, a high-speed low-loss optical cable is
different from conventional PCF optical cables (A66L-6001-0026 and A66L-6001-0029) in optical
properties. Therefore, the mode of propagation of light is also different. Connecting different types
of optical fibers can result in a greater transmission loss, ultimately leading to an optical
communication failure.
The two optical cables used with a low-loss optical relay adapter must be the same type (two
high-speed low-loss optical cables or two low-loss optical cables).
Appearance of the low-loss relay adapter, low-loss optical fiber cable, and high-speed low-loss
optical fiber cable (how to distinguish them from conventional types)
While the body of the conventional optical relay adapter is black, that of the low-loss optical relay
adapter is blue. While the protection cover (see the figure above) of the conventional PCF optical
fiber cable is black, that of the low-loss optical fiber cable is blue, and that of the high-speed
low-loss optical fiber cable is yellow.

(8) Installing the optical fiber junction adapter


The optical fiber junction adapter should be installed within a cabinet, as a rule. If it is impossible to
avoid installing it within a cabinet, protect the adapter and the optical fiber cable portions (such as
connectors and cords) not covered with reinforcement coating from the outside air by, for example,
covering them with packing.
- 454 -

B-64603EN/01

APPENDIX

D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

(9) Environmental resistance of the optical fiber junction adapter

The optical fiber junction adapter is not waterproof. Even when optical fiber cables are attached to
both ends of the adapter, there are very small gaps in the linked portions, so water resistance can not
be expected.
When optical fiber cables are attached to both ends of the junction adapter installed in a normal
environment (such as within a cabinet), it is unlikely that dust will penetrate between the adapter
and optical fiber to the degree that it may hamper normal optical linkage. If one or both ends of the
adapter are left open, dust and dirt may accumulate even when the adapter is in a normal
environment (such as within a cabinet). The dust and dirt on the adapter ends is likely to hamper
normal optical linkage when the optical fiber cables are attached. In such a case, clean the junction
adapter and the optical connector using the optical fiber junction adapter cleaning method described
below.
Do not allow cutting fluid to splash over the adapter or those optical fiber cable portions (such as
connectors and cords) that are not covered with reinforcement coating. If the inside of the adapter
and fiber end surfaces are contaminated with cutting fluid, a malfunction may occur.

(10) Cleaning
If the optical fiber junction adapter, optical-to-electrical conversion module, or optical fiber cable is
soiled, clean them according to the following procedures.

Cleaning the optical fiber junction adapter and optical-to-electrical conversion module
First, clean the entire housing by wiping it with a cloth moistened with, or by washing it in, ethyl
alcohol. Similarly, wash the two sleeves in the adapter or wipe them with a cotton swab or the like.

Cleaning optical fiber cables


For the optical fiber cables, it is important to clean the connectors at their ends. Any soiling on the
optical fiber end surfaces will hamper optical transmission, resulting in a malfunction. Wipe the
optical fiber end surfaces (that is, the ferrule end surfaces) thoroughly with a soft, clean cloth (like
gauze) moistened with ethyl alcohol, in the same way as described above. The use of cotton swabs
may prove convenient. The fiber end surfaces of low-loss optical fiber cables are lower than the
ferrules. To remove any soiling from the fiber end surfaces completely, push the cotton swab or
gauze into the depressions all the way through while rotating the ferrule. If the ferrules and optical
connectors are contaminated with oily substances, and they may extend over a cleaned fiber end
surface when it is attached to the optical-to-electrical conversion module, it is a good idea to wash
them before wiping the optical fiber end surfaces, using the procedure stated above.

- 455 -

E.MEMORY CARD INTERFACE

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

MEMORY CARD INTERFACE

Overview
The memory card interface on the left side of the LCD-mounted control unit or the display unit allows
input/output of data in the control unit and DNC operation. This appendix describes the memory card
interface on the left side of the LCD-mounted control unit or the display unit.

Compact Flash Card


Use a compact flash card (called a CF card below) purchased from FANUC.

NOTE
1 If a CF card other than that purchased from FANUC is used, the operation is not
guaranteed.
2 The flash ATA card uses a quick format.
3 In case of formatting flash ATA card using a personal computer, format the card
in the FAT16 format. Other formats are not supported.

Using the compact flash adapter


1.

Attachment

Attach the CF card to the compact flash card adapter (A02B-0303-K150, called the CF adapter
later).

Make sure lock lever A is in the upper position and then insert the CF adapter above into the
memory card interface.

Push lock lever A downward.

Close the cover of the memory card interface.

NOTE
1 To perform continuous operation with the CF adapter attached, be sure to push
lock lever A downward and then close the cover of the memory card interface.
2 The lock function is enabled only when the CF adapter (A02B-0303-K150) is
used.
3 The CF adapter must be inserted with label surface facing toward the screen.
2.

Removal

Open the cover of the memory card interface.

Push lock lever A upward.

Push eject button B once to project the button.

Push eject button B again to eject the CF adapter.

Remove the CF card with your fingers.

Close the cover of the memory card interface.

NOTE
When lock lever A is in the lower position (in the locked state), eject button B
cannot be pushed.

- 456 -

B-64603EN/01

APPENDIX

E.MEMORY CARD INTERFACE


Compact flash card

Lock lever A

Eject button B
Compact flash card adapter

- 457 -

F. HOW TO ATTACH THE


KEYBOARD COVER

APPENDIX

B-64603EN/01

HOW TO ATTACH THE KEYBOARD


COVER

Overview
FANUC offers a keyboard cover to protect the MDI unit and the machine operator's panel main panel
from dust and cutting oil.
If you want to use, attach in the following way. There are several type keyboard cover fitted to each unit,
but the attachment method is the same. The following example shows how to attach to the standard MDI
unit.

How to attach the keyboard cover


1.

2.

3.

4.

If the ornamental frame of the keyboard is dirty in the cutting fluid, etc., before attaching the
keyboard cover, wipe off any soil and smear completely the ornamental frame using ethanol or
diluted neutral detergent (such as kitchen detergent). If you used neutral detergent, remove any
remaining detergent, using a cloth wetted with water. Any remaining oily substance or detergent
causes the keyboard cover to come off easily. After making sure that the ornamental frame is dry,
follow the procedure below to attach the keyboard cover.
There is no standard of position attach the keyboard cover. Peel off the release paper about 1-2
column of the key from the left or right, position the keyboard cover in such a way that interval of
molding rising portion of the keyboard cover and key of the corner of the top and bottom to be the
same.(Fig. F(a))
While peel off the release paper, attach the keyboard cover. At that time, be aware of the following.
(a) Do not touch the adhesive portion of the double-sided tape.
(b) The keyboard cover is made of soft material, it will be deformed by pulling. So attach to not to
pull.
Press it firmly while stroking the both-side adhesive tape section.(Fig. F(b))

both-side adhesive tape


(Hatched area)

These intervals to be
the same, position the
keyboard cover.

Fig. F (b)

Fig. F (a)

- 458 -

INDEX

B-64603EN/01

INDEX
Configurations of LCD-mounted Type Control Units ..... 1
Configurations of Optional Boards .................................. 5
Connecting 24 VDC Power ............................................ 36
Connecting I/O Devices ................................................. 56
Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit ... 22
Connecting the High-speed Skip (HDI) ......................... 66
CONNECTING THE HIGH-SPEED SKIP (HDI)......... 66
CONNECTION ............................................................ 104
Connection ..................................................... 158,234,266
Connection between Modules ...................................... 211
Connection Between the Basic Unit and Additional Unit
.................................................................................... 98
CONNECTION BETWEEN THE LCD-MOUNTED
TYPE CONTROL UNIT AND MDI UNIT ............... 50
CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) ..... 443
Connection Diagram ............................................... 83,122
Connection diagram ..................................................... 150
Connection Diagram ............................... 196,349,392,395
Connection Diagrams of an Analog Basic Unit ............. 91
Connection of Basic and Extension Modules............... 138
Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector... 96
Connection of Extension Module C (2A Output
Module) .................................................................... 131
Connection of Extension Module D (Analog Input
Module) .................................................................... 133
Connection of FANUC I/O Link i by Optical Fiber
Cable ........................................................................ 106
Connection of I/O Link i by Electric Cable ................. 105
CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR
CONNECTOR PANEL ............................................ 121
CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR
OPERATORS PANEL SUPPORTING SAFETY
FUNCTION .............................................................. 349
CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR OPERATOR'S
PANEL (FOR MATRIX INPUT) ........................... 163
CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR OPERATOR'S
PANEL AND I/O MODULE FOR POWER
MAGNETICS CABINET ........................................ 179
CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE TYPE-2 FOR
CONNECTOR PANEL ............................................ 194
CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL
CONNECTION UNIT (SOURCE DO) ................... 314
Connection of Power Supply ......................................... 84
CONNECTION OF SAFETY IO UNIT ...................... 331
CONNECTION OF TERMINAL TYPE I/O MODULE221
Connection of the Basic Module, and Extension
Modules A and B...................................................... 125
Connection of the ground terminal............................... 249
Connection of the Grounding Terminal of the Module
............................................................. 148,178,193,220
CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS ................... 50
CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i ...................... 103
CONNECTION TO MACHINE OPERATOR'S
PANEL ..................................................................... 268
CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS ................ 390

<Number>
20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES432
24 VDC POWER (INSULATION AC/DC
CONVERTOR) .......................................................... 36
24 VDC Power Supply Specification ............................. 38
2A Output Signal Connection ...................................... 132
2A output signal specifications .................................... 133

<A>
Address map ................................................................. 250
Analog 1Vp-p Interface.................................................. 93
Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation ....................... 133
Analog Input Signal Connections................................. 134
Analog Input Signal Specifications .............................. 135
Applicable Cables ........................................................ 436
Applicable wire ............................................................ 227
ASSIGNMENT FOR I/O UNITS ................................ 112
Assignment of Signals.................................................. 112
ATTACHING SCREW CAPS ....................................... 34

<B>
BATTERIES .................................................................. 44
Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor
(6VDC) ....................................................................... 49
Battery for Memory Backup in the Control Unit (3
VDC) .......................................................................... 44
Battery for Separate Absolute Pulsecoders (6VDC) ...... 48
BOARD-MOUNTED CONNECTORS ....................... 432

<C>
Cabinet ........................................................................... 18
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing ............................... 26
Cable Connection ......................................................... 394
Cable connection to a terminal block ........................... 247
Cable connection to the terminal block ........................ 156
CABLE CONNECTORS ............................................. 433
CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT
.................................................................................... 44
Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator ................... 115
CAUTIONS ................................................................. 391
CAUTIONS ABOUT MULTI-PATH CONTROL ...... 389
CAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION
DESIGN OF MACHINE TOOL POWER
MAGNETICS CABINETS ........................................ 11
Channel selection and A/D conversion data ................. 135
Channel selection and A/D conversion data for
extension module D .................................................. 251
Channel selection and D/A conversion data for
extension module E .................................................. 253
Code Output for the Rotary Switch .............................. 299
Color labels for connectors of Safety IO Unit .............. 345
Component names ................................................. 151,229
CONFIGURATION ......................................................... 1
Configuration ........................................................ 121,194

i-1

INDEX

B-64603EN/01

Environmental Conditions outside the Cabinet .............. 10


ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE
THE CABINET .......................................................... 10
Ethernet Connector Panel............................................... 73
External View .................................. 173,188,327,360,377
External view and dimensions ..................................... 154
External View and Dimensions .................................... 228

Connection to the Ethernet Interface .............................. 68


CONNECTION USING Ethernet ................................ 395
CONNECTION USING THE HIGH-SPEED SERIAL
BUS (HSSB)............................................................. 391
Connection When Multiple Channels of the I/O Link i is
Used.......................................................................... 108
CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND
COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS ......... 391
CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES.... 56
Connection with the MDI Unit....................................... 51
Connector (on the cable side) specifications ................ 297
Connector Layout Diagram .......................................... 195
Connector Locations ...................................................... 98
Connector locations of main panel ............................... 305
Connector locations of Safety IO Unit ......................... 344
Connector locations of safety machine operators panel305
Connector locations of safety machine operators panel
type B ....................................................................... 306
Connector Panel Printed Circuit Board ........................ 215
Connector pin arrangement ................................... 125,131
Connector specification of Safety IO Unit ................... 346
CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND
COMPONENT NAMES .............................................. 1
COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE AND
GROUNDING ............................................................ 16

<F>
FANUC serial interface ................................................. 86
Fixed Signals ................................................................ 112

<G>
GENERAL UNITS ...................................................... 117
General-purpose DI signal connection ......................... 287
General-purpose DI signal definition ........................... 308
General-purpose DO signal connection ....................... 293
General-purpose DO signal definition ......................... 309
GND Cable Connection ............................................... 378
Grounding as Noise Suppression Measures ................... 17
Grounding methods ........................................................ 17

<H>
Handling Precautions ................................................... 393
HARDWARE OVERVIEW ............................................ 6
Heat dissipation ............................................................ 226
Heat output ................................................................... 308
Heat Output of Each Unit............................................... 14
HOW TO ATTACH THE KEYBOARD COVER ....... 458

<D>
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND
NOTE ........................................................................ s-1
Detachable key top on the main panel.......................... 311
Detaching a terminal block .......................................... 248
DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection..... 166,182
DI (Input Signal) Connection ......................... 126,199,316
DI (Matrix Input Signal) Connection ........................... 168
DIGeneral-purpose Input SignalConnection ........ 355
DI(General-purpose Input Signal)Connection.............. 366
DI/DO Address............................................................. 333
DI/DO Address Map ............................................. 274,351
DI/DO Addresses for the Keyboard ............................. 297
DI/DO connection ................................................. 239,335
DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement . 165,181,315,353,365
DI/DO Connector Pin Assignment ............................... 198
DI/DO Signal Specifications ................................. 129,210
Dimensions (common to the modules) ......................... 228
Dimensions in a maximum configuration (one basic
module + three extension modules) ......................... 228
DO (Output Signal) Connection 128,169,186,206,323,358
DO (Output Signal) Error Detection ..................... 312,348
DO (output signal) Error Detection .............................. 362
DO alarm detection ...................................................... 254
DO(Output Signal) Connection .................................... 373
DUSTPROOF MEASURES FOR CABINETS AND
PENDANT BOXES ................................................... 31

<I>
I/O Link connection ..................................................... 266
I/O Link CONNECTION UNIT .................................. 260
I/O Link i connection ................................................... 281
I/O Link i Connection .................................................. 332
I/O signal specifications ............................................... 223
I/O UNIT FOR POWER MAGNETICS CABINET .... 363
Input signal requirements (analog 1Vp-p interface) ....... 94
Input Signal Requirements (Parallel interface) .............. 88
Input Signal Rules for the High-speed Skip (HDI) ........ 67
INSTALLATION........................................................... 10
Installation .............................................. 100,155,232,263
INSTALLATION CONDITION FOR UL
RECOGNITION......................................................... 35
Installation conditions ........................................... 223,306
Installation Conditions of the Control Unit .................... 10
Installation Environment .............................................. 393
INSTALLING THE CONTROL UNIT ......................... 30
Installing the LCD-mounted Type Control Unit ............ 30
Interface to the Amplifiers ............................................. 80
Inter-module connection .............................................. 246

<K>
Key Layout of MDI Unit ............................................... 53
Keyboard ...................................................................... 309
Keyboard Cover ............................................................. 55
Keyboard cover ............................................................ 311

<E>
Each Connections ......................................................... 276
EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL ................................... 385
Emergency stop signal connection ............................... 284

i-2

INDEX

B-64603EN/01

<L>

Parallel DO (output signal) connection ........................ 259


Parallel interface ............................................................ 87
Pendant type manual pulse generator connection ........ 295
Pin assignment ............................................................. 276
Pin assignment of DI/DO ............................................. 334
Power Capacity of 24 VDC Power Supplies .................. 40
Power Connection ................................................. 164,180
Power connection .................................................. 235,267
Power Connection .......................................... 314,350,364
Power ON/OFF control signal connection ................... 285
POWER SUPPLY ........................................................ 116
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION ............................... 36
Power Supply Connection ............................................ 211
Power supply connection ...................................... 280,332
Power supply rating ..................................................... 226
Power supply specification .......................................... 308
Power-off Sequence ....................................................... 42
Power-on Sequence ........................................................ 41
PREFACE .................................................................... p-1
Procedure for Installing Personal Computer Interface
Boards ...................................................................... 393
Protective Ground (Grounding for Protection against
Indirect Contact)......................................................... 21

LCD PROTECTION COVER........................................ 34


LCD-mounted Type Control Unit Overview.................... 6
Lightning Surge Absorber Installation ........................... 28
LINKING THE ETHERNET INTERFACE .................. 68

<M>
Main panel specification .............................................. 307
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR .............................. 114
Manual Pulse Generator ............................................... 295
Manual Pulse Generator Connection 114,138,172,187,211
Manual pulse generator connection ....................... 246,295
Manual pulse generator Connection ............................. 359
Manual Pulse Generator Connection ............................ 377
Manual Pulse Generator Signal Specifications ............ 115
Meaning of key symbols .............................................. 309
MEMORY CARD INTERFACE ................................. 456
Method for checking the encoder signals ....................... 95
Method of common pin expansion ............................... 257
Module Installation ...................................................... 139
Module Specifications .................................... 123,197,222
Mounting the Module ................................................... 214

<N>
<R>

Network Installation ....................................................... 72


Noise Suppressor ............................................................ 25
NOTE REGARDING KOREAN KC MARK ............... s-5
Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit 101
Number of Units That Can Be Connected ...................... 81

Recommended Connectors........................................... 436


RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE
HOUSINGS, AND CABLES ................................... 435
Replacing commercially available alkaline dry cells
(size D) ....................................................................... 46
Replacing the lithium battery ......................................... 45
Rotary Switch Setting .................................................. 146
RS232-C Interface Specification.................................... 59
RS232-C Serial Port ....................................................... 57

<O>
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE........................................... 446
Order specification ....................................................... 306
Other Notes ............................... 144,176,191,218,329,381
Others ........................................................................... 257
Outline.......................................................................... 300
OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS AND
CONNECTORS ....................................................... 399
Outline of main panel ................................................... 300
Outline of Safety IO Unit ............................................. 343
Outline of Safety machine operators panel ................. 301
Outline of Safety machine operators panel type B...... 302
Outline of sub panel AA............................................... 303
Outline of sub panel D ................................................. 304
Overall Connection Diagram ................................ 163,179
Overall connection diagram ......................................... 234
Overall Connection Diagram ................................ 314,363
Overview ................................................................... 50,56
OVERVIEW .................................................................. 79
Overview ........................................................................ 82
OVERVIEW ................................................................ 103
Overview ................................... 221,260,268,331,349,391
OVERVIEW ................................................................ 391
Overview ...................................................................... 395
Overview of the Analog Basic Unit ............................... 90

<S>
Safety machine operators panel and safety machine
operators panel type B specification ....................... 307
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................................... s-1
SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE ....................... 82
Separate Detector Interface (Analog Input) ................... 93
Separate Detector Interface (Digital Input) .................... 86
Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification .............. 84
Separating Signal Lines ................................................. 23
SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES ....................... 79
Setting the rotary switch .............................................. 256
Settings......................................................................... 250
SHUTTING OFF THE MOTOR POWER ................... 383
Signal assignment on terminal blocks .......................... 236
Soldering Type Connector ........................................... 434
Specification ................................................................ 261
Specification of Twisted-Pair Cable .............................. 70
Specifications ................................... 174,189,327,361,379
Specifications of a Commercial PC ............................. 392
Specifications of Safety IO Unit .................................. 346
Specifications of the Machine Operators Panel .......... 306
Status Alarm................................................................. 113
STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP .............................. 383

<P>
PANEL i....................................................................... 396

i-3

INDEX

B-64603EN/01

STOP MODES ............................................................. 383


STOPPING THE SERVO MOTOR ............................. 384
STOPPING THE SPINDLE MOTOR ......................... 384
Straight and Right-angled Connectors (for Spring and
Screw-fixing Connector Housings) .......................... 432
Strand Wire Press-mount Connector ............................ 433
Sub panel AA, D specification ..................................... 308

<T>
Temperature Rise within the Machine Tool Magnetic
Cabinet ....................................................................... 14
Terminal Conversion Adapter ...................................... 149
Thermal Design of Operator's Panel .............................. 15
THERMAL DESIGN OF THE MACHINE TOOL
MAGNETIC CABINET ............................................. 14
TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR FASTENING UNITS
AND GROUND TERMINALS .................................. 31
Total Connection Diagram ........................................... 271
Total connection diagram ............................................. 331
TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ............................ 7
TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE
CONTROL UNIT ....................................................... 41
Types of modules ......................................................... 222

<U>
Unit Dimensions........................................................... 213
UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i ........... 117
USB PORT ..................................................................... 77
Using the channel 2 of I/O Link i ................................. 281

<V>
Vertical-type Connectors ............................................. 432

<W>
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING
DESIGNING ............................................................. s-4
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING
MOUNTING, WIRING, AND EXCHANGING ....... s-2
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
REGARDING DAILY MAINTENANCE ................ s-5
Weight .......................................................................... 226

i-4

REVISION RECORD

B-64603EN/01

REVISION RECORD
Edition
01

Date

Contents

Sep., 2014

r-1

You might also like